a . Sapper 
oe rete pl stganere congas a feo gapeaeseqeeere ehyarenee pens pera a ae 


bglne 
o-swates — = 
Pe 


























































































































































































































The Lancroft Library. 


University of California + Berkeley 











ee en 





SD CCHARDENAL’S 
COMPLETE 


FRENCH COURSE 


J2ew Cdition 


REVISED AND REWRITTEN BY 


MARO S. BROOKS 


HEAD OF THE MODERN LANGUAGE DEPARTMENT IN THE 
HIGH SCHOOL, BROOKLINE, MASSACHUSETTS 





ALLYN AND BACON 
Boston and Chicaga 





COPYRIGHT, 1907, BY 
ALLYN AND BACON 


PDA 





PREFACE 


For many years Chardenal’s Complete French Course has 
been the most popular and the most successful of the 
many text-books for elementary instruction in French. 
Its success is owing largely to its simplicity and its 
thoroughness. In revising the book for a new edition 
the editor has endeavored to retain both these excellent 
qualities, and to make the book still more acceptable by 
the following changes. 

The order of presentation has been altered so as to 
secure from the outset greater variety in the exercises. 
Among many other changes may be mentioned the early 
introduction of verbs and their presentation by tenses 
instead of by conjugations ; the treatment of verbs in -oir 
as regular verbs of the third conjugation and those in -re as. 
regular verbs ofthe fourth; the early introduction of per- 
sonal pronouns, | gether with the rule for the agreement, 
of the past participle used with the verb avoir. 

The practical value of the vocabulary has been increased 
by the insertion of many words and phrases of frequent 
occurrence in ordinary conversation. 

The sentences for translation have been made lively 
and colloquial. To many of the lessons there have been | 
added whole exercises consisting of questions only. These 
questions are intended as a basis for conversational work 
in the classroom, and may all be answered from the 


4 


iv | Preface 


material furnished by the preceding lessons. To stimu- 
late conversation still further, a list of expressions for 
classroom use has been prepared. 

While as a rule one topic at a time has been presented, 
every subject will be found completely summarized in a 
single lesson. 

The editor’s thanks are due to Professor Charles H. 
Grandgent, of Harvard University, and to many others, 
for valuable criticisms and suggestions. 


DECEMBER, 1907, 


CONTENTS 


INTRODUCTION 


PAGE 

me Alphabet. . 2s 6 se 6 & 6 6 8 1 
Orthographic Signs . . 1. « « « «© © e « + 1 
DMEOCURMON .. (9 so 6) 8 os ee ee ee 3 
Division of Syllables. . 2s ss 8 ee a2 
Words for Practice . . . Ree Te ees 12 
The Linking of Words (Liaison) Fa Sia ie eee 14 
Capital Letters .° 0.0 6. ie 8 ew ee 8 te 15 
marks or Ppunpouauonr Se ei ee 6 eee Oe 
Expressions for Classroom Use ..-+ .. « 17 

EXERCISES 

eee nO ALGO: 3 6 Se Ree IO aA ei 8 aT 
2. Avoir: Present Indicative, Affirmative ... . 22 
3. Avoir: Present Indicative, Interrogative . . . . 23 
4. Btre: Present Indicative, Affirmative ... ee 
5. Btre: Present Indicative, Interrogative . . . . 25 
6. Pluralof Nouns . =. .« » oe eras: 25528 
Avoir: Present Indicative, N cgntiv Sr fondle CDS 

7. Possessive Adjectives .. +: . . of QF 
Avoir: Present Indicative, Negative halebitigatt¥e - 28 

8. Agreement of Adjectives . . « »« « « « « « Q9, 
English Possessive . . pith alietie i fetes 
Etre: Present Indicative, Negative at fe) 6 Thee oP RO 

9. Agreement of Adjectives (continued) . . . . + 80 
Etre: Present Indicative, Negative Interrogative 30 


vl 


10. 
11. 
42; 
13. 
14, 
15. 
16. 
ge 
18. 
19. 
20. 
21. 
22. 
23. 
- 24, 
25. 
26. 
27. 
28. 
29. 
30. 
31. 
$2. 
33. 
34. 
35. 
36. 
37. 
38. 
39. 
40. 


Contents 


The Past Indefinite Tense 


Numeral Adjectives . 
Ordinal Numbers 


Contraction of the Preposition a 


Contraction of the Preposition de 


Possessive Pronouns 
Comparison of Adjectives . 
Relative Pronouns 
Demonstrative Adjectives . 
Demonstrative Pronouns 


Demonstrative Pronouns (continued) . 


Cardinal Numbers 


Cardinal Numbers (continued) . 


Ordinal Numbers and Fractions 
Names of Days and Months 
Past Participles with 6tre . 


Personal Pronouns with Prepositions . 


The Adjective tout . 
The First Conjugation . 


Personal Pronouns as Direct Objects 


Past Participle with avoir 


Plural of Nouns and Adjectives . 


The Second Conjugation | . 
Nouns Used in a General Sense 
Nouns of Quantity . 

The Third Conjugation 
Adverbs of Quantity 

The Pronoun en . 

Partitive Article and Pronoun 
The Fourth Conjugation . . 
The Partitive after a Negative 


41. 
42. 
43. 
44. 
45. 
46. 
47. 
48. 
49. 
50. 


51. 


52. 
’ Conjugation of savoir 
53. 


54. 


55. 
56. 
57. 
58. 
59. 
60. 
61. 
62. 
63. 
64. 
65. 
66. 


Contents 


The Partitive with Adjectives . . 
The Imperfect Indicative 

Position of Adjectives. 
Comparison of Adjectives 

C’est and ce sont . 


Relative and Interrogative Pronouns . 


The Future Tense . 

The Future Tense (continued) . 
Interrogative Adjectives . 
Time of Day. Dates . 
Conjugation of aller 

The Seasons . 

Conjugation of faire 

Ages. Dimensions 


The Interrogative Pronoun lequel 
Conjugation of dire 


The Relative Pronouns lequel and dont 


Conjugation of voir 


Ce qui, ce que, and Other Relatives 


Feminine of Adjectives 

Feminine of Adjectives (continued) 
Position of Adverbs 

Idioms with avoir . 

Conditional Mode . 

Interrogative Adverbs 

Personal Pronouns . 

Order of the Pronouns 

Personal Pronouns (continued) . 
Pronominal Verbs: Reflexive Use . 
Pronominal Verbs: Reciprocal Use 


Vill © 


86. 
87. 


Contents 


Compound Tensedia ie Rive Ke aca. 


. The Pronouns en and y's) 2%! eee 
. Personal Pronouns: Summary. . . . 
. The Definite Article: Summary of its Use . 
. The Definite Article (continued) . . . . « 


The. Indefinite Aatiole): (scsi w) Zils 


. Daration of Time:.«. «©... .28aee petite 
. The Past Definite Tense. . ... . 
. Peculiarities of the First Conjugation 

. Verbs Ending in -yer, -cer, or -ger . 

. The Subjunctive Mood 


With Impersonal Verbs . 


. Formation of the Present Subjunctive 


The Subjunctive after Negative or iahcveatted 
VOEIR cis. s cok Siener( Oh tee terol ee eee 


Conjugation of croire . . . . . « « « 


. Subjunctive after Verbs Expressing Emotion . 


Conjugation of vouloir . .. . ; 


. The Subjunctive with ne after Cnitain eels 


Conjugation of craindre. . ..... 


. Subjunctive in Adjective Clauses... . 


Conjugation of connaftre . .... . 


. Subjunctive in Adverbial Clauses. . . =. 
. Summary of the Uses of the Subjunctive 


Sequence of Tenses of the Subjunctive . . 
The Imperfect Subjunctive... .. .. .» 
Further Drill on the Subjunctive . 

Conj ugation of falloir and pleuvoir. . . 
Subjunctive in Independent Clauses . . . 
The Subjunctive withque .... . 
Conjugation of venir. . a cebua'l eties 


Contents 1X 


88. The Infinitive . . . . 2 + + 2 «© « » ~ 219 
Conjugation of pouvoir. . . . a 
89. The Infinitive with the Prepositionde . . . . 222 


Conjugation of mettre .. . biimpumtig «| 228 
90. The Infinitive with the Peetalihe ad Gubmpantt<. Aen 
Conjugation of écrire. . .. . is tea 226 


91. The Subjunctive and the Infinitive Moons tons 
TOG 6 lO 8 lange Ree a) Whee ee Bie eee 


Conjugation of courirand mourir . .. . . 229 

wa. evdeont Participie. «sf ces er. eu wie eee ee eOU 
Conjugation of lire ©. <).e jee eee & 2B1 
Conjugation of riré ©. a. wine ee. a ee eee Oe 

Pes SUGARS OURIOIDIC . goer Se ele vas. w des Bs BOO 
Collective Doane 6.65 ie hati eee te) aia eee 

94: Aller, devoir, andfaire. ..... Vere. ORT 
Ob. Formation: of Tenses 6: 60 abcde bh ve oy oe) S42 
96. Summary of Relative and Interrogative Pronouns 247 
G7. Fosition of Adjectives. <..)6; .) «.°S «,.jsiee » QOL 
po. Negation, sii dalivebh ah iielsee ss Begg 2° 266 
oa. ane Use Of Mai! ss pi ok Balin th Gain ee eee 
SOU The Uae Ob Beet. iss a) 0 ei en dy # ie ee 
101. The Prepositions en anddans. . .... . 268 


SUOVIEW. XKBYOIQGD «50 0h 5 6 vet bk Ye, Se 6 ee 8 eee 
Sentences Selected from College Entrance Examinations 279 
Selections for Reading . . «© « « « © « « « « 286 


APPENDIX OF FORMS AND RULES | 
me pranmse Article. «c).6 e:éuel tesee es eee 
The Noun: 
Rule foc Gonder... ae stos s ge a eee 


; 


x Contents 


Formation of the Feminine . ...... 
Formation of the Plural 2°... 4 2 2 2 
The Adjective : 
Formation of the Feminine 
Possessive Adjective 
Demonstrative Adjective 
The Pronoun . 
The Verb: 
Avoir 
Etre . ° 
Terminations of Regular Verbs , 
The Four Conjugations 
The Passive Verb 
Conjugation of a Reflexive Verb 
Conjugation of a Reciprocal Verb . . . .. . 
Irregular Verbs 


Verbs Followed iy the Infinitive wriehiout a pind 
sition . pe, <p 


Verbs Requiring de bites an ‘Infinitiye . 
Verbs Requiring a before an Infinitive 


Adjectives which Change their Meaning with their 
Position . ’ » its, ts 


The Adverb 
Official Modifications in Syntax . 


VOGABULARY ein le oa’ ec ae cen 
END ie ee Bee eee eo ee 


INTRODUCTION 


THE ALPHABET 


j k ] Bh Or ee a ae 


jt ka _ elle emme enne o pé ku erre 


8 t u V Ww x y Z 
esse té uw  vé doublevé iks igrec zéd 


ORTHOGRAPHIC SIGNS 


Accents. — Apostrophe. — Hyphen. — Cedilla.— 
Dieresis. 


Three orthographic marks are called accents,— the 
acute (~), the grave (*), and the circumflex (‘). 

The acute accent, accent aigu, is used only over the 
vowel e (6), which then has the sound of a in late. As 
été, vérité. 

The grave accent, accent grave, is used chiefly over 
the vowel e (8), which then has nearly the sound of e in 
met. As pres, pere. It is used over a and uw merely to 
distinguish certain words which are otherwise spelled 
alike, and does not alter the pronunciation. As a (fo) 
from a (has) ; 1a (there) from la (the or her); or (where) 
from ou (07). 


1 In repeating the alphabet, e is usually pronounced like 6; in spelling a 
word, an unaccented e is given the sound of e in le. See page 3. 
2 


2 Introduction 


The circumflex accent, accent circonflexe, is used on 
any vowel, which is then long. As Age, téte, fle, déme, 
bfiche. It frequently indicates that a letter has been 
dropped, as in fle, isle ; ame (Latin, anima), soul. 


It distinguishes di (owed) from du (of the) sfir, (sure) from sur 
(upon), mfr (ripe) from mur (wall). 

These accents do not imply any stress of voice on the syllable where 
they occur. 


The apostrophe, l’apostrophe, (’), indicates that one of 
the vowels, a, e, or i has been dropped before a word 
beginning with a vowel or h mute. 

a is elided only in the article or pronoun la; as lame for la ame. 

e is elided in le, je, me, te, se, de, ce, ne, que (but when je, ce, le, 
and la come directly after the verb, either as subjects or objects, no 
elision takes place) ; in jusque and lorsque; in puisque and quoique 
before il, ils, elle, elles, on, un, une; in quelque before un, une; and 
in entre in compound words. 

i is elided only in si before il or ils. 

No elision occurs before onze, onziéme, oui, huit, huitiéme. 


The hyphen, le trait d’union, (-), marks the connection 
between two or more words or parts of a word. 

The hyphen is used between the verb and the pro- 
nouns je, moi, nous, tu, toi, vous, il, ils, elle, elles, le, la, 
les, lui, leur, y, en, ce, on, when they are placed after a 
verb of which they are subjects or objects. The other 
cases of its use will be noticed as they occur. 

The cedilla, la cédille, (¢), is put under ec when it has 
the sound of s before a, o, or u. As frangais, gargon, 
regu. 

The dizresis, le tréma, (*"), is placed over the second 
of two vowels to show that it begins a new syllable. As 
naif (na-if), noél (no-el). 


Pronunciation 8 


PRONUNCIATION 


Most French sounds have no English equivalents. In 
the following pages on pronunciation, intended only to 
supplement the work of the teacher by furnishing ex- 
amples for the use of both teacher and pupil, the word 
like means somewhat like, when French and English | 
sounds are compared. 


Simple Vowels 


a (short) has a sound between the @ of bar and the a 
in mat. As la, the; quatre, four; table, table; a, has; 
a, to ; Canada. : 

a (long) or a has the sound of a in father. The mouth 
should be opened wide. As ame, soul ; batir, to build ; 
sale, dirty ; fable, fable ; pas, step ; classe, class; espace, 
space ; nation, nation ; tentation, temptation. 

a is silent in aoit, Curacao, toast, Sadne. 


é has the sound of @ in late.’ As été, summer; 
vérité, truth ; cédé, yielded ; répété, repeated ; dégénéré, 
degenerate. | 

® and é vary in sound between the e of me¢ and the et 
of their. As pres, near; pbre, father ; mbre, mother ; 
téte, head ; méme, same. 

e without an accent has a sound similar to that of e in 
the before a consonant: the door, the boy, etc. As de, 


1 When we pronounce an English vowel slowly, we really produce two 
sounds, a slight finish or vanishing sound being heard. A French vowel 
has only one sound. Practise the various vowel and nasal sounds, first 
placing the mouth in position, and then uttering the sound without moy- 
ing lips, tongue, or jaws. Practise prolonging the sound, always stopping 
abruptly. | 


4 


4 | | Introduction 


of ; je, I; venir, to come. At the end of words of more 
than one syllabie it is silent; as dame, lady ; farine, 
flour. After two consonants, or at the end of a syllable 
and preceding a consonant, its sound is very indistinct, 
merely sufficient to pronounce the consonant before it; 
as arbre, tree ; samedi, Saturday. It has the sound of é 
(a in late) before final d, f, r, z, when these consonants 
are mute; as pied, foot; clef, key; parler, to speak ; 
nez, nose. It has the sound of @ before oc, f, 1, r,s, t, x, 
not mute, before final t mute or pronounced, and before 
a double consonant; as bec, beak ; chef, chief; sel, salt ; 
fer, iron; ferme, farm ; belle, beautiful; net, clean ; 
obje(t), object ; secre(t), secret; regre(t), regret ; tu es, 
thou art ; il est, he is. 

In et, les, des, ces, mes, tes, ses, the e is longer than e in est, zs, but 
not quite so long as e in nez, nose. 

In femme, woman; solennel, solemn; hennir, to neigh; nenni, no, 
not by any means, and in all adverbs ending in -emment, the first e has 
the sound of French short at 

iand ¢ usually have the sound of i in machine. As 
nid, nest ; gris, gray ; fle, island ; fini, finished ; midi, 
noon ; ici, here. In the last three of these examples the 
first iis shorter than the second. 

o (open) has a sound between the o of not and the w 
of nut. Robe, dress ; mode, fashion ; mol, soft ; votre, 
your ; école, school ; bonne, good (fem.); parole, word. 

o (closed) has the sound of o in note. As mot, word; 
cété, side ; le vétre, yours ; réle, roll, réle; rose, rose ; 
chose, thing ; fosse, grave. 


o is silent in faon, Laon, paon, taon. 


u is pronounced like ti in German, but has no equiva- 
lent in English. To form it, round the lips as if about 


1 Really a medium a 


/ 


Pronunciation 5 


to whistle, then without moving the lips, say ee. Tu, 
thou ; rue, street; plus, more; lune, moon ; murmure, 
murmur. It is usually silent after q and also when 
standing between g and e or g andi. As qui, who ; 
quatre, four; guerre, war; guide, guide. 

y following a consonant, or standing alone, has the 
sound of Frenchi. As type, type ; y, there. 

y standing between two vowels performs the office of 
iy, the i uniting with the preceding vowel. As rayon, 
ray,—=rai-yon; appuyer, to support, =appui-yer. (See 
below, Compound Vowels.) Pays, paysan, paysage = pai- 
is, etc. 

Compound Vowels and Diphthongs. 


ai at the end of verbs, in gai, quai, and in je sais, tu 
sais, il sait, has the sound of é: j’ai, J have; je donnerai, 
I shall give ; otherwise it has the sound of 8: mais, but; 
vrai, trwe ; je donnerais, J should give. 

In faisant, doing, and its derivatives, it has the sound of e. 

au, eau have the sound of o in note. As autre, other ; 
chapeau, hat; beau, handsome. In Paul, mauvais, bad, 
and before r, au has the sound of open o. 

ei has the sound of & As reine, queen. 

eu, ceu have no equivalent in English. The sound is 
somewhat like that of 7 in siv, pronounced with the lips 
rounded, and is longer iv some words than in others. 
As feu, fire ; fleur, flower ; couf, egg. 

In all parts of the verb avoir, to have, eu has the sound of u. 

ou has the sound of 00 in moon. As jour, day. 

oi has nearly the sound of wah ; more correctly, it is 

a combination of French ou and medium a. As moi, 
me; roi, king. Be careful not to get a sound resembling 
a in the English word dal. 


oe has the sound of oi in moelle and poéle. 


6 Introduction 


In all other diphthongs the first vowel is pronounced 
quickly and the voice dwells on the second. As ciel, 
heaven ; Dieu, God; bruit, noise ; oui, yes; juin, June. 
Distinguish carefully between ou-i and u-i, the latter 
being a combination of French u andi. As puis (pit-i), 
then ; huile, oii. C'est lui, it 7s he; but c’est Louis, i¢ 
is Louis. 

Nasal Vowels 


m and n, when final or before a consonant, lose their 
value as consonants and form with the preceding vowel 
a nasal sound which is a true vowel. These sounds 
have no exact equivalents in English; and in pronoun- 
cing them, care must be taken that no consonant m, n, 
or ng, be heard. 

They are divided into four groups: 

an 

I, 7" \ = an in want. 

en 
em 

As dans, in; lampe, lamp; enfant, child; empire, 
empire ; grand, large. 

En is silent in the ending of the third person plural 
of all verbs. As ils donnent, they give. 


in ) 


II. aim } = an in bank, not too flat. 





ym J 

As vin, wine; important, important; pain, bread ; 

faim, hunger ; sein, breast; syntaxe, syntax; symbole, 
symbol. 


Pronunciation 7: 


En = in in examen, examination, européen, European. Some pro- 
nounce en in hymen like in, but the best authorities favor -éne 
(hymeéne). 

-ien final or in the verbs tenir, to hold, and venir, to come, =i-in 
(French i followed by nasalin). As bien, (bi-in), well; rien, nothing; 
tiens, hold; viens, come. 


0 
fe = ou followed by nasal in. As coin (cou-in), corner; loin, 
far; moins, less; poing, fist. 


on 


II. = on in don’t. 
om 


As bon, good ; ponton, pontoon; nom, name; non, no. 


un 
IV. um ;=a slightly rounded unaccented French e 
eun (see p. 3), nasalized. 


As un, one; brun, brown; parfum, perfume; a jeun, 
Sasting. 

Final -um in album, rhum, géranium, médium, maximum, etc., is 
pronounced like om in homme, comme. 

Vowels are not nasalized before double n or double m, 
nor before n or m followed by a vowel or h mute. As 
bonne (fein.), good ; ame, soul ; une (fem.), one ; pomme, | 
apple ; ennemi, enemy ; inhumain, inhuman ; européenne, 
(fem.) Huropean. 

But the nasal sound is heard in ennui and its derivatives, and in 


all words beginning with emm-, as emmener, fo lead away ; also in 
enivrer, to intoxicate. 


" Consonants 


Final consonants are generally silent, except o, f, 1, r. 
Otherwise they usually have the same sound as in Eng- 
lish. As sec, dry ; chef, chief; sel, salt ; mer, sea. 

e before e, i, y, or with the cedilla (¢g) has the sound 
of s. As ceci, this; citer, to quote; gargon, boy ; legon, 


8 Introduction 


lesson ; regu, received. Otherwise it has the sound of &. 
As car, for ; cou, neck ; avec, with; lac, lake ; échee, 
check (in chess). 


Verbs ending in -cer and -cevoir preserve the s sound of ¢ by the 
use of the cedilla (¢). recevoir, to receive: il recut, he received ; com- 
mencer, to begin: commengant, beginning ; commencons, Jet us begin. 

¢ final is silent after n (as blanc, white; franc, frank), and in 
accroc, broc, clerc, cric, échecs (chess), escroc, estomac, lacs, raccroc, 
tabac. c of done is heard in the announcement of a conclusion 
or before a vowel. It has the sound of hard g in second and its 
derivatives. 


ch has the sound of ch in machine. As chat, cat ; 
chercher, to seek ; chirurgien, surgeon ; architecte, archi- 
tect ; chimdre, chimera. 


ch before a consonant, and usually in words derived from the 
Greek, has the sound of k. As yacht (iak), orchestre, orchestra; 
cheur, choir; Christ, Christ; chrétien, Christian; écho, echo; chaos 
(ka-o), chaos. It is silent in almanach. 

d final is sounded in proper names (as David) and in sud, sowth. 
It is silent in poids, weight. 

f final is silent in clef, key, cerf, stag, chef-d-cuvre; and also in 
the plurals beufs, oren, eufs, eggs, nerfs, nerves, though heard in 
the singulars boeuf, cuf, nerf. In neuf, nine, f is silent before a 
consonant, and has the sound of v before a vowel or h mute. 


g before e, i, and y, has the sound of s in pleasure ; 
before a, o, and u, the sound of gin gag. As gingembre, 
ginger, gage, pledge. g is silent in doigt, jinger ; sang, 
blood ; vingt, twenty ; legs, legacy. 


Verbs ending in -ger insert e after g before a or 0, to keep the 
zh quality throughout the verb. The e has no value except to 
modify the sound of g. As manger, io eat: mangeant, eating ; pro- 
téger, to protect: protégeons, /et us protect. 

gn sounds like gn in mignonette. As agneau, amb, montagne, 
mountain ; magnifique, magnificent. 

h is not heard in pronunciation. It is ealled mute 


Pronunciation 9 


(h muette) when the final vowel of the preceding word 
may be elided before it, or when the final consonant of 
the preceding word may be carried over to it in pronun- 
ciation; otherwise, it is called aspirate (h aspirée). As 
Vhomme, te man,.and les hommes, the men ; but le héros, 
the hero, and les héros, the heroes. 

If the -s of les in les héros were carried over it would sound like 
les zéros, the zeros, 

Whether the h is mute or aspirate can be learned only by obser- 
vation and practice. The following are among the most usual 
words in which the h is aspirate: la hache, the axe; la haie, the 
hedge; la haine, hate; une halle, a market-place; les hardes, the 
clothes ; les haricots, the beans ; le hasard, the chance; la hate, haste ; 
le haut, the summit; le héros, the hero (but ’héroine, l’héroisme) ; la 
honte, the shame; le Havre, Havre ; la Haye, the Hague ; la Hollande, 
Holland ; le huit, the eight (but mute in dix-huit and vingt-huit). 

j has the sound of s in pleasure. As jour, day ; joli, 
pretty ; jambe, leg ; joindre, to join. 

ill, not initial, and sometimes il when final, form the 
so-called liquid 1 (1 mouillée), with nearly the sound of y 
in yes. As soleil, swn ; fille, daughter. 

A vowel standing before the liquid 1 does not form a 
diphthong with the i, but retains its own sound; ue and 
oe have then the sound of eu. As paille, straw ; feuille, 
leaf ; orgueil, pride; ceil, eye. 

There is no liquid sound in il, avril, exil, vil, fil, mil, civil, profil, 
péril, nil, Achille, Lille, pupille, distiller, vaciller, osciller, mille, ville, 
Village, tranquille. Ofthe exceptions containing ill, the last four 
are of most frequent occurrence. 

1 is silent in baril, chenil, coutil, fils (s is sounded), fusil, gentil, 
gril, outil, persil, pouls, sofil, sourcil. 

1 is heard in calme, calm. 

m and n, if the preceding vowel is not nasal, have the 
same sound as in English. m is silent in damner and 
its compounds and in automne. 


10 Introduction 


p is silent in baptéme, compte, corps, dompter, exempt, temps, 
sculpter, sept, and their compounds. It is sounded in septembre, 
September, and in psaume, psalm. ph has the sound of f. 


qu has the sound of k. As qui, who; qualité, quality. 


Final q of cing, jive, is sounded, except before a consonant or 
aspirate h. q is heard in coq, cock, but silent in coq d’Inde, turkey- 
gobbler. 

In aquarelle, équateur, équation, loquace, quadrupéde, quartz, and 
a few other words qu has the same sound as in English. 

r is articulated much more distinctly than in English. 
As rue, street; rividre, river. 

r final is sounded when preceded by a, i, 0, u (as car, 
for ; finir, to finish ; dur, hard), in monosyllables ending 
in -er (as fer, tron), and in amer, bitter ; cuiller,! spoon ; 
enfer, fell ; fier, proud ; hier, yesterday ; Vhiver, winter. 

In other words final -er is sounded like 6. As parler, 
to speak ; dernier, last ; premier,’ first ; léger, light. 

Both r’s are distinctly sounded in the future and conditional 
tenses of acquérir, courir, and mourir, to distinguish them from the 
other forms with a single r. As nous courons, we run ; nous courrons 
we shall run. Itis always silent in monsieur, pronounced m’ sieu. 

s between two vowels has the sound of sin please. As 
voisin, neighbor ; base, base ; écraser, to crush. . 

Except in parasol, désuétude, and in compound words, where s 
retains the hissing sound of its simple form. As préséance, prece- 
dence, vraisemblable, likely. 

Otherwise it has the sound of s in sister. As sensa- 
tion, sensation ; prisme, prism ; héroisme, heroism. 

Except in transaction, transalpin, transiger, transit, transitif, 
transition, balsamine, and Alsace, in which it has the sound of z. 


s final is silent except in albinos, aloés, angelus, as, atlas, bis, 
blocus, cens, chorus, dervis, en sus, fils, florés, Gil Blas, gratis, hélas, 


1 Look out for French u in this word. 
2 Notice that the first e in this word is like e in English th(e) man. 


Pronunciation 11 


iris, jadis, laps, lis (though generally silent in fleur-de-lis), mais, mars, * 
mceurs, obus, ours, rébus, Rheims, rhinocéros, Saint-Gaudens (Fr. nasal 
in s), sinus, sens (but sen(s) commun), tous (when used without a 
noun), us, vis, and in Greek and Latin names, as Vénus. In the 
singular os, bone, the s is generally heard, but not in the plural: un os 
(short 0) ; des os, pronounced like des eaux. 

In Jesus, the final s is sometimes heard, and in le Christ both s and 
t are pronounced ; but in Jésus-Christ the s of Jésus and st of Christ 
are silent. 


t usually sounds as in tutor. It has the hissing sound 
of sin the combinations -tion, -tial, -tiel, -tieux, and in a 
few words ending in -tie, which in English end in -cy. 
As situation, situation ; partialité, partiality ; essentiel, 
essential ; factieux, factious ; démocratie, democracy. 


Also in balbutier, initier, patience, ineptie, minutie, satiété (first 
t), and in proper names ending in -tien; as un Vénitien, a Venetian. 

In the imperfect indicative and present subjunctive of verbs, or 
when preceded by s, t retains its hard sound. As nous partions, 
question. Also in moitié, half, bonnetier, Poitiers, galimatias, chrétien, 
Claretie. 


th always has the sound of t. As théAatre, theatre ; 
thé, tea. 


t final is silent, except in brut, but, chut, dot, déficit, est, east, fat, 
granit, lest, mat, net, ouest, and most words ending in -ct. In sept 
and huit, the t is mute only before a noun or adjective beginning with 
a consonant; as dans huit jours. In vingt, t is always mute except 
in the numbers 21 to 29 inclusive. 


w occurs only in a few words of foreign origin, such as tramway 
(pron. as in English), whist (pron. ouist), wagon (pron. vagon). 


x usually has the sound of ks. As luxe, luxury ; 
auxiliaire, auxiliary. ex- initial and followed by a vowel 
or h mute has the sound of gz. As exil, exile ; examen, 
(en= nasal in), examination; exemple, example. In 
exception, x = ks. 


12 Introduction 


It has the sound of ss in Bruxelles, soixante, six, and dix; but the 
x of six or dix is silent before a consonant, and sounds like z before 
a vowel or h mute. It has the sound of z in deuxiéme, sixiéme, 
dixiéme, dix-huit, dix-nent. 


Division of Syllables 


In the body of a word each syllable must if slabs 
begin with a consonant; as mo-ra-li-té, a-ma-bi-li-té. 

If there are two consonants the division usually takes 
place between the two; as hom-me, vil-le, par-tir, en- 
ten-du. But if the second is 1 or r (and the first is 
neither 1 nor r), or if the two are gn, the division takes 
place before the two; as é-glise, ta-bleau, no-tre, é-crire, 
vi-gne. 

As h is never heard in pronunciation, the consonant 
which precedes it is always carried, in speaking, to the 
following vowel; as i-nhu-main, i-nha-bi-té. 

The compound consonant x (=ks or gz) always goes with the 
preceding vowel ; as ex-il. : 


Words for Practice 


quatre trés robe 
papa téte mode 
Canada je école 
table de or 
blamer venir fort 
ananas dame hdte 
pas arbre oter 
classe samedi Kia ee 
passer nez plus 
été pied gal 
vérité objet pays 
répété secret puis 
pere ici appuyer 


prés midi cou 


Words for Practice 


bout 

eau 

fiéau 

hair 

je hais 
haissant 
paille 
tailleur 

ceil 

leur 
demeure 

eu Parts 
jeus of 
j’eusse) avoir 
roi 

soif 

grand 


Exceptions, similarities, etc. 


et 

est (is) 
est (east) 
mer 
mére 


enfant 
jambe 
vin 
pain 
main 
bien 
rien 

le sien 
moyen 
juin 

on 
bonbon 
grognon 
brun 
lundi 
humbie 
album 


votre 

le v6tre 
non 
nom 

un 

une 

bon 
bonne 
rien 
reine 
plein 
pleine 
faim 
femme 
examen 


13 


avec 
blane 
gage 
second 
garcon 
général 
mangea 
rossignol 
science 
patience 
le tien 
question 
nation 
soleil 
meilleur 


sais 
ses 
ces 
mes 
mais 
mais 
au 
eau 
bout 
but 
butte 
des 
dés 
pré 
prés 


14 Introduction 
prés villageois tabac 
lui gentil estomac 
Louis gentille net 
cou le haut nette 
coup Veau clef 
moi la hauteur clé 
mois auteur chef 
moins les hauteurs chef-d’ceuvre 
moine les auteurs ceuf 
sel la haine ceufs 
selle laine boeuf 
celle le héros beeufs 
on V’héroine cour 
an les héros choeur 
ane les zéros soeur 
mil le huit je donnai 
mille lui je donnais 
fils tache tous (adj.) 
fil tache tous (pron.) 
fille ennemi Jésus 
ville ennui Christ 
village lac J ésus-Christ 


The Linking of Words (La Liaison). 


The last consonant of a word, standing before a 
word beginning with a vowel or h mute and closely con- 
nected with it in sense, is often carried over to it in 
pronunciation. 

In such cases s and x have the sound of z, d that of t, c 
and g that of k, and f that of v. As. mes_amis, ils_ont, 
aux_armes, grand_homme, avec_elle, rang_élevé. In 
carrying ‘over the n of a nasal, the sound of the nasal 
must be retained, and the n sounds as if it were the first 


Linking of Words 15 


letter of the following word: mon enfant = mon nenfant ; 
un homme = un nhomme. 

This Itnking of words, called liaison, is necessary in public speaking 
or reading; in conversation it generally takes place only when the 
words thus joined cannot do without each other. It cannot occur 
before oui, onze, or onziéme. The t of et is never linked to the 
following word. 

Final m, n, p, or r of a noun is not usually carried over. Beyond 
certain general principles, it is impossible to lay down rules. In read- 
ing, the number of liaisons will vary, according to the style of the 
composition, the shades of thought, pauses, euphony, and the taste of 
the reader. 


Examples of Liaison 


Ce petit_enfant est trés_aimable, This little child is 
very lovable. 3 

Leurs_amis ne sont pas_encore arrivés, Their friends 
have not arrived yet. 

Quels jours_heureux! What happy days !/ 

Que dit-on ? What do they say? 

Quand_avez-vous_été chez_eux? When were you at 
their house? 

Je les_ai vus de temps_en temps, J saw them from 
time to time. 

Ca m’est_égal, That makes no difference to me. 

Elle répond_a ses questions_amusantes, She answers 
his amusing questions. 

I]s_aiment_a lire et 4 écrire, They like to read and 
write. 

Il a beaucoup_étudié, He has studied a great deal. 

Elle est bien_heureuse, tout_heureuse, She is very 
happy, quite happy. 

Capital Letters 


Except at the beginning of a sentence, capital letters, 
lettres majuscules, are not used for the names of the 


16 Introduction 


months and of the days of the week: as avril, lundi; for 
any word used as an adjective: as un officier frangais ; 
for any word used to signify rank or position: as 
“empereur, roi, duc, général, cardinal, docteur, abbé, 


maire, etc. 


Punctuation Marks 


The following are the marks of punctuation most 


frequently used : 
le point . 
la virgule ~ ’ 
le point (et) virgule ; 
les deux points - 
le point d’interrogation ? 


le point d’exclamation ! 


le tiret — 
la parenthése () 
les guillemets bese eee 


les points SUSPENBIES ...cve 


| Expressions for Class-room Use 17 


EXPRESSIONS FOR CLASS-ROOM USE 


_—1 Monsieur (M.), Sir, Mr. 
Se Madame (Mme.), Madam, Mrs. 
Te Mademoiselle (Mlle.), Miss. 


Bonjour, Good morning, good day. 
5 Bon soir, Good evening, good night. 
ae ee (until I have the 
Fe: u plaisir,) ~ pleasure of seeing you again) 
a A‘ demain, Good-bye until to-morrow. 


8 
a 9 Ace soir, Good-bye until this evening. 
ae Que signitie af \ What does 
1 Que ve re ? 





mean ? . 








12 Comment dit-on 





? How does one (do you) say 

















2 

Comment écrit-on ? How does one (do you) 
write ? 

Ecrivez, Write? . 


En anglais, In English. 

En francais, In French. 

Comment épelle-t-on 

~ spell ——? 

Epelez, Spell. 

Comment prononce-t-on —— ? How does one (do you) 
pronounce ? 

Prononcez apres moi, Pronounce after me. 

Lisez, Read. 

Lisez le francais, Read the French. 


S’il vous plait, Please ; if youplease. 
= i] hat (did-you pt) 


1 With capital letters, accents are regularly omitted. 
2 Forms ending in -ez without the subject vous, you, are all imperatives. 
To make any of them negative, put ne before and pas directly after. 
2 





? How does one (do you) 





en 
. a = 
; wv Se ee 
"il , 
on 
> _ -* 
: en ~ 
aa - 
- 










Pardon, ‘I beg (your) pardon. _. 
2 erci, Thank you. | 
one l n’y-a l, | You are welcome; don’t men- 
é n’est_pas la peine, J tion it. (In response to thanks. a 
DE Répétez, Repeat. 
51 FRépétez ensemble, Repeat together. 
32 § Traduisez, Z’ranslate. 
53 | Conjuguez, Conjugate. 
N Répondez, Answer. 
65) Fermez les livres, Close the (your) books. 
356} Ouvrez_ les livres, Open the books. 
37} Commencez, Begin. | 
8} Continuez, Continue. \ 
39] Ecoutez, Listen. | 
AQ Attendez, Wait. 
41 Faites attention! Pay (lit., make) attention! 
42 Comprenez-vous, Do you understand ? 
43 Qui, monsieur, je comprends, Yes, sir, I understand. 
44 Non, madame, je ne comprends pas, Vo, madam, I 
do not understand. 
45 Je ne sais pas, I do not know. 
46 N’est-ce pas ? Js it not? * 
47 Vous comprenez, n’est-ce pas? You understand, oo. 
you not ? 
_ 48 Levez * main, Raise your hand. 
“49 Ceci, i Tig); clay that (thing). ~ 
50 Qu’ ae ? ) ris 
51 Qu’est-ce que c’est ? What is that? 
52 Qu’est-ce que c’est que cela oJ 





9va 














ae 








OT 


1 The explanation of the use of n’est-ce pas? instead of the repetition of 
a statement in the form of a negative question, is left to the teacher: You 
do, do you not? He has, has he not? They will, will they not? etc., in 
English, but always n’est-ce pas in French. 





Expressions for Class-room Use we... 
53 C’est un (une) , Lt is a ( an) —<— bam Pine 
u 54 Le mot, The word. bs \ : 


55 La phrase, The sentence. 
56 Quelle legon ? What lesson? 


57 Quelle page? What page? 








58 Au-haut At the top 
9 Au milieu fa la page, {i the mitt} f the page. 
60 Au bas _ At the foot 
“~61 Ajoutez, Add. 
62 Quelle faute? What mistake ? 
63 Corrigez, Correct. 
64 Avez-vous quelque chose 4 ajouter ? Have you any- 
thing to add ? 
65 Y a-t-il encore quelque chose & corriger? Js there 
anything else to correct ? 
66 Est-il permis de dire ? May one say ——? 
67 Il] faut ——, We need 
68 Faut-il ? Do you need ? 
69 I) faut ajouter , We must add ——., 
70 Il doit @tre, Zé should be. 
‘71 Il doit y avoir, There should be. 
72 Au lieu de, Inst 
Oulez-vous’ Do you wish? (followed by an infini 
tive, Will you ?) 
74 Allez au tableau (noir), Go to the blackboard. y ae 
75 Ecrivez sur le tableau, Write on the board. of 
76 Levez-vous, Rise, stand up. <<" Spy ar \ 
77 Asseyez-vous, Be seated. Q_p 
78 Ramassez, Pick up, gather 
79 C’est assez, That is enough. 
80. Cela suffit, That will do. 





ee 


fy Cee 



































a 


silt 


- 


: s > 
ate hey ae 
‘ isi hs 


Mf 
oder TERE Sek eS ES Rae 
Mee Bee: SE et 
4 ha . ar winndiminul 


Lig f ae 
pa 


PAs a eat 


% 


a 


‘i oe af : Aa ee hos * F erin. te 
wat iy aes) A ne ily Vee 
me a - ; ’ ay | | 


I bee aero! . 
AVERT OAD 





EXERCISES 


\ 


: 1 

a. are only two genders in French, the masculine 
and the feminine.} 

Before a noun masculine use un for @ or an, use le 
for the. 

Before a noun feminine use une for @ or an, use la 
for the. 

Before a vowel or h mute use I’ instead of le or la, 


le pére, the father. un homme, a man. 

la mére, the mother. une femme, a woman, a wife. 
un frére, a brother. un ami a friend. 

une sur, a sister. une amie 

le fils, the son. Venfant (m. or f.), the child. 


la fille, the daughter. _ et, and. 


1. Un pére,une mére. 2. Uneméreetunfils. 3. Un 
fils et une fille. 4. Le frére, la scour. 5. L’homme et 
lafemme. 6. Unfréreetunami. 7. Lascur et l’amie. 
8. Une femme et un enfant. 9. Le pére, la mére et 
Venfant. 10. L’homme, le fils et la fille. 


1. A mother,adaughter. 2. Afatherandason. 3.A 
sonandamother. 4. Thefatherandthe mother. 5, The 
brother, the friend (m.), the child, the sister. 6. The 
man, the woman, the friend (f.), the son. 7. The brother 
and afriend. 8. The daughter and a friend (f.). 9A 
manandachild. 10. The woman and the child. 


1 When learning a French noun, pupils should acquire with it an article 
denoting the gender. 
21 


22 Present Indicative of Avoir 


2 | 
The e of je (7) is omitted when the following verb 
begins with a vowel, and an apostrophe takes its place. 
je, I. ai, have. jai, Z have. 
Avoir, to have. 


PRESENT INDICATIVE, AFFIRMATIVE. 


jai, Z have. _ nous avons, we have. 
tu as, thou hast. vous avez, you have.t 
il a, he has. ils ont, they (m.) have, 
elle a, she has. elles ont, they (f.) have. 


1. J’ai un frére. 2. L’>homme aune femme. 3. Tu 
asunami. 4. L’enfantaune sceur. 5, Nous avons un 
pére et une mere. 6, Elle a une amie. 7. Ils ont un 
enfant. 8. Vous avez une mére, une sceur et un frére. 
9.J’aiunami. 10. Il aun fils et une fille, . 

1. I have a sister. 2. We have a friend. 3. They 
have a mother. 4. The child has a brother and a sister. 
5. The woman has a friend (f.). 6. You have a father 
and a brother. 7. The man has a son and a daughter. 
8. They (f.) have a father anda mother. 9. She hasa 
sister. 10. He has a friend, and the friend has a brother. 


3 
(1) Ina question, if the subject is a personal pronoun, 
it stands after the verb and is connected with it by a 
hyphen: ai-je, have I? ont-ils, have they ? 
(2) When the third person singular ends in a vowel, 
it is followed for the sake of euphony by -t- nein il or 
elle: a-t-il, has he? 


1 Vous, like the English you, may be either singular or plural. Tu is 
the familiar form, and is used among members of the same family, intimate 
friends, among and to children, to animals, etc. Use vous for you in these 
exercises, unless otherwise indicated. 


Present Indicative of Avoir 23 


Avoir. — Present Inpicative, INTERROGATIVE. 


ai-je, have 1? avons-nous, have we ? 
as-tu, hast thou? avez-vous, have you? 
a-t-il, has he? ont-ils, have they (m.) ? 
a-t-elle, has she ? ont-elles, have they (f.) ? 
le livre, the book. vu, seen (past part.). 
une grammaire, a grammar. perdu, lost (past part,). 
up crayon, a pencil. qui? who? 

une plume, a pen. oui, yes. 

le papier, the paper. ou, or 

Vencre (f.), the ink. aussi, a/so,-too, 

Veau (f.), the water. la,! there. 


qu’avez-vous la, what have you there? . 
qu’a-t-il perdu, what has he lost ? 


1. Avez-vous un frére ou une seur? 2. J’ai un frére et 
une sceur. 3, A-t-il perdu le crayon? 4. Il a perdu le 
crayon et le papier. 5. Ai-je une grammaire? 6. Oui, 
monsieur, vous avez une grammaire. 7. A-t-elle vu 
le fils? 8. Oui, mademoiselle, elle a vu le fils et elle 
aaussi vu la fille. 9. Ont-ils un enfant? 10. Ls ont 
un fils. 11. Qu’avez-vous 14? 12. J’ai l’eau et l’encre. 
13. Qui a un crayon? 14. Qu’a-t-il vu? 15.11 a vu 
une grammaire et une plume. 


1. She has a sister and a brother. 2. We have seen 
the paper and the pen. 3. They have the water and 
the ink. 4.She has a book. 5. She has also a pen. 
6. Have you a grammar?? 7. Have you lost a pencil ? 
8. What have you there? 9. Who has lost a pen? 
10. Who has the paper? 11. What have you lost? 
12. What has she seen? 13. Have I a penor a pencil? 
14. Who has seen the ink ? 

1 Pronounced like la, the. See Introduction, page 1. 


2 For use of the numerous questions in the English exercises of this book, 
see Editor’s Preface. 


24 Agreement of Adjectives 


4 


An adjective always agrees in gender with the noun 
which it qualifies. To, form the feminine of most 
adjectives, add e to the masculine. 

Adjectives ending in e mute in the masculine do not 
change in the feminine. 


Etre, to be. 

PRESENT INDICATIVE, AFFIRMATIVE. 
je suis, Z am. nous sommes, we are. 
tu es, thou art. vous étes, you are, 

il est, he is. ils sont, they (m.) are. 
elle est, she is. . elles sont, they (f.) are. 


petit (m.), petite (f.), little, small, short. 
grand (m.), grande (f.), /arge, tall, great. 
bon (m.), bonne (f.), good, kind. 
mauvais (m.), mauvaise (f.), bad. 


riche, rich. facile, easy. jeune, young. 
pauvre, poor. difficile, difficult. trés, very. 
la lettre, the /eiter. écrit, written. 


1. Le crayon est bon, la plume est mauvaise. 2. Le 
pére est grand, la fille est petite. 3. La grammaire est 
trés difficile. 4. Il a une plume, la plume est bonne. 
5. Le fils a perdu un petit livre. -6. Je suis grand, tu es 
petit. 7. Quiest jeune? 8. Le fils est jeune, et la fille 
est jeune aussi. 9, Il est bon, elle est bonne. 10. Le 
frére est riche, la sceur est tres pauvre. 11. J’ai vu un 
jeune homme, il est trés riche. 12. Le jeune homme a 
écrit une trés bonne lettre. 


1. The good pencil, the bad pen. 2. The ink is very 
bad, the water is good. 3. The man has a good son. 
4. Has he also a good daughter? 5. Has she lost a 
small pencil? 6. Who has lost a large book? 7. The 
father is very kind, the mother is also very kind. 8.1 


Present Indicative of Etre 25 


have lost a small grammar. 9. You are very kind. 
10She has written a letter, the letter is very good. 
11. The brother is young, and the sister is young too. 
12. The mother is tall, the daughter is short. 13. The 
grammar is difficult. 14. They have a friend, she is 
very rich. 15. The pen is good, the paper is poor (bad).* 


5 


(1) When the nominative 7¢ stands for a masculine 
noun (such as crayon), it is expressed by il; when it 
stands for a feminine noun (such as plume), by elle. 


J’ai un crayon, il est bon, J have a pencil, it is a good one. 
Tl a une grammaire, elle est difficile, he has a grammar, it is difficult. 


(2) In a question, if the subject of the verb is a noun, 
the noun usually stands before the verb and is repeated 
after the verb in the form of a pronoun. - 

L’homme est-il riche, is the man rich? 


Etre. — Present INDICATIVE, INTERROGATIVE. 


suis-je,am ZI? | sommes-nous? 
es-tu ? étes-vous ¢ 
est-il? sont-ils ? 
est-elle t” - gont-elles 


1. J’ai vu le livre, il est petit. 2. L’enfant a-t-il 
Yencre? 3. L’homme a-t-il une femme? 4, La femme 
est-elle riche? 5. Nous avons vu l’encre, elle est mau- 
vaise. 6, Vous avez un crayon; est-il bon ou mauvais? 
7. La grammaire est-elle facile ou difficile? 8. L’enfant 
est-il jeune? 9. L’amiest-ilriche? 10. L’amie est-elle 
grande ? 11. L’homme est-il grand ou petit ? 

1. The woman has a son. 2. The son has a grammar. 
3. The little child has a good father. 4. He has also a 


1 English words in parentheses () are to be expressed in French; those 
in brackets [ ] are to be omitted. 


26 ‘Plural of Nouns 


good mother. 65. The child has a sister. 6. Is the man 
young? 7.Is he poor or rich? 8. Is the pencilefa] 
good [one]? 9.I1s the ink good or bad? 10. Is the 
grammar small? 11. Is it easy or difficult? 12. Has 
the manafriend? 13.Is the water good? 14. What 
have you written? 15. Is the letter [a] good [one]? 
16. Are? you tall or short? | 


4 


6 


(1) Most nouns form their plural, as in English, by 
adding s to the singular. 

(2) The plural of all the forms of the definite article 
(le, la, 1’) is les. 


le frére, the brother. les fréres, the brothers. 
la scour, the sister. les sours, the sisters. 
Vami, the friend. les amis, the friends. 


(3) The negation not is ordinarily expressed by ne 
before the conjugated part of the verb and pas after it. 


Je n’ai pas vu, J have not seen. 


la maison, the house. fermé, closed. 

la chambre, the room. trouvé, found, Past 

la porte, the door. acheté, bought. Y 

une fenétre, a window. _ pris, taken. Participles. 
une table, a tuble. ouvert, opened. 

une chaise, a chair. mais, but. 

le tiroir, the drawer. non, no. 


’ 
Avoir. — Present INDICATIVE, NEGATIVE. 


je n’ai pas, J have not. nous n’avons pas. 


tu n’as pas. vous n’avez pas. 
il n’a pas. ils n’ont pas. 
elle n’a pas. elles n’ont pas. 


1 Yous always takes a plural verb, but the adjective qualifying it is 
plural only when more than one person is addressed, 


Possessive Adjectives 27 


1. Avez-vous les grammaires? 2. Jen’ai pas les gram- 
maires, mais j’ai les crayons et le papier. 3. Nous 
n’avons pas vu les maisons. 4.11 n’a pas fermé les 
fenétres, mais il a fermé les portes. 5. Ai-je pris la 
plume? 6. Vous n’avez pas pris la plume, mais vous 
avez pris le crayon. 7. Avez-vous trouvé les enfants ? 
8. Quia ouvert la fenétre? 9. Quiaacheté les maisons ? 
10. Qui a écrit une lettre? 11. Qu’avez-vous acheté ? 
12. Qu’avez-vous pris? 13. Elle a fermé le tiroir. 


1. They have bought the houses. 2. He has closed 
the doors. 3. He has also closed the windows. 4. We 
have not seen the pencils. 5. The children have taken 
the ink; they have not taken the water. 6. She has 
found the children. 7. Has the man closed or opened 
the windows? 8. Have you taken the pens or the 
pencils? 9. Have they bought the tables and the 
chairs? 10. Have you bought the small or the large 
pens? 11, Have I the grammar? 12. Have they 
closed the books? 18. Has the woman seen the rooms? 
14. Has she taken the paper or the pen? 15. What 
have you closed? 16. Who has opened the drawer ? 


E 7 
Possessive Adjectives. 
SINGULAR. PLURAL. 


mon (m.), ma (f.), mes, my. 
ton (m.), ta (f.), tes, thy, your. 
son (m.), sa (f.), ses, his, her, its. 


notre (m.), notre (f.), nos, our, 
votre (m.), votre (f.), vos, your. 
leur (m.), leur (f.), leurs, their. 
In French, the possessive adjective agrees with the 
thing possessed, and not, as in English, with the 
possessor. 


28 Possessive Adjectives 


son pére, his father, or her father. leur maison, their house. 
sa mére, his mother, or her mother. leurs maisons, their houses. 
Before a feminine word beginning with a vowel or h 
mute, for the sake of euphony use mon, ton, son, instead 
of ma, ta, sa. 
mon ami, my friend (m.). 
mon amie, my friend (f.). 
son amie, Ais or her friend (f.). 
Avoir.— Present INDICATIVE, NEGATIVE INTERROGATIVE. 
n’ai-je pas, have J not? n’avons-nous pas ? 


n’as-tu pas ? n’avez-vous pas ? 
n’a-t-il pas ? n’ont-ils pas ? 
n’a-t-elle pas ? n’ont-elles pas ? 


1. N’ai-je pas vusa plume? 2. Vous avez vu sa plume 
et soncrayon. 3, A-t-il prismes crayons? 4. Qu’avez- 
vous trouvé? 5. J’ai trouvé son encre, mais je n’ai 
pas trouvé sa plume. 6. N’a-t-il pas vu son amie? 
7. Il a vu son amie et ses amis. 8. Qui a pris ma petite 
grammaire? 9. Ses filles sont grandes, mais ses fils sont 
trés petits. 10. N’ont-ils pas mon livre? 11. N’avez- 
vous pas vu meS amis? 12. Qui a vu leurs fils et leurs 
filles? 13. Ils ont trouvé nos crayons. 


1.:The men have not seentheirsons. 2. Your friends 
have seen my sister. 3. Her friend (f.) has bought the 
little tables. 4, The woman has n’t found her children. 
5. Their mother has found their little sister. 6. Has 
he not lost his books? 7. Have you not opened my 
drawer? 8. Has she seen her father or her sister ? 
9. Has n’t the man closed our doors and our windows ? 
10. Have I not seen your friend? 11. My child, have 
you (2nd sing.) lost my pencil ? 12. Have they lost 
their pens or their pencils? ( 13, Have we our gram- 
mars? 14. Haven’t you seen their house? 15. Who 
has opened his windows ? 


Agreement of Adjectives 29 


" ; 


An adjective always agrees in number, as well 
gender, with the noun which it qualifies. 

Most adjectives form their plural like nouns, by 
adding s to the singular. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 


bon (m.). bons (m.). 
bonne (f.). bonnes (f.). 






(3) The sign ’s of the English possessive is not used 
in French. Turn such expressions as my brother’s book, 
their father’s house, etc., into the book of my brother, the 
house of their father, etc. 


le livre de mon frére, my brother’s book. 
la maison de leur pére, their father’s house, 


utile, useful. ; amiable, lovable, kind, 
5 ae aimable, , 
joli, pretty. pleasant, agreeable. 
ici, here. wicked ; (in speaking 
pour, for. méchant,{ a child) naughty. 
un, une, one. trois, three 
deux, two. quatre, four. 


de, of, from. 


Etre. — Present InDICATIVE, NEGATIVE. 


je ne suis pas, Jam not. nous ne sommes pas. 


tu n’es pas. vous n’étes pas. 
» iln’est pas. ils ne sont pas. 
elle n’est pas. elles ne sont pas. 


} 
Ly Ve” Les trois enfants de mon frére sont trés aimables. 


2) Les amis de votre fils sont-ils riches? 3. Ses amis 
bp sont pas riches, ils sont pauvres. 4. Les deux 
maisons de sa sceur ne sont pas trés grandes, mais elles 
sont trés jolies. 5. Les enfants ont-ils trouvé les livres 
de leur pére? 6. Les plumes de ma secur ne sont pas 
bonnes; elles sont mauvaises. 7. N’avez-vous pas vu 


30 Agreement of Adjectives 


les quatre enfants de votre ami? 8. Sont-ils aimables ? 
9. Sont-ils grands? 10. Sont-ils jolis? 11. Sont-ils 
méchants? 12. Sa fille n’est pas jolie, mais elle est 
bonne. 18. Ses deux livres ne sont-ils pas trés utiles ? 


1. You have taken my brother’s two pencils. 2. Your 
father has bought the houses for your three brothers. 
3. The houses are small, but they are very pretty. 
4. His frignd’s sisters are young. /$. They are very 
kind. Be: your friend here? 7%. Who is here? 
8. Who is not here? 9. Are your pens good [ones] ? 
10. Are the children tall or short? 11. Are they 
naughty? 12. Has he taken the books? 13. Have n’t 
the children closed their grammars? 14. Has your 


brother lost his pen facades penel ? 15. Has he lost 
his books too? 16. What has he lost? 17. Have you 


written three or four letters ? 


, 9 
i mee ie 
Hh (1) An adjective qualifying two or more nouns 
.—” masculine must be masculine plural. 
a ° . . : 
(2) An adjective qualifying two or more nouns 
feminine must be feminine plural. 
(3) An adjective qualifying two or more nouns of 
different genders must be masculine plural. 


A 
Etre. — Present INDICATIVE, NEGATIVE INTERROGATIVE. 


ne suis-je pas, am J not? ne sommes-nous pas t 


n’es-tu pas ? n’étes-vous pas ? 
n’est-il pas ? ne sont-ils pas ? 
n’est-elle pas ? ne sont-elles pas ? 
malade, sick, ill. souvent, often. 
gai, cheerful, merry. toujours, always. 
triste, sad. aujourd’hui, to-day. 


haut, high. sur, on, upon. 


ey pM" AAef AsAe beh (arn. 
; Aree Ay aut j 
“<< du” The Conversational Past 31 


1. Le pére et le fils sont grands. 2. La maison est 
aute. 3. La mére et la fille sont petites. 4. Elles sont 
oujours bonnes et aimables. 5. Nous avons vu les tables 

et les chaises. 6. Sont-elles hautes? 7. Le pére et la 
mére sont-ils bons? 8. Les livres sont-ils sur la table 
aujourd’hui? 9. Ne sont-ils pas souvent sur la chaise ? 
10. Vos amis ne sont-ils pas toujours gais? 11. Ils sont 
tristes aujourd’hui; ils sont malades. 12. N’est-il pas 
ton frére? 13. Les hommes ne sont-ils pas riches ? 
1 s quatre petites filles sont-elles souvent méchantes ? 


is father and his brother are very tall, and he is y 
too. 2. His wife and his sister are always very 
agreeable. 3.-His friends are not sad; they are very. y 
cheerful. 4. Their trees and their houses are high. ’ 
5. Your brother’s friend is ill to-day. 6. Aren’t you aN 
here often (often here)? 7. Are you always here? | 
8. Are you sad to-day? 9. AmTI not always cheerful ? y 
10. Who took (has taken) my books? 11. Are n’t they 
on yourtable? 12. Are my pensand my pencils goodor /\ ~ 
bad? 13.Isn’t your grammar easy? 14. Isn’t the 
book [a] useful [one]? 15.Isheyourfriend? 16. Am\\V 
I not his friend ? ) aN ‘ 
10 i ee: 

(1) The conversational past tense in French is the 
perfect (past indefinite). 

J’ai vu votre pére hier, J saw your father yesterday. 
Il a perdu sa montre, he lost his watch. 

(2) The auxiliary verb ¢o do does not exist in 
French. In translation, change the expressions did J 
see, did he buy, did you find, etc., into have I seen, has he 
bought, havegou Sound, ete. 

A-t-il perdu sa montre, did he lose his watch ? 


a 


J 


§2 — The Conversational Past 


(3) The prepositions de and a, the definite article (le, 
la, 1’, les,), and the possessive adjectives are repeated 
before each noun to which they refer. | 


la poche, the pocket. mis, put. 

le mouchoir, the handkerchief. donné, given. je : 

le canif, the penknife. parlé, spoken. participles. 
la montre, the watch. hier, yesterday. 

ou,! where. 4,1 to, at 

quand, when. dans, in, into. 


& la maison, at home. 


1. Les montres de notre pére et de notre mére sont 
jolies. 2. Ou étes-vous? 38. Etes-vous sur la chaise ? 
4. Etes-vous Gaston Foulquier? 5.Je ne suis pas 
Gaston Foulquier, je suis 6. Votre frére a-t-il 
perdu son canif hier ou aujourd’hui ? 7. Il a perdu son 





- eanif hier. §8..J’ai écrit une lettre 4 mon frére et &4 ma 


seur. 9. Ouest votre mouchoir? 10. Il est dans ma 
poche. 11. Quand ai-je vu votre grammaire ? 12. Vous 
avez Vu ma grammaire aujourd’hui. 13. Ou avez-vous 
mis mes livres? 14. J’ai mis vos livres sur votre bs 
ou sur une de vos chaises. 15. Mes crayons sont dans 
le tiroir. 

1. My brother has lost his pencil and penknife. 
2. They are not on his table. 3, They are in his pocket. 
4, She has lost her pretty little watch. 5. They have 
often spoken to my friend and his brother. 6. She has 
lost her brother’s pencils and pens. 7. Where did she 
find her handkerchief? 8. Who took (has taken) my ~ 
ink? 9. Who put my books on the table? 10. Did 
they speak of my brother and sister? 11. Have you 
your penknife to-day ? 12. Whereisit? 13. Is n’t it 


1 Notice the accent which distinguishes &, to, at, from a, has, and also 


ou, where, from ou, or. The accent does not affect the pronunciation. 


Numeral Adjectives 33 


in your pocket ? G4 Jare your father and mother here ? 
15. Where arethey ? 16, Did you write a letter to-day 
or yesterday ? 17. Have you one, two, three, or four 
pencils? 18. Are they in your drawer? 


' 
‘ 


¥ 11 

+ cing, five. _huit, eight, 
six, six. neuf, nine. 

sept, seven. dix, ten, 


~ The nsonant of each of the above numerals is silent before a 
ai n r h aspirate of a word which they multiply; in all other 
Be P y ply 
e final consonant is sounded. The p of sept is always silent. 


™ 
onze, eleven. douze, twelve. 
»* New . 
Ee ; Vécole (f.), the school. l’éléve (m. or f.), the pupil. 


V’école, at school. une salle, a room (a large room). 
), the church. _ une salle de classe, a class-room, 
t church, assis (m.), assise (f.), seated. 

the class. debout (adv.), standing. 


Il y a, there is, there are. 

Y a-t-il ? is there? are there? 

4 1. Son ami a trois crayons et huit plumes sur sa table. 
2. Il y a dix éléves dans la classe de mon frére. 3. Je 
ne suis pas debout, je suis assis. 4. Louise est aussi. 
assise. 95. Il y a neuf salles de classe dans cette école. 
6. Nous sommes 4 l’école; notre pére et notre mére sont 
&lamaison. 7. Il yasur ma table un canif, une plume, 
deux crayons, six cahiers, et neuf grammaires. §8.Je 
suis assis. 9. Mes élé ne sont pas debout, ils 
sont assis. 10. Y at-il"tix éléves dans cette classe ? 
11, Avez-vous écrit sept_ou huit lettres? 12. Etes-vous 
a Véglise ou & Vécole ? 


1. The pupils ‘are in the class-room. 2. The pupils 
of my class are very tall. 3. His pupils are short. 
8 





mee aon 


ee” 


34 Ordinal Numbers 


4, There are ten books on my table. 5. The pupils 
are not seated. 6. They are standing. 7. She is 
seated. 8. They (f.) are seated. » Sion is the 
class? 10. Where are you? 11. Are“yeu at home or 
at school? 12. Who is standing? 13. Are you my 
pupils? 14.AmTIapupil? 15. WhoamI? 
there six, eight, or ten books on the table ? 

father at school? 18. Where is he? 19. A 
mother, where aS to-day? 20. Is she at church? 





‘eo 


y 12 
Y 
yer premier (m.), sixiéme, sixth. 
et ; Sirst. : 
_ premiére (f.), septiéme, seventh, 
. deuxiéme, huitiéme, eighth. 
_-Y second, second. — nenvieme, ninth. 
S\ J _ troisiéme, third. dixiéme, tenth. 
oy quatriéme, fourth. onziéme, eleventh. 
cinquiéme, /i/th. douziéme, twelfth. 


With the exception of premier (/irst) and second (second), an 
ordinal number is formed by adding -iéme to the cardinal number. In 
adding -iéme to form the ordinal, drop final -e of the cardinal, insert 
u after q, and change f to v: quatre, quatriéme; cing, cinquiéme; 
neuf, neuviéme. 

Before huit or huitiéme, onze, or onziéme, |’ is never used for le or 
la, and final consonants are never linked’ la huitiéme legon; la onzi- 
éme porte; les onze livres. 


la legon, the lesson. un théme, | 
la phrase, the sentence. un exercice, J 
un mot, a word. un cahier, a note-book. 


préparé, prepared (past part.). 


an exercise, 


1. Avez-vous écrit le onziéme théme hier? 2. Nous 
avons écrit le onziéme théme hier et le douziéme aujour- 


: @hui. 3. La onziéme lecon est trés facile. 4. Y a-t-il 


. J 
z 


~ 


~s 


dix salles de classe dans son école? 5. Mes éléves ont 
écrit leurs phrases dans leurs cahiers. 6. Il y a neuf 


Contraction of the Definite Article’ 85 


; 

“mots dans la cinquiéme phrase. 7. Y a-t-il onze ou 

douze éléves dans votre classe? 8. Huit éléves sont oO 
assis, et trois sont debout. 9. Il a écrit dix lettres 4 sa 
mére et six & son pére. 10. J’ai mis mes onze livres 
sur votre table. 11. Qu’avez-vous écrit aujourd’hui ? 
12. Il a vendu sept montres Asesamis. 13.11 yadouze 
phrases dans la onziéme lecon. 


» 1. The eleventh lesson is an easy one. 2. The les- 
sons are not often difficult. ? 3. No, they are always 
very easy. 4. There are five letters in the word éléve, 
5. There are twelve pupils in his class. 6. Have you 
written the eleventh exercise? 7. Have you written the 
twelfth to-day? 8. Have you prepared your lesson? 
9. Who has written the sentences in his note-book ? 
10. Who wrote your exercises? 11. Who has written / 
the first sentence? 12. Who is standing? 13. Have © 
the pupils closed their grammars? 14. Have they pre- 
pared their lesson ? 


WO as 


Contraction of the preposition & and the definite 
article; 
a & and le contract into au. 
4 ~ & and la do not contract, & la. 
a and!’ do not contract, a I’. 
a and les contract into aux. 


au garcon, to the boy. & V’amie (f.) to the friend. — 
& loncle, to the uncle. & la tante, to the aunt. 
aux médecins, to the doctors. 





fau before a masculine noun beginning with a consonant or 
aspirate h, 
ala before a feminine noun beginning with a consonant or 
1To the= aspirate h. 
& 1’ before a masculine or feminine noun beginning with a 
vowel or mute h. 
ux before a plural noun. 





¥ 


¥%to the: brothers. 


36 Contraction of the Definite Article 


le garcon, the boy. le médecin, the doctor. 


Yonele, the uncle. la famille, the family. 
la tante, the aunt. prété, lent. Pp 

: ; ast 
le cousin, the cousin (m.). _—lu, read. 


la cousine, the cousin (f.). | vendu, sold. Participles. 


le neveu, the nephew. Jean, John. 

la niéce, the niece. Jeanne, Jane. 
le voisin, the neighbor (m.). Louis, Louis. 
la voisine, the neighbor (f.). Louise, Louise. 


treize, thirteen. treiziéme, thirteenth. 


1. Le neveu, eu neveu. 2. La niéce, & la niéce. 
3. Les garcons, aux garcons. 4. L’oncle, les oncles, & 
Vonele, aux oncles. 5. Aux médecins, aux amis, aux 
amies. 6. Il a prété ses livres au frére de mon voisin. 
7. Mon ami a vendu une jolie maison & l’oncle de sa 
femme. 8. Avez-vous parlé au neveu et a la niéce de 
votre amie? 9.J’ai parlé 4 son fils et 4 sa fille. 
10. Elle a donné un livre au médecin. 11. Qu’avez-vous 
prété & lami de mon cousin? 12.11 a vendu ses 
maisons aux médecins. 13. Nous avons donné nos livres 
et nos plumes aux enfants. 14. Le fils de mon oncle est 
mon cousin, et sa fille est ma cousine. 


For Oral Drill. 1. The boy, the friend (m.), th 


friend (f.), the family, the neighbors. 2. To the boy, ~, 
to the friend (m.), to the friend (f.), to the family, to») 
the neighbors. 3. The man, to the man, the men, to the 
men. 4, The woman, to the woman, the women, to the » 
women. 65. The brother, to the brother, the brothers, ~ 
6. The father, the child, to the father, ~ 


to the child. 


1, John and Louis are my neighbor's children. 2. He 
has written a letter to his son’s friend. 3. She has 
written to her friend’s son. 4. They have spoken to the 





Contraction of the Definite Article 37 


doctor. 5. She gave the boy her pens and pencils (her — 


pens and pencils to the boy). 6. He has often spoken to 
his pupil’s uncle and aunt. 7. Have we the twelfth or 
thirteenth lesson to-day? 8. Did your cousin sell his 
house to his wife’s father or brother? 9. Did you give 
or lend your books to my neighbor’s children? 10. Have 
I seen your father and mother? 11. Is Jane Louise’s 
sister or her cousin? 12.Is your neighbor’s family 
alarge one? 13. Has he four or five children? 14. Have 
we written twelve or thirteen sentences ? 


Contraction of the preposition de and the definite 
article 1: 







e and le contract into der 

de and la do not contract, de la. 

de and |’ do not contract, de I’. 

and les contract into d 

du frére, of or from the brother. de Y’ami, ‘a 
de la sur, of or from the sister. de Vasa, of ox from the friend. 


des éléves, of or from the pupils. 
. 





le chapeau, the hat. joué, played, 
Vhabit (m.), the coat. regu, received, 
la robe, the dress. porté, carried, worn. | Past 
une bague, a ring. apporté, brought. Participles. . 
un cadeau, a yifl, a present. 6té, taken off. 
quatorze, fourteen, montré, shown. 7 
avec, with, 


fdu before a masculine noun beginning with a consonant. or 


de la before a feminine noun beginning with a consonant or 

1 Of the=; aspirate h. 

del’ before a masculine or feminine noun beginning with a 
vowel or mute h, 

\des before a plural noun 





aspirate h. —e. 







Ye 
y, 
‘ Z 
VA ) 
f 


38 — Contraction of the Definite Article 


1. A-t-il parlé au frére ou au fils du médecin? 2, Le 
fils et la fille de notre voisin ont recu une lettre de 
leur oncle. . 3. Jean a requ un cadeau de son: oncle. 
4, Jean a regu un chapeau, et Louise a recu une bague. 
5. Un de mes éléves a écrit quatorze phrases; il n’a pas 


pauvre femme. 7. Mon voisin a apporté treize ou qua- 


: »\pen avec ses amis. 6. J’ai donné un habit au fils de la 


4 
a . 
. 
—— 


ont 
Q 


rze livres aux enfants. 8. Qui a pris les livres des 
enfants? 9. A-t-elle écrit aux filles du médecin? 
10. As-tu vu le chapeau du gargon? 11. Avez-vous la 
montre de la jeune fille? 12. Les cahiers des éléves 
sont sur la table. 13. Nos amis ne sont pas a l’église 


aujourd’hui ; je &lamaigon. £ ) 
(ro 2 CANES Louth) 
-Por Oral Drill. hephew, the man, the aunt, 


. . the boys. 2. Of the nephew, of the man, of the aunt, 


) 


Bs 


cy 
~ 


r 


S 


/ 


of the boys. 3. The friend (m.), the friend (f.), of the 
friend (m.), of the friend (f.), the friends (m.), of the 


_——— 


friends (f.). 4.The boy, of the boy, to the boy, of 


the boys, to the boys. 5. The father, from the father, 


to the father. 6. The child, from the child, to the 
child. 7. The chil (As tome th cae to the 


chuldren Wr Lt J v st WW 


1. We have i a a letter from the” GSO? s son. 
2. He has shown his exercises to his brother’s friend. 
8. The doctor has given his daughter a ring. 4. The 


man’s children have received a gift from the neighbors. 


5. Our neighbor is agood woman. 6. Is the boy’s hat on 
the table? 7. Did your father sell his house to the doc- 
tor or to the doctor’s neighbor? 8. Isn’t the boy’s 
grammar easy? 9. Have you written the first sentence 
of the fourteenth lesson? 10. Has he brought a letter 
from his friend’s father or from his father’s friend? 


aie 






Possessive Pronouns 39 
S. 


11. Are the child’s father and mother rich or poor? 
12. Hag Jphn spoken to the woman’s nephew or son? 


-13. ln age il hat in the house ? W. Did he 
oa his hat o 5. Have my pupils yep. hy 


son o¥ have = played with their friends? 








~~Poasessive Pronouns, 


SINGULAR Pr , cPrtel: a7 LA % 


a MASCULINE. FEMININE. MASCULINE. FEMININE. 


iv le mien, la mienne, les miens, les miennes, mine. 
le tien, la tienne, les tiens, _les tiennes, thine, yours. 
“a le sien, la sienne, lessiens, _les siennes, his, hers, its. 
le nétre, la notre, les nétres, ours. 
le votre, «, la votre, les votres, yours. 
— Je leur, la leur, les leurs, theirs. 





(1) Possessive pronouns, in French 






. Note carefullythe circumflex Accent that distinguishes 


Votre crayon est bon, mais } sie&\est mauvais, the pronoun le sien 
is masculine singular, be the noun which it represents, 
is masculine singular. 
yours? Yoici ma mont 
feminine singular, be 







- ou est la vétre 


b J 
se the noun montre is 






aap: 


\a friend of mine, de mes amis, une de m 
} mn. - a book of oH! Be 















40 Possessive Pronouns 


la boite, the bor. la craie, the chalk. un encrier, an inkwell. 
un porte-plume, a penholder. la régle, the rule, the ruler. 
voici, here is, here are. voila, there is, there are. quinze, fifteen. 





Il y a, makes a statement: Il y a un 
livre sur ma ta on my table; Ilya dix éléves dans 
cette salle, there are ten in this room. Voila points out an object 
and answers the qu where are? There is my book, 


1. Voici mon livre; ot est le votre? 2. Voici le 
mien, voila le vétre. 3. Ou est la boite? 4. Voila 
‘la boite. 5, Ou est la craie? 6. Voila la craie dans 
la boite. 7. Oi est la bague? 8. Voila la bague sur la 
table. 9. Voici mon porte-plume; je n’ai pas trouvé le 

dtre. 10. Voici le porte-plume; ot est la plume? 
11. Il y a quatorze éléves dans ma classe. 12. Y a-t-il 
aussi quatorze éléves dans la voétre? 13. Ou est la 
classe? 14. Voici la classe. 15. Ou est votre exer- 
cice? 16. Voici le mien, voila le sie 7. Voila un 
de vos themes. al tinea onde 


wr 


1. There are my Ne, pens, paper, i A 2. fre 
is a book of yours. 3. Here is the box; io Whe 4 
chalk? 4. It is Fat the table. 45. There is Ns 
holder. 6. r ohn, has ld jh atch, and Jane se 
lost ‘netsO¥” Maier. a mane and Windows in 
this (cette) room. 8. Tye the doors: 9. Tiere are 


the windows. 10. ese is my pen; where is yours? 


| AL, here is his ? 12, Here are eg pencils; where 
nav “are ?.13. Where ‘re theirs?”* 14, (on he mine 


or his [own]? 15. Is, the ink-well on the . chair ? 


16. Where is it? 17. Haig you séen a dé ‘ob-initie >” 


18. There is my kwids iwpere Js where We RY ‘6 9. Are your 
od, too % 


pens good? 20, Are mine “go . We have 
written our exercises; have you written yours too? 
22. Where is the ink? 23. Where is your friend? 







son of Adjectives 4] 


16 


arger, smaller, higher, etc., are translated by more 
ye, more small, more '€ etc.: plus grand, plus petit, 












haut. i 
Ma scour est plus grande que mon frére. 
My sister is ta han my brother. 


By exception, better ig expressed by meilleur. 


plus, more. dix-néuf, nineteen. 

moins, /ess. vingt Venty. 

que, than. un avocat, a lawyer. 

seize, sixteen. un arbre, a tree. 

lix-sept, seventeen. une fleur, a flower. - 


fix-huit, eighteen.  aane feuille, a leaf (of a tree or of a book), 


Note the elision of e in que (than) before a vowel: qu’un. 


Mon frére est plus petit que votre scour. 2. Est-il 

lus ou moins jeune qu’elle? 3. Leurs arbres sont plus 
hauts que ma maison. La fille de Vavocat est plus 
jolie que la vodtre. 5. Les fleurs de Jeanne sont 
plus jolies que les vétres. 6) Votre plume est meilleure 
ue la mienne, mais mon crayon est meilleur que le votre. 
J’ai mis vos lettres et les siennes sur votre table. 
. Il n’a pas trouvé les siennes. QLa chambre de mon 
rére est plus grande que lg_mienne, mais la mienne est 
lus jolie que la sienne. a-t-jl dix-neuf ou vingt 
ots dans la neuviéme phrase ? es phrases de la 
quinziéme legon somt-elles faciles ot difficiles? 12. Nos 
églises sont plus hautes que les vdtres. (48) Un avocat 
est moins utile qu’un médecin. 


1. We have seen the doctor’s house. 2. It is taller 
than histrees. 3. Your neighbor’s trees are higher than 
his house. 4. Your friend’s nieces are prettier than 

his daughters. 5. Your pens are smaller than mine. 


49 Relative Pronoun 


6. They are better too. 7. She has lost a leaf of her 
note-book. 8. Where is your brother? 9. Is he taller 
than I (moi)? 10. Is he not taller than you? 11. Is 
he younger? 12, Have you your watch or his? 
13. Where is mine? 14. Where is yours? 15. Is 
yours larger or smaller than mine? 16. Is the six- 
teenth lesson more or less difficult than the fifteenth ? 
17. Is a doctor more or .less useful than a lawyer? 
18. Are the leaves of your trees very large? 19. Are 
your friends richer than we? 20. Are they more agree- 
able? 21. Are his pencils better than yours? 22. Are 
the flowers more or less useful than the trees ? 


17 
(1) The nominative case of the relative pronoun 
(who, which, that) is qui, the objective case is que. 


L’homme qui est ici, the man who is here. 
L’homme que vous avez vu, the man whom you saw. 


(2) The relative is never omitted in French. 
Le parapluie qu'il a perdu, the umbrella he lost. 


Note elision of e in que before a vowel. The i of qui is never 
dropped. 
le jardin, the garden. le parapluie, the umbrella. 


un bane, a bench. laissé, /e/t. 
le pupitre, the desk. emprunté, borrowed. P ai ; 
la canne, the cane. rendu, given back, returned. Participles. 


si, so (before an adjective or adverb). 


1. Nous avons vu une maison qui est trés haute; elle 
est plus haute que la nétre. 2. Le livre que vous avez 
acheté est plus utile que le mien. 3. J’ai trouvé une 
plume qui est trés mauvaise. 4. Mon pére a acheté le 


1 Which or that next the verb is qui; separated from it, que. 


Demonstrative Adjectives — 43 


jardin que vous avez vu. 5. Le livre qu’il a perdu est 
| le mien. 6, Ou a-t-elle laissé le livre qu’elle a rendu? 
7. Il aemprunté ma canne. 8. Voila un joli petit para- 
\ _ pluie que j’ai acheté pour vous. 9. Les arbres qui sont 
dans son jardin sont plus hauts que ceux (those) qui 
sont dans le mien. 10. Il y a six banes dans le jardin 
de Yavocat. 11. J’ai deux bons amis; ils sont si aima- 
bles! 12, Les garcons qui sont ici aujourd’hui sont mes 
cousins. 13. Sa femme a laissé son parapluie a l’église. 


1. We have seen the benches which the man has put 
into our garden. 2. We have found one sentence that 
is difficult. 3. They are often very easy. 4. There is 
the young man who gave a cane to my brother. 65. The 
books which he has put on the desk are mine. 6.1 
have lost my umbrella; have you lost yours? 7. Have 
you brought yours to school to-day? 8. Is it a better 
one than mine? 9. Where is the pencil you borrowed? 
10. Did you leave yours at home? 11.Isn’t an um- 
brella more useful than a cane? 12. Is the boy I saw 
yesterday with you younger than you? 3. His sister 

t, so tall; is she younger? 14,1 e€ exercise 
Oke on have written easy or difficult? 15, Is*a pe 

more useful than a pencil? 16, Who has t the 
note-book she left on my table? 


ah engrone a eel 


op KO 1g 


ealfferative Adjectives, 


ce, cet (m.), Be 


ia h 
A \eww weotte (£), or that. 
Vo AN ces (m. and f. pl.), these, those. 





et OE meee a 







form eet is used instead of ce before a masculine 
adjective beginning with a vowel or 4 mute: 


uae uni 


44 Demonstrative Adjectives 


eet ami, this friend; cet homme, that man; ce jeune 
homme, ‘his or that young man. e 
~ Demonstrative adjectives, in French, must be repeated . 
before each noun which they modify. 


Oi avez-vous vu cet homme et cette femme? 
Where did you see that man and woman? 


le chien, the dog. le chat, the cat. 


1. Quand avez-vous acheté cette table? 2. Ce livre 
est petit; il est plus petit que les livres qu’elle a mis 
sur mon pupitre. ( 3. Cette eau est bonne, cette encre est 
mauvaise. 4. Ayezvous ouvert ces fen@tres? 5. J’ai 
donné un cadeau_a ce joli petit enfant. 6. Cet enfant 
est le leur. (7. Jean a acheté ces chaises. 8. Qui a 
trouvé ce chien? 9. Qui a apporté cette encre? 
10. La fille de cet homme est notre amie. 11. Voici 
ton chat, mon enfant. 12 Ce chat n’est-il pas joli? 
13. Qui a acheté cette maison? 14. Ces hommes sont 
nos amis. 15. Cet exercice est trés facile. 6. Cet 
arbre est plus haut que le ndtre. 


1. These books are yours. 2. We have seen this 
child’s father and mother. 3. Her father has bought 
that large house. age flowers are prettier than 
yours. 5. The children found that dog and cat yester- — 
day. 6.Is this water good? 7. Isn’t this tree a tall 
one ? (8. Are n’t the leaves of those trees pretty ? 
9. This pen is mine; where is his? 10. These pencils 
are yours; where are mine? 11. Did he receive this 
letter from the doctor or the lawyer? 12. Who opened 
' these doorsand windows? 18, Is that man rich.or poor? 

14, Is that chalk good? 15. Is it better’ than mi 

(i Is this exercise easy or difficult? {- — 







Demonstrative Pronouns 45 


19 
Demonstrative Pronouns, 
SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
celui (m.) \ this (one), that (one), ceux (m.) ) these, 
celle (f.) Vike one. celles (f.) eae 


Notice that celui, celle, ceux, celles, instead of being 
placed before nouns, are pronouns and take the place 
of nouns. 

Mon livre et celui de mon frére, my book and my brother’s, 


Ces plumes sont meilleures que celles de mon ami. 
These pens are better than my friend’s. 


une pomme, an apple. apportez-moi, bring me. 
une poire, a pear. apportez-nous, bring us. 
une orange, an orange. montrez-moi, show me. 
donnez-moi, give me. montrez-nous, show us, 
donnez-nous, give us. encore, still, yet, again. 


1. Mes pommes sont plus petites que celles de ce 
garcon. 2. Vos arbres sont moins hauts que ceux de 
notre jardin. 3. Ce crayon est meilleur que celui que 
vous avezacheté. 4. La montre de Louis est plus petite 
que la mienne, mais celle de sa sceur est encore plus 
petite. 5. Montrez-moi votre cahier et celui de votre 
frére. 6. Voici une orange et voila une poire. 7. Avez- 
vous recu ma lettre ou celle de mon ami? 8. Vos fe- 
nétres sont plus hautes que celles de mon frére, mais celles 
de notre voisin sont encore plas hautes. 9. Voila votre* 
encre et votre encrier. 10. Ce porte-plume est-il celui 
que j’ai trouvé? 11. Les scurs de Louis sont plus . 
jolies que les miennes; elles sont aussi plus jolies et 
plus aimables que celles de Jean. 12. Le cadeau qwil a 
regu est plus joli que le tien. 


46 Demonstrative Pronouns 


1. Give me my cane or my brother’s. 2. Bring us 
four good apples and two good pears. 3. Show me your 
ink-well and the one you found. 4. Bring me those 
books and the ones he put on your desk. 5. Give me 
your rings and your sister’s. 6. Here are my books; 
show me yours. 7. There are mine. 8. Where is your 
apple? 9. Thereis yours; whereismine? 10. Where 
is John’s? 11. Have you your pencil or your neigh- 
bor’s? 12. Have you seen my umbrella? 13. Did 
you leave yours athome? 14. Have you borrowed your 
father’s ? 15. Who took mine? 16. Have you given 
back the one you took? 17. Where are the trees? 
18. Are they in the garden? 19. Are these oranges 
good ones? 20. Are they better than your sister’s? 
21. Are yours still better ? 


20 


Demonstratives with -ci and -la. 


(1) To distinguish between this (pl. these) and that 
(pl. those), add to the noun or pronoun -ci for this 
(these) and -la for that (those).3 

Cette plume-ci est meilleure que celle-la. 
This pen is better than that. 

(2) The demonstrative pronouns (celui, celle, ceux, 
celles) cannot be used alone. They may be followed 
by -ci or -la, by de, or by any case of a relative pronoun. 

Voici deux parapluies; celui-ci est plus grand que celui-la. 
Here are two umbrellas ; this one is larger than that. 


Mon livre, celui de mon frére, et celui qui est sur la table. 
My book, my brother’s, and the one which is on the table. 


1 Observe that -ci (ici), here, points to the nearer object and -I&, there, 
to one more distant; hence, Celui-ci frequently means the latter, and celui- 
la, the former. 


— 


eS ee ee 
ee ' 


Demonstrative Pronouns 47 


(3) Ceci, this, and cela, that (ca colloquially) are invari- 
able and refer tg objects or ideas indicated but not named. 


Voulez-vous ceci ou cela, will you have this or that? 
Cela n’est pas vrai, mais ceci est vrai, that is not true, but this is true. 


noir, black. jaune, yellow. 
blanc (m.), hi bleu, dlue. 
blanche (f.), } ot brun, brown. 
vert, green. rouge, red. 
la couleur, the color. 
De quelle couleur est ——? 
What is the color of 





(4) Adjectives of color follow their nouns. 


un chat blanc, a white cat. 


un chapeau brun, a brown haf. 
( (i) Cette eau-ci est meilleure que celle-la. poe 
h es-l4 sont plus grands que. cetx-ci. éux-la 


sont aussi pis riches. @)Ce garcon-ci est Oi jeune 


(OF  celui-la. (6) De ser couleur est cette fleur? 


Elle est Oe 7. Ces plumes-la sont meilleures . 
que celles-ci. 8. Cette maison-la est jaune, celle-ci est 
rouge. 9. Elle a apporté une fleur et une feuille; 
celle-ci est verte, celle-la est bleue. 10. Ce parapluie 
est celui de ma scour. 11. Elle a perdu le sien. 
12. Celui-ci est le mien, celui-la est le vétre. 13. Nous 
avons trouvé deux cannes; avez-vous perdu la vétre ? 
14. Donnez-moi celle que vous avez. 


. This Window is higher than that. 2. This one is 
still higher. 3. Here is the red pen-holder you brought 
to school. 4.I have lost the oneI borrowed. 65. Those 
books are smaller than these. 6. This box is smaller 
than that one. 7. It is smaller than the one you have. 


8. Is this a good one? 9. Here are my apples; where 


\ 


\ 
48 Cidpant Numbers 


oy 

are yours? ’ 10. Are thesebetter thanthose? 11. What 
color are these? 12. Are they yellow? 13. Are mine 
green? 14,Is this desk high? 15. Is it higher than 
that? 16. Where is the chalk? 17. Is it in the box? 
18. Is that pupil seated? 19. Is this one standing? 
20. Here is a white handkerchief; have you lost 
yours? 21, What is the color of his coat? 22. Is it 
black or blue ? 


21 
Numeral Adjectives. 


CARDINAL NUMBERS 


0, zéro. 15, quinze. 61, soixante et un. 

1, un, une, 16, seize. 70, soixante-dix. 

2, deux. 17, dix-sept. 71, soixante et onze. 
8, trois. 18, dix-huit. 72, soixante-douze. 
4, quatre, 19, dix-neut. 80, quatre-vingts. 

5, cing. 20, vingt. 81, quatre-vingt-un. 
6, six. 21, vingt et un. 90, quatre-vingt-dix. 
7, sept. 22, vingt-deux. 91, quatre-vingt-onze. 
8, huit. 30, trente. 92, quatre-vingt-douze, 
9, neuf. 31, trente et un. 100, cent. 
10, dix. 40, quarante. 101, cent un. 
11, onze, 41, quarante et un. 200, deux cents. 
12, douze. 50, cinquante. 230, deux cent trente. 
13, treize. 51, cinquante et un. 1000, mille. 
14, quatorze. 60, soixante. 4000, quatre mille. 


5796, cing mille sept cent quatre-vingt-seize. 
1,000,000, un million. 
1,000,000,000, un milliard. 

(1) Un always becomes une before a feminine noun: vingt et une 
maisons. 

(2) Et must be used/in 21, 31, 41, 51, 61, and may be used in 71, 
but never in 81 or 91. 

(3) Except where et is used, hyphens connect the different parts 
of any French number under 100, either when that number is alore 
(trente-sept) or when it is part of a large number (deux cent trente- 
sept). 





~ 


Cardinal Numbers | 49 


(4) Neither a nor one is expressed before cent or mille. 

(5) The t of vingt is pronounced only in the numbers 21 to 29 
inclusive. The t of cent is silent in 101, 102, etc. 

(6) Quatre-vingt and the multiples of cent add s, except when 
followed by another numeral or used in a date or as an ordinal: trois 
cent quatre-vingts; quatre cents; sept cent quatre-vingt-dix-sept ; 
page quatre-vingt. |. 

(7) Mille does not add s: quatre mille, four thousand. It becomes 
mil in dates: l’an mil huit cent douze (or dix-huit cent douze) the year 
1812. 

(8) Un million and un miliiard are followed by de before a noun, 


un an, a year. une heure, an hour. 

un mois, a month, une minute, a minute. 

une semaine, a week, une seconde, a second. 

un jour, a day. font, make (3d pl. pres. indic.). 


1. Tl y a 35 mille hommes dans cette ville. 2. J’ai 
recu 21 lettres cette semaine. 3. Il ya15 arbres dans 
le jardin du pére de ce garcon. 4, Cet homme a sept 
enfants: deux fils et cinq filles. 5. Voila les quatre 
livres que vous avez mis sur ma table. 6. Sept jours 
font une semaine. 7. Douze mois font un an. 8. Soi- 
xante secondes font une minute. 9, L’an dix-sept cent 
quatre-vingt-neuf. 10. Il y a 200 oranges dans cette 
boite. 11.11 yacent pommes dans celle-ci. 12. Ilya 
540 éléves dans son école. 13. L’heure a soixante 
minutes ou trois mille six cents secondes. 


1.21, 34, 47. 2. 31, 45, 58. 3.41, 56, 62. 4, 51, 

ei. 5. 61, 76; 81. 6. 89, .98, 103... 7.101, 178, 
196. 8.555, 777,999. 9. 800, 801, 9000. 10. 20 and 
20 make 40. 11.91 and 11 make 102. 12.94 minus 
(less) 18 make 76. 13. 60—35=25. 14. The year 
1892. 15. 60 seconds make a minute. 164 60 minutes 
make an hour. 17. 24 hours make a day. )18. 7 days 
make a week. 19. 52 weeks or 365 da 


20. The year has twelve months. 
4 


ake a year. 


a 


ee. 


# 
fet 


SS 


a 


50 Cardinal Numbers 


22 


un centime, a centime. une fois, once. 
un sou, a sou, 5 centimes (about onecent). deux fois, twice. 
un franc, a franc, 20 sous, 100 centimes. _ six fois, six times. 


une piéce, a piece, combien, how many, how 
much ? 
une piéce de cinquante centimes, combien font 3 fois dix? 
Jifty centimes (a 10-cent piece). how many are 8 times 10? 
une piéce de cing francs, 3 fois dix font 30, three 
a five-franc piece. times ten are thirty. 


comptez, count (imperative). 
jusqu’a, as far as. 
Comptez jusqu’aéa dix, count to ten. 


/ Comptez de dix & vingt, count from ten to twenty. 
i 


Combien takes de before a noun. 


/eombien de livres, how many books? combien de fois, how many times ? 


1. Comptez jusqu’a douze. 2. Combien de fois a-t-il 
| parlé & l’ami de son frére? 8, Combien font treize et 


‘neuf? 4, Combien font treize moins neuf? 5. Com- 


bien font treize fois neuf? 6.Il y a cent sous dans 
une piéce de cing francs. 7.7 X12=84. 8. Voici 


une piéce de vingt francs. 9.10 et 15 font 26. 


10. Six fois huit font quarante-huit. 11.12 x 12=144, 
12. Combien de crayons avez-vous? 13. J’ai deux cra- 
yons, trois plumes, et un porte-plume, 14.4; 64; 264; 
3,264; 13,264; 513,264. 


1. How many are six and five? 2. How many are 
eight times twelve? 3. Two times one are two, two 
times two are four, etc., to two times twelve. 4.6X1= 
6,6 X 2=12, ete, to 6 X12. 5. How many times have 
you read this book? 6. Count from 15 to 25. 7. Give 
us those 5-frane pieces. 8. One hundred centimes make 
afranc. 9. Twenty sous makea franc. 10. How many 





Ordinal Numbers 51 


centimes make asou? 11. There are five hundred cen- 
times in a five-franc piece. 12. How many trees are 
there in the garden you have seen to-day? 15. Show 
mea twenty-franc piece. 14. Here is a ten-franc piece; 
I have left my twenty-franc piece at home. 


23 
Ordinal ‘Numbers. 


(1) Ordinals agree in gender and number with the 
nouns which they modify: les premiéres phrases. 
For the formation of ordinal numbers, review Les- 


son 12. 
OrDINAL NUMBERS AND FRACTIONS 


premier (m.). 9th, neuviéme. 
Ast,{ rremiare (f.). 10th, dixiéme. 
deuxiéme. 1lth, onziéme, 
2nd, second. 12th, douziéme. 
Srd, troisiéme. 20th, vingtiéme. 
4th, quatriéme. 21st, vingt et uniéme. 
5th, cinquiéme. 22nd, vingt-deuxiéme. 
6th, sixiéme. 99th, quatre-vingt-dix-neuviéme. 
7th, septiéme. 100th, centiéme. 
8th, huitiéme. 1000th, milliéme. 


Abbreviations: premier, 1°; premiére, 1°; deuxiéme, 2°; troi. 
siéme, 3° ; etc. 


dernier (m.), last un tiers, one-third. 

derniére (f), } ; un huitiéme, one-eighth. 

la partie, the part. trois quarts, three-fourths. 

la moitié (noun), hal cing centiémes, jive-hundredths. 

un demi (adj.) \ sehr un quart d’heure, a quarter of an hour. 
deux demis, two halves. mangé, eaten. past 

un quart, one-fourth. offert, offered.) participles. 


(2) With the exception of half, third, and quarter, fractions are 
expressed as in English, the numerator by a cardinal and the denomr- 
nator by an ordinal: neuf dixiémes, ;5. | 


1 Strictly speaking, second is the second of only two. 


52 Ordinal Numbers and Fractions 


(3) Demi before a noun is invariable and is connected with the 
noun by a hyphen: une demi-heure, a half-hour; after a feminine noun 
to which it relates, it has the form demie: une heure et demie, an hour 
and a half. 

1. Il y a 95 éleves dans la premiére classe, 180 dans 
la deuxiéme, 245 dans la troisiéme, et 300 dans la qua- 
triéme. 2. Le méchant petit garcon a mangé la moitié 
de ma pomme. 3. Les éléves ont écrit les premiéres 
phrases de leurs exercices, mais pas lesderniéres. 4. Je 
suis le premier de ma classe, Louise est la troisiéme 
de la sienne, mais Jean est le dernier de la sienne. 
5. Jeanne est la onziéme. 6. Elle a perdu vingt et 
une lettres. . 7. Donnez-nous la moitié de votre poire. 
8. Vous avez pris la moitié de la mienne. 9. Elle a 
offert une partie de la sienne 4 son amie. 


1.5,5th. 2.9,the9th. 3.11,the 11th. 4. 31,31st. 
5. 80, 80th. 6. 81, 81st. 7. 200,200th. 8. 4,3,%. 9.4, 
$y, 43. 10. Are youthe first in (de)theclass? 11. Who 
is the first? 12. Are you the second? 13.Is your 
sister the first in her class? 14. Is she the last? 
15. Are you often the last in this clas’? 16. Who has 
eaten half of my orange? 17. Did he eat one apple or 
an apple and a half? 18. Is the first part of this ex- 
ercise easy or difficult? 19. Did you talk with my 
brother? 20. We talked a quarterofanhour. 21. To 
whom (@ gui) did you offer your book ? 


24 


(1) In dates and in titles of sovereigns, cardinal 
numbers are used, except for the jirst. 


le premier avril, April 1st. 
le onze juin, June 11th. 
Francois premier, Francis the First. 


T, 


capital letters. 


iéme jour de la semaine. 
ier. 
. Avez-vous visité votre tante mardi ou mercredi? 
. Montrezmoi ces quinze lettres. 
ce livre & sa scour vendredi, 
partie de trente. 


ig 
[of] July, 1789. 


ames of Days and Months 53 


dimanche, Sunday, . yp © 
lundi, Monday, “* 


mardi, 7'uesday. - Pad 


mercredi, Wednesday. , (” 
jeudi, Thursday. (/) 
vendredi, Friday. 

samedi, Saturday. 

le matin, the morning. 
Napoléon, Napoleon. 
Henri, Henry. 

visité, visited (past part.). 


nommez, name (imperative). 
The names of the days and months are all masculine. 


5. Nommez les mois. 


' (2) The English words on used before days and 
dates, and the in titles are not translated into French. 
(3) Names of days and months do W pelle i, 9 with 


bps Mog? Cot 


~géicior, January. 


mg - février, February. 


mars, March. 
avril, April. 
mai, May. | 
juin, June. Ny 
juillet, July. | ~ 
aot, August. 
septembre, September. 
octobre, October. 
novembre, November. 
décembre, December. 


(4) In expressions like last week, last month, last Tuesday, dernier 
follows the noun: la semaine derniére, le mois dernier, mardi dernier. 
G4. Charles I*, Henri deux. 2. Le trois octobre, 1781. 
3. Lundi, le 51 mars, 1843. 4. Dimanche, le 8 aoiit, 
6. Le samedi est le sept- 


7. Le dimanche est le pre- 


8. Un jour est la septiéme partie d’une semaine. 


11. Elle a offert 


12. Six est la cinquiéme 
13. Il a visité sa mére jeudi dernier. 
14. Elle a trouvé cette montre et cette bague samedi. 


Napoleon I; Henry LY; Louis XIV. 
3. September 22, 1792. 


2. The 14th 
4, February 


94th, 1848. 5. Friday, Aug. 11, 1900. 6. My father 
1 The final consonants of cinq, six, etc., are pronounced in dates. (See 
Lesson 11.) 


VO pc cA 


\ 


Bs 


4, 
\ 


” 


Mle 


04  — Past Participles with Htre ¢ 


bought this ouse of the 31st .ef December, 1896. 
7. When did you sell yours? 8. I sold mine of the 
12th. 9. Name the, days. 10. Name the months also. 
11. How _m y ‘days “are there in’d “Week? 12. How — 
mary days make.a month? 13. I saw your brother last 
Thursday. 14. Where did you see the pretty little red 
handkerchief I lost. on Wednesday last? 15. My sister ~ 
saw her friends, Jane and Louise, at church, on Sunday, 
the 16th. 16. We saw your friends last week. 


25 
Past Participles with Etre. 


(1) The past participle coming after any form of the 
verb étre (to be) agrees in gender and number with the 
subject. (For exception, see Lesson 67.) 

(2) The following are the past participles that are 
always used with étre instead of avoir. 


allé, gone. arrivé, arrived. 
parti, gone away, set out, left. entré (dans), entered, gone into. 
sorti, gone out, come out. resté, remained, stayed. 

, Venu, come. tombé, fallen. 

Re devenu, become. né, born. 


~_. revetiu, returned, come back. mort, died (adj. dead), 
retourné, returned, gone back. décédé, died (rarely used). 


il y a (before a period of time), ago. * 
il y a huit jours (une semaine), a week ago. 
pas encore, not yet. le soir, the evening. 
ensemble, together. hier soir, last evening. 
Londres, London. 

1, Mes frares sont sortis. { 2, Leurs sceurs sont parties 
hier soir. “3. Son pére et sa~mére sont morts. 4. La 
petite fille est tombée. 5.) Quand est-elle née? 6, Elle 
est née en 1899. 7. Vos amis sont-ils restés 4 la maison ? 


Past Participles with Etre 55 


8, Les enfants ne sont-ils pas venus? 9. Ils ne sont 


pas encore arrivés.' 10; Mes éléves sont devenus. trés 
grands. 11. Elles sont revenues ensemble. (12.)0u 
sont-elles allées? (13. Elles sont allées a Paris. 
4. Nous sommes entrés dans la maison. 15. Nous 
avons acheté ces deux maisons blanches. 16. Je suis 
né en 1869, et mon amie en 1868, 17. Napoléon est 


mort le 5 mdi, 1821. 


Hereafter there will be found in many of the Lessons two exer- 
cises for transiation from English into French, marked respectively 
A and B, the latter consisting entirely of questions. For use of 
these questions, see Preface. m8 


(A) t ‘The letters arrived an hourago. 2. Here is the 
pencil that I bought. 3. Your friends went away Friday 
morning, and ours Saturday evening. 4. His father and 


5. This family has become rich. 6. John’s pen is lost. 
7. He has\ lost his pen-holder>too, 8. This man’s 
daughters have grown (become) very tall and have also 
grown to be (become) very pretty and agreeable. 9. I 
received a pretty little present last evening. 10. Two 
men fell dead that morning.) 11. The leaves of these 
trees have become yellOW. 12. Our neighbors left a 
week ago. 13. Two of our large trees have fallen. 
14. His letters are not written yet. 


(B) 1. Who has come? 2. Did your sister go to 
school to-day? 3. Did you see the boys who came in? 
4, Haven’t the pupils come into the class-room yet? 
5. Did you come to school yesterday or did you stay at 
home? 6. Didshecome last Friday,the11th? 7. Have 


\ 


yh 


) 


mother went to Paris June 1st and returned on the 21st. 


Mi 


7T 


your friends gone to London? 8. Where did they go? , 


1 Note the position of pas encore, 


etd 





- 








( 5) Personal Pronouns with Prepositions 


9. When did they leave? 10. Did they set out to- 
gether? 11. Have you seen the house and gardens? 
Not yet. 12.Is his uncle dead? 18. Is his aunt dead 
also? 14. Where and when did she die? 185. Did 
they (f-) go into the house? 16. Is he out (gone out) ? 
17. When were you born? 18. Were you born in 


REN ¥ w= os 


x following are the forms of the personal pronouns 
used with prepositions : 


moi, me. nous, us 

toi, thee, you. vous, you. 

lui, him. eux, them (m.). 

elle, her. elles, them (f.). 
aprés, after (time). sous, under. 


derriére, behind (place). _ prés de, near. 
avant, before (time). malgré, in spite of. 
devant, before (place). sans, without. 

entre, between. chez, at the house of. 


Chez means also to the house of, in the house of, at the office or place: 


of business of. 
De is not used after chez or malgré, but is used with prés. 
aii yy chez le médecin, at the doctor’s. 
nr malgré son pére, in spite of his father. 
prés dg nous, near us. 


“ RES enfants sont alléschezleuroncle. 2. Ilsnesont 


> x 
~~ 


HX \pas restés chez eux. 3. Ne sont-ils pas encore revenus ? 


4. Tous les éléves sont assis sur les banes. 5. Ils sont 
derriére les pupitres. 6. Cette femme est trés pauvre; 
toutes ses amies sont mortes avant elle. 7. Elles sont 
sorties malgré moi. 8. Ils sont venus 4 nous. 9. Vos 
fréres sont arrivés quinze minutes avant vous. 10. Ils 
sont arrivés il y a une heure et demie. 11. Je suis 


—— 


Personal’ Pronouns with Prepositions 57 


devantlaclasse. 12. Laclasseestdevant moi. 13. Qui 


ia a elles? 14. Notre école est prés de l’église. 


. For them (m.), for them (7). 2. Of me, of 
him.~ 3, Of you, of her. 4, At my house, at her house. 
5. At his house, at our house. 6. At your house, at their 
house. 7. At the lawyer’s, at the doctor’s. 8. She 
came to our house without them and in spite of them. 
9. He fell sick on Thursday morning and died before the 
evening. 10. Our neighbors are not at home to-day; 
they weut away last evening and have n’t returned yet. 
11, My father is at home; he is not out. 12. We went 
away after them and returned home before them. 
13. After you, my friend. 14. He is standing by (near) 
the ee 15. She is sitting near the door. 16. He 
went away with them a quarter of an hour ago and came 
back without them. 17. They did not come back to- 
gether. 18. Have you seen the garden behind the 
church ? 


(@) 1. Where are you? 2, Are you at home [express 
two-Ways|? 3. Where istheclass? 4. Is it in front of 
me? 5.AmTin front of the class? 6.Is the table 
behind me? 7. Is it behind you (pl.)? 8. Am I near 
the table? 9. Where is the chair? 10.Is the table 
between the classandme? 11. Am I standing or seated? 


12. Where am I standing? 13.Is my grammar on the 
table? 14. Is the pencil on the grammar ?) 15. Are 


your brothers at the doctor’s? 1 ey go to his 
house together? 17. Are they ill? 18. Where are 
they? 19. Did you come into this room before or after 
I did (after me)? 20. Is she sitting in front of you? 
21. Am I standing behind you? 22. Did you go out 
without her? 


58 The Adjective Tout 














ee 


Kee 







27 






The adjective tout alwa article when 
the latter is prese Of is not expressed after al/ in 


French. | 
nae Tout, all, whole, every. 
| SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
Pe. tout (m.), toute (f.). tous (m.), toutes (f.). 
i tout homme, every man. tous les mois, every month. 
toute femme, every woman, toutes les semaines, every week. 


toute la maison, the whole house. _ tous les jours, every day. 
tout le monde, everybody (lit., all tous les dimanches, every Sunday. 


the world). tous les lundis, every Monday, 
tous les hommes, all the men, all and so on for each day. 
men. tous les ans, every year. 


co nh autre, other.1 eu, Aad, ) past 


at 


“~ méme, same. été, been, | participles. 


_- After méme (same), as is expressed by que : 
J’ai lu les mémes livres que vous, J have read the same books as you. 


Pa 


/ - 1. Tous mes crayons sont perdus, et toutes mes plumes 
sont mauvaises. 2. Qui a apporté toutes ces fleurs? 
3. Elle a vu les mémes livres et les mémes encriers que 
vous. 4. Qu’avez-vous cherché? 65. J’ai cherché mon 
encrier et mon porte-plume; j’ai trouvé mon encrier 
chez lui, mais je n’ai pas encore trouvé mon porte-plume. 
6. Montrez-moi la fenétre. 7. Voila la fenétre; elle est 
prés de la porte. 8. Ont-ils lu les autres lettres? 
9. A-t-elle visité tout le jardin? 10.1] a écrit une 
lettre & sa mére tous les jeudis. 11. Elle a requ une 
lettre tous les lundis. 12. Tout le monde est ici au- 
jourd@’hui, 13. Tous les hommes qui sont ici sont mes 
amis. 14, Donnez-moi les mémes crayons. 


1 Another is expressed in two ways in French: by encore un (or une), 
an additional one; by un (une) autre, a different one. Encore une fois, 
once more ; une autre fois, some other time. 






mem, } 


Verbs\/ 59 


1. I have been in-all ooms of that white house. 
2. She has visited the whole house every week. 3. Her 
uncle and aunt have not been at church to-day. 4. Allof 
their friends aredead. 5. Is the whole grammar useful ? 
6. We have seen the same man as you. 7. When did 
she write to her mother? 8. Did she write a letter 
every day or every week? 9. She wrote every Friday. 





10, Gi same books bu pens 
11. Everybody is here. > Where are the other pupils ? 
13. He has prepared all athome. 14, John 


has left one of his books at home every day. 15, All of 
Mary’s dresses are pretty; they are prettier than her 
sister’s. 16. Bring us another umbrella [two meanings]. 














a 











OO 


VERBS. 


French verbs may be divided into four conjugations, 
distinguished from each other by the termination of 
the infinitive. The 1st ends in -er, the 2d in -ir, the 3d 
in -oir, the 4th in -re. 

In English, the present participle ends in ~ing; in 
French, it ends in -ant. It is frequently used in Eng- 
lish with the verb ¢o be, but it is never so used in French. 
Instead of saying J am speaking, we must in French 
say I speak ; instead of J was speaking, I spoke ; instead 
of I shall be speaking, I shall speak. | 


parlant, speaking. 


Ss ga do you speak ? . 
je parle, \! do speak, parlez-vous, Ale: highs Ean 
I am speaking. ToS CERO 


60 The First Conjugation 


First Conjugation. 


In the first conjugation, which contains the great 
majority of French verbs, the infinitive ends in -er, and 
the past participle in -€. 


porter, to carry; portant, carrying; porté, carried. 


PRESENT INDICATIVE. 


TERMINATIONS: -€, -€8, -€, -ONS, -ez, -ent. 


AFFIRMATIVE. INTERROGATIVE. 
I carru, I am carrying, porté.je t1 
qe: Ores, I do carry. ae est-ce que je porte ? 
tu portes. portes-tu ? 
il (elle) porte. porte-t-il (elle) ?2 
nous portons. portons-nous ? 
vous portez. portez-vous ? 
ils (elles) portent. portent-ils (elles) ? 
NEGATIVE, NEGATIVE INTERROGATIVE. 
je ne porte pas. ne porté-je pas? 
tu ne portes pas. est-ce que je ne porte pas ? 
il ne porte pas. ne portes-tu pas ? 
nous ne portons pas. ne porte-t-il pas ? 
vous ne portez pas. ne portons-nous pas ? 
ils ne portent pas. - ne portez-vous pas ? 
ne portent-ils pas ? 


1 In questions, when the Ist person singular ends in e mute, an acute 
accent is placed on it for the sake of the sound: donné-je, do J give? Any 
statement preceded by est-ce que (is it that?) becomes a question : : Ila 
regu une lettre, he has received a letter. Est-ce qu’il a regu uné lettre? 
Has he received a letter? The latter construction should be used for the 
interrogative form of the Ist person singular, as forms like donné-je, parlé- 
je, etc., are found only in exalted style and in poetry. 

2 See Lesson 3, (2). 


The First Conjugation 61 


trouver, to find, io consider. _visiter, to visit. 


donner, to give. parler, to speak, to talk. 

préter, to lend. ter, to take off. 
demeurer, to live, to dwell. laisser, to leave, tolet, let alone, allow. 
fermer, to shut, to close. cacher, to hide. 

montrer, to show, to point out. pleurer, to weep, to cry. 

aimer, to love, to like. chercher, to seek, to look for. 
penser, to think. travailler, to work. 


bien, well. sage, wise; (of a child) good, well-behaved. 


IMPERATIVE. 
] 


The imperative of any regular verb is formed from 
the present indicative. In the 1st conjugation,-s of the 
second person singular is dropped. 


SINGULAR, PLURAL. 


porte, carry. portons, /et us carry. portez, carry. 


1. Je cherche mes crayons; ilssont perdus. 2. Aimez- 
vous les fleurs? 3. Est-ce que tout le monde aime les 
jardins ? 4. Ne cachez pas les cahiers de mes éléves, 
mon ami. 5, Travaillez chez vous. 6. Ne parlez pas 
toujours. 7. Nous sommes allés chez elle, mais elle 
était (was) sortie avec vous. 8. Cette femme est riche, 
mais elle travaille une heure dans son jardin tous les 
jours. 9. Je trouve que votre frére est trés sage; il 
travaille bien. 10. Fermons ces fenétres. 11. Nous ne 
fermons pas les portes. 12. Vous cachez toujours mes 
plumes ; ott sont-elles? 13. Qui cache les miennes ? 
14. Demeurez-vous prés d’ici? 15. Quipleure? 16. Ne 
trouvez-vous pas ces enfants sages? 17. Oui, ils sont 
toujours sages. 18. Ne pleure pas, mon petit ami. 


1 Notice this meaning of trouver: Comment trouvez-vous mon cha- 
peau? How do you like my hat? or What do you think of my hat? Dis- 
tinguish from aimer and penser. 


at ee 


of they live near the school? 4. Are you looking-#@ your. 


‘pen or pencil? 5. Are you working? 6. Are all the 


~ 


62 Personal Pronouns as Direct Objects 


For Oral Drill.—i1.He is visiting; he is visited. 
2. She is not visiting; she is not visited. 3. He has 
visited; he has not visited. 4, She does visit; she does 
not visit. 5. Does he visit? 6. Does he not visit? 
7. We visit; we are visiting. 8. We do visit; we do not 
visit. 9. We are visited; we are not visited. 


Where do youlive? 2. Wheredowelive? 3, Do 


pupils of this class working? 7. Do you not consider 
these sentences very easy? 8. Am I speaking of you 
or of her? 9. Are you speaking of him or of me? 
10. Who is talking? 11. Where did you leave your 
books? 12. Who has hidden mine?) 135. Does she 
leave hers at home? 14. Have you brought all of 
yours? 15. Does a boy wear or take off his hat in the 
house? 16. Do not’ ery, my-child. 17. He is speak- 
ing of your friends and mine. 18. We close all the 
doors and windows every evening. 19.1 do not close 
mine. 20. Close that window near the door and this 
one too. 


| 29 
Personal Pronouns used as Direct Objects. 


Personal pronouns used as objects always precede 
the verb, except in an affirmative command. 


SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

me, me. nous, us. 

te, thee, you. vous, you. 

le, him, it. les (m. & f.) them. 
la, her, it. 


1 Use second singular in addressing a child. See French sentence 18 of 
this lesson. 


: 
> — 
a ee 





Personal Pronouns as Direct Objects 638 


op Me, te, le, la, standing before a verb, become m’, t’, I’ 
before a vowel or mute. 


M’a-t-il vu, has he seen me? 


Ou sont-ils? Les voila. Where are they? There they are. 
Me voici, here J am. 
Donnez-le & votre pére, give it to your father. 

But Ne le donnez pas & votre pére, do not give it to your father. 


Notice that a pronoun, whether subject or object, placed after a 
verb is connected with it by a hyphen. 


accepter, to accept. gronder, to scold. 

apporter, to bring. regarder, to look at. 

jouer, to play. remarquer, ¢o notice. 
compter, to count. rester, to stay, to remain, 
entrer (dans), to enter, to go or comein. tomber, to fall. 

louer, to praise. blamer, fo blame. 

une excuse, an excuse. préparer, to prepare, to get 
le plaisir, the pleasure. ready beforehand. 

avec plaisir, with pleasure. quelquefois, sometimes. 


s’il vous plait, if you please, please. maintenant, now. 


1. Acceptez-vous ce joli cadeau? 2. Je Il’accepte 
maintenant avec plaisir. 3. Je ne vous ai pas vu ce 
matin. 4. Votre cousin est arrivé, mais je ne l’ai pas vu. 
5. Il a perdu sa grammaire; il la cherche maintenant. 
6. Avez-vous pris mes livres? 7. Oui, monsieur, je les 
ai pris et je les ai mis sur cette petite table qui est prés 
de la fenétre. 8. Les voici. 9. Otez-les. 10. Vous 
travaillez quelquefois, n’est-ce pas? 11. Voila votre 
habit noir; le cherchez-vous? 12. Aimez-vous les 
livres? 13. Jelesaime bien. 14. Ne les aimez-vous 
pas? 15. Mon pére apporte un joli cadeau 4 ma sceur 
Marie. 16. Est-ce que votre mére vous blame? 17. Elle 
ne me blame pas, mais elle vous blame. 


(A) 1. Here is a book; I bought it for you. 2. When 
he is naughty, I scold him. 3. Is n’t he always good? 





————eEE — — — —Ceee—rreeee —_— 





64 Personal Pronouns as Direct Objects 


4, Where is my book? I have lost it. 5.1 haven’t it 
now. 6. Have youseen it? 7. Haven’t you found it 
yet? 8. Hereitis. 9. There youare. 10. Where are 
the books that I put on this boy’s desk? 11. You did 
not put them on his desk; here they are on mine. 
12. John has found a penknife; he has put it into his 
pocket. 13. Now, show me the chalk, please. 14. With 
pleasure; there it is in the box. 15. Don’t look at me, 
look at-her. 16.1 do not like his excuse, and I do not 
accept it. 17. Accept my excuses. 18.1 do accept 
them very often. 19. That door is open; shut it. 
20. Your parents love you, love them. (21. Here are the 
rules; noticethem. 22. Wefindthemeasy. 23. Don’t 
hide it. 24. Count your sentences. 25. Don’t scold us 
always; scold her sometimes. 


(B) 1. Here is anexercise; didI write it? 2. Where 
are you now? 3.WhereamI? 4. Where is Mr. 8.? 
5. Where is Miss M.? 6. Are you looking at me? 
7. Am I looking at you? 8. Am I looking at you now? 
9, Are you not looking for him? 10. She has lost her 
pencil; have youseenit? 11, Haven’t you noticed it? 
12. Are you looking for it? 13. Do you bring your 
note-books every day? 14. Who has taken them? 
15. Have you my watch?: 16. Hasheit? 17. Where 
is it, please? 18. Does the man close these windows 
every evening? 19. Do you always prepare your les- 
sons? 20. Have you written this exercise? 21. Has 
everybody written it? 22. This boy’s mother is kind to 
(pour) him; does he love her? ~238. Are you playing or 
working? 24. Do I praise you often ? 


Past Participle with Avoir 65 


30 
Past Participle with Avoir. 


A past participle used with the verb avoir agrees 
with the direct object when the object precedes the 
verb. 


Ma seur est arrivée; l’avez-vous vue? VW y sister has arrived ; have 
you seen her? 

Nous a-t-il vus, Aas he seen us? | 

Voici une montre; mon pére I’a achetée hier. Here is a watch; my 
father bought it yesterday. 

tl a regu les lettres que j’ai écrites; les avez-vous lues ? 

He has received the letters that I wrote ; did you read them? 


If there is no direct object or if it follows the verb, 


the past participle with avoir remains unchanged. 
Nous avons joué, we have played. 
J’ai vu votre swur, / saw your sister. 


Il a acheté une montre, he bought a watch. 
Elle a regu mes lettres, she got my letters. 


Recall rule for agreement with étre (Lesson 25), 


excuser, to excuse. une histoire, a history, a story. 
raconter, to relate, to tell. intéressant, interesting. . 
chanter, to sing. pourquoi, why. 

une chanson, a song. . parce que, because. 


Is ont chanté les mémes chansons. 6 yes sont 
venues. 3. Ils ont lu tous les livres que j’ai prétés 
Yautre jour 4 leur pére. 4. Les avez-vous tromyés inté- 


ressants? 5, Pourquoi les.avez-vous lus ? u as-tu 
mis ses autres plumes? (7. Je les ai mises dans cette 


petite boite verte. 8. Est-ce que vous ne les avez pas 
-trouvées? 9. Ernest a Gly montre et une canne. 
11. 


10. Ou les a-t-il achetées ? ous avez ouvert mes 
fenétres. G25 Pardon, madame, je ne les ai pas ouvertes, 


5 


66 Past Participle with Avoir 






je les ai fermées. 13. A-t-elle eu ma Z 
ne l’a paseue. 15. L’a-t-elle vue? (16.)Pourquoi cette 
petite fille est-elle si méchante? (f lle n’est pas 
méchante, elle est trés sage. 18. Pourquoi pleure-t-elle 
toujours? 19. Elle est triste, parce que son pére et sa 
mére soyt morts. 


(A). 1/ We like all the stories yow tell. (2m 

liked all the stories you told. Siero foun tour 

them interesting. (4/4 He does not len@ his”note-book to 

the other_pupi . He has often shown it fo hi 

friends. @ ell? us a little story or ging on 

song. 7. Our parents always love us. 
_» leave my hat and coat ? (9, You leftthem in thegarden. 
“Vv 10. The pense that he has sold is a large one. The 

book tha ad is not very interesting. 12. The woman 

that wrote aa we received yesterday arrived this 


) morning. That Bee i re near-you is not 
(MW A looking @ his book, ooking” at A There is 
} your book, sir; look at it. Do not look at me. 
(B) 1. Do you like this story? 2. Who told it? 
3. Did you tell it? 4. Who wrote this letter? 5. Did 
your brothér write it? 6. Where are the apples you 
brought to school this morning? 7. I put them on the 
table or into a box, I think; who took them? 8. Did 
youeatthem? 9. Did she sing this song? 10. Is she 
Singing to-day the same songs she sang yesterday ? 
11. Why do I scold you sometimes? 12. Why did I 
this morning? 18. Did I scold her because she did 
not write the same sentences as the other pupils ? 
14. She has written them now, hasn’t she? 15. Have 
the other pupils written theirs? 16. Here is the his- © 
tory; don’t you find it interesting? 17. Do you like 
the songs they sing? 18. Have you excused us? 


1 Same construction as montrez-nous in Lesson 19. 










— i. <=. os 


ye 


Plural of Nouns and Adjectives 67 


31 
Plural of Nouns and Adjectives. 
Most nouns and adjectives form their plural, as in 
English, by adding s. 
V’éventail (m.), the fan. les éventails, the fans. 
Exceptions: 1. Nouns and adjectives ending in -s, 
-X, or -Z, remain unchanged in the plural: 


SINGULAR. PLURAL. 


le fils, the son. les fils, the sons. 
Vomnibus (m.), the omnibus. les omnibus, the omnibuses 
la voix, the voice. les voix, the voices. 

le nez, the nose. les nez, the noses. 
heureux, heureux, happy, fortunate. 


2. Nouns and adjectives ending in -au, -eu, and seven 
nouns in -ou,! add x to form the plural: 


SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

le chapeau, the hat. les chapeaux, the hats. 

le feu, the fire. les feux, the fires. 

un cheveu, a hair. les cheveux, the hair. 

beau (m.), beaux (m.),\ beautiful, handsome, 
belle (f.), belles (f.), \ fine. 

le bijou, the jewel. les bijoux, the jewels. 


le joujou, the toy, plaything. les joujoux, the toys, playthings. 
The plural of the adjective bleu is regular: bleus. 
3. Most nouns and adjectives ending in -al change 
-al into -aux. 


SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
le cheval, the horse. les chevaux, the horses. 
V’animal, the animal. les animaux, the animais. 
égal, égaux, equal. 


The plural of bal (m.), ball (a dance) is regular : bals. 


- A complete list is given on page 303. For the plural of foreign and 
compound nouns, see Appendix, page 304. 


68 Plural of Nouns and Adjectives 


4, Hight nouns in -ail change ail into aux:! 


le travail, the work, the labor. _les travaux, the works, the labors. 
le corail, the coral. les coraux, the corals. 


5. Aieul, ciel, and cil are irregular. 


SINGULAR, PLURAL. 
aieul, grandfather. _aieuls, grandfathers. 
aieul, ancestor. aieux, ancestors. 
ciel, sky. ciels, skies (of painting). 
ciel, sky, heaven. cieux, skies, heavens. 
nel, CE. a NEUE pa YES 0 ee pages 








1, Les coraux qu'il a achetés sont trés beaux. 2. Ces 
voix sont trés gaies. 3. Vos cheveux sont plus beaux 
que les miens et que ceux de ma sceur. 4. Ou avez-vous 
trouvé ces grands chapeaux? 5. Je les ai trouvés chez 
votre voisin. 6. Les enfants qui ont joué avec moi 


aujourd’hui sont heureux; ils sont plus heureux que 
moi. 7. Louis et Jea dans la méme classe. 








8. Aimes-tu tes jolis joujoux? ~9. Les tiens sont plus 
jolis que les miens, 10. Vos travaux sont plus utiles 
que les leurs. 11. Je pense que vous aimez les animaux. 
12. N’acceptez-vous pas ces jolis cadeaux? 13, Avez- 
vous vu mes beaux chevaux? 14. Ousont-ils? 15. Les 
voila. 


1. Your hats are smaller than ours. 2. This animal 
is very little. 3. These little animals are beautiful and 
useful. 4. When did you buy these gifts? 5. Did 

- you buy them for me? 6. Her eyes and mine are 
blue. 7. The sky is blue. 8. Have you seen the beau- 
tiful corals that she has received ? 9. Do they sing be- 
cause they are happy? 10. Why are they not happy ?* 
11. Their father and mother have not come back from Lon- 
don. 12. All of.her jewels are @geautiful. 13. Have you 


1 A complete list is given on page 303. 


Paine” a 





seen his horses? 14. Have youseen mine? 15. Your 
hair is prettier than hers or her brother’s. 16. Where do 
you find those beautiful red flowers? 17. I am always 
looking for them. 18. The works of these men are not 
very useful. 19. Her toys are prettier than her 
brother’s. 


32 
_Second Conjugation. 





ae EIR etme -———_—— 


acne 


In verbs of the second conjugation the infinitive ends 
in -ir, and the past participle in -i. 
finir, to finish ; fin, Jinished. 
In regular verbs of this conjugation, -iss is inserted 
before the ending of the present participle: finissant, 
Jinishing. 


PRESENT INDICATIVE, 





TERMINATIONS: -is, -is, -it, -issons, -issez, -issent. 
je finis, J finish, I am finishing, nous finissons. 


tu finis. IT do finish. vous finissez. 
> il or elle finit. ils or elles finissent. 
iJ “t IMPERATIVE, 
C SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
5 finis, finish. eeeren, let us finish. finissez, finish. 
NS punir, to punish. le tableau,! the picture. 
batir, to budd. le portrait, the portrait. 
agir, to act. la ville, the city, the town. 
salir, to soil. le village, the village. 
saisir, to seize, le prix, the price, the prize. 
choisir, to choose. le jeu, the game, play. 
mal, badly. le bateau, the boat, 
ainsi, thus, so. le couteau, the knife. 
principal, principal. le général, the general. 


le parent, the parent, the relative. le journal, the newspaper. 


1 le tableau noir (or le tableau, if there is no chance for ambiguity), 
the blackboard. 


70 Second Conjugation 


1. Le général finit son journal. 2. Les généraux 
finissent leurs journaux. 3. Est-ce votre oncle qui batit 
cette maison? 4. Non, c’est le médecin; il est devenu 
bien riche. 5. Voici deux grands couteaux; Jean 
choisit celui-la, et son frére choisit celui-ci. 6. Punissez- 
vous souvent les enfants qui sont sages? 7. Non, mon 
ami, mais je punis quelquefois les méchants enfants. 
8. N’agissez pas ainsi. 9. Cette enfant salit sa robe 
tous les jours. 10. Pourquoi punit-elle ce petit garcon ? 
11. Parce qu’il saisit toujours les fleurs de sa sceur. 
12. Cet homme a bati deux maisons dans le village ou 
vous demeurez. 13. Les enfants aiment bien les jeux. 
14. Elle est moins souvent punie que son frére. 
15. A-t-il vu les livres que nous avons choisis ? 


For Oral Drill.—1. They choose ; they choosing. 
2. They do not choose; they are not choosing: 3. Are 
you choosing; are you chosen? 4, Are Fou not choos- 
ing; are you not chosen? 5, She chooses; she has 
chosen. 6. She is choosing; she is chosen. 7. We 
choose; we have not chosen. 8. She has been chosen; 
she has not been chosen. 9. Does she choose ? © 


1, Of all their animals, their white horses are the most 
beautiful. 2. Are your parents building that house? 
3. Are you speaking of this house or that? 4. He is 
choosing these knives for the boys. 5. Have you seen 
the boat that he has built ? 6. The pictures that he has 
brought from Paris are finer than ours. 7. Isthis your 
aunt’s portrait or your mother’s? 8. I am choosing the 
prizes that I give to the pupils who work well. 9. This 
woman’s children act badly. 10. Why do they act so? 
11. Why does she punish us? 12. Our newspapers are 
better than yours.) 13. All of the generals have left for 


Nouns in General Statement 71 


Paris; they have left their horses here. 14. She is 
finishing her work; are you finishing yours? 15, Do 
you like the games these children play ? 16. She always 
punishes her daughters when they soil their dresses. 


- ~ 


33 | 
Nouns in General Statement. ~ 


A noun used in a general sense requires the definite 
article in French. 
J’aime les chiens, J am fond of dogs (in general). 
Le café est meilleur que le thé, coffee is better than tea. 


Les chevaux sont utiles &4 ’homme (or aux hommes), horses are 
useful to man. 


le soldat, the soldier. obéir (4), to obey.) 

un oiseau, a bird. désobéir (a), to disobey. 

la vie, the life, living. cher ri eis 

l’argent (m.), silver, money. _ chére (f.), ; 

Yor (m.), gold. rare, rare. 

le café, coffee. court, short. 

le thé, tea. nombreux, numerous. 

peut-étre, perhaps. malheureux, unhappy, unfortunate. 


1. Tout le monde aime l’argent. 2. Les enfants sages 
ne désobéissent pas a leurs parents. 3. Ils obéissent 
toujours, 4. La vie d’un oiseau est courte. 5. La vie 
est plus chére & Londres qu’a Paris, 6. Les omnibus 
sont plus nombreux a Paris qu’a Rome. 7. Votre plume 
est peut-6tre meilleure que mon crayon. 8. Le chien est 
Vami de ’homme. 9. Aimez-vous les chevaux noirs ? 
10. Les yeux bruns sont toujours bons. 11. Le vert est 
une jolie couleur. 12. Les pommes vertes ne sont pas 
bonnes. 18. Les enfants aiment les soldats. 


1 Obéir and désobéir take the dative case: either an indirect pronoun 
object or & before a noun object. 


= 


72 Nouns of Quantity 


1. A lawyer is less useful than a doctor. 2. Doctors 
are more useful than lawyers. 3. Lifeisshort. 4. Gold 
and silver are useful. 5. Silver is perhaps more useful 
than gold. 6. Tea is good, but I think that coffee is 
better. 7. This dog obeys the little boy. 8. My sister 
is fond of birds. 9. I like them too. 10. Horses are 
more useful than all the other animals. 11. Cats love 
birds. 12. Do birds love cats? 13. Do not dogs love 
eats? 14. Are birds numerous here? 15. Omnibuses 
are still numerous in Paris. 16. Are you fond of ani- 
mals? 17. Do you disobey your parents? 18. Always 
obey your father and mother. 19. Does everybody care 
for flowers? 20. Is living dearer in this town than in 
that? 21. Do I always accept excuses? 22: Boys like 
work. 23. Those who do not work are often unhappy. 
24, Our soldiers always obey their generals. 


34 
Nouns of Quantity. 


A noun of measure or quantity requires the preposi- 


tion de (d’) without the article before the noun limited: 
une paire de chevaux, a pair of horses. 


Exception: La plupart, most, takes de and the article before the. 
noun. La plupart des hommes, most men. 


la douzaine, the dozen. la plupart, most, the greater part. 
la demi-douzaine, the half-dozen. un euf, an egg. 

la livre, the pound. le sucre, the sugar. 

la demi-livre, the half-pound. la fraise, the strawberry. 

un panier, a basket. le beurre, the butter. 

un verre, a glass. le lait, the milk. 

une tasse, a cup. le vin, the wine. 


une carafe, a carafe, a decanter. la biére, the beer. 


Nouns of Quantity 73 


la bouteille, the bottle. remplir, to jill. 
un morceau,! a piece. voulez-vous,2do you wish, will you 
have ? 


1. Apportez-moi une tasse de café et un verre d’eau. 
2. Donnez-moi encore une tasse de thé. 3. Le pére de 
Jean a acheté une douzaine de bouteilles de vin. 4. Ila 
apporté une carafe d’eau. 5. J’ai donné deux paniers de 
poires 4 la femme du pauvre homme. _ 6. Voulez-vous 
une livre de beurre ou une douzaine d’eufs? 7.Ila 
pris une tasse de lait. 8. Ddénnez-moi une demi-douzaine 
demouchoirs. 9. Ilremplitnosverres. 10. Macousine 
a pris un verre de vin, et mon cousin un verre de biére. 
11. Il a offert un beau cadeau au jeune homme qui a 
trouvé sa montre. 12. L’a-t-il accepté? 13. Voici un 
panier de pommes pour votre mére. 14. La plupart des 
femmes aiment les fleurs. | 


(A) 1. She bought a dozen eggs on Monday. 2. Who 
fills the carafe? 3.Ido(I fill it), 4. Will you have 
a glass of wateroracupofmilk? 5. They have brought 
a half-pound of tea and two pounds of butter. 6. They 
have also brought three pounds of sugar and four baskets 
of strawberries. 7. My sister has bought a half-dozen 
white handkerchiefs for her friend Louise. 8. Bring 
me a carafe of water. 9. There are two dozen pupils 
in his class. 10. Here is a cup of coffee for you. 
11. Do not fill my glass, fill hers. 12. There it is. 
13. You have lost your pen and ink, but I have n’t seen 
them. 14. Look forthem. 15. Won’t you have mine? 
16. Most men work (pil.) every, day. 


1 Notice that morceau is a fragment, a morsel, while piéce is usually a 
complete whole. Un morceau de beurre; une piece d’or (ou de cing francs). 

2 Followed by an infinitive, will you? Voulez-vous rester ici, will you 
stay here # 


T4 Third Conjugation 


(B) 1. Are you filling my glass? 2. Are you filling 
hers? 38. Whois filling it? 4. Did he take a glass of 
water or wine? 5. What did you take? 6. Where is 
mychalk? 7. Whohastaken my bottleofink? 8. Did 
youtake it? 9. Did yousee it? 10. Did I put it into 
the drawer? 11. Where is the box of pens? 12. Is 
it on this table? 13. Have I a dozen pens or pencils ? 
14. Did you take a cup of coffee or a glass of milk this 
morning? 15. What have you in your pocket? 


35 
Third Conjugation. 
In verbs of the third conjugation the infinitive ends 
in -oir, and the past participle in -u. 
recevoir, to receive;  recevant, receiving; regu, received. 
PRESENT INDICATIVE. 
TERMINATIONS: <8, -8, -t, -ons, -ez, -ent. 


je recois, J receive, I do receive, nous recevons. 


tu recois. I am receiving. vous recevez. 
il regoit. ils regoivent. 
IMPERATIVE. ‘ 
SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
recois, receive. recevons, /et us receive. recevez, receive. 


Nouns of Material. 


A noun, used to denote the material of which an 
object is made, follows the name of the object and is 
preceded by de without the article: 


une montre d’or, a gol watch, 
une robe de soie, a silk dress. 
un chemin de fer, a railroad. 


Nouns of Material 78 











décevoir, to deceive. la paille, the straw. 
devoir, to owe (past participle, le cuir, the leather. 
dfi (m.), due (f.).)! une bottine, a boot, 
une paire, @ pair. un soulier, a shoe. 
le fer, the tron. un gant, a glove. 
l’acier (m.), the steel. un sac, a bag. 
le fer-blane, the tin. une chaine, a chain. 
le cuivre, the copper. une fourchette, a fork. 
le marbre, the marble. une cuiller, a spoon. 
le bois, the wood. une assiette, a plate. 
la soie, the silk. un chemin, a road. 


1. Nous avons une douzaine de couteaux d’argent. 
2. Elle a acheté une belle robe de soie. 3. Nous n’avons 
pas nos gants. 4. Lesavez-vous? 5. Voulez-vous cette 
demi-douzaine de cuillers d’argent? 6. Donnez-moi 
aussi deux douzaines et demie de couteaux d’acier. 
7. Marie, apportez-nous trois tasses de thé, trois verres 
deau, et le sucre. 8. Voici un panier de fraises., 
9. J’accepte ce cadeau avec plaisir. 10. Nos amis sont 
venus par (4y) chemin de fer. 11. Les avez-vous vus.? 
12. Pas encore. 13. Ou sont-ils maintenant? 14. Ils 
visitent leur oncle & Chicago. 15. Apportez-nous une 
livre de café, s’il vous plait. 


For Oral Drill.—1.I receive; I am not receiving. 
2. We receive; let us not receive. 3, He receives; he 
does not receive. 4. We are not receiving; let us 
receive. 5. They receive; do they receive? 6. Does 
she receive? 7.Is she not receiving? 8. Receive; 
do not receive. 


(A) 1. He owes ten frances to his brother. 2. You 


owe yours six frances, I think. 3. We have bought a 
dozen silver forks and a half-dozen plates. 4. They re-. 


1 The circumflex accent is placed over the past part. masc. dfii to distin- 
guish it from du, of the. 


76 Adverbs of Quantity 


ceive these beautiful gifts with pleasure. 5. She receives 
every week two or three interesting letters from her 
brother who is now in London. 6, Here is your pair of 
silk gloves. 7. Yes, I left them here. 8.I have a 
silver pen-holder and a gold pen. 9. Here is your 
leather bag. ‘10. Bring us a half-dozen silver spoons, 
please. 11.1 do not wearmy straw hatnow. 12. This 
man loves everybody. 138. Everybody loves him. 
14, Will you have a pair of boots or shoes? 15. I have 
bought a dozen boxes of steel pens for the pupils of 
this school. 16. She receives her friends every evening. 
17. He is very rich; he owes it to his father. 18. Let 
us receive him well. 


(B) 1. Does your father receive his papers every day 
or every week? 2. Where are the pears I bought ? 
3. Have you eaten them? 4. Who put them into this 
paper bag? 5. What have you in that tin box, sir? 
6. Is iron more useful than steel? 7. Is copper still 
more useful? 8. Who has a gold watch? 9. Where 
is your gold chain? 10. Did you leave it at home? 
11. She likes wooden tables; do you like them too ? 
12. Do you like marble tables? 13. Is there a railroad 
in this town? 14.Is it near this house? 15. Have 
you brought that pair of boots for me ? 


36 
MERE 
if Adverbs of Quantity. 
An adverb of quantity (like a noun of quantity) re- 


quires de‘without the article before the noun limited: 
beaucoup de pommes, many apples. 
Exception: bien, much, many, takes de and the article before the 


noun. 
bien du monde, many people; bien des hommes, many men. 


“) Adverbs of Quantity 17 


combien, how much? how many? le pain, the bread. 


headooup { much, a great deal, la viande, the meat. 

” | plenty, many. le sel, the salt. 
trop, too much, too, too many. le poivre, the pepper. 
tant, so much, so many. le fromage, the cheese. 
autant, as much, as many. la faute, the fault, the mistake. 
assez, enough, couper, /o cut. 
plus, more. bu, drunk. past 
moins, /ess, fewer. fait, made, Sau eels 
peu, little, few. concevoir, to conceive. 
un peu, a little, a few. apercevoir, to perceive. 


prenez, take. 
que, conj., than, as (at the beginning of a second term of a 
comparison). 
plusieurs, several (an invariable adjective, hence no de). 
plusieurs livres, several books. 


Beaucoup is never preceded by a modifier like trés or trop, but it is 
possible to say beaucoup plus (much more or far more), beaucoup moins 
(much less or far less), and beaucoup trop (far too, far too much cng too 
many). 

Assez ays precedes the noun: assez de fleurs, flowers rate 

Autant, and not tant, is used both affirmatively and negatively in 
a comparison: I n’a pas autant de plumes que de crayons, he has not so 
many pens as pencils. Vous avez tant de beaux tableaux! You have so 
many beautiful pictures! — 

Peu, little, denotes quantity, while petit denotes size; as a noun, peu 
is always masculine: un peu d’eau, a little water. 


1. Voulez-vous un_peu~ de pain et de? hea 
2. Prenez plus de Weurre. 3. Nos voisins ont moins 
d’enfants que les vétres. 4. Avez-vous un peu moins de 
sel que moi? 5. Nous avons assez de crayons, mais peu 
de plumes. 6.J’ai plus de pain que vous, mais vous 
n’avez pas autant de lait que moi. 7. Prenez un peu 
plus de beurre. 8. Recevez-vous beaucoup d’argent ? 
9. Recoit-elle bien du monde ? 10. Combien d’enfants 


1 Recall rule for repetition of de, page 32. The poun or adverb of quan- 





oie CO 


K 


78 The Pronoun En 


a-t-elle? )11. Elle a cing enfants: trois filles et deux 
; Ss. . Louise a moins d’amies que votre sceur. 


13. Avez-vous pris autant de paniers de fraises que lui? 
14. Cet enfant a bu trop de lait. 15.11 a moins de 
crayons que Jeanne, maisila plus delivres. 16. Voulez- 


vous un peu plus de poivre ? my P| 
i pan A VLA 


1. There are several paces in this class-room. 
2, How inuch money does he r cdtve? 3, He réeetean* 
4.6000"franes from his father and a eheuga from his 


: mother. 4. so xP u not neat enough ? “2 5. Lhave too 


mai! eese and ittle Bread. 6. I do not conceive 
why shi AT, Give, us ttle bread ” figee 
butter, please. - a hi Lap ott mgt m 

very Bah 9. How many doz en basket S 0 attr SHA 
has 10 Will you more” sugar or “salt? — 
11. There“Are many railfoads her there not?? 
12. You have made too manyoth prhiceakes"t in this exer- 
cise.) 13. John has made far fewer mistakes stad you. 
14. I perceive three mistakes in my own. 15. He has 
drunk a cup of coffee and eaten a small piece of bread 
and a little meat. 16. Do you owe more money than 
I (moti)? 17. There are not so many flowers in this 
garden as in that. 18. There are too many doors and 
windows in that house. 19. That man has plenty of 
friends, but too little money. 20. He is so rich and has 
so many friends, — why is he so sad? 


37 


Pronoun En. 






| number (un, deux, etc.), after a noun 
of measure (dougaine, bouteille, etc.), or after an adverb 


1 See page 18, footnote. 


ah en 


The Pronoun En 79 


=e are \ 

of quantity (beaucoup, trop, peu, etc.), the noun limited 
is not expressed, this noun must be represented by the 
pronoun en (of it, of them). En always stands next 
before the verb, except in the imperative affirmative. 

Combien de scours avez-vous? J’en ai une. How many sisters have 

you? TI have one. 
Ont-ils acheté assez de beurre? Ils en ont trop acheté. Did they 


‘buy butter enough? They bought too much. 
Ils en ont acheté huit livres, they bought eight pounds. 


le maitre, the master, the teacher. plein, full. 

le magasin, the store. content, glad, contented. 

le porte-monnaie, the purse. sir, sure. 

le reste, the rest (remainder). le besoin, the need. 

étudier, to study. avoir besoin (de), to need. 

expliquer, to explain. la honte, the shame. 

écouter, /o listen (takes a direct object). avoir honte (de), to be ashamed. 
| oo enema la peur, the fear. 

ja, alreaty avoir peur (de), to be afraid. 


1. Combien de plumes y a-t-il dans ces deux boites ? 
2. Il y en a 200 dans celle-ci, et 150 dans ceile-la. 
3. Ecoutez toujours vos maitres. 4. Pourquoi rougissez- 
vous? 5, Enavez-vous honte? 6. Donnez un peu plus 
d’argent 4 votre secur. 7. Je n’enai pas assez. 8. En 
étes-vous sir? 9. Il ya quatre fenétres dans cette salle. 
10. Il en a fermé deux et il a laissé les deux autres 
ouvertes. 11. Quand je raconte une histoire intéres- 
sante, pourquoi n’écoutez-vous pas? 12. J’ai perdumon 
porte-monnaie dans un grand magasin prés de la Seine. 
13. Avez-vous bien étudié aujourd’hui? 14. Il y a plu- 


| sieurs fautes dans sa lettre, mais la-vétxe en est pleine. 
. 15. J’en ai compté quatorze ou qujaite. 

: ’ 
| 1. That man has too much money, and I haven’t 


enough. 2. Are there sixty or seventy minutes in an 
hour? 3. There are sixty. 4. Where is the rest of my 


re 








80 The Partitive Article 


orange? 5. You have eaten half of it. 6. Are you 
sure of it? 7.lamgure of it. 8. Where are my gold- 
pieces? 9. Herearetwo. 10. Why do you not explain 
these rules? 11.1 have already explained most of 
them. 12. Youdonot listen. 13. Who does not listen? 
14. One of those boys isn’t listening. 15. There is the 
boy, —look at him. 16. Yes, there he is. 17. Is he 
ashamed of it? 18. No, he is glad of it. 19. How 
many books have you at home? 20.1 have two hun- 
dred. 21. You have enough,I think. 22. Do you need 
these books? 23.I do. 24. Do you? 25. Has he 
money enough ?-. 26. His pockets are full. 27. He has 
too much perhaps. 28.I] am afraid so. 29. Always . 
study well (study always well). 


38 
Partitive Article and Pronoun. 


(1) Some or any, whether expressed or understood 
before a noun in English, is regularly expressed in 
French by de and the definite article: du, de la, del’, 
des! (For exceptions, see Lessons 39 and 40.) 

Elle a apporté du pain et de la viande, she has brought bread and 

meat. 

Les chevaux sont des animaux, horses are animals. 

(2) When some or any (expressed or understood) is 
not followed by its noun, it is expressed by en (of zt, of 
them). 


Avez-vous des fleurs? Have you any flowers? 
Oui, j’en ai, yes, J have (some). 

Il n’en a pas, he has n’t any, he has none. 
Achetez-en, buy some. 


1 The plural of this construction is also the plural of a or an: un livre 
a book; des livres, books. 





2 yylae ZUNd oO 
» rtitive Article 81 
Y en a-t-il, are there any? (B) Ary 


N’y en a-t-il pas, are there none? or are there not any? 


la rose, the rose. une pomnte de terre, a potato. 
la tulipe, the tulip. un insecte, an insect. 
le muguet, the /ily-of-the-valley. une mouche, a fly. a 
le fruit, the fruit. une abeille, a bee. y / q 
un ananas, a pine-apple. le miel, the honey. 
une banane, a banana. le métal, the metal. 6 
_ la framboise, the raspberry. le mur, the wall. “at 
la créme, the cream. miir, ripe. ~ OMB 
la farine, the flour. miirir, to ripen, to get ripe. 
le légume, the vegetable. & présent, now, at present. Qo 
‘ 


1. Voulez-vous des tulipes ou des roses? 2, Donnez- 
nous du pain, de la viande et de l’eau. 3. Apportez- 
nous aussi de la créme pour nos fraises, 4. A-t-elle 
acheté des légumes? 5. Elle en a beaucoup acheté. 
6. A-t-il pris du sel ou du poivre? 7. Cet homme a 
vendu de l’encre, du papier, des plumes, et des crayons. 
8. Y a-t-il des pommes de terre dans ce panier? 9. Non, 
madame, il n’y ena pas. 10. Voici des muguets prés de 
ce mur. 11. La vie d’un oiseau est courte. 12. A-t-il 
bu de V’eau ou du vin ce matin? 13. Voulez-vous de 
la créme? 14. Les mouches et les abeilles sont des 
insectes. 15. Tout le monde aime le miel. 


(A) 1. There are metals that are far more useful 
than gold. 2.I am sure that there are a great many. 
3. Gold and silver are metals. 4. Will you have cream 
or milk in your coffee? 5. Will you have sugar too? 
6. Cream is better than milk. 7. Roses and tulips are 
flowers. 8, Roses are more beautiful than tulips. 
9. We think that lilies of the valley are beautiful too. 
10. That is because (C’est que) you have some in your 
garden, 11. There are some in mine, but there are none 


in sip» B’ Bees love flowers. 13. Bees make honey. 


: 
J 


eG poe. ae 


qhg 


82 Fourth Conjugation 


14, Will you have sugar or honey on your bread ? 
15. Here are pine-appies; willyouhavesome? 16. Flies 
and bees are insects. 17. There are eggs, bananas, and 
a pound and a half of tea in her basket. 18. She has 
also bought potatoes and twenty or twenty-one pounds of 
flour. 19. Apples are getting ripe. 20. There are some 
red apples that are ripe already (already ripe). 21. Here 
are a half-dozen. 


(B) 1. Have you any books? 2. Have you pencils ? 
3. Are there roses on yonir table? 4. Are there any in 
the garden? 65. Do you like strawberries? 6. Who 
likes raspberries? 7.Is there any ink in this ink- 
well? 8, Is there any in yours? 9. Is there none 
in hers? 10. Have you brought pears or bananas 
to school to-day? 11. Are strawberries ripe now ? 
12. Have you some money for me? 13. Has he some? 
14, Have n’t youany? 15. Has she none 77 16. Where 
is your money? 17.Did you leave it at home? 
18. How many gold watches have you? 19. What is 
the color of lilies of the valley? 20. The flowers are 
white; what color are the leaves? 21. Do you like 
them? 22. Have you any? 23.Is there flour in 
that paper bag? 24. Are the walls of this garden 
high? 25. Name a vegetable. 26. Name some fruits. 
27. Name some flowers. 


ee t 


39 \ 
Fourth PES 


In verbs of the fourth conjugation the infinitive ends 
in -re, and the past participle in -u. 


vendre, to sell ; vendant, selling ; vendu, sold. 


Fourth Conjugation 83 


PRESENT INDICATIVE. 


TERMINATIONS: -8, -8,(-t), -ons, -ez, -ent. 


The ending -t of the 3d person singular is dropped after e, d, t.1 
As the stems of all the regular verbs of this conjugation, except 
rompre, fo break, end in d, the verb vendre is given as a model. 


je vends, J sell, J do sell, nous vendons. 
tuvends. Jam selling. vous vendez. 
il vend. ils vendent. 


~ IMPERATIVE. 


vends, sell. vendons, /et us sell. vendez, sell, 
On, one, we, you, they, people. 


The indefinite pronoun on, even when plural in mean- 
ing, is used only as the subject of a verb in the third 
person singular. In many cases it is used where the 
passive form is used in English. 

On vend des pommes ici, they sell apples here. 
On chante, parce que l’on ? est heureux, one sings (we sing) because 
one is (we are) happy. 
Ou trouve-t-on * des aiguilles, where do you find needles ? 
Ou vend-on du lait et de la créme, where are milk and cream sold ? 


i Baa sg 1+ | French spoken here. 
Ici on parle frangais, 


la dentelle, the lace. le lit, the bed. 

la mousseline, the muslin. la question, the question. 
le ruban, the ribbon. la réponse, the answer. 
le fil, the thread. répondre (4), to answer. 


1 In the irregular verb mettre, to put: je mets, tu mets, il met; in 
vaincre, to conquer’, also irregular: je vaincs, tu vaincs, il vaine. 

2 Notice that l’on may be used instead of on whenever it sounds better. 
It is often used aftér et, ou, ou, que, lorsque, pourquoi, si, etc., but not 
when the following word begins with 1]. 

8 Like il and elle in a question (Lesson 3), on is joined by -t- to a verb 


ending in a vowel. 





84 Fourth Conjugation 
une aiguille, a needle rendre, to give back, to return, 
une épingle, a pin. entendre, to hear. 
un dé, a thimble. attendre, to wait, to wait for. 
des ciseaux (m,), scissors. perdre, to lose, to waste. 
la laine, the wool. certainement, certainly. 


le drap, the cloth, the sheet (of a bed). presque, almost, nearly. 


Répondez-vous aux lettres |de votre cousine? 
















épond-On,toujours 4 vos questions? (3/ Oui, presque 
oujours. Quand je joue avec|mon frére, je perds 
souvent. / 5. Oui, quand on joue avec lui, on perd 
presque ge (3) vend-on |des rubans? 7. On 

- en vend/i 


du fi, de pas ? quoi attend-on ici? 

On gdttend des lettres. ttend des réponses 

4) \ aux lett es qu’il a déja ey B) On trouve que la |) 

\ \ vie est |ehére dans les grandes villes. 18. are eat) 
/ © des livrés intéressants dans ce grad magasin? 14. Cer- 
\ tainemeht, on en trouve beaucoup. 5)On a apporté 
\y des pommes et des poires. 6 On les a apportées a 


(8 On end au Opy des/aiguilles, des épingles 







OARS rt XQ 
Su are los din’ 2 s you fot losing ? 


i/ 







On en 13 fois. 








ne 7 
J 













J e 
or Ore Drill, — : 
2. She loses she 







¥ 

















ot | oses; one is 

= a6 4She og; a0 aot am: aay ence 

MBH 1 Wa: ing ? 6. Wait ;/do ai ek 7.Is he 

waiting ? Are people waiting? ~9. Let us ese 
let us not wai 10. Do I hear? 11. Do I not he 


12. Have they heard? 13. /they hear ; “alt wait. 
By. 


your brother ? He always 
iwaiting for mine. I am 

: imes (one~waits-for mé, etc.). 
(5, where do they sell gloves and hats? 6. Do they 


them near here? 7. Where are scissors sold ? 
ae do you find beds, tables. and chairs? 9. We 





) Return these aa to-day. . )Certa 
your friends always return\yours ?~ (13/AAlmost always. 

When people have fNends, théy are fortunate. 

en SS oe 
ie you hear me? 16, Are you waiting 
or me? 7am. 

you borrowed. 3 by - are. .\There are 
pins, thread, /and a 
bought lace, mustin, ribbo : 
eo. 
















Rule for Use of the Pa 
After a Negative. 


ion to 







en the noun is the direct objégt of a negative 
‘verb, some or any (expressed or understgéd in English) 
is expressed by de without the article. 
Je n’ai pas/d’argent, I haven’t any money, or I have no ey. 
Elle n’a pas de souliers, she has n’t any shoes, or she has 
Vous n’avez pas de livre, you haven’t a book. 
(2) After ni... ni, neither... nor, and{gans, with- 
out, both de and the article are omitted. 


> Il n’a ni amis ni argent, he has neither friends nor money. 
Tl est sans amis, he is without friends, 
(3) After ne ... que, only, both de and the article 
» are used. f 
Nous n’avons que des piéces de cing sous, we have only five-sou 


* 


pieces. x 


Il n’a que des amis, i has nothing but friends. 


(4) Jamais without a verb means never ; with a verb 
preceded by ne, it means never; with a verb without 
ne, it means ever. 


dhe OmwUref afrer 






j/ 
f 





86 The Partitive after a Negative 


Avez-vous jamais vu des lions, have you ever seen lions ? 
Jamais, never. 
N’en avez-vous jamais vu, have you never seen any ? 


Notice the position of jamais: before the past participle in a 
compound tense. 


(5) Ni... ni, without a verb, have a negative mean- 
ing: ni l'un ni autre, neither one; used with a verb, 
the verb must be preceded by ne. 


Je ne parle ni anglais ni frangais. 
I speak neither English nor French. 


Notice the omission of pas as in the case of ne... que and 
jamais. 

1. N’attendez pas de réponse 4 vos lettres. 2. Je n’en 
attends jamais. 3. M. Jacob vend-il de la dentelle et 
de la mousseline? 4. I] ne vend ni dentelle ni mousse- 
line. 65. Il] ne vend que des rubans. 6. Ce garcon n’a 
jamais lu de livre francais. 7. Je n’ai pas de soie, mais 
j’ai du fil blane. 8. Vous en avez beaucoup. 9. En 
avez-vous jamais assez? 10.Jamais. 11. N’en avez- 
vous jamais assez? 12. Presque jamais. 13. M’ap- 
porte-t-on du pain et du beurre ? 14. Nous n’avons 
pas de thé. 15. Apportez-nous du lait. Merci (thank 
you),madame. 16. En voulez-vous deux ou trois verres ? 
17. Mon pére n’a ni porte-monnaie ni argent. 


hese men,are very poor; they have neither friends 
nor money. @sne has n’t any muslin; she has only 
lace. Hag she enough ? yh, is (there is) ih 
question. We have no books 6.)Have you p 
only? 7. We have neither books nor_ paper. 

have not an umbrella. (sate ni iG Thank a 
I have already borrowe Gide 


ever return 
the umbrellas you borrow ? {2) Almost never, 3, Not 
\ 


The Partitive with Adjectives 87 


(pas) always, but sometimes. 14. Have you returned 
the one you borrowed on Thursday? 15. Not yet. 
16. Return it to-day, please. 17. My friends never re- 
turn those that they borrow. 18. Now I have only’ 
one. (10) smoney, but haven’t. 20, Have you? 
21. I Rave. (22..;How much have you? \23.\I have a 
good deal. 24. One never has enough. 25. Answer 
this question: have I as much as you? 26. Are you 
waiting forananswer? 27. I always wait for an answer, 
but you never do (wait).— Tene Say 


—— 
— 
~ 


41 





/ 
Exception to Rule for Use of the Partitive Article. 
Adjective before the Noun. ‘ 


When an adjective stands before the noun in French, 
some or any (expressed or understood in English) is ex- 
pressed by de without the article. 


du pain, de bon pain. 
de la viande, de bonne viande. 
de l’eau, de bonne eau. 


des pommes, de bonnes pommes. 
But du papier, du papier blanc. 


The following adjectives usually precede their nouns. 


beau, beautiful. mauvais, bad. 
bon, good. méchant, wicked. 
grand, large. petit, small. 
gros, big. vieux vi old 
jeune, young. vieille (f.), : 
joli, pretty. vilain, ugly. 


1 The position of adjectives must be learned largely by observation. For 
a more complete treatment of this subject, see Lesson 43. 


88 The Partitive with Adjectives 


le cirque, the circus. la souris, the mouse. 

la cage, the cage. la vache, the cow. 

le lion, the lion. le beeuf, the ox. 

un éléphant, an elephant. le mouton, the sheep, mutton. 
le tigre, the tiger. la brebis, the sheep, the ewe. 
le léopard, the leopard, un agneau, a lamb. 

un ours, u bear. une béte, a beast, an animal. 
le loup, the wolf. un troupeau, a flock, a herd 
le singe, the monkey. la grange, the barn. 

le serpent, the snake. mordre, to bite. 

le rat, the rat. fournir, to furnish. 


1. Vous n’avez pas encore vu de lion, je pense.* 2. J’ai 
vu des tigres, des léopards, des loups et des serpents. 
3. Nous avons vu de gros éléphants. 4. Les lions, les 
éléphants et les loups sont des animaux. 5. Les élé- 
phants sont de gros animaux. 6. Ils sont plus gros que 
tous les autres animaux. 7. Que regardez-vous? 8. Je 
regarde cette cage de singes. 9. Les aimez-vous ? 
10. Je les trouve trés intéressants. 11. Les chats 
aiment les rats et les souris. 12. Notre vache fournit 
de bon lait. 13.Ce chien ne nous mord jamais. 
14. On n’aime pas les mauvais fruits. ~15. Les agneaux 
sont de petits moutons. 16. Ces hommes portent de> 
grands chapeaux mais de petits gants. 


1. The man has cows and sheep in his barn. 2. He 
has no oxen, but he has fine horses. 3. Has he a pair 
of them? 4. That horse is biting one of your young 
trees. 5. Sheep furnish wool. 6. Mice and rats are 
small animals. 7. Do you like snakes? 8. I do not. ) 
9. He always has good friends and beautiful S. 
10. Good books are always good friends. 11. There are 
many old men and women who live in this town. 


12. Here we are at the circus. 13. Are there animals in 
these cages? 14. There are a great many. 15. How 





Imperfect Indicative 89 


many? 16. There are two or three hundred. 17.1 
think that there are three hundred and fifty. 18. Did 
you ever visit any other (d’autre) circus? 19. What 
have you seen to-day? 20. We have seen old lions, 
handsome tigers, and beautiful leopards. 21. We have 
also seen young elephants and little bears. 22. Where 
are the monkeys? 23, There they are in the cage. 
24. Look at them; aren’t they pretty? 25, I think that 
those little beasts are very ugly. 
( f 


i (anpertect Indicative. 


It has been stated (Lesson 10) that the perfect is the 
past tense of conversation. If, however, the past action 
is represented as going on at the same time with another 
action or as a customary or continued action, it is ex- 
pressed by the imperfect. 

Quand j’étais jeune, je demeurais & Rouen. 
When I was young, I lived at Rouen. 

The imperfect of a verb may be formed by changing 

the ending -ant of the present participle into -ais. 


INFINITIVE. PRESENT PARTICIPLE. IMPERFECT INDICATIVE. 


porter, portant, je portais. 
finir, finissant,! je finissais. 
recevoir, recevant, je recevais. 
vendre, vendant, je vendais. 
avoir, ayant, ; j avais.” 
étre, étant, j étais. 


1 Note again the iss before the ending of the present participle of regular 
verbs of the second conjugation. 
2 Notice that the imperfect of avoir is regular, while the present gohan oe 


is irregular, roto ap | afi 


90 Imperfect Indicative 


The terminations of the imperfect are alike in all 
verbs: -ais, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, -aient. 


je portais, J was carrying, I car- nous portions. | 
tu portais. [ried, I used to carry. vous portiez. 
il portait. ils portaient. 


Conjugate the imperfect indicative of each of the 
verbs given on page 89, using that of porter as a model. 


(la campagne, the country (asdis- _ rencontrer, to meet. 


,! tinguished from the town). paresseux, idle, lazy. 
. . & la campagne, in the country. appliqué, diligent. 
) le pays, the country (the region, abondant, abundant. 
the whole country). suivant, following. 
la chose, the thing. autrefois, formerly. 
le lapin, the rabbit. Vannée derniére, /ast year. 


il y a, there is, there are. 

il y avait, there was, there were. 
Qu’est-ce qu'il y a, what is there ? 
Qu’est-ce qu'il y avait, what was there? 

Douana vous étiez jeune, mon ami, vous aviez de 
beaux joujoux. 2. Mes parents n’étaient pas si riches 
que les vétres, mais j’avais aussi de jolies choses. 
3. Nous ne demeurions pas 4 la ville, mais nous avions 
une grande maison 4 la campagne. 4. Il y avait prés 
de la maison un petit boisetde grandsarbres. 5. J’avais 
prés de ma fenétre un petit jardin plein de fleurs rouges 
et blanches. 6. Mon jardin était trés petit, mais mes 
fleurs étaient si jolies! 7. Il y avait beaucoup d’oiseaux 
dans le jardin et dans le bois. 8. Les oranges étaient 
rares, mais les fraises étaient abondantes. 9. Nous 
avions aussi beaucoup de poiresetde pommes. 10. Nos 
chiens étaient heureux parce qu’il y avait beaucoup de 
lapins dans le bois, et les chats parce qu’il y avait beau- 
coup d’oiseaux dans le jardin. 11. Il] y avait aussi des 
souris et des rats dans notre vieille grange. 12. Nous 


Impersect Indicative 


étions heureux, parce que nous avions beaucoup de 8 
amis. 13. Tout le monde était heureux. a) 


Répondez en francais aux questions suivantes: 1. Quand 
(ROMER TEN yet anette EE avieZ-Vous / 
assez? 3. Qu’est-ce que vous aviez? 4. Vos aaa 
étaient-ils trés riches? 5. Etaient-ils plus ou moins 
riches que les siens? 6. Ou demeuriez-vous? 7. Aviez- 
vous une petite maison? 8. Qu’est-ce qu’il y avait pres 
dela maison? 9. Qu’aviez-vous prés de votre fenétre ? 
10. Qu’est-ce qu’il y avait dans votre jardin? 11. De 
quelles couleurs étaient-elles? 12. Etaient-elles trés 
jolies? 13. Y avait-il des oiseaux? 14. Combien y en 
avait-il? 15. Vous aviez beaucoup d’oranges, n’est-ce 
pas? 16.Y avait-il des fraises? 17. Quels fruits 
aviez-vous? 18. Et quels animaux? 19. Les chiens 
étaient-ils heureux? 20. Pourquoi? 21. Et les chats? 
22. Etiez-vous heureux ou malheureux? 23. Pourquoi? 
24. Qui était heureux ? lous ; ; 







vat 
or Oral Drill. {/1. They had; they have. 2. They 
Begnne orn fe regeive; they do re- > 

€ - VE - . 











(3) His sisters were rich because they were always 8 
diligent, but his brothers were sometimes idle. 2, Is 


as in Paris last year I often used to.m father, 
Where were you an hour ago? , e at our™, 
uncle’s. s answering my friend’s™letter, when 


you came in. { 7/ When she was young, she used to aS Nae 


\/ 
¥ 


2 Lec = 4 


: 


92 Position of Adjectives 


well. 8. Our neighbors were formerly richer than you; 
they had large houses, beautiful gardens, and a large 
number of horses and dogs. 9. Did he have more money 
than youthis morning? 10. There was formerly a large - 

ood near the town in which (where) I used to live. 
11.)We were speaking of her when she entered the 
room, here were you when we went to your 
house ? (13.)Were you waiting for an omnibus when I 


saw you this 


had 






receive more letters than I. 


ast year she used to 
15. They never obeyed 


A y their parents, but we always obeyed ours. 16. They 
ror” worked well and they were always happy. 17. They 


IMCA/9 


worked well because they were never punished. 


43 


Position of Adjectives. 


Adjectives usually follow their nouns in French, 
especially those denoting color, shape, or nationality.’ 


aveugle, blind. 
sourd, deaf. 


muet (m.), ae dumb, 


muette (f.), silent, 
droit, right, straight. 
gauche, left, awkward. 
chaud, warm. 

froid, cold. 

rond, round, 

carré, square. 
allemand, German. 
américain, American. 


espagnol, Spanish. 

italien, /talian. 

la main, the hand. 

le pied, the foot. 

la langue, the tongue, language. 

un hétel, a hotel. 

Vhétel de ville, the city hall. 

descendre, to go down, come down, descend. 

descendre & un hétel, to stop or to put up at 
a hotel. 

monter, to go up, to ride. 

désirer, to desire, to wish. 


& pied, on foot. 
& cheval, on horseback. 


1 For a fuller treatment of this subject, see Lesson 97. 


Position of Adjectives 93 


1. Apportez-nous, s’il vous plait, de meilleur vin, de 
VYeau chaude, et du sucre. 2. Votre cousine prétait 
autrefois 4 ma sceur des livres allemands qui étaient trés 
intéressants et aussi trés amusants. 3. Nous avons de 
bonne encre rouge. 4. Désirez-vous une table ronde 
ou carrée? 5. Je désire une table ronde, monsieur. 
6. Voila un homme aveugle. 7. Est-il sourd aussi? 
8. Ces deux petites filles sont muettes. 9. La langue 
italienne est beaucoup plus facile que/la langue alle- 
mande. 10, Ce pauvre homme a peydu la main droite. 
11. Montez-vous quelquefois 4 cheyal? 12. Nous avons 
de bon pain et de bonne viande. /13. Dans le mot gauche, 
il y a une lettre muette. 





Do you desire hot water or cold water ? esire 

ome hot water. 6, Sh e the right hand. ow 
the left hand, pledSe. Miss K. deaf ? he is 
also dumb and blind. ow do you find the German 
anguage 3 I find it difficult, butvery interesting. 
Where do you put up in Paris ? ost always stop at 
ne hotel Continental. Did you ride horseback 
when you were young? Yes, I rode sometimes in (@) 


came back on horseback. This table is round, that 
one is square. 15. How m@fhy American newspapers 
did you receive when you were in,London? 16. We 
always received three or four. yoy wish (desire) 
two cups of cold milk, please. is tr you have no tea 
or (neither . . . nor) coffee, bring us hot water, cream, 


and some sugar. 19. We were looking at the city hall 
when your friends found us. 


the Bois de Boulogne. Gays away on foot and 





94 





(1) The comparative is formed by placing plus, more, 
moins, Jess, or aussi, as, before the adjective. After a 
negative si usually takes the place of aussi. 


Elle est moins gauche que son amie, she is less awkward than her 
Sriend. 

Elle est aussi jolie que son frére, mais elle n’est pas si polie, she 
is as pretty as her brother, but she is not so polite. 


Than before a number is expressed by de. 


J’ai plus de cing livres, J have more than jive books. 
Vous en avez plus de dix, n’est-ce pas ? 
You have more than ten, have you not ? 


(2) The superlative of an adjective is formed by 
placing the definite article or the possessive adjective 
before plus or moins of the comparative. 


jeune, young; plus jeune, younger; le plus jeune, the youngest. 

intéressant, interesting ; moins intéressant, /ess interesting ; le moins 
intéressant, the /east interesting. 

Charles et Jean sont leurs plus chers amis, Charles and John are their 
dearest friends, 


Three adjectives have irregular comparative and su- 
perlative forms: 


bon, good; meilleur, better; le meilleur, the best. 
: _ [plus petit, smaller ; le plus petit, the smallest. 
petit, small { utagee: less ; le moindre, the least. 
plus mauvais, worse, poorer; le plus mauvais, the 
worst, the poorest. 
pire, worse, more evil, more wicked ; le pire, the worst, 
the most evil, the most wicked. 


mauvais, bad; 


(3) A superlative following the noun requires the 
definite article. 


Comparison of Adjectives 95 


La grammaire la plus facile, the easiest grammar. 
Mes livres les plus intéressants, my most interesting books. 


(4) Jn after a superlative is expressed by de. 


Sa mére est la femme la plus riche de la ville. 
His mother is the richest woman in the town. 


poli, polite. fort, strong. 

fidéle, faithful. habile, clever. 

célébre, celebrated. la rue, the street. 
magnifique, magnificent. le monde, the world, 
excellent, excellent. le souvenir, the remembrance. 


1. Tout le monde aime les hommes forts et polis. 
2. Le chien est l’ami le plus fidéle de Vhomme. 3. Ma 
mére est la meilleure femme du monde. 4. Voila de 
trés bon beurre ; il est beaucoup meilleur que celui que 
vous avez acheté ce matin. 5. Ces aiguilles sont plus 
mauvaises que les miennes. 6. Les vétres sont excel- 
lentes. 7. Votre petit chat blanc est le plus joli de tous 
les chats. 8. Louise est la jeune fille la plus aimable 
de l’école. 9. Vos sceurs sont trés habiles; elles sont 
plus habiles que les miennes. 10. OU vend-on des sou- 
venirs? 11. Onn’en vend pasici. 12. Voila de belle 
dentelle. 13. Cette église est la plus célébre de Paris, 
et peut-étre du monde entier. 


2) His friend is the best man in the world. 2. The 
hotels at which (where) he used to put up were the finest 
and largest in the city, perhaps inthe country. 3. Every- 
body likes faithfulfriends. 4. Haveyouany? 6, Have 
youmorethanI? 6.I have more than twenty. 7. She 
is not so clever as her brother. 8. My best friends live 
in Chicago. 9. Her father was one of the most cele- 
brated men in the country. 10. Your cousin Mary is 
the merriest and most polite of all my pupils. 11. Are 
you stronger than John? 12.1 am taller, but I am not 


96 C’est and Ce Sont 


so strong. 13. John is the strongest boy in the class. 
14. These pens are good, mine are better, but my brother’s 
are the best. 15. He lives in the highest house in the 
street. 16. I have not the slightest (least) remembrance 
of those men. 17. I have fewer souvenirs than you, but 
yours are less interesting than mine, I think. 18. His 
are the least interesting. 19. I have accepted her gift, 
but without the least pleasure. 


45 
C’est and ce sont. 


(1) He is, she is, it is, and they are, are generally ex- 
pressed by c’est and ce sont before a noun, a pronoun, or 
a superlative. 


C’est Henri, it is Henry. Ce sont mes fréres, it is (those 
are) my brothers. 
C’est la femme la plus riche du pays, Ce sont les plus hauts de nos 
she is the richest woman in the country. arbres, those are the highest 
%/f our trees. 
C’est le mien (la mienne), it is mine. Ce sont les miens (les miennes), 
they (those) are mine. 


C’est celui (celle) qu’il a, it is that Ce sont ceux (celles) qu’il vend, 
one (the one) he has. it ts those that he sells. 

C’est votre amie qui est partie, n’est- Ce ne sont pas nos amies qui 
ce pas, it is your friend who has gone sont parties, it is not our 
away, ¢s it not? | Jriends who have gone away. 
(2) The forms of the personal pronouns used with 

prepositions (Lesson 26) are also used alone or after c’est 


or ce sont. * 


C’est moi, it zs I, C’est nous, zt is we. 
C’est toi, zt zs thou (you). C’est vous, it zs you. 
C’est lui, it is he. Ce sont eux, it is they (m.). 


C’est elle, it is she, Ce sont elles, it is they (f.). 


C’est and Ce Sont 97 


INTERROGATIVE. 


Est-ce nous ? is it we? 
Est-ce vous ? is it you ? 


Est-ce moi ? is it [? 

Est-ce toi? is it thou (you) ? 
Est-ce lui? is it he ? Est-ce eux? is it they (m.) ? 
Est-ce elle % is it she? Est-ce elles ? is it they (f.) ? 


Observe that c’est is used before all of these forms, except the third 
person plural affirmative: ce sont eux (elles), but est-ce eux (elles) ? 


(3) C’est may be used before any masculine adjective 
referring to something already mentioned. 
C’est bon! that is good! Allright! C'est possible, it ’s possible. 
C’est juste, it is right. C’est vrai, it is true. 
Que c’est beau! how beautiful that is! 
Notice also the following expressions : 


C’est dommage, that’s a pity, a shame, too bad. 

C’est & vous, ¢¢’s your turn, 

C’est pour lui, it is for him. | 
C’est pourquoi je l’admire, that is why I admire him. 


le monsieur, the gentleman. 
les messieurs, the gentlemen. 
la dame, the lady. 

la demoiselle, the young lady. 
le courage, courage. 
l’ambition (f.), ambition. 

le talent, talent. 

la conduite, conduct. 

les maniéres (f.), manners. 
l’expérience (f.), experience, 
Vouvrage (m.), the work. 


le roman, the novel, 
un écrivain, a writer, 
un auteur, an author. 
illustre, i//ustrious. 
possible, possible, 
impossible, impossible. 
inutile, useless. 
ordinaire, ordinary, common. 
juste, just, right. 

vrai, true. 

admirer, to admire, 


frapper, to strike, to knock. 


1. Qui est 14? 2, Est-ce vous, Paul? 3. Oui, c’est 


moi, 
sieurs ? 
ses deux fils. 


ville? 10. C’est Monsieur Gaillard. 
7 


4, Qui frappait? 5. Moi. 
7. Ce sont nos amis. 
9. Qui est l’avocat le plus célébre de la 


6. Qui sont ces mes- 
8. C’est notre voisin et 


11. C’est le plus 


98 C'est and Ce Sont 


illustre de tous nos avocats. 12. Qui sont ces dames ? 
13. Ce sont leurs sceurs. 14. Qui sont ces enfants ? 
15. Ce sont les siens, son fils et sa fille. 16. New York 
est une grande ville; c’est la plus grande de ce pays. 
17. Londres est la plus grande du monde. 18. C’est a 
toi que je parle, mon enfant. 19. Il y a beaucoup de 
mots ordinaires dans cette grammaire. 20. A-t-il du 
courage? 21.I1 en a beaucoup. 22. Ces arbres sont 
presque aussi beaux que ceux de votre jardin. 23. C’est 
sans le moindre plaisir que je réponds &@ leurs lettres. 
24, C’est dommage. 25. C’est vrai. 


(A) 1.ITamfondofhorses, 2. That’sgood! 3. They 
are more useful than dogs. 4. They are the most useful 
of animals. 5. Neither cats nor dogs are useless. 
6. There is Mary; she is the youngest of my friends. 
7. Is it she who lives in that large square house near _ 
your uncle’s? 8. He had courage, talent, and experi- 
ence, but he never had any manners. 9. He had too 
much ambition. 10. That is too bad. 11. It is pleas- 
ure that they seek. 12. That is why they are never at 
home. 138.Is it possible? 14. Who has a penknife? 
15. I. 16. Who is the author of that novel? 17. It is 
a writer that I admire greatly (much). 18. Is it he? 
19. It is not he, itis she. 20. It’s impossible. 21. Is 
itthey? 22. Yes,itisthey. 23. Who are those boys ? 
24. They are John, Charles, and Gustave. 25.1 do not 
admire their conduct. 26. It’s money they want (de- 
sire), 27. It is with pleasure that I accept this gift. 


(B) 1. Who is that gentleman? 2. Is it your friend ? 
3.Is it Henry? 4.Isn’t it he? 65. Who is that 
young lady? 6. It is Mary, isn’t it? 7. Who is it? 
8. Who are those gentlemen? 9, Is it to him or to me 


Relative and Interrogative Pronouns 99 


that you are speaking? 10. Is it to her or to you that 
Iam speaking now? 11. Is it their turn? 12. Is it 
John’s? 138. Have you ever read Walter Scott’s works? 
14, How do you like (find) them? 15. Is he a cele- 
brated author? 16. Haven’t you read Ivanhoe? 
17. Is it possible? 18. Here is an interesting novel; is 
it yours? 19. Are you sure of it? 20. Is it the one 
you bought at Brentano’s? 21. It is a French novel, 
isn’t it? 22. Who is knocking? 23.1s it you? 
24. Do you admire courage? 25. Do we (on) admire 
courage more or less than talent ? 


46 
Who, whom, whose. 


(1) The nominative who is qui for either the relative 
or the interrogative pronoun. 

La femme qui est entrée, the woman who came in. 

Qui est 14? who is there ? 


C’est vous qui avez fait cette boite, it is you who made that box. 
C’est nous qui demeurons ici, it is we who live here. 


Notice the agreement of the verb with the antecedent of qui. 
(2) The objective case, whom, is que for the relative 
pronoun, and qui for the interrogative. 


Les dames que vous avez rencontrées, sont mes meilleures amies. 
The ladies whom you met are my best friends. 
Qui avez-vous vu? whom did you see? 


(3) The interrogative whom, governed by a ep 
tion, is expressed by qui. 


A qui parlez-vous? to whom are you speaking ? 
Pour qui travaille-t-il ? for whom is he working? 


100 elative and Interrogative Pronouns 


(4) The interrogative whose! is expressed by & qui (to 
whom) and the verb étre. 


A qui est cette maison? Whose house is this? To whom does this house 
belong ? 

Elle est & mon voisin, 

C’est & mon voisin, fi is my neighbor’s, it belongs to my neighbor. 

C’est celle de mon voisin, 

Elle est & moi, 


: it is mine, it belongs to me. 
C’est la bieakeh) : - 


la bibliothéque, the library. la lampe, the lamp. 

le salon, the drawing-room, the parlor. le paquet, the package, packet. 
une ombrelle, a parasol, une allumette, a match. 

un manchon, a muff. allumer, fo light. 

la fourrure, the fur. amuser, to amuse. 

le bracelet, the bracelet. arroser, to water. 

le bouton, the button. oublier, to forget. 

un dollar, a dollar. laborieux, industrious. 

la clef, the key. occupé, busy, occupied. 

le théatre, the theatre. free, at liberty, 


l’opéra (m.), the opera. is A, Phat disengaged. 
on dit, they say, it is said. 


1. A qui est cette ombrelle? 2. Elle est 4 ma cou- 
sine. 3. A quisontces manchons? 4. Ce sont ceux de 
Marie et de Louise. 5. Qui est Ia dame que j’ai vue 
hier soir au théftre avec vous? 6. Vous l’avez rencon- 
trée bien des fois. 7. L’avez-vous oubliée? 8. Voila 
des fourrures magnifiques. 9. Ce sont celles de 
madame §. 10. Nos amis étaient trés laborieux. 
11. Quand nous sommes allés chez eux, ils étaient oc- 
cupés. 12. Ils n’étaient jamais libres. 13. C’est dom- 
mage, n’est-ce pas? 14. Est-ce vous qui. les amusez 
tant? 15. C’est nous quiles amusons toujours. 16. Ce 


1 For the relative whose, see Lesson 54. 


Relative and Interrogative Pronouns 101 


sont eux que nous amusons. 17. Avec qui étes-vous 
sorti hier soir ? 


(A) 1. Here is a beautiful bracelet; whose is it? 
2. From whom did you buy it? 3.1 did not buy it. 
4. She has an uncle whom she has never seen. _ 5. Is it 
he who bought it? 6. Yes,he isthe one. 7. Is it you 
who lost thiskey? 8.ItisnotI. 9. Show it to John. 
10. It is his perhaps. 11. No, itisn’t his. 12. Where 
did you findit? 13. I found two of them in the library 
this morning. 14. Those are the keys to (de) my house. 
15. With whom did you go to the opera last evening ? 
16. I went with my father. 17. Light the lamp in the 
parlor, please. 18.I have no matches. 19. Here is a 
package of them. 20. They (on) have already lighted 
the fire (made some fire). 21. Who is the richest man 
intown? 22. They say that it is he. 


(B) 1. Whose umbrella is that? 2. For whom is this 
one? 3.Is it the one I bought several days ago? 
4. To whom does this handkerchief belong? 5. It is 
your own (yours),isn’tit? 6. Has your sister forgotten 
the parasol she borrowed? 7. Whoseisit? 8. Whose 
gardens are those? 9. Are you busy or unoccupied this 
morning? 10. This house is very high; is it the high- 
est in the street? 11. Whose is that pencil? 12. To 
whom do those books belong? 13. It is said that your 
neighbors have gone away; is it true? 14. Here-is a 
little gold button; who has lost one? 15. Here is 
a dollar for you; you accept it,do you not? 16. Does 
that question amuse you? 17. From whom have you 
received a letter ? 


102 The Future Tense 


47 
The Future Tense. 
The future of a verb may be formed by adding -ai to 
the infinitive. 


INFINITIVE. FUTURE. 
porter, to carry. je porterai, Z shall carry. 
finir, to finish, je finirai, Z shall finish. 
recevoir. je recevrai. 
vendre. je vendrai. 


Drop oi from the infinitive ending of the third con- 
jugation and e from that of the fourth, when adding the 
terminations of the future. Avoir and étre are irregular: 

avoir, ° jaurai. 
étre. je serai. 

The terminations of the future are alike in all verbs: 
“Ai, -A8, -a, -Ons, -ez, -ont. 


FUTURE OF porter. 


je porterai. nous porterons. 
tu porteras, vous porterez. 
il portera. ils porteront. 


Conjugate the future of each of the above verbs, using 
that of porter as a model. 


un moment, a moment. l’aprés-midi (m. or f.), afternoon. 
le bord, the edge, shore, border. _ bientét, soon. 

la mer, the sea. plus tét, sooner. 
au bord de la mer, at the seashore. tout de suite, immediately, at once. 
demain, to-morrow. prét, ready. 

prochain (adj.), next. fatigué, tired. 


jeudi prochain,! next Thursday. bitn aise, glad. 
la semaine prochaine, next week. cofiter, to cost. 


le mois prochain, next month. réussir, to succeed. 
l'année prochaine, next year. ne (...) plus, no more, no longer, not 
again. 


il y aura, there will be. 
y aura-t-il, will there be? 


1 Compare with dernier, Lesson 24 (4). 


The Future Tense 103 


1. Votre pére arriverademain,j/ensuissir. 2. Aurons- 
nous aujourd’hui les lettres que nous attendons? 3. Vous 
recevrez aussi beaucoup de jolies choses. 4. On vous 
donnera une petite montre, une jolie chaine et un beau 
porte-monnaie avec des piéces dor. 5. Aurai-je aussi un 
cheval blanc? 6. Vous ‘n’aurez pas de cheval; ces 
animaux-la cotitent trés chert 7. Nous ne choisirons 
ni chevaux nichiens. 8. Je pense que nous visiterons 
nos amis francais l’année prochaine. 9. Elle ne rendra 
& Sa cousine ni sa bague nises gants. 10. Ne m’écouterez- 
vous plus? 11. Je vous écouterai et je, vous obéirai. 
12. Etudierez-vous la langue francaise? 13. Vous la 
trouverez la plus belle des langues. 14. Marie sera plus 
belle que sa scour. 15. Vous travaillez trop aujour- 
d’hui, vous serez malade demain. 16. N’étes-vous plus 
fatigué ? 


For Oral Drill.—1. We shall have; we shall be; we 
shall find. 2. He wiil have; he will be; he will find. 
3. You willhave; you willbe; youwillreceive. 4, Shall 
Ihave? ShallI be? ShallIsell? 5. They will have; 
they will be; there will be. 6. We shall have found; 
we shall be found; we shall have arrived. 7. She will 
give; she will succeed; she will sell. 8. They will for- 
get; they will have forgotten; they will be forgotten. 


Repeat the above sentences, making them negative. 


1. Shall you be busy this afternoon? 2. We shall be 
at liberty soon. 3.I shall be glad of it. 4. She will 
answer her friend’s letter to-morrow morning. 5. Shall 
you stay here next month? 6.1 shall be at the sea- 
shore next month. 7. Who will be in the country ? 


1 Notice the adverbial use of cher; hence, no agreement. 


104 The Future Tense 


8. You will find some paper inthis drawer. 9. No, there 
isn’t any more. 10. Your exercises will be much less 
difficult than mine. 11. Mine will no longer be so easy 
as yours. 12. When shall you arrive in Paris? 13.1 
shall be in London on the ist and in Paris on the 11th 
of next month, 14. Work well, and I am sure you will 
succeed. 15. We shall have an American newspaper 
next Saturday. 16. That will be a great pleasure for 
us. 17. We shall have one sooner than you. 18. You 
will receive a letter from your friends next week. 
19. Shall you, come down this morning? 20. Wait a 
moment, I shall be ready soon. 21. We shall wait no 
longer. 22. Whom are you looking for in this street ? 
23. How much do those scissors cost? 24. They cost 
three francs a (/a) pair, 25. They cost dear. 26. Yes, 
they are very dear. 


48 


The future tense must be used after quand, lorsque, 
when, aussitot que, dés que, as soon as, if futurity is 
implied. 

Vous aurez ce livre quand (lorsque) vous aurez écrit votre lettre. 

You will have this book when you have written your letter. 


Vous aurez cet argent aussitét que (dés que) vous arriverez. 
You shall have that money as soon as you arrive. 


Quand must be used for when in direct and indirect questions ; 
otherwise, quand and lorsque are practically interchangeable. 


le bout, the end, the extremity. simple, simple. 

la fin, the end, the conclusion. préférable, preferable. 

la récompense, the reward. quelque chose, something. 
gagner, fo earn, to win quelqu’un, some one, any one. 
casser to break. le temps, the time, the weather. 


agé, old. avoir le temps, to have time. 


The Future Tense 105° 








passer, fo pass, to go by, to fade. passer par, to go through. 
passer le temps, to spend the time. par ici, this way. 
passer chez , to call on ‘ par la, that way, 
passer devant (ou prés de), topass, to alors, then. 
go past something. 


1, Serez-vous bien aise quand vous aurez fini votre 
travail? 2. Louise travaille bien, elle gagnera tous les 
prix. 3. Comment passerons-nous le temps? 4. Nous 
regarderons les animaux dans le Jardin des Plantes. 
5. Dés que leur mére sera ici, elle nous donnera du fil, 
de la soie et des aiguilles. 6. Vous serez un peu plus 
aimable quand vous ne serez plus malade. 7. Aussitdt 
qu’elle sera arrivée, elle aura une tasse de lait, du pain 
et des fraises. 8. Aussitdt qu’elle arrive, elle dit tou- 
jours qu’elle ne restera pas. 9. Elle dit qu’elle n’a 
jamais le temps. 10. Quand nous aurons préparé notre 
legon, nous serons libres. 11. Nous en serons bien aises. 
12. Nous jouerons alors avec plus de plaisir. 13. Quand 
je serai 4 Londres, je passerai chez votre ami, M. Rainer, 
23 Downs Road, Clapton. 14. Voici quelque chose que 
jai acheté pour vous. 15. Quand on passe devant 
quelqu’un, on dit, “ Pardon!” 


(A) 1. When she is here, we always work well. 
2. When they are here, we shall not work any more, 
3. Shall you speak of it? 4.1 shall speak of it only 
once. 5. We shall find these books very interesting, I 
am sure (of it). 6. Won’t you have one? 7. How 
many days shall you stay in Boston? 8. Shall you go 
through Baton Rouge? 9. When will he have finished 
his letters? 10. Will he not finish them at once? 
11. His father and brother are very tall, and he will be 
taller still (still taller) perhaps. 12. When John is 
older, he will win more prizes. 13. Prizes are the re- 


(106 The Future Tense 


wards of labor. 14. The weather is fine to-day, and it 
will be finer to-morrow. 15. Do not take this beautiful 
silk umbrella, — you will lose it. 16. When there are 
fewer words in these rules, they will be simpler. 17. At 
the end of this book one will find many useful words. 
18. He has broken the end of his umbrella. 19. Where 
will one find you next week? 20. Do not look at 
me, look at your book; I shall be here when you have 
finished your sentence. 21. Men fade [away] like 
(comme) flowers. 


(B) 1. Shall you not be at liberty this evening ? 
2. Shall you be busy to-morrow evening? 3. Shall you 
play this afternoon? 4.Shall you not have time ? 
5, Shall you work all the afternoon? 6. How do you 
find the weather to-day? 7. Do you often call on your 
friends? 8. Where willthey benextSunday? 9. Here 
are two roads; shall we choose this one or that one? 
10. When you go’ home this afternoon, shall you go this 
way orthatway? 11. Are you older or younger than I? 
12. Will my pupils stay at home to-morrow? 13. Will 
they be at church or at school? 14, Who will be here 
to-morrow morning? 15. Who will be here on Monday 
next? 16. Who was here last Tuesday? 17. Shall 
we have the forty-ninth or the fiftieth lesson to-morrow ? 
18. Show me your pocket-book. 19. Shall you have 
money enough? 20. How do you spend your time? 
21. Do you work all the time ? 


1 irez, future of aller, to yo. 


Ie eee ee ee ee oe 





at ee Fees oe eS ee 


\ 


Interrogative Adjectives 107 


49 
Interrogative Adjectives. 

The adjective quel, which, what, what a, has the fol- 
lowing forms: 
quel (m.), quels (m.), 
quelle (f.). . PLURAL,| Orelles (£.). 

The noun which quel modifies is usually the next word in the sen- 
tence; with the verb @tre, the noun may stand after the verb. 


SINGULAR, { 


Quel livre avez-vous pris? 

Quel est le nom du livre que vous avez pris? 
le nom, the name. Vaffaire (f.), the affair. 
l’exemple (m.), the example. les affaires, the affairs, business. 
le dictionnaire (m.), the dictionary. ramasser, to collect, to pick up. 
le plancher, the floor. laisser tomber, to let fall, to dropA 
Ie bruit, the noise, the report. 


Quelles fleurs avez-vous prises? Which flowers did you take? 
Quels livres a-t-il lus? What books has he read? 

Quelle femme! What a woman! 

Quel dommage! What a pity! 


1. Dans quelle partie de cette ville demeurez-vous ? 
2. De quel pays @tes-vous ? 3. Sur quelle table a-t-il mis 
mes gants? 4. Quels gants? 5. Ceux que j’ai achetés 
Vantre jour au Bon Marché. 6, Quel grand magasin! 
7. Quels souliers avez-vous choisis? 8, Quelles chan- 
sons choisirez-vous? 9. Je choisirai celles-ci; ce sont 
les meilleures. 10. De quelle chambre a-f-on ouvert les 
fenétres? 11. Quels mouchoirs a-t-il donnés 4 sa sceur ? 
12. Vous avez laissé tomber quelque chose, monsieur. 
13. Merci, madame; c’est ma montre que j’ai laissée 
tomber sur ce plancher de marbre. 14. Vous V’avez 
cassée, n’est-ce pas? 15. Quel dommage! 16. Ra 


1 In laisser tomber, tomber remains unchanged and laisser is conju- 
gated. 


108 Time of Day. Dates : 


massez vos livres, vos crayons et votre papier. 17. Ne 
les laissez pas tomber. 18. Avez-vous entendu ce bruit ? 


1. Whose are these pens? 2. Whatpens? 3. Those 
that some one has dropped on the floor. 4. I dropped 
them a moment ago, they are mine. 5. Pick them up, 
please. 6, I will pick them up immediately. 7. What 
French books have you read? 8, Whose dictionary is 
this? 9. What dictionary? 10. This one. 11. It is 
not mine, it is your own (yours). 12. What a fine book! 
13. Which pen is the best, this one or that? 14. This 
one is much better than the other. 15. Which pens are 
the best? 16. These steel pens are the best. 17. What 
is the name of this book? 18. Who wrote it? 19. Of 
what book are you speaking? 20. What lesson have we 
to-day? 21. What a question! 22. What beautiful 
pictures! 23. Who dropped something? 24. What a 
noise! 25. You do not work enough; that is why you 
do not succeed in your business, 26. What an example! 


50 
Time of Day. Dates. 


(1) Examine the following models for telling the time 
of day: 


Quelle heure est-il ? What time is it? 
Il est une heure, It is one o'clock, 
Il est deux heures, It is two o'clock. 


Il est cing heures et demie, : 
Il est cing heures trente, \ie a8 POR) Pame Fp 


Quatre heures (et) (un) quart, 

Quatre heures quinze (minutes), \ aga atc dee 
Six heures dix, vingt, etc., Six ten, twenty, etc. 
Huit heures cinquante, 


Neuf heures moins dix (minutes), Eight fifty, ten minutes to nine, 





Time af Day. Dates 109 


Il est midi, It is twelve o’clock, noon, 

Tl est midi et demi, It is half-past twelve. 

Il est minuit, It is twelve o'clock, midnight. 
lest minuit moins cing, (Zt is jive minutes to twelve, 
A quelle heure 3 At what time ? 

A huit heures du soir, At eight in the evening. 

A dix heures précises, Promptly at ten o'clock. 
Vers sept heures, About seven o'clock. 


(a) Asin English, any number of minutes may go with the preced- 
ing hour, although after half past, the next hour is usually named /ess 
(moins) the number of minutes. 

(b) Il est or est-il in these expressions is an impersonal verb and is 
therefore invariable. 

{c) O'clock is often omitted in English, but heure or heures is not 
omitted in French. Minutes may be omitted. 

(d) Midi and minuit are used for twelve o'clock. 

(e) Demi is masculine after midi and minuit ; Lesson 23 (8). 

(2) Recall rules for dates, Lesson *24, and observe 
the following expressions : 

Quel jour du mois est-ce aujourd’hui ? 
Quel jour du mois avons-nous ? What day of the month is it 
Quel quantiéme (le combien) du mois|{ to-day? 


est-ce aujourd’hui? 
C’est aujourd’hui le premier février, It is February first. 


Ce sera demain le deux, To-morrow will be the second. 
C’était hier le trente et un janvier, Yesterday was Jan, 31st. 
Elle est revenue le 11 mars, She came back on March 11th. 
Il y a une semaine (ou huit jours), A week ago. 

Ily a une quinzaine (ou quinze jours),! A fortnight ago. 
D’aujourd’bui en huit, A week from to-day. 
D’aujourd’hui en quinze, A fortnight from to-day. 
Vendredi en huit, A week from Friday, 
Samedi en quinze, A fortnight from Saturday. 
En dix-neuf cent six, In 1906. 

En (dans) quel mois? In what month ? . 
Au mois de septembre, In the month of September. 
En septembre, In September. 


1 In the expressions huit jours and quinze jours, the French count as 
one the day from which the time is reckoned. 


110 Conjugation of Aller 


Aller (irregular), to go. 
PRESENT INDICATIVE. ImpPEeRFECT INDICATIVE. Furure. 


je vais, J go, I am going, jallais, 7 went, I was going, j’irai, I shall go 


tuvas. J dogo. tuallais. J usedtogo. tuiras. 
il va. il allait. il ira. 
nous allons, nous allions. nous irons. 
vous allez. vous alliez. vous irez. 
ils vont. ils allaient. ils iront. 
IMPERATIVE. 
SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
va, go. allons, /et us go. allez, go. 


la nuit, the night. la voiture, the carriage. 
la gare, the station, tard, late. 
le train, the train. par, by, through, 


en voiture, in a carriage. 
il est tard, it is /ute. 
par le train de deux heures, by the 2 o’clock train. 


1. Quelle heure est-il? 2. Il est midi cing ou midi 
dix. 3. Il n’est pas encore midi et quart. 4, Elle n’est 
pas partie avec eux; elle est partie plus tard, a 3 heures 
et demie. 5, Nous avons rencontré nos amis ce matin a 
9 heures moins un quart lorsque nous allions a la gare. 
6. Avec qui alliez-vous ala gare? 7. Avec mon pére et 
ma mére; ils sont allés 4 la campagne pour deux ou 
trois mois. 8. De quelle gare sont-ils partis? 9. Ils 
sont partis de la gare du Nord. 10. Irez-vous 4 l’église 
dimanche prochain? 11. J’ai vu votre pére il y a une 
quinzaine. 12.11 arrivera 4 cing heures précises. 
13. Il est maintenant prés de neuf heures. 14. Est-elle 
née en 1897? 15. Elle est née le 7 juillet, 1899. 


1 Tt will be noted that the tenses of aller given here correspond to thoss 
already presented in connection with regular verbs. 


ake 


Conjugation of Aller 111 


(A) 1. We are going home to-morrow. 2. We shall 
be at home before noon. 3. In what month do you go 
to the country? 4. In the month of July. 5. What 
time is it? 6, It is a quarter to two. 7. It is five 
minutes to three. 8. Itis 4.20. 9. To-day we shall go 
home at half-past one. 10. He started for London last 
evening by the 8.10 train. 11. His brother went to 
London too, but he was veryill. 12. He will go home a 
week from to-day. 13.It is already late. 14. What a 
beautiful night! 15. Where were you going last even- 
ing when we met you? 16. We were going to the 
theatre. 17. Do you often go to the theatre? 18. It 
is the of ,190-. 19. Yesterday was the a 
and to-morrow will be the 20. At what time did 
they go away? 21. They went away from the house at 
a quarter to eleven and from the station a half-hour 
later. 22. They came back by the midnight train. 
23. Let us go to church next Sunday. 


(B) 1. What time is it? 2. At what time did you 
come to school this morning? 38. At what hour do you 
gohome? 4. Whatdayofthe monthisthis? 5. What 
day of the week is it? 6. Where shall you go a week 
from Sunday? 7. Do you go to school every day? 
8. Shall we be here a week from Friday? 9. Did you 
go to the country last Saturday ? 10. Did you come 
back by the train, on foot, on horseback, or in a carriage ? 
11. It is already ten o’clock, is it not? 12. Is it noon? 
13, Shall you stay here till three? 14. You go home 
about two o’clock, do you not? 15. Did you get here 
this morning at exactly eight o’clock ? 16. Where were 
you a fortnight ago? 17. How many days are there in 
aweek? 18. Are there seven or eight? 19. But how 
does one say, “ A week ago” ? 














112 Conjugation of Faire 


51 

Seasons. Weather. 
la saison, the season. en (dans) quelle saison, at what season ? 
le printemps, the spring. au printemps, in spring. 
Vété (m.), the summer. en été, in summer. 
V’automne (m.), the autumn. ea automne, in autumn. 
Vhiver (m.), the winter. en hiver, in winter. 
la neige, the snow. le champ, the field, 
la pluie, the rain. le sable, the sand. 
le vent, the wind. la cour, the yard, the court. 


le tonnerre, the thunder. le proverbe, the proverb. 


Faire (irregular), to do, to make. 


PRESENT INDICATIVE. IMPERFECT INDICATIVE. FUTURE. 
je fais, J do, I am doing, je faisais. je ferai, Z shall do or 
tu fais. [J make or am making. tu faisais, tu feras. [make. 
il fait. il faisait. il fera. 
nous faisons. nous faisions. nous ferons. 
vous faites. vous faisiez. vous ferez. 
ils font. ils faisaient. ils feront. 
IMPERATIVE, 
SINGULAR. PLURAL. 


fais, make, do, faisons, let us make or do. faites, make, do. 


Observe the following impersonal constructions: 


Quel temps fait-il? What kind of weather is it? 
Il fait beau (temps),! It is fine (weather). 

Il faisait mauvais hier, It was bad weather yesterday. 
Il faisait de la pluie, It was rainy.. 

Tl fera froid demain, It will be cold to-morrow. 
Ilfaitdu vent, . It is windy. 

Il fait chaud, It is warm. 

Il fait froid, It is cold. 

Il neige, It snows. 


1 In Lesson 48, we had le temps used as the subject of the verb étre. It 
cannot be the subject of any form of the verb faire. 


Li Ss .|h mcehlUCe - ~~ Fy ee ee 
1 


a a 
, 





Conjugation of Faire a 


Il tonne, It thunders; 

Il éclaire, It lightens. 

Il gréle, It hails, 

1 pleut (pres. ind. of pleuvoir, irreg.), Jt rains. 

Il pleuvait (imperf. ind.), It was raining, it rained. 
Il pleuvra (future), It will rain. 


1. Le printemps est une belle saison. 2. C’est la 
saison des fleurs. 3. Quand il pleut, prenez votre para- 
pluie. 4. D’ot tombe la pluie? 5. Quand il pleut ou 
quand il neige, on dit qu’il fait mauvais (temps). 6. Le 
temps est mauvais. 7. Voici un proverbe: aprés la 
pluie, le beau temps. 8, En quel mois sommes-nous a 
présent ? 9. Les arbres ont des feuilles en été; mais 
en hiver ils n’en ont plus. 10. Combien de jours a ce 
mois-ci? 11.Combien en. aura le mois prochain? 
12. Que font les enfants d’une école? 13. Notre cour 
est belle tout l’été. 14. Tout-le monde aime les champs 
au printemps, ils sont si verts. 15. Vous faites trop de 
bruit; n’en faites plus. 


1. Name the seasons. 2. Do you like all the seasons ? 
3. Why does one love the spring? 4. Where do people 
go in summer? 68. Does it snow in summer or in 
autumn? (Use mi... niin answer.) 6. When does 
itsnow? 7. Do youlike the snow? 8. Is there much 
in this part ofthe country? 9. Isit raining? 10. Was 
it raining this morning when you came to school? 
11. Did you open your umbrella? 12. Umbrellas are 
very useful when it rains, aren’t they? 13. Is it cold 
here? 14,Is it too warm? 15.In what season is 
it cold? 16. What season is this (in what season are 
we)? 17.Is it windy to-day? 18. What kind of 
weather is itinJuly? 19. Does it often thunder in the 
winter? 20. What do the children do? at the seashore ? 


1 See 12th sentence in French exercise of this Lesson. 
8 


114 — Ages. Dimensions 


21. Where do they play? 22. Where do they play in 
the country ? 23. Are the pupils playing in the yard or 
are they working in their class-room? 24. You are 
making a great deal of noise, — what are you doing? (IL 
am closing the window.) 25. Is autumn the season of 
fruits or flowers ? 

52 
Ages. Dimensions. 
(1) In asking or stating ages, the following construc- 
tions are used: 


Quel age avez-vous ? How old are you? 

J’ai vingt ans, I am twenty years old, 

Quel fge a votre cousine? How old is your cousin? 

Elle a quinze ans, et son She is fifteen years old, and her little 
petit frére en a dix,! brother is ten, 

Elle est agée de quinze ans, She is fifteen, 

Elle est plus agée que lui = She is five years older than he. 
de cing ans, 

A Vage de quarante ans,! At the age of forty. 


(2) Dimensions are expressed as follows: 


De quelle hauteur est cette église ? 
Quelle est la hauteur de cette église ? 


Une église haute de cent pieds, A church one hundred feet in height. 

Une maison d@’une largeur detrente pieds, A house thirty feet wide. 

Un jardin de cent pieds de longueur,? A garden a hundred feet long. 

L’escalier est large de dix pieds, 

L’escalier a dix pieds de largeur,? The staircase is ten feet broad. 

L’escalier a une largeur de dix pieds, 

Cette table a six pieds de longueur sur quatre de largeur, -This table is 
six feet by four. 

Cet arbre-ci est plus haut que celui-la de vingt pieds, This tree is twenty 
feet taller than that. 


\ What is the height of this church? 


1 Observe that the years must always be expressed im French. If ans 
has already occurred in the sentence, en takes its place. 

2 Long, large, and haut may be used for longueur, largeur, and hauteur 
tn this construction; épais and profond are not so used instead of épaisseur 
and profondeur. 


—e 
— 
’ 


Conjugation of Savoir 115 


Savoir (irregular), to know (a fact). 


Present Inpicative. Imperrect INDICATIVE. Furure. 
je sais, J know, je savais, J knew. je saurai, J shall know, 
tu sais. tu savais. tu sauras. 

il sait. il savait, il saura. 
nous savons. nous savions. nous saurons. 
vous savez. vous saviez. vous saurez. 
ils savent. ils savaient. ils sauront. 
un édifice, a building. lage (m.), the age. 
l’escalier (m.), the staircase. les dimensions (f.), dimensions. 
long (m.), les la hauteur, the height. 
longue tt. g la longueur, the length. 
large, broad, wide, la largeur, the breadth, the width. 
profond, deep. la profondeur, the depth. 
épais (m.), \ thick: l’épaisseur (f.), the thickness, 
épaisse (f.), le pouce, the thumb,.the inch. 


vraiment, truly, really. 


1. On a b&ti encore un grand édifice dans la rue du 
Temple. 2. Vraiment? je ne le savais pas. 3. Est-ce 
une église ou une école? 4. C’est une école. 5. Quel 
grand édifice! 6. De quelle hauteur est-il? 7. Il a 
cent pieds de hauteur. 8. Est-ce que cette école est 
déja occupée? 9. Combien d’éléves y at-il? 10. [ly 
en a six cents. 11. Quel Age ont-ils? 12. Les plus 
agés ont peutétre dix-sept ou dix-huit ans, et les moins 
agés en ont treize ou quatorze. 13. Quel fge avez-vous ? 
14, J’ai dix-neuf ans et demi. 15. Savez-vous quel fige 


avotre sour? 16, Elle a seize ans, et mon frére en a 


treize. 17. Je ne sais pas pourquoi nos amis ne sont 
pas encore revenus. 18. Nous le saurons bientdt, je 
pense. 


1. How high is this table? 2. It is three feet high. 


3. What are the other dimensions? 4. It is four feet 
wide by five and a half feet long. 5. I knew that it was 


116 The Interrogative Pronoun Lequel 


a foot longer than ours. 6. Here is another table; this 
one is thirty inches in height. 7. What a pretty little 
box! 8. It is a square one, isn’tit? 9. This water is 
very deep. 10. What is its depth? 11. It is said that 
it is a hundred feet deep. 12. I know that it is over 
(more than) forty feet in depth. 13. How old are you? 
14, Don’t you know how old I am (my age)? 15.1 
know that you are two or three years older than I. 
16. How old is your brother? 17.Is he only six? 
18. He is over six; he will be seven the first of next 
month. 19. Is Charles fourteen or fifteen years old? 
20. He is neither fourteen nor fifteen, he is only twelve 
andahalf. 21. Really? Are yousureofit? 22. Yes, 
sir, I know it. 23. What is the length of this room ? 
24. What a thick book ! 


53 


The interrogative pronoun lequel, which, which one, 
has the following forms: 


SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
MASCULINE. FEMININE. MASCULINE. FEMININE. 
lequel, which, which one. laquelle. lesquels. lesquelles. 
duquel, of which, of which one. de laquelle. desquels. desquelles. 
auquel, to which, to which one. & laquelle. auxquels. auxquelles. 


Observe the difference between the use of quel (adjective) and 
lequel (pronoun) : 


Quel homme? Which man? 
Quel est ce livre? What is this book ? 
Lequel de ces hommes? Which of these men? 


Dire (irregular), to say, to tell. 


PRESENT INDICATIVE. Impf£RFectT INDICATIVE. | Fourure. 
je dis, J say, am saying, jedisais, J was saying, I said, je dirai, J shall 
tu dis. I do say. tu disais. J used to say. tu diras. [say. 
il dit. il disait. il dira. 





Conjugation of Dire 117 


nous disons. nous disions. nous dirons. 
vous dites. vous disiez. vous direz. 
ils disent. ils disaient. ils diront. 
IMPERATIVE. 
SINGULAR. PLURAL, 
dis, say. disons, /et us say. dites, say. 

une personne, a person. absent, absent. 

une jeune personne, a young lady. garder, to guard, to keep. 

la jeune fille,! the girl. emporter, to carry away or off. 

les jeunes gens, the young men. remporter, to carry buck, to win. 

le miroir, the mirror, envoyé, sent (past part.). 

le fauteuil, the arm-chair. bien (adv.), well. 

sauvage, wild. mieux (adv.), better. 

domestique, domestic. le mieux (adv.), best. 


aimer mieux, to like better, to prefer. 


Notice: (1) The adverb bien is irregularly compared. (2) In the 
superlative of an adverb, le is invariable. (3) In the idiom aimer mieux, 
mieux is not usually separated from aimer, except: by a second negative 
such as pas, jamais, plus, etc. 


1. Lequel de ces jeunes gens est sourd? 2. Dites- 
vous que c’est celui qui est prés de la table? 3. La- 
quelle de ces jeunes personnes est votre cousine ? 
4, Elle n’est pas ici, elle est sortie. 5, Duquel de ces 
romans parliez-vous? 6. Disiez-vous que vous aimiez 
mieux celui-ci? 7. De laquelle de ces jeunes filles 
avez-vous regu ce joli miroir? 8. De Jeanne; c’est la 
plus chére de mes amies. 9. A laquelle de ces jeunes 
personnes a-t-il envoyé les choses qu’il a achetées ce 
matin? 10. De quelles jeunes personnes parlez-vous ? 
11. Je parle de celles que nous avons vues 1’été dernier 4 
la campagne. 12. Auxquels de ces messieurs doivent- 
ils de argent? 13. Lequel de ces deux écrivains aimez- 


1 Fille, daughter, girl, is rarely used in the latter sense without an 
adjective. ; 


118 Interrogative Pronouns 


vous le mieux? 14. J’aime mieux celui qui a écrit Les 
Misérables. 15, Moi aussi. 16. Tout le monde aussi, 
nest-ce pas? 17. Cela va sans dire. . 


For Oral Drill.—1. 1am going; lam making. 2. Are 
you doing? Are you saying? 3.Is he not going? 
Is he not making? 4. Who is making? Who is 
going? 5. Whosays? Who knows? 6. Do you go? 
Do you know? 7. They are saying; they are doing. 
8. We never know; we never do. 9. They always say ; 
they always go. 10. Does she ever know? 


Change the tenses of the above sentences to the imper- 
fect (I was going, I was making, efc.); then repeat in the 
future (I shall go, I shall make, eéc.). 


(A) 1. Here are six hats; which one is the best? 
2. I do not know which one is the best, but I know which 
one I like the best. 3. There are a great many pupils 
in that school. 4. They say itis our neighbor’s children 
who carry off all the prizes. 5. Who says it? 6. The 
pupils say it. 7. Which ones? 8. Which of those 
arm-chairs is the highest? 9. This is much higher than 
the others. 10. Which [of them] shall you choose ? 
11. I prefer this one. 12. So do I. 13. Which of 
these needles shall you keep? 14. This one; carry 
away the others. 15. Which of the horses they have 
bought are the strongest and finest? 16. My father 
says that these, to which the man is giving some water, 
are the best. 17. How many persons are there here ? 


(B) 1. Here are several pens; which is yours ? 
2. Which is mine? 3. There are six books on my 
table; arethey yours? 4. Whosearethey? 5. Which 
of these pencils is yours? 6. Haven’t you any? 


Relative Pronouns 119 


7. Here are two; which do you prefer? 8. Do you like 
wild animals? 9. Name some. 10. Which ones do 
you like best? 11. What domestic animals do” you 
like? 12. Do you know which are the most useful 
to man? 13. Which? 14. Do you prefer dogs to 
eats? 15. Do you know why? 16. Shall I tell why ? 
17. Which of the rooms of this building is the largest ? 
18. All of the boys are here; which of the girls are 
absent? 19. Which one of my pupils is standing? 
20. Which insects make honey? 21. Does this house 
belong to you? 22. Which of these sentences is 
the easiest? 23. And you, sir, what do you say? 
24. Which one is the shortest? ~ 25. Which of my 
pupils are the most industrious ? 26, Do you know it ? 


54 
Lequel (relative); dont. 


(1) We have seen (Lessons 17 and 46) that the nom- 
inative case of the relative pronoun is qui, and the ac- 
cusative que. 

The relative pronoun which after a preposition is 
lequel (laquelle, lesquels, lesquelles). 


Ou est le crayon avec lequel j’ai écrit cette lettre ? 
Where is the pencil with which I wrote this letter ? 
Voici la table sur laquelle j’ai mis votre porte-monnaie. 
Here is the table on which I put your purse. 
(2) Ou, to which, in which, where, is frequently used 
for 4 or‘dans and a relative, referring to place and time. 


La maison ou nous sommes allés, The house to which we went. 


La ville ou il demeure, The city in which he lives. 
Le moment ol elle est partie, Ze moment at which (or when) she 
started, 


Notice: d’ot = whence. 


120 Corjugation of Vow 


(3) When of which, of whom, or whose are not inter- 
rogative, they may be expressed by dont for both gen- 
ders and numbers, instead of duquel, de laquelle, desquels, 
desquelles, or instead of de qui (persons only). 


Apportez-moi le livre dont j’ai parlé, bring me the book of which I spoke. 
L’homme dont la fille est arrivée, the man whose daughter has arrived, 


La femme dont (de qui, de laquelle) j’ai vu le fils,! 
The woman whose son I have seen. 


(4) If the object possessed is dependent upon a prep- 
osition, then duquel, de laquelle, etc., or de qui (persons 
only), must be used instead of dont. | 


L’homme du fils duquel (de qui) nous parlions, the man of whose son 
we were speaking. 


Voir (irregular), to see. 


PRESENT INDICATIVE. IMPERFECT INDICATIVE. Future. 

je vois, J see, 1 do see, je voyais, J saw, I used to see, je verrai, I shall 
tu vois. Jam seeing. tu voyais. I was seeing.  tuverras. [see. 
il voit. il voyait. - il verra. 

nous voyons. nous voyions. nous velrons. 
vous voyez. vous voyiez. vous verrez. 

ils voient. ils voyaient. ils verront. 


IMPERATIVE. 
SINGULAR, | PLURAL. 
vois, see. voyons, /et us see. voyez, see. 
l’adresse (f.), the address, le toit, the roof. 
la malle, the trunk. sacrifier, to sacrifice. 
de temps en temps, from (time to time. 


1. Montrez-moi la rue dans laquelle vous avez perdu 
votre chien. 2. Voila le livre dont je parlais hier. 


1 In a relative clause introduced by dont, the noun object must follow 
the verb: homme dont j’ai trouvé le chapeau. 


ee ae 


ras 


Relative Pronouns apa | 


3. Ou a-t-on mis la feuille de papier sur laquelle vous 


~ avez écrit votre nom et votre adresse? 4. Quelqu’un l’a 


laissée dans la petite chambre ou vous avez mis votre 
malle. 5.Ou est la maison dont vous avez parlé? 
6. La voila; n’en voyez-vous pas le toit? 7. Voici le 
couteau avec lequel j’ai coupé le pain. 8. Ou sont les 
deux plumes avec lesquelles ils ont écrit leurs lettres ? 
9. Je ne les yois pas. 10. Le garcon dont j’ai emprunté 
la grammaire est le neveu de Monsieur B, 11. Ou 
voit-on des animaux sauvages? 12. On en trouve beau- 
coup dans le jardin ou nous irons demain. 13. La 
maison d’ou elle est sortie est une des plus jolies de la 
ville. 14. La dame au fils de laquelle j’ai prété mes 
livres frangais, est amie de ma mére, 15. Montrez-moi 
le tiroir ol. vous avez mis mes journaux et mes lettres. 


For Oral Drill.—1.I see you; I see them. 2. Do 
you see me? Do you not see me? 3. Have you seen 
us? Have you seen them? 4. Shall you see him? 
Shall you not see her? 5, Had you seen her? Had 
she seen you? 6, Let us see them; -let us not see 
them. 7. You will have seen them; you will not have 
seen them. 8. You used to see us; they used to see 
you. 9. Shall I see you? Shall we see them? 


1. Where are the pens with which you wrote your 
letters? 2. The table upon which you will see your 
letters and newspapers is in the little room near 
your own. 3. Show us the books of which you spoke to 
my sister. 4. When I was in New York, I used often 
to see the man of whom you are speaking. 5. Did you 
know that he was here? 6. The ladies whom we saw 
from time to time are also here this afternoon. 7. Do 
you see them now? §8.I do not see them, but they 
were here five minutes ago. 9. Tell me, please, the 


122 Relatives and Interrogatives 


name of the city in which they live. 10. Shall I see you 
at my house next Saturday? 11. No, Miss Barthet; but 
a week from Sunday you will see me at church. 12. Of 
what church are you speaking? 13.1 am speaking of 
the one the roof of which we see from this window. 
14. Shall we see the prize for which you have sacrificed 
so much time? 15. When you go to the country next 
summer, you will see the large white house in which I 
was born and where I lived when I was young. 16. You 
will also see the old barn in which the boys used to play. 
17. It was there that we used to spend most of the 
time. 18. Do you know where we live now? 19.1 
know in what street, but I do not know in what house. 
20. Where did you put my souvenirs? 21. I put them 
into the trunk. 22. Into what trunk? 23. Into the one 
on which you have put your address. 24. We arrived 
at the moment when he was finishing his work. 


55 
Ce qui, ce que. 


(1) When the pronoun what means that which, it is 
expressed by ce qui, if what is the subject; by ce que, if 
it is the object. 


Donnez-moi ce que vous avez, give me what you have. 

Ce qui est vrai est bon, what is true is good. 

Dites-moi ce que c’est, tell me what it is. 

Ce qui m’amuse, c’est ce tableau, what amuses me is this picture. 

Ce qui m’amuse, c’est ce qu’il a dit, what amuses me is what hehas said. 
Celui qui est arrivé, (c’)est mon pére, he who has come is my father. 


Notice that in some of these examples ce is used to repeat the pre- 
ceding subject. This is the usual construction when the subject is a 
clause, especially if without the ce the meaning of the spoken sentence 
would not be clear. 








Relatives and Interrogatives: 123 


Tout ce qui, tout ce que. 

(2) Everything that or all that (sing.) is expressed 

by tout ce qui, if ¢iat is the subject; by tout ce que, if 
that is the object. 

Donnez-moi tout ce qui est sur la table, give me everything that is on 


the table. 
Donnez-moi tout ce que vous avez, give me all you have, 


Quoi. 


(3) Quoi, what, may be either a relative pronoun or 
an interrogative. It never refers to persons and is gen- 
erally used with a preposition. It is also used alone. 

De quoi parlez-vous, of what are you speaking ? 

Voila de quoi je parle, that is what I am speaking of. 
Quoi! il est parti? What! he has gone? 

Tl n’a pas de quoi payer, he has n’t anything to pay with, 


there isn't anything worth mentioning 
Il n’y a pas de quoi (parler), i sesadiiie Iiibn taandaoleamed ; 


Notice also the expression un je ne sais quoi, a certain indefinable 
something. 
Qu’est-ce qui. 

(4) We have seen that the nominative case of the 
interrogative pronoun who is qui. The nominative of 
the interrogative what is qu’est-ce qui. 

Qui est arrivé, who has arrived? 

Qu’est-ce qui est arrivé, what has happened? 

Que. 

(5) Que, either relative or interrogative, is used only 

as the direct object of a verb. 


Que dites-vous, what do you say? 
Qu’est-ce qu'il a fait, what did he do? 


1 In reply to thanks, You are welcome is expressed by Il n’y a pas de 
quoi or Ce n’est pas la peine-. 


124 Relatives and Interrogatives 


arriver, to arrive, to happen. remercier, to thank. 
payer, to pay. parler mal, to speuk ill. 
deviner, 1o guess. penser mal, to think dll. 
penser de, to have an opinion about. 
penser &, to think of, to consider, to have in mind. 
Que pensez-vous de lui, what do you think of him? 
Je pense & mes amis, [ am thinking of my friends. 
A quoi pense-t-il, what is he thinking about ? 


1. Savez-vous ce qui est arrivé? 2. Je ne sais pas 
tout ce qui est arrivé. 38. Devinez ce que j’ai requ ce 
matin, 4. Dequil’avez-vousrequ? 65. Dites-moice que 
vous avez fait. 6. Pensez 4 ce que vous faites. 7. Je 
pense toujours a ce que je fais. 8. Pensez-vous aussi 
& ce que vous dites? 9. Dites-moi qui est arrivé, 
10. Dites-moi aussi ce qui est arrivé. 11. Je sais ce que 
c’est. 12. Il pense mal de tout le monde. 13. Mangez 
ce que vous avez sur votre assiette. 14. Apportez-nous, 
s’il vous plait, de la viande, du pain, du beurre et deux 
tasses de café. 15. Merci, monsieur. 16. I] n’y a pas 
de quoi, madame. 17. Maintenant, avez-vous de quoi 
payer? 18. Prenez tout ce que vous voyez. 


(A) 1. Guess who has come. 2. It is your cousin 
Mary. 3. It is n’t she who has come, it is her brother. 
4, Do you know what he has brought? 6. No, what? 
6. Think a great deal, but speak little. 7. They say 
he never says what he thinks. 8. What! he always 
says everything he thinks. 9. Has she any money ? 
10. She has lost all she had. 11. Give me everything 
there is on my table. 12. Here is everything that was 
in your room. 138.I did not buy everything I saw, 
because I did n’t have anything to pay with. 14. Tell 
me what has happened. 15. What has happened ? 
16. [thank you,madam. 17. Don’tmentionit. 18. He 


always does everything I desire. 
1 See examples under quoi, page 123. 





Feminine of Adjectives — 125 


(B) 1. What have you done to-day? 2. Don’t you 
know what I have done? 38. Do you know what he will 
do to-morrow? 4, What has happened? 5.Do you 
know all that has happened? 6.Of what are you 
speaking? 7. Of whatare youthinking? 8. Of whom 
are you speaking? 9.Of whom are you thinking? 
10. Do you know what I have in my pocket? 11. Guess 
what I have here. 12. What did you see this morning ? 
13. Show me what you have written. 14. What! is that 
all? 15. Tell me who is here to-day. 16. Have you 
anything to pay with? 17. What!nomoney? 18. Do 
you see this package? 19. Do you know what it is? 
20. What! you have already opened it? 21.1 thank 
you for (de) all you have done for me, 


56 
Feminine of Adjectives. 
(1) We have seen (Lesson 4) that the feminine of an 
adjective is formed by adding e mute to the masculine, 
while adjectives ending in e mute remain unchanged: 


MASCULINE. FEMININE, 
vrai, true, vraie. 
appliqué, diligent, appliquée. 
sincére, sincere, sincére. 
moderne, modern, moderne. 


(2) Adjectives ending in -el, -en, -on, -et, double the 
final consonant before adding e mute for the feminine: 


cruel, cruel, cruelle. 
tel, such, telle. 

un tel, such a, une telle. 
ancien, ancient, ancienne, 
bon, good, bonne. 
muet, mute, dumb; silent, muette, 
sujet, subject, sujette. 


net, clean, neat, nette. 


fi 


126 Heminine of Adjectives 


(3) The following adjectives also double the final 
consonants in the feminine: 


gentil, nice, gentle, gentille. 
nul, no, nulle. 
pareil, like, alike, such, pareille. 
bas, low, basse. 
épais, | thick, épaisse. 
gros, big, stout, grosse. 
gras, fat, grasse. 
las, tired, lasse. 
sot, foolish, sotte. 


(4) A few adjectives ending in -er and -et change 6 
to 6 in forming the feminine; for example: 


cher, dear, chére. 
fier, proud, fiére. 
léger, light, .  légére. 
premier, Jirst, premiére. 
dernier, last, derniére. 
complet, complete, compléte. 
inquiet, uneasy, inquiéte. 
secret, secret, secrete. 


(5) Adjectives ending in -f change f to v: 


actif, active, active. 
attentif, attentive, attentive. 
neuf, new, new-made, neuve. 
vif, lively, quick, vive. 


(6) Adjectives ending in -x change x to s. 


heureux, happy, fortunate, heureuse. 
malheureux, unhappy, unfortunate, malheureuse. 
affreux, Srightful, affreuse. 
généreux, generous, généreuse. 
jaloux, jealous, jalouse. 
nombreux, numerous, nombreuse. 


1 Nul requires ne with the verb. 


Feminine of Adjectives = 127 


orageux, stormu. orageuse. 
pluvieux, rainy, pluvieuse. 
studieux, studious, studieuse. 
la géographie, geography. lourd, heavy. 
charmant, charming. appris, /earned. 
bien, very, indeed, 


1. Ces derniéres nuits ont été trés orageuses. 2. Dites- 
vous que votre sceur est paresseuse? 3, C’est mon 
frere qui est paresseux. 4. Ma scour est trés appli- 
quée. 5. Cette belle jeune fille est toujours studieuse. 
6. Votre cousine n’est-elle pas un peu jalouse? 7. J’ai 
un chapeau neuf et aussi des bottines neuves. 8. Nos 
cousins sont heureux, mais nos cousines sont trés mal- 
heureuses. 9. Ces fraises ne sont-elles pas délicieuses ? 
10. Vous @tes bien heureuse, madame; vous avez des 
enfants laborieux. 11. Ces jeunes filles ne sont pas si 
actives que ces garcons. 12. Les éléphants ne sont pas 
cruels, mais ces bétes sauvages sont trés cruelles. 
13. L’histoire moderne n’est pas si facile que l’histoire 
ancienne, mais la géographie ancienne est beaucoup plus 
difficile que la géographie moderne. 14. La langue ita- 
lienne n’est pas difficile quand on a appris le frangais. 
15. Les grosses fraises ne sont pas si bonnes que les 
petites. 16. Cette viande est trop grasse; donnez-nous 
autre chose, s’il vous plait. 17. Voyez-vous cette petite 
fille? Elle est bien lasse. 18. Pourquoi avez-vous 
vendu votre petit chien? Il était si gentil! 19. Vous 
n’étes jamais trop gentil, vous savez. 20. Ni vous non 
plus. 21. Ces dames sont jalouses, parce qu’elle a tant 
de robes neuves. 22. Quelle gentille petite fille! 


1. Have you ever read ancient history or studied an- 
cient geography? 2. Whichdoyou prefer? 3. Which 
do you find the easier? 4.1 do not like either one, 


128 Feminine of Adjectives 


6. This little beast is pretty, but very 
cruel. 7. Your watch is too big. 8. This meat is too 
fat. 9. These men are generous. 10. Are their wives 
generous too? 11. His sisters are happy, but very tired. 
12. Their shoes are new, but her boots are not new. 
13. This cream is delicious. 14. 1t¢ does not rain yet, 
but I think we shall have a rainy night. 15. It is said 
that girls are always more attentive and more diligent 
than boys. 16.IJt is not true, I am sure (of it). | 
17. Are n’t they a little more studious? 18. Everybody 
prefers sincere friends to those who are not sincere. 
19. Did one ever hear such a story? 20. We like such 
stories. 21. This table is not heavy; it is very light. 
22. That lady is very proud and happy; she has indus- 


5. Nor I either. 


trious and charming children. 


very nice. 24. No? pupil is absent to-day. 


I am glad of it. 


57 


23. Yes, her children are 


25. Good! 


Feminine of Adjectives (Continued). 


The following adjectives form their feminine irregu- 


1 See note, page 126. 


larly : 

tee MASCULINE. FEMININE. 
blanc, white, blanche. 
franc, Srank, franche. 
sec, dry, séche. 
public, public, publique. 
ture, Turkish, turque. 
grec, Greek, grecque. 
frais, Fresh, cool, fraiche. 
faux, false, fausse. 
roux, red, rousse. 
doux, sweet, gentle, douce. 
tiers, third, tierce. 








feminine of Adjectives . 129 


causeur, talkative, causeuse. 
flatteur, Jlattering, flatteuse. 
bénin, benign, bénigne. 
malin, cunning, maligne. 
bref, brief, bréve. 
long, long, longue. 
aigu, sharp, aigué. 
favori, favorite, favorite. 
jumeau, twin, jumelle. 
fou, fol, mad, folle. 
mou, mol, soft, molle. 
beau, bel, deautiful, fine, handsome, belle. 
nouveau, nouvel, new?, nouvelle. 
vieux, vieil,* old, vieille. 


Observe that each of the last five adjectives of this list has two 
forms for the masculine. The second form is used only before a noun 
beginning with a vowel or h mute: un bel oiseau, le nouvel opéra, mon 
vieil ami.® 


la promenade, the walk. latin, Latin. 

la nouvelle, the news. flatter, to flatter. 
Vavenue (f.), the avenue. causer, /o chat, to talk. 
un sifflet, a whistle, siffler, to whistle. 


1. Apportez-nous des verres d’eat fraiche. 2. Cette 
table est longue de cing pieds et large de trois. 3. La 
langue grecque est plus riche que la langue latine; elle 
est aussi plus difficile. 4. On dit que c’est la langue la 
plus difficile. 5. Je n’ai jamais vu de petite béte plus 


1 Also, malign, malignant, malicious, mischievous, roguish, shrewd, sly, 
clever. 

2 Nouveau, standing before the noun, means another: j’ai acheté de 
nouveaux livres, J have bought some more books; une nouvelle maison, 
a new house (new to us). 

Nouveau, after the noun, means recent: j’ai acheté cinq livres nou- 
veaux, J have bought five books that have appeared recently. 

Neuf means newly made, not used yet: un habit neuf, a new coat; 
une maison neuve, a new house (newly built). 

8 Vieil is not absolutely required before a noun beginning with a vowel: 


"mon vieil ami or mon vieux ami, my old friend. 
a 9 





130 Position of Adverbs 


maligne que celle-ci. 6. Cette nouvelle avenue n’est-elle 
pas publique? 7. Oui, c’est maintenant ma promenade 
favorite. 8. Tout le monde admire cette longue avenue 
par laquelle nous sommes venus hier. 9. Ces dames 
sont bien vieilles. 10. Comment trouvez-vous sa voix ? 
11. Je la trouve trés douce. 12. Sa sceur est la plus 
franche et la plus aimable des filles. 13. Mon frére a 
acheté un bel habit neuf, et ma sceur une robe blanche. 
14. Cette nouvelle est fausse. 15. Ce bruit n’est pas 
moins faux. : Z 


1. There isa fine animal. 2. Your chain is longer and 
more beautiful than mine or (than) his. 3. Is that news 
true? 4. Itis not true; itis false. 5. Italian women 
are more numerous in this country than Greek women. 
6. Have you read Rostand’s new work? 7. This hice 
little girl is her father’s favorite. 8. Her voice is very 
gentle. 9. Who is whistling? 10. What a sharp 
whistle! 11. How do you find the Greek language ? 
12. This lady talks a great deal, but she is not too talka- 
tive. 13. She is always very flattering. 14. She. is 
always flattering somebody. 15. What a_ beautiful 
white house! 16. Her hairis red. 17. His sisters are 
too frank. 18. That poor woman is mad. 19. This 
beautiful muslin is as white as snow. 20. Why is she 
so unhappy? 21. Aren’t her daughters industrious ? 


58 
Position of Adverbs and of tout, rien, and personne. 


(1) Adverbs generally stand after the verb in a 
simple tense, and before the past participle in a com- 
pound tense. 


Elle parle bien frangais, she speaks French well. 
Elle a bien parlé, she has spoken well. 





/ 


Position of Adverbs _ 131 


Exceptions: Hier, aujourd’hui, demain, ici, 1a, and most adverbial 
phrases! are placed after the past participle. 


Ils sont partis hier, they left yesterday. 
Elle a fini tout a l’heure, she has just now finished, 


(2) As direct objects, tout (everything, all) and rien 
(nothing) precede the past participle, but personne 
(nobody) follows it. 


J’ai tout perdu, J lost everything. 
Je n’ai rien vu, / have seen nothing. 
Je n’ai rencontré personne, / met nobody. 


Rien and personne (like jamais, never) require ne before the verb; 
used alone or without a verb, they retain their negative meaning. 


Personne n’est absent, nobody is absent. 
N’avez-vous vu personne? Personne. 
Have you seen no one? No one. 
N’avez-vous rien trouvé? Rien. 
Have you found nothing? Nothing. 


ne... pas,” not. cette nuit, /ast night. 
ne... point, not (emphatic), commencé, begun. )\ past 
not at all. ri, laughed. parti- 
ne... jamais, never. dormi, s/ept. ciples. . 


ne... plus,’ no more, no longer. €tre bien mis(e),* to be well dressed. 
ne... guére, scarcely, but little. 6tre mal mis(e), to be badly dressed. : 
ne. . . rien, nothing, not anything. enfin, finally, at last. 
ne... personne, nobody, not any- & peine, hardly. 

body, no one. tout & fait, wholly, quite. 
hier soir, /ast evening. tout a Vheure, just now. 
ce soir, this evening, to-night. alors, then. 


1 For example: tout de suite, immediately; sur le champ, instantly; 
tout & Vheure, just now; avec plaisir, with pleasure. Apeine, hardly, 
precedes the past participle. Tout a fait, wholly, quite, generally precedes. 

2 In these negative expressions, the place of pas is taken by point, 
jamais, etc. Personne alone follows the past participle. 

8 Plus (like jamais, rien, and personne), when used without a verb has 
negative meaning. Plus d’argent, no more money; plus de lecons, %0 
e lessons. 

Mis (past part. of mettre, to put) agrees with subject of étre. 





132 Position of Adverbs 


1. Mon frére a beaucoup pleuré ce matin. 2. Dites. 
moi pourquoi. 3.Je vous l’ai déja dit. 4. Il pensait 
qu’il avait perdu son argent hier soir. 5. L’avait-il 
vraiment perdu? 6.11 n’avait rien perdu. 7. Per- 
sonne n’a rien perdu. 8. Vous avez bien écrit votre 
théme. 9. Quia mal agi? 10. Il n’a guére d’argent. 
11. Cette lettre est trés bien écrite. 12. Saviez-vous 
alors que votre frere était déja revenu hier? 13. A 
quelle heure serez-vous ici demain? 14. Toutes ses 
amies sont toujours bien mises. 15. Nous sommes partis 
de Paris hier soir. 16. Personne n’est encore revenu. 
17. Jen’ai point réussi. 18. Avez-voustoutvu? 19. Je 
nal rien vu. 20, Quand nous étions chez eux, ils 
n’avaient encore rien vendu. 21. Personne n’a pris ce 
que vous avez perdu. 22. Personne? 23. Personne. 
24, Mon ami parle bien italien. 


For Oral Drill.— 1. He has said nothing; he has seen 
nobody; he has done well. 2. They have seen every- 
thing; they have finally seen everything; they will have 
seen everything to-morrow. 3. Have you met no one? 
Have n’t you met any one? 4, There is not; there was 
‘no longer anything; there will be nobody. 65. Has he 
lost anything? Who has lost everything? 6. He has 
not lost anything; he has not lost everything. 7. No- 
body came just now; nothing has happened to-day. | 


(A) 1. You have written your letter badly. 2. His is 
very well written. 3. There was nobody here yesterday 
at half-past five in (de) the afternoon. 4. When I met 
your brother just now, he had seen everything. 5. I 
have not seen anything yet (yet anything seen). 6. Our 
neighbor has not had much business to-day. 7. Nobody 
has bought anything because everything is so dear. 








Idioms with Avoir 133 


8. Those ladies are always well dressed. 9. She laughed 
so much that I scolded her. 10. I think that poor man 
has always been so sad that he has never laughed. 
11. He has no money at all, and he has scarcely any 
friends. 12. He has lost everything. 13. No more? 
noise, please, 14. Did you meet no one this morning ? 
15. Noone. 16. What have youforme? 17. Nothing. 
18. Let us not wait any longer, let us finish these 
sentences. 19. We have hardly begun. 


(B) 1. Did you sleep well last night? 2. At what 
time did you get here? 3. Has written a letter ? 
4, Has he’written it well? 5. Are you very fond of 
dogs (Do you like much the dogs)? 6. Have you many 
dogs? 7. How did you like those dogs we saw to-day? 
8. Do you speak English? 9. Do you speak French 
well? 10. What have you lost? 11. Who has lost 
nothing? 12.Is there anything in this drawer ? 
13. Who is knocking? 14. What were you doing a 
moment ago? 15. Who laughed just now? 16. Where 





_shall you spend the night? 17. Whom do you see in 


the street? 18. Don’t you see anybody? 19. Have 
you entirely finished your exercise? 20. Are there no 
more sentences ? 
59 
Idioms with Avoir. 


(1) In the following idioms avoir is used instead of 
the verb to be; 


avoir chaud, to be warm, avoir soif, to be thirsty. 
avoir froid, to be cold. avoir sommeil, fo be sleepy. 
avoir faim, to be hungry. avoir honte, to be ashamed. 


1 See note, page 131. 


134 Idioms with Avow 


avoir peur, to be afraid. avoir besoin (de), to need. 
avoir raison, to be right. avoir l’intention (de), to intend. 
avoir tort, to be wrong. avoir mal a, to have a pain in, to ache. 


In these expressions bien is generally used for very or quite : vous 
avez bien raison, il a bien peur. 


Qu’avez-vous? What is the matter with you? 
Je n’ai rien, nothing is the matter with me. 

Il a quelque chose, something ails him. . 
Qu’y a-t-il? What is the matter ? 

Il n’y a ‘rien, there is nothing the matter. 
N’importe, no matter, never mind. 


Recall idiomatic use of avoir in asking or stating a person’s age 
(Lesson 52). 


Quel age a-t-il? How old is he? 
Il a trente ans, et son frére en a vingt-cing, he is thirty, and his 
brother is twenty-five. 


(2) In speaking of parts of the body, the definite 
article is ordinarily used for my, his, her, etc., if the 
possessor is the subject of the sentence. 

Il ale bras cassé, Ais arm is broken. 
Elle a les yeux bleus, she has blue eyes. 
Montrez-moi la main droite, show me your right hand. 

(3) With the three words mal, froid, and chaud, the 
person spoken of is made the subject of avoir. 

Il a mal au bras, Ais arm is sore, or aches. 
J’ai bien froid aux mains, my hands are very cold. 


le corps, the body. le cou, the neck. 
la téte, the head. la gorge, the throat. 
les cheveux (m.), the hair. l’épaule (f.), the shoulder. 


la figure, \ tha face, la poitrine, the breast. 
le visage, le coeur, the heart. 

la bouche, the mouth. le bras, the arm. 

la lévre, the lip. le coude, the elbow. 

la dent, the tooth. le poignet, the wrist. 


la langue, the tonque. la main, the hand. 


‘Idioms with Avoir | 135 


la joue, the cheek. le doigt, the finger. 
Voreille (f.), the ear. le pouce, the thumb. 
Veil (m.), the eye. la jambe, the /eg. 
le nez, the nose. le genou, the knee. 
le menton, the chin. le pied, the foot. 


1. N’avez-vous pas trop chaud si prés du feu? 
2. J’avais froid tout a l’heure, mais 1aintenant j’ai trop 
chaud. 3. Vous avez sommeil, n’est-ce pas? 4. Vous 
avez raison, monsieur, j’ai bien sommeil. 5. Saviez-vous 
qu’il avait perdu le bras gauche? 6. Qu’avez-vous ce 
matin? 7. J’aimalalatéte. 8. Vous avez faim, peut- 
6tre. 9. Non, monsieur, j’ai trop mangé. 10. Donnez- 
moi la main droite. 11. Avez-vous l’intention de revenir, 
demain? 12. Qu’y a-t-il? 13. Rien. 14. Elle a tort. 
15. N’importe. 16.Ils ont froid aux mains. 17. Ne 
voyez-vous pas qu’il a perdu la jambe droite? 18. Quel 
age a votre sceur? 19. Elle a vingt ans, et son amie en 
avingtetun. 20. Ellea les yeux noirs. 21. Le coude, 
le genou et le pied sont des parties du corps. 22. Il ne 
parle plus, parce qu’il a mal a la gorge. 


(A) 1. His eyes hurt him. 2. That old man has only 
onearm. 3. He lost one when he was young. 4. You 
are wrong, I think. 5. The elbow and the wrist are 
parts of the arm. 6. What are you afraid of? 7. Iam 
not afraid of anything. 8. We intend to go to the sea- 
shore next summer. 9. How many fingers have we? 
10. My kneeaches. 11.Givemeyourhand. 12. Which 
one,— the right or the left? 13. In winter my feet are 
always cold. 14. He has acted badly and he is not 
ashamed of his conduct. 15. No matter. 16. We are 
cold and hungry. 17. Tell me what is the matter with 
him. 18. Nothing is the matter with him. 19. He has 
a broken wrist. 20. She has blue eyes and brown hair, 
21. What a beautiful face ! 


136 Conditional Mode 


(B) 1. Are your ears cold? *2.Is it cold to-day ? 
3. Is it too warm in this room? 4, What is the matter 
with you? 5. Have you the tooth-ache? 6. Do you 
need this pencil? 7. Have you one? 8. Whose is 
this one? 9, Who is thirsty ? 10. Where are your 
teeth ? 11. Have you a sore throat? 12. Is anything 
the matter with you? 13. Am I right or wrong? 
14. Are you always right? 15. Has he blue eyes or 
brown? 16. How many ears do we have? 17. Have 
we more eyes than ears? 18. Name ten parts of the 
head. 19. Name several other parts of the body. 
20. Do you intend to stay here this evening? 21. You 
are sleepy; did n’t you sleep well last night? 22. What 
is the matter? 23.Is there nothing the matter? 
24. Are you hungry? 25. You are always hungry, are 
you not ? | 


60 
Conditional Mode. — 

(1) The present conditional of most verbs may be 
formed by adding -ais to the infinitive. The first per- 
son conditional of any French verb is the first person 
of the future with s added. The endings are the same 
as those of the imperfect. 


TERMINATIONS: -ais, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, -aient. 


INFINITIVE. FUTURE. ConDITIONAL. 

porter, ‘o carry, je porterai, J shall carry, je porterais, J should carry. 
finir, je finirai, je finirais. 

recevoir, je recevrai, je recevrais. 

vendre, je vendrai, je vendrais. 

avoir, j’aurai, j aurais. 


1 In other words, to conjugate the conditional, add s to the first singular 
of the future and conjugate with the endings of the imperfect. 


Conditional Sentences 137 


étre, je serai, je serais. 
aller, jirai, jirais. 
faire, je ferai, je ferais. 
dire, je dirai, je dirais. 
savoir, je saurai, je saurais. 
voir, je verrai, _ ‘je verrais. 


PRESENT CONDITIONAL OF Porter. 


je porterais, J should or would nous porterions. 
tu porterais. carry. vous porteriez. 
il porterait. ils porteraient. 


Conditional Sentences. 


(2) The conditional does not denote a condition, but 
the conclusion to a condition. Neither the future nor 
the conditional is used after si! (if), except in the 
sense of whether. 


Je ne sais pas s'il réussira, J do not know whether he will succeed. 
Je ne savais pas s'il réussirait, J did not know whether he would succeed. 


(3) Examine the following examples of conditional: 
sentences : 


ConDITION. Conclusion. 

Si vous eae demain, je serai content. 

Lf you are here to-morrow, I shall be glad. 
If you will be here to-morrow, 


Si vous étiez ici maintenant, 
If you were here now, 
je serais content. 


Si vous restiez ici, L 
I should be glad. 


If you stayed here, 
If you would stay here, 
If you were to stay here, y 





Bi vous étiez resté ici, j’aurais été content. 
If you had stayed here, I should have been glad. 


1 j js elided in si only when followed by il or ils: s'il est, s’ils sont. 


138 Conditional. Sentences 


It will be seen from these examples that the #/ 
clause takes the present tense when the conclusion is 
in the future, and the imperfect when the conclusion 
is in the conditional. Notice that in the examples this 
rule holds true, whatever the corresponding English 


form may be. 
Tf you do (or will), I shall. 


If you did (or would), I should. 


tromper, to deceive. parmi, among. 
oser, to dare. le choix, the choice. 
sans, without, but for. longtemps, a Jong time, long. 


plus longtemps, /onger. 
il y aurait, there would be. 
y aurait-il, would there be? 


1. Si néus avions le temps, nous visiterions cette ville 
dont il parlait tout & Vheure. 2. Elle est pleine de 
tableaux magnifiques. 3. Je vous gronderai bien, Sl 
vous oubliez ma bague. 4. Ils ne batiraient pas tant 
de maisons, s’ils n’avaient pas beaucoup d’argent. 
5. Que feriez-vous, si vous aviez autant d’argent qu’eux ? 
6. Que ferez-vous lorsque vous serez 4 Londres ? 7. Sil 
fait trop chaud ici, nous passerons dans la bibliothéque. 
8. Si elle avait remporté le prix de frangais, sa mére 
aurait été bien heureuse. 9. N’ai-jepasraison? 10. Si 
vous aviez assez d’argent, oti iriez-vous? 11. S’il faisait 
cela, il tromperait ses meilleurs amis. 12. Sans moi, 
elle serait tombée. 13. Seriez-vous parti aujourd’hui, 
si vous aviez recu cette lettre dont vous me parliez tout 
& Vheure? 14. Répondriez-vous a sa lettre, si vous 
aviez de l’encre et une meilleure plume? 165. Je vous 
aurais attendu jusqu’aé deux heures, si j’avais eu le temps. 

1 Recall rvies for quand, aussitét que, etc. (Lesson 48), which take the 


future if futurity is implied, and notice that the contrary is true with si, the 
present being required even if fntnritv is implied. 


Conditional Sentences 139 


For Oral Drill. — 1. He will receive; he would receive. 
2. If he will sell; if he would sell; if he sold; if he 
sells; if he were tosell. 3.I1f he has sold; if he had 
sold. 4. We shall go; we should go. 5.If we go; if 
we were to go. 6. She has gone; she had gone; she 
will have gone ; she would have gone. 7. If you see; 
if you will see; if you saw; if youhad seen, 8. I shall 
do it, if you speak of it; I should do it, if you spoke of 
it; I should have done it, if you had spoken of it; I will 
do it, if you will speak of it. 9. Would you do it, if I 
spoke of it? 10. Will you do it, if I speak of it? 
11. Would you not have done it, if I had spoken of it? 


1. If he does not obey his parents, he will be unhappy 
all his life. 2. She would deceive her father, if she 
dared. 3. But she would not dare. 4,If£ she had 
stayed longer yesterday, she would have seen a friend of 
hers. 5.1f you will be here to-morrow evening, you 
will see him, I think. 6. We should be glad, if he were 
here now. 7. If it had n’t been for you (but for you), I 
should have lost everything I had. 8. If you were not 
here, where would you be? 9. If you are not at church 
next Sunday, where shall I find you? 10. Would he not 
return all the money he received, if he were not so poor ? 
11. If she does not prepare her lesson, what shall we do ? 
12. Would you choose this book, if you had your choice 
among all theseworks? 13. Why would you not choose 
this one? 14. Have you ever visited the largest cities 
of this country? 15. Should you visit them if you had 
time? 16. Shall you visit them when you have money 
enough ? 17. If you are at liberty this evening, shall 
we go to the theatre together ? 


140 Interrogative Adverbs 


61 
Interrogative Adverbs. 


(1) If asentence begins with an interrogative adverb 
(pourquoi, ou, quand, comment, etc.), the rest of the sen- 
tence follows the regular order used in asking a question 
in French (Lesson 5). 


Pourquoi votre frére est-il si malheureux ? 

Why is your brother so unhappy ? 

Quand ma mére est-elle partie? When did my mother leave ? 
A quelle heure la votre est-elle arrivée chez elle ? 

At what time did yours get home? - 


(2) An interrogative lequel, laquelle, etc., in the objec- 
tive case, requires the same order. 


Lesquels de ses chiens votre frére a-t-il perdus ? 
Which (ones) of his dogs has your brother lost ? 
(3). After o1 with the verb in a simple tense, the sub- 
ject is not usually repeated in the form of a pronoun. 
Ot est l’église dont vous parliez tout a l’heure? 
Where is the church of which you were just now speaking ? 


Ou demeurent vos amis? Where do your friends live ? 
But Ou vos amis sont-ils allés? or, Vos amis ow sont-ils allés? 


Composite Subject. 


When a verb has two or more subjects of different 
grammatical persons, they are usually summed up by 
nous or vous, with which the verb agrees.! 


Ma mére et moi, nous sommes allés chez vous. 

My mother and I went to your house. 

Mon frére et vous, vous étes partis & cing heures précises. 
My brother and you started at exactly five o’clock. 

Lui et moi, nous le verrons demain. 

He and I shali see him to-morrow. 


1 If the nous or vous is omitted, the verb agrees with whichever pro« 
noun is understood. 


Interrogative Adverbs 14] 


Monsieur, Madame, Mademoiselle. 


As a mark of respect, the words monsieur, madame, 
mademoiselle, or their plurals, are placed before the 
adjective votre or vos followed by pére, mére, frére, 
seur, oncle, cousin, ami, etc., or their plurals. 


J’ai rencontré monsieur votre pére et madame votre mére. 
I met your father and mother. 

Comment se porte mademoiselle votre scour ? 

How is your sister ? 


Jacques, James. maintenant que, now that (or now when 
Guillaume, William. that is understood), 

le quartier, the quarter. partout, everywhere. 

le musée, the museum. quelque part, somewhere. 

le bagage, Yi h nulle part,! nowhere, 


les bagages, | € baggage. sévérement, severely. 


1. Mon frére et moi, nous sommes un peu malades 
aujourd’hui. 2, Pourquoi monsieur votre frére n’a-t-il 
pas encore répondu a ma lettre? 3. Si vous étes libre 
aemain soir, que ferez-vous? 4. Quand vous serez libre, 
je vous visiterai. 5. Combien madame votre mére 
a-t-ellé payé sa maison? 6. Ou votre scur a-t-elle 
caché ma montre? 7. Elle ne l’a cachée nulle part; 
la voila sur la table. 8. Quand mon ami. Louis et 
moi, nous demeurions ensemble dans le quartier latin, 
nous visitions souvent les musées et les théitres. 
9. Nous ne l’oublierons jamais, j’en suis sfir. 10. Com- 
ment votre ami et vous trouviez-vous les tableaux dans 
le musée du Luxembourg? 11. Nous les trouvions 
magnifiques. 12. Pourquoi mesdemoiselles vos sceurs 
ne sont-elles pas contentes maintenant qu’elles ont recu 
tant d’argent? 13. Ma mére et moi n’aurions-nous 
trouvé personne, si nous étions allés chez vous hier 


1 Nulle part requires ne before the verb. 


142. Personal Pronouns 


a quatre heures de Vapres-midi? 14. Non, monsieur 
GuiJlaume, vous n’auriez trouvé personne. 


1. Henry and I have returned from London. 2. When 
did you and hearrive? 3. We arrived a half-hour ago. 
4, Where is your baggage? 5. We left it somewhere. 
6. Have n’t you looked for it? 7. Yes, we have looked 
for it everywhere. 8. Mary and I saw it at the station. 
9. Why didn’t you and she bring it? 10. Because we 
were not strongenough. 11. Whatshallwedo? 12.I 
have spoken to James about it; he will bring it this 
afternoon. 13. If it had n’t been for you, we should 
have lost it. 14. At what time shall you and I go 
home ? 15. When will your parents visit us? 16, Your 
mother and sister will be here on Tuesday, the 16th, but 
your father will stay in Paris until the 20th. 17. You 
forget that you and your brother will have no prize this 
month, because you have not worked well enough. 
18. You know that you always succeed when you 
work. 19. If you deceive him, he will punish you 
severely. 20. Which of her friends is your mother 
visiting ? 21. She is visiting a lady who lives in the 
American quarter. 22. We shall go nowhere fondnys 
but to-morrow we shall go to the country. 


62 
PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 


(1) There are two classes of personal pronouns, dis- 
junctive and conjunctive. 


Disjunctive Pronouns. 


moi, J, me. nous, we, us 
toi, thou, thee. vous, you. 
lui, he, him. eux, they, them (m.). 


elle, she, her. elles, they, them (f.). 


Personal Pronouns 143 


moi-méme, mysel/. nous-mémes, ourselves. 
toi-méme, thyself. vous-mémes, yourselves. 
lui-méme, himself. eux-mémes, themselves (m.). 
elle-méme, herself. elles-mémes, themselves (f.). 


Also, vous-méme, yoursel/. 


(2) A disjunctiv n is used : — 


(a) With a@ preposition : chez lui, at his house. (Lesson 26.) 

(b) Alone: Quivala? Moi. Who goes there? J. (Lesson 45.) 

(c) Predicate nominative: C’est lui, it is he. Ce sont eux, it is they. 
(Lesson 45.) 

(d) For emphasis: Moi, je le ferai, J shall do it. Nous le ferons nous- 
mémes, we shall do it ourselves. (See Lesson 64.) 

(ec) When separated from the verb by a word (other than ne or a con- 
junctive pronoun): Lui seul l’a fait, he alone has done it. Je 
n’aime que lui, J love no one but him. Nous sommes plus riches 
qu’eux, we are richer than they. 


Conjunctive Pronouns. 


(3) A conjunctive pronoun is used.as-subject, direct 
object, or indirect object of a verb expressed. (If the 
verb is understood, a disjunctive pronoun must be used, 
as in (2), b above.) 


SuBJECT. Direct OBseEct. InpDIRECT OBJECT. 
(NOMINATIVE) (ACCUSATIVE) (DATIVE) 

je, J. me, me. me, to me. 

tu, thou. te, thee. te, to thee. 

il, he. le, him, it. lui, fo Aim. 

elle, she. la, her, it. lui, to her. 

nous, we. nous, us. “ nous, to us. 

vous, you. vous, you. vous, to you. 

ils, they (m.). les, them (m.). leur, to them (m.). 

elles, they (f). les, them (f.). leur, to them (f.). 


(4) Se, himself, herself, itself, one’s self, themselves, a 
reflexive pronoun, is either singular or plural, direct or 


144 Personal Pronouns 


indirect object, according to the construction of the sen- 
tence. To prevent confusion, examples of its use will 
not be given until Lesson 65 is reached. It must not 
be confused with the disjunctives, lui-méme and eux- 
mémes. For the form soi, see Lesson 96. 

(5) A personal pronoun used as the direct or indirect 
object of a verb always precedes the verb, except in 
the imperative affirmative. 

Il me préte un dollar, he ends me a dollar. 
Prétez-moi! encore un dollar, /end me another dollar. 
Ne lui prétez rien, don’t lend him anything. 


Répondez-vous & votre ami, do you answer your friend ? 
Je lui réponds toujours, J always answer him. 


une offre, an offer. contre, against. 

refuser, to refuse. quant a, as for, 

promis, promised (past part.) selon, according to. - 

fermer & clef, to lock. au contraire, on the contrary. 


demander quelque chose & quelqu’un,? to ask something of somebody, to 
ask somebody for something. 
J’ai demandé un canif & un de mes éléves, J asked one of my pupils 


Sor a penknife. 
Je lui ai demandé un canif, J asked him for a knife. 


1. Parlez-vous contre moi ou contre elle? 2. Je ne 
parle ni contre vous ni contre elle. 3. Je ne lui aurais 
pas prété ma montre. 4, Si nous arrivons avant eux, 
nous ne fermerons pas la porte,a clef. 5. Elles n’agi- 
ront certainement pas contre leur intérét. 6. Voici un 
porte-monnaie que j’ai acheté pour vous. 7. Si vous ne 
le trouvez pas beau, je le garderai pour moi-méme ou je 


1 The disjunctives moi and toi are used for me and te in the imperative 
affirmative. 

2 Notice that the thing asked for is in the accusative, and the person 
from whom a thing is asked is in the dative, whatever be the corresponding 
English form. 


Personal Pronouns 145 


le donnerai 4 votre frére. 8. Je suis sfir qu’il l’admirera 
et qu’il l’acceptera avec grand plaisir. 9. Est-ce pour 
moi ou pour vous-méme que vous travaillez ? 10. C’est 
pour moi-méme. 11. Qui avez-vous vu aujourd’hui ? 
12. Lui. 18. Selon eux, nous ne réussirons pas. 14. Je 
lui ai donné plusieurs journaux frangais. 15, Les a-t-elle 
-envoyés 4 son amie? 16. Est-ce que vous m’apportez | 
des lettres ou des livres? 17.1] leur a demandé de 
Yargent, mais ils ne lui ont rien donné. 18, Quant a 
elle, je ne l’aime pas. 19. Sans lui, je ne leur aurais 
jamais écrit cette sotte lettre. 


For Oral Drill.—1.I see you. 2. Do you see me? 
3. I am not looking at him, I am looking at them. 4. Is 
he looking at us? 5. At whom are you looking? 
6. Don’t look at me. 7. Look at her. 8. Don’t look at 
_her. 9. Look at him. 10. What do you s.e? 11.1 

-give him nothing. 12. Give them something. 13. Do 
you do it? 14. Haven’t you done it? 15. Don’t do 
it. 16. Do it. 17. Do you know it? 18. Don’t say 
it. 19. They have n’t said it. | 


1. As for you, my friend, I am certain that you will 
succeed. 2. He does nothing; she works all the time. 
3. Speak to me; don’t speak toher. 4. Shall you accept 
his offer? 5, Certainly, I shall accept it with a great 
deal of pleasure. 6. Your brother has written me, but I 
_ have n’t answered him yet. 7. If you had lent me your 
pen, I should have written to him this morning. 8. Did 
he speak to youagainst me? 9. He never speaks against 
you; on the contrary, he often speaks in your favor 
(for you). 10. Let us never speak against any one. 
11, Is it for their parents or for themselves that these 


children are working? 12. Itisforthemselves. 13. If 
10 


146 Order of the Pronouns 


he gives me that money, I shall not keepit. 14. Explain 
to me why you will not keep it. 15. Why did you re- 
fuse her what she asked you for? 16. I had promised 
it to my neighbor. 17. Ask your neighbor for it. 
18. He would punish her severely if she did not obey? 
‘him. 19. I shall give him back his book, when he gives 
me back mine. 20.1 think you will wait a long time. 
21.S0 do I (too). 22. Is it you who have bought a 
new house? 23. It is n’t I, it is he. 


63 


Personal Pronouns: two Objects. 


(1) When two personal pronoun objects stand before 
the verb, the first and second persons precede the third; 

when both are third person, the direct object precedes 
the indirect. . 

Je vous le donne, J give it to you. 

Il me le donne, he gives it to me. 

Je le lui donne, J give it to him. 

Je ne vous le donne pas, J do not give it to you. 

Je ne vous l’ai pas donné, J did not give it to you. 

Ne me le donnez-vous pas, do you not give it to me? 

Ne me l’avez-vous pas donné, did you not give it to me? 


(2) When two personal pronouns stand after the verb 
(imperative affirmative), the direct object ror the 
indirect. 


Donnez-le-moi, give it to me. 
Donnez-les-nous, give them to us. 
Donnez-la-leur, give it to them. 
Observe that in the imperative negative, the pronouns precede the 
verb. 
Ne me le donnez pas, don’t give it to me. 
Ne le lui donnez pas, don’t give it to him (to her). 


1 Remember that obéir takes the dative case. 


Order of the Pronouns — 147 


Briefly: Direct and indirect object pronouns precede the verb, 
except in the imperative affirmative. Before the verb, the order is 
Ist, 2d, 3d person; if both pronouns are 3d person, the order is direct, 
indirect. In the imperative affirmative (pronouns after the verb), the 
order is always direct, indirect. 


un article, an article. supposer, fo suppose. 

un instant, an instant. de ma part, from me, on my part. 
demander pardon &, to ask pardon of. de sa part, from him, on his part. 
pardonner, to pardon. de votre part, from you, on your part. 


1. Monsieur, je vous ai demandé le Journal des Débats 
il y a une demi-heure, et vous ne me l’avez pas donné, 
2. Pardon, monsieur, je finis un article trés intéressant ; 
je vous le donnerai dans un instant. 3, Cet argent est 
& votre pére, rendez-le-lui. 4. Je pense que voici mon 
verre ; remplissez-le-moi, s’il vous plait. 5. Je vous 
remercie. 6, Quand me préterez-vous l’ouvrage nouveau 
de Winston Churchill? 7. Vous n’avez pas oublié que 
vous me l’avez promis, je suppose. 8, C’est ma voisine 
Mme. N. qui l’a 4 présent, mais elle va me le rendre ce 
soir. 9. C’est mon crayon que vous avez la prés de vous ; 
passez-le-moi, s’il vous plait. 10. Je trouve que ces 
réegles ne sont pas trés faciles, mais je suppose que vous 
nous les expliquerez. 11. Dites-lui ce qui est arrivé. 
12. Ne nous le dites pas. 13.51 vous lui demandez son 
parapluie, je suis stir qu’il vous le refusera. 14. Ne le 
lui demandez pas. 15. Dites-lui bien des choses de ma 
part. 16. Ces jolies fleurs sont 4 ma tante; rendez-les- 
lui. 17. Je vous demande pardon, mon ami. 18. Et je 
vous pardonne avec plaisir. 


For Oral Drill.—1.He gives it to me. 2. He does 
not give it to you. 3. Does he give it to you? 
4. Does n’t he give it to you? 5. Hasn’t he given it to 
me? 6. Do you give them to him? 7. Give them to 


148 Personal Pronouns. 


us. 8. Don’t give them to her. 9.1 ask you for it. 
10. Do you ask me for it? 11. Ask them for it. 
12. Don’t ask us for it. 13. Hasn’t he asked you for 
it yet? 14. Ask them for them. 


1. I have asked you for your pen-holder, and you 
have n’t given ittome. 2. I know it; I have n’t given 
it to you, because I have n’t it any longer. 3. To whom 
have you lent it? 4.1 have lentitto her. 5. Has he 
asked your pardon? 6.I1f he asks my pardon, I will 
forgive him. 7. Forgive me too. 8. This pen is nota 
very good one; do not‘give it to him. 9. Give it 
to me. 10. This pencil belongs to her; give it back to 
her. 11. Do not give it back to her; give it to her 
sister. 12. You promised her this French book; why 
don’t you give it to her? 13. If you had promised it 
to me, would n’t you have given it tome? 14. Did you 
ever speak to me of her? 15. I have never spoken to 
you of her, but I have often spoken to her of you. 
16. Mary has asked her brother for his friend’s letter, but 
he will not give it to her. 17. When you meet your 
uncle, thank him in our behalf. 18.1 will do it with 
pleasure. 


64 


Personal Pronouns (Continued). 


(1) Le (so or 2#), In English, J am, we are, etc., may 
be used alone in answer to a question; the French use 
le, la, or les with the verb, to represent the complement 
of the verb ¢o be. 


(a) If the complement understood is a noun (or an 
adjective used as a noun, as le or la malade, the patient), 


Personal Pronouns — 149 


use Ie, la, les, according to the gender and number of 
the noun represented. 


Etes-vous la fille de ce monsiear? Are you this gentleman’s daughter ? 
Oui, je la suis. Yes, I am. 

Etes-vous les fils de M. Cadieux? Are you the sons of Mr. Cadieux ? 
Non, monsieur, nous ne les sommes pas. No, sir, we are not. 


(b) If the complement understood is an adjective (or 
a noun used as an adjective), le alone is used. 


Etes-vous contentes, mesdames? Are you pleased, ladies ? 


Nous le sommes. We are. 
Etes-vous gouvernante ? Are you a governess? 
Je le suis. I am. 


Observe this adjective use of a noun without an article to state a 
person’s position or profession : 


Mon pére est médecin, my father is a doctor. 
Le votre est avocat, yours is a lawyer. 


(2) The dative case to him is distinguished from to 
her by the use of the disjunctive pronoun with & The 
same is true of to them, masculine and feminine. 


C’est & lui que je le donne, non pas & elle, J give it to him, not to 
her. 


(3) The disjunctive pronoun is used instead of the 
conjunctive, when the verb has two direct or two indi- 
rect object pronouns. 


J’ai rencontré lui et elle, or ge GY nig AS FE 
Je les ai rencontrés, lui et elle, 
Je parlerai & lui et & elle, Z will speak to him and to her. 


le beau-frére, the brother-in-law. 1a couturiére, the dress-maker. 
la belle-seeur, the sister-in-law.  reprocher (a), to reproach. 

la permission, the permission. emprunter (&), to borrow. 

la modiste, the milliner. réclamer (a), to claim. 


150 Personal Pronouns 


1. Si son beau-frére et sa belle-sceur lui réclamfient 
Vargent qu’ils lui ont prété, est-ce qu'il ne le leur rendrait 
pas? 2. Il le leur rendrait certainement, s’il l’avait. 
3. Etes-vous la dame dont mon frére a trouvé la montre? 
4. Jelasuis. 5. Si vous lui demandez un peu d’argent, 
je suppose qu’il ne vous le refusera pas. 6. Elle m’a 
demandé mon nouveau parapluie, mais je ne le lui ai pas 
donné. 7. Pourquoi me le reprochez-vous? 8. Si vous 
la rencontrez aujourd’hui, racontez-lui l’affaire, mais ne 
lui parlez pas de ce que je vous ai dit. 9. Ne le leur 
dites pas, 4 eux; dites-le 4 elles, 10. Permettez-moi de 
vous offrir ce petit souvenir. 11.Je vous remercie; 
je l’accepterai avec la permission de ma mére. 12. On 
in’a emprunté presque tous mes livres. 13. Qui vous 
les a empruntés? 14. Est-ce vous qui me les avez 
empruntés ? 15. Ce n’est pas moi; c’est un de vos 
autres amis, 16. Etes-vous le garcon qu’on a puni ce 
matin? 17. Je ne le suis pas, madame. 18. J’en suis 
bien content. 19. Moi, je le suis aussi. 20. Cette 
femme est-elle couturiere ? 21. Oui, elle l’est. 


1. Lend me your gold watch, please. 2.I shall not 
lend it to you, because you would lose it. 3, Are you 
sure of it? 4.1 am. 5. You are always borrowing 
something of me. 6. If you reproach him for it, I shall 
scol@ you. 7. Are you happy, Mary? 8. Iam. 9. Are 
you John’s sister? 10.ITam. 11. Are you a milliner, 
madam? 12.I am not. 138. He is industrious, and 
so is she. 14. You are not. 15. Are you the gentle- 


men who were? here yesterday? 16. Weare. 17. Give 
it to her, do not give ittothem. 18. I should have given 


it to her if she had asked me for it. 19. Hadn’t she 


1 Third person plural. Compare with Est-ce vous qui étiez ici? 


Reflexive Verbs 161 


already asked for it? 20. If you lose anything, look 
for it yourself. 21. Lend him the watch he has asked 
you for; but do not lend him any money, because he 
would never give it back. 22. Do you knowit? 23. I 
do. 24. Here is Jane’s letter; give it toher. 25. No, 
don’t. 26. I won’t. 


65 
Pronominal Verbs: reflexive use. 


Pronominal or reflexive verbs are conjugated with 
two pronouns of the same person, one the subject, and 
the other the direct or indirect object. Any transitive 
verb may be conjugated reflexively. 

Reflexive verbs follow the conjugations to which they 
belong, and the pronouns are placed according to the 
rules already given for the position of personal pro- 
nouns (Lesson 62). Se always precedes the other 
pronouns of the third person. 

First ConJuGATION. 
se cacher, to hide one’s self. 
PRESENT INDIC. je me cache, J hide myself. 
tu te caches. 


se cache. 
aus} 
nous nous cachons. 


vous vous cachez. 


ils 
se cachent. 
elles 
IMPERFECT. je me cachais. 
FUTURE. je me cacherai. 


CONDITIONAL. je me cacherais. 
IMPERATIVE.!_ cache-toi,? cachons-nous, cachez-vous. 


1 Imperative negative: ne te cache pas, ne nous cachons pas, ne vous r 
cachez pas. 

2 Remember that moi and toi regularly take the place of me and te in 
the imperative affirmative. 


1652 Reflexive Verbs 


SeEconD CONJUGATION, 


4 se trahir, to betray one’s self. 
PRESENT INDIC. je me trahis, J betray myself. 
IMPERFECT. je me trahissais. 

FUTURE. je me trahirai. 


CONDITIONAL. je me trahirais. 
Tuirp CONJUGATION, 
s’apercevoir, to perceive.) 


PRESENT INDIC. je m’apercois, J perceive. 
IMPERFECT. je m’apercevais. 
FUTURE. je m’apercevrai. 
CONDITIONAL. je m’apercevrais. 
FourtH ConJuGATION. 
se rendre, to surrender (one’s self). 


PRESENT INDIC. je me rends, / surrender. 


IMPERFECT. je me rendais. 
FUTURE. je me rendrai. 
CONDITIONAL. je me rendrais. 3 
se cacher, to hide (one’s self). s’appeler,? to call one’s self. 
se flatter, /o flatter one’s self. s’amuser, tu enjoy one’s self. 
se montrer, to show one’s self. se dépécher, to hurry, to hasten . 
se blamer, to blame one’s self, se méler de, to meddle with. 
s’admirer, to admire one’s self. se tromper, to be mistaken. 
se porter, to be (with reference to health). se trahir, to betray one’s se/f. 
se porter bien, to be well. s’apercevoir, to perceive.! 
se porter mal, fo be ill. se perdre, to get lost. 
se reposer, ¢t“* rest, to take a rest. se rendre, to surrender (one’s 
self). ‘ 
la route, the route, the road. voyager, to travel. 
seul, alone. mais, why (exclamation). 


1 Apercevoir, to perceive or discover an external object; s’apercevoir, 
to perceivea fact. J’apercois mon frére, J perceive my brother. Jem’aper- 
gois que mon frére est arrivé, / perceive that my brother has arrived. 

2 The verb appeler has the 1 doubled before a mute e: j’appelle, / call, 
tu appelles, il appelle, ils appellent, but nous appelons, vous appelez. 


Reflexive Verbs 153 


Comment vous pé@&tez-vous ? 
Comment allez-vous ? | do you do? 
Comment ¢a va (familiar), 
Je me porte bien, I 

. a 
Ca va bien, 
Comment s’appelle-t-il, What is his name ? 


m well. 


1. Ne trouvez-vous pas que cette petite fille s’admire 
beaucoup? 2. On me dit que toutes les jeunes filles 
s’admirent assez. 3. Vous vous trompez, monsieur; vous 
n’ensavezrien. 4. Pardon, madame, mais je sais qu’elles 
ne s’admireront pas tant, lorsqu’elles seront plus vieilles, 
5. Comment vous portez-vous? 6. Je me porte trés bien, 
je vous remercie, monsieur; et vous? 7. Je ne me porte 
pas trés bien ce matin. 8, Etes-vous vraiment malade ? 
9. Un peu, oui. 10. Qu’avez-vous? 11. J’ai mal a la 
gorge et aussi 4 la téte. 12. Comment s’appelle ce mon- 
sieur? 13. Il s’appelle Joly, je pense; il est professeur 
@histoire, 14. Et cette dame, comment s’appelle-t-elle ? 
15. Je pense que c’est Madame Joly. 16. Ces messieurs 
se flattent que nous leur raconterons notre histoire, mais 
_ils se trompent; nous la garderons pour d’autres. - 17. Ne 
vous perdrez-vous pas si vous voyagez seul? 18. Moi, 
me perdre! et comment me perdrais-je ? Est-ce que je 
n’ai pas passé vingt fois par cette route? 19. Mais 
oui, c’est vrai! 20. De quoi vous mélez-vous? 21. Je 
me méle de mes affaires, 


For Oral Drill.—1.He enjoys himself. 2. He is 
not enjoying himself. 3. Is he not enjoying him- 
self? 4. We shall enjoy ourselves. 5. Let us enjoy 
ourselves. 6. Enjoy yourself. 7. They used to enjoy 
themselves. 8. She would enjoy herself. 9. They sur- 
render. 10.They will not surrender. 11. Let us 
surrender. 12. Let us not surrender. 13. Do you 


154 Reflexive Verbs 


surrender? 14. ITamhurrying. 15. Please hurry[up]. 
16. Don’t hurry. 17. Everybody is hurrying. 


(A) 1. My name is Mary, and my sister’s name is Jane. 
2. What is your name? 3.Is your name Louise ? 
4, That young man’s name is John. 5.J] am well 
to-day, but my father is not well. 6. He is very ill. 
7. His aunt is not well, and they say that she will never 
be well. 8. Did you know that they were not well ? 
9. Why no! 10. They will not show themselves here 
any more. 11. There are people (personnes) who have 
a good time everywhere. 12. No one has lost your 
newspaper, you have lost it yourself. 13. Don’t hide; 
I see you. 14. Explain yourself, sir. 15. She is mis- 
taken. 16. Hide. 17. I will atonce.. 18. He attends 
to his own affairs. 19. Attend to your own business, — 
please. 20. I always do mind my own business. 21. I 
perceive that you flatter yourself. 


(B) 1. Whatis your name? 2. What is your friend’s 
name? 3. Have you brothers and sisters? 4. What 
are their names? 5. How are you? 6.1 am well; 
and you? 7. Are all your friends well? 8. Are you 
attending to my affairs or yourown? 9. Are you work- 
ing or resting? 10. Are you having a good time? 
11. Where do you go in summer? 12. Do you enjoy 
yourself? 13. Are you hurrying? 14. What are the 
children in this picture doing? 15. This lady flatters 
herself she sings well; she is much mistaken, is n’t she ? 
16. Is everybody mistaken sometimes? 17. Does one 
often blame’one’s self? 18. Whois ill? 19. What is 
the matter with him? 20. Am I enjoying myself? 


Pronominal Verbs 155 


66 
Pronominal Verbs: reciprocal use. 


(1) Some pronominal verbs may be used in the 
plural either reflexively or reciprocally. 
Nous nous flattons, we flatter ourselves or each other. 


Ils se défendent, they defend themselves or each other. 
Elles se blessent, they wound themselves or each other. 


(2) When the verb is used in a reciprocal sense, am- 
biguity is prevented by the use of l'un autre; if the 
verb has two subjects; by les uns les autres, if there are 
more than two subjects. 

Nous nous flattons l’un l’antre, we flatter each other (two persons). 
Ils se défendent les uns les autres, they defend one another (more than 


two persons), 
Elles se blessent l’une l’autre, they wound each other (two persons). 


- But in ils se séparent, they part, ils se querellent, they quarrel, ils 
s’embrassent, they kiss each other, there is no ambiguity, and l’un 
Vautre, etc., are not needed. 


assurer, to assure, se défendre, to defend one’s self or each other. 
attaquer, to attack. se séparer, to part. 

blesser, to wound. se quereller, to quarrel. 

tuer, to kill. embrasser, to embrace, to kiss. 


1. Je pense que vous vous flattez toujours l’un l’autre. 
2. Au contraire, votre frére et votre scour se querellent 
souvent. 3, C’est vrai, ils se grondent quelquefois; ils 
ne s’aiment pas trop. 4.Si quelqu’un vous attaque 
quand vous serez absent, je vous défendrai; et, si 
quelqu’un m/’attaque quand je serai absent, vous me 


1 Do not confuse with l’un et V’autre, both: Ils sont partis l’un et 
Yautre, they have both left. Notice also l’un ou l’autre, either, and ni l’un 
nil’autre, neither. 


156 Pronominal Verbs 


défendrez. 5. J’accepte votre offre avec bien du plaisir. 
6. Vous le ferez, n’est-ce pas? 7. Je ne l’oublierai pas, 
je vous assure. 8. Nous nous défendrons ainsi l’un 
l’autre. 9. Si vous vous séparez dans le bois et si vous 
perdez votre chemin, nous vous chercherons l’un et 
Vautre. 10. On me dit que les sceurs ne se querellent 
jamais. 11. Quelle histoire! vous vous trompez, je vous 
assure. 12. Celles-ci se querellent souvent, mais elles 
finissent par s’embrasser. 13. Vos parents se portent-ils 
bien? 14. Toujours bien, merci. 15, Ne vous blessez 
pas l’une l’autre. 16. Ces messieurs se blament les uns 
les autres. 


For Oral Drill.—1.They (f.) admire themselves. 
2. They (f.) admire each other (two persons). 3. They 
admire one another (more than two persons). 4. Are you 
amusing yourselves? 5, Are you amusing each other ? 
6. Part. 7. Let us not part. 8. Do you blame us? 
9. Do you blame yourselves? 10. Do you blame each 
other? 11. Do not blame us. 12. Do not blame each 
other. 13. They are fond of her. 14. They are fond 
of each other. 


1. We never blame ourselves, I assure you. 2. You 
know, I suppose, that we always blame each other. 
3 These two friends are quarrelling, are they not? 
4. Will they not wound’each other? 5. Will they kill 
each other? 6. If this man killed his friend, he would 
kill himself too, I think. 7. Why do you not like each 
other? 8. Who told you that we did (do) not like 
each other? 9. Nobody; but you are always scolding 
each other. 10. Weare not quarrelling. 11. These two 
brothers quarrel sometimes, it is true, but in spite of 
that (cela) they are very fond of each other. 12. We 


Compound Tenses 157 


always defend one another. 13. Yes, but when you are 
together you always quarrel. 14. If we lose our way in 
this wood, we will not separate. 15. If any one attacks 
us, we will defend ourselves. 16. Who will attack us? 
17. I will defend myself and you will also defend your- 
‘self. 18. We will defend each other. 19. You forget 
that Iam no longer the young man you saw five years 
ago. 20. You are mistaken, I do not forget it. 
21. Were you and your brother looking for each other 
this morning ? 


67 


Compound Tenses. 

(1) The compound or perfect tenses of a verb are 
formed by combining its past participle with the vari- 
ous tenses of an duxiliary verb. All transitive and 
most intransitive verbs form their compound tenses 
with the auxiliary verb avoir. For intransitive verbs 
conjugated with étre, refer to the list given in Lesson 
25.1 


donner, to give Comrounp Tenses. __ retourner, to go back.* 
jai donné, Past INDEFINITE je suis retourné, 

I have given. } I have gone back. 
j’avais donné, | Priuprerrect Inpic.  j’étais retourné, 

I had given. I had gone back. 
j’aurai donné, Future Perrect je serai retourné, 

I shall have given, IT shall have gone back. 
j’aurais donné, ConDITIONAL PERFECT je serais retourné, 

I should have given. I should have gone back, 


i Certain verbs are conjugated with avoir or étre, according to the sense. 
With avoir, attention is called to the action itself, its duration, etc.; with 
étre, the result of the action is indicated: Vous avez grandi en peu de 
temps, You have grown up in a short time ; Vous étes grandi maintenant, 
You are grown up now. 

2 Three French verbs may be translated return in English: rendre, to 
give back, revenir, to come back, retourner, to go back. 


158 Compound Tenses 


(2) Reflexive and reciprocal verbs are always conju- 
gated with étre. 
Se défendre, to defend one’s self. 


Past INDEFINITE. PLUPERFECT. 
je me suis défendu, J have defended je m’étais défendu, 
tu t’es défendu. [myself. I had defended myself. 
il s’est défendu. Future PERFECT. 
elle s’est défendue. je me serai défendu, 
nous nous sommes défendus. I shall have defended myself. 
vous vous 6tes défendus.! ConDITIONAL PERFECT. 
ils se sont défendus. je me serais défendu, 
elles se sont défendues. I should have defended myself. 


(3) With reflexive and reciprocal verbs, étre takes 
the place of avoir, and, therefore, the past participle 
agrees with the preceding direct object (Lesson 30). 


Ils se sont aimés, they loved each other. 

Ils se sont écrit une lettre, they have written a letter to each other. 

Les lettres qu’ils se sont écrites, the letters they have written each other. 

Ma seur s’est coupée, my sister has cut herself. 

Ma seur s’est coupé? le doigt, my sister has cut her finger (literally, 

the finger for herself). 

Observe that in the first, third, and fourth of these examples the 
past participle agrees with the preceding direct object. In the second 
and fifth, however, the direct object does not precede the verb, the 
reflexive pronoun being in the dative case. 


se lever, to rise, to get up. adresser, to address. 

se coucher, to go to bed. commencer, to begin. 

se promener, to take a walk ora ride.  grandir, to grow tall, to grow up. 
s’enrhumer,® to take cold. simplement, simply. 

facher, to vez. sitét, so soon. 

se facher, to get angry. fort (adv.), very, hard. 


1 Nos in this form if vous is singular. 

2 Compare: Ma scour s’est cassé le bras, ma scour a le bras cassé, and 
ma sceur m’a cassé le bras. 

8 s’enrhumer, fo catch cold; @6tre enrhumé or avoir un rhume, /o have 
a cold. ° 


Compound Tenses 159 


1. A quelle heure vous étes-vous couché hier soir ? 
2. Je me suis couché 4 dix heures et demie. 3, A quelle 
heure votre frére s’est-il levé ce matin? 4. Il s’est levé 
a sept heures moins un quart. 5. Votre scur s’est-elle 
promenée aujourd’hui? 6. Elle s’est promenée une 
demi-heure. 7. Elle s’est un peu enrhumée hier soir; 
e’est pourquoi elle ne se porte pas mieux aujourd’hui, 
8. Elles se sont adressées & nous. 9. Elles se sont 
adressé des lettres. 10. Nous avons vu les lettres 
qu’elles se sont adressées. 11. Est-ce que vos cousins se 
sont fachés lorsque vous leur avez raconté l’affaire ? 
12. Henri m’a dit simplement que je me trompais, mais 
Louise s’est fachée tout de suite. 13. Est-ce que vous 
ne vous seriez pas faché, si j’avais fait cela? 14. Nous 
nous sommes promenés si longtemps ce matin que ma 
sceur était fort lasse. 15. Mais ne vous étes-vous reposés 
nulle part? 16. Si nous étions restés chez nous hier 
soir, nous ne nous serions pas enrhumeés. 


For Oral Drill. —1.I am amusing them. 2.I am en- 
joying myself. 3.I have amused them. 4.I have 
enjoyed myself. 5. ITusedtoenjoy myself. 6. I had en- 
joyed myself. 7.Ishallenjoy myself. 8. I should have 
amused her. 9. I should have enjoyed myself. 


Repeat these sentences, making them negative, interroga- 
tive, or negative-interrogative, and changing the person 
and gender of the subject pronouns to third person singular 
feminine, first person plural masculine, ete. 


1. I got up at eight this morning. 2. At what time 
did you get up? 38. We got up at half-past nine. 
4, Whatalazy man! 5.Iwas not well. 6. What was 
the matter with you? 7.I caught cold two or three 
days ago, and I had the tooth-ache this morning. 8. Go 


160 The Pronouns Y and Hn 


to bed at once! you are sleepy. 9. If I went to bed so 
soon, I should n’t rest. 10. Don’t get angry. 11. Get 
up, your friends have arrived already. 12. When she 
has rested a little longer, perhaps another half-hour; you 
will tell her that we are ready. 13. Where are the 
letters you sent each other? 14. We have given them 
back to each other. 15. Would you have gone to 
bed so soon, if it had n’t been so cold? 16, Have they 
been out this evening? 17. Yes, sir, they went out 
with their father at a quarter before eight; they walked 
until quarter past nine, when (and then) they returned. 
18. They enjoyed themselves greatly (much), and I think 
he did also (he also, I think). 19. Go back home now; 
and when you are here to-morrow, we will finish together 
what we began yesterday. 


68 
En and Y. ' 

(1) En and y, although used frequently as adverbs, 
are pronouns. En=deandanounor pronoun, Y=&a 
and a noun or pronoun. 

For the use of en (of tt, of them, some, any) with 
words of quantity, numerals, etc., recall Lesson 37. 


Avez-vous des crayons, have you pencils? 
Oui, _j’en ai, yes, J have, 

Il n’en a pas, he has n’t any. 

Elle en a un, she has one. 

Apportez-en, bring some. 


(2) Y (to it, to them, there) is rarely used in refer- 
ence to persons. 
Pensez-vous & vos lecons, are you thinking of your lessons ? 
J’y pense, 7 am thinking of them. 
Pensez-y, think of them. 


Pensez-vous & vos amis, are you thinking of your friends ? 
Je pense & eux, J am thinking of them. 


The Pronouns Y¥ and En (161 


(3) There (expressed or understood in English) is 
expressed by y in referring to a place already men- 
tioned, and by la in pointing out a place or thing. 


Regardez cette maison-la, /ook at that house. 

J’y ai demeuré trois mois, J lived there three months. 
C’est la que vous trouverez ce que vous cherchez. 
That is where you will find what you are looking for. 


Position of y and en. 


(4) ¥ and en follow the other pronouns. Y precedes 


en. ‘ 
Je vous les y porterai, J shall carry them to you there. 
Je vous y en porterai, J shall carry you some there. 

Il y en a beaucoup, there are many of them. 


(5) A past participle does not agree with a preceding 


en.! 
Je n’en ai pas vu, J have n’t seen any. 


(6) In the imperative affirmative, y and en are joined 
to the verb, to other pronouns, and to each other. 


Prétez-nous-en, /end us some. 
Donnez-m’en,? give me some. 


car (conjunction), for. de tout mon ceeur, with all my heart. 
au moins, at /east. quelques-uns, quelques-unes, a few, some. 
remercier quelqu’un de quelque chose, to thank somebody for something. 


1. Avez-vous de l’eau fraiche ? 2. Oui, nous en avons. 
8. Donnez-en un verre a votre frére. 4. Vous parlez 
toujours de mes affaires ; pourquoi vous en mélez-vous ? 
5. Vous vous trompez, je vous assure, si vous pensez que 
je m’en méle. 6. N’étes-vous jamais entré dans cette 


1 If en is used with an adverb of quantity which precedes the verb, 


agreement takes place: Combien en a-t-on vus ? 
2 Notice that me and te do not become moi and toi before en, when used 


with the imperative affirmative. 
ll 


162 The Pronouns ¥ and En 


belle église? 7. Non,jen’y suis jamaisentré. 8. Com- 
bien de livres allemands avez-vous? 9. J’en ai plus que 
vous. 10.11 y en a dix sur cette table. 11. Ilya 
beaucoup de fautes dans sa lettre, mais la votre en est 
pleine. 12.J’en ai compté au moins une douzaine. 
13. Voici avenue ot vos amies se sont promenées tant 
de fois lorsqu’elles étaient ici ’année derniére. 14. Nous 
les y avons rencontrées bien des fois. 15. N’y avez-vous 
jamais vu mon pére et ma mére? 16. Ce n’est pas la 
que je les ai vus,c’est a l’opéra. 17. Oui, ils y sont 
allés de temps en temps. . 18. Je désirais beaucoup des 
romans intéressants lorsque j’étais a la campagne, et votre 
scour m’y en a envoyé quelques-uns. 19. Les lui avez- 
vous empruntés ou vous les a-t-elle donnés? 20. Elle 
m’en a donné plusieurs, mais il y en a aussi que je lui 
rendrai l’été prochain. 21. Mon frére a regu des piéces 
d’or; il m’en a donné quelques-unes. 


1. Have you any money about (sw) you? 2. Have I 
any money? My pockets are full of it. 3. If you have 
so much, you will give me some, won’t you? 4. If you 
would lend a little to your brother, I am sure he would 
be very glad of it. 5. He would thank you for it with 
all his heart. 6. How many books did you leave at 
home this morning? 7. I left two or three there, but 
I brought most of them to school. 8, If you have any 
good hot coffee, bring us a cup (of it), please, for we are 
very cold. 9. Haye you caught cold? 10. Has your 
mother been at church to-day? 11. She has not, but I 
have. 12. Have you? 13. Were there many American 
ladies there? 14. There were a few, at least a dozen. 
15. How many times have you been (gone) at the opera? 
16. I have been (gone) there twice. 17. He has also 
been there from time to time. 18. She used to have a 


Personal Pronouns - 163 


great many friends when she was young; now that she 
has grown up,’ she has more than ever. 19, Are you 
speaking of it? 20. Think of it, but do not speak of it. 
21. I will not speak of it there to any one. 22, Are you 
thinking of it ? 


69 
Personal Pronoun Objects: Summary. 


(1) The position of personal pronouns (se included) 
before the verb may be shown by the following table :? 
1. Me, te, se, nous, vous. 
2. Le, la, les. 
3. Lui, leur. 
4. Y. 
: 5. En. 


Or Me, te, se, nous, vous|le, la, les|lui, lear|y|len. 
Tl me le demande. . 
Ne les leur rendez pas. 
Il leur y en a apporté. 
On nous les y a envoyés. 

(2) In the imperative affirmative, which requires the 
pronouns after the verb, le, la, les precede the other 
pronouns, and me and te become moi and toi, except 
before en. | 
Montrez-les-moi. Donnez-m’en. 


le pare, the park. la tranche, the slice. 

la bonne, the maid, the servant. la cuisine, the kitchen, 

le boulanger, the baker. la cnisiniére, the cook, 

le gateau, the cake. la salle & manger, the dining-room. 


1 See note 1, page 157. 
2 In case teachers do not care to use this table, taken from an early edition 


of Magill’s grammar, this lesson, with the exception of the vocabulary, may 
be omitted, or the exercises may be used for further practice in the use of 
personal pronouns. 


164 Personal Fepecacith 


le déjeuner, the breakfast. se laver, to wash (one’s self). 
déjeuner, to breakfast. la brosse, the brush. 

le diner, the dinner. brosser, to brush. 

diner, to dine. le peigne, the comb. 

le savon, the soap. peigner, to comb. 


la serviette, the napkin, the towel. mériter, to deserve. 

le linge, the linen, the washing. compris, understood (past part.). 
laver, to wash. volontiers, willingly. 

‘1. N’avez-vous pas compris ce que je vous ai dit? 
2. Vous avez de si bon lait que je vous en demanderai 
encore un peu. 3. La bonne en désire aussi; ne lui en 
donnerez-vous pas? Volontiers. 4. Elle dit qu’elle vous 
en remercierait beaucoup. 5. Votre frére a tant de jolis 
romans allemands que je lui en emprunterai quelques-uns. 
6. Il ne vous les prétera pas, je vous assure, car il ne 
m’en a jamais prété un seul. 7. Elle n’a pas mérité le 
prix, parce que, si elle avait mérité, on le lui aurait 
donné, 8. Lui, il ne l’a pas mérité non plus. 9. Ce 
pauvre garcon a bien faim; coupez-lui une grosse tranche 
de pain, et donnez-lui aussi du beurre et un verre de 
lait. 10. Il yenaassez pour lui et pour nous. 11. Vous 
trouverez ce que vous avez perdu, si vous le cherchez. 
12. Ce sont 1& des histoires intéressantes que vous 
m’avez racontées. 13. Ne lui enracontez pas. 14. Ra- 
contez-m’en souvent. 15. Lui répondez-vous, lorsqu’elle 
vous parle? 16. Voici sa lettre; répondez-y. 17. N’y 
pensez plus. 


For Oral Drill—1. We lend them to you. 2. Do you 
lend them to her? 38. Lend them to her. 4. Lend 
them some. 5. Lend me some. . 6. Have you lent it 
to us? 7%. Has she lent me any? 8. Shall you lend 
them to them? 9. Are you speaking of it? 10, Are 
you thinking of it? 11. Let us think of it. 12. Let 
us speak of it. 13. Speak of it. 14. Think of it. 


Repeat, making each sentence negative. 





Personal Pronouns 165 


(A) 1. There are a great many bakers in this town, 
but there is only one in our street. 2, We sent our 
servant there this morning. 3. She bought us bread 
and cake there. 4. Our cook has bought us some there 
too. 5. These children have been playing in the yard 
behind the house and have not washed their hands yet. 
6. Here are soap, water, and towels; wash at once. 
7. Here is the brush; brush your hair. 8. Here is my 
dog; if you have any meat, give him some. 9. Here 
is some bread too, but don’t give him any, for he does n’t 
like it. 10. If those apples are not ripe, bring us some 
others (of them). 11. If youare in Paris next summer, 
I think I shall visit you there. 12. I shall not be there 
next year, but my sister will. 18. Bring us a napkin, 
please. 14. Give us also a slice of bread, a piece of 
meat, some butter, and a cup of black coffee. 15. I 
thank you for it. 16. What day of the week are the 
clothes washed? 17. Don’t ask me; I know nothing 
about it. 18. Comb your hair,? and brush your coat. 


(B) 1. Didn’t Lask you what time it was? 2. Did you 
. understand my question? 3. If you understood it, why 
did n’t youanswerit? 4. If I ask your pardon, will you 
forgive me? 6. Do you forgive me [for] it willingly ? 
6. Are you listening to what I am saying? 7. Is he? 
8. Has your father bought a néw house? 9. Who sold 
it to him? 10. Have I told you what has happened ? 
11. At what time do you getup? 12. At what time do 
you breakfast? 13. Do you dine at noon? 14. When 
do you dine? 15. Where do you dine? 16. Do we 
(does one) always dine there? 17. Shall you relate to 
us all the amusing stories you heard at Mrs. N.’s? 
18. John has won the prize; does he deserve it? 19. Is 
hesproud of it? 20. Would he be proud of it, if he did 


1 Se peigner or se peigner les cheveux, to comb one's hair. 


166 The Definite Article 


not deserve it? 21.1 haven’t any more money; have 
youany? 22. How much? 23. Have you more than 
1? 24. Have you ever been fora walk in that beautiful 
park? 25. What did you see there? 26. Were you 
alone? 27. Have you a good cook? 28. Is she in the 
kitchen ? 


70 
The Definite Article. 
(1) The definite article is used in a general sense 
(Lesson 33). 


L’or et l’argent sont des métaux précieux, gold and silver are precious 
metals. 
La rose est la reine des fleurs, the rose is the queen of flowers. 
(2) The definite article is used before names of con- 
tinents, countries,! provinces, rivers, and mountains. 


l’Asie, ‘Asia. la Seine, the Seine. 

lAllemagne, Germany. le Rhin, the Rhine. 

l’Angleterre, England. le Mont Blanc, Mont Blane. 

la Suisse, Switzerland. les Alpes, the Alps. 

Espagne, Spain. les Montagnes Rocheuses, the 
les Etats-Unis, United States. Rocky Mountains. 


(3) The article is omitted before the name of a coun- 
try used adjectively. 


Le roi d’Italie, the King of Italy. Du vin de France, French wine. 
La biére d’Allemagne, German beer. Lareine de Hollande, The Queen 
of Holland. 


(4) The article is omitted after en, in, the preposition 
regularly used to express where, where.to, before femi- 
nine names of countries. 

Aller, ou voyager, en Europe, en Asie, en Afrique, en Chine, en 


Angleterre, en Russie, en France, en Ecosse (Scotland), en Normandie, 
en Alsace. 


e 
1 The names of countries, cities, etc., found in the examples of this lesson 
are not repeated in the vocabulary. 


The Definite Article 167 


(5) It is not used after a, to, at, in,+ before names of 
towns. 

& Liverpool, & Rome, 4 Berlin, & Constantinople. But & la Haye, at 
the Hague, & la Nouvelle-Orléans, in New Orleans, au Havre, at Havre. 

(6) But it is used after & with masculine names of 
‘countries. 


Demeurer au Japon, au Mexique, au Canada, au Brésil, au Chili, aux 
Etats-Unis. 


(7) Jn is expressed by dans before the name of a 
country accompanied by an adjective or any other 
attribute. 


Dans l’Amérique du Nord (du Sud), in North (South) America. 
Dans toute la France, in the whole of France. 
Notice also: Dans le midi de la France, in the south of France. 


(8) From is expressed by de without the article 
before names of towns and feminine names of countries, 
and by de with the article (du, de la, del’, des) before 
masculine names of countries or names of countries 
accompanied by an attribute. 


Partir, ou venir, de Paris, de Londres, de France, d’Angleterre, 
d’Italie, etc. Partir, ou venir, du Japon, du Mexique, du Canada, de 
l’Amérique du Nord, des Indes Orientales (ou Occidentales). 


le président, the president. la capitale, the capital. 


le roi, the king. la terre, the earth, the land. 

la reine, the queen., le fleuve, the river. 

V’empereur, the emperor. le palais, the palace. 
V’impératrice, the empress. royal, royal. 

le prince, the prince. les habitants (m.), the inhabitants. 
la princesse, the princess. habiter, to live in, to inhabit, 


précieux, precious. 


1 Notice that dans Paris means inside the city, not in the suburbs, 
while & Paris means either. 


168 The Definite Article 


1. J’irai en France le mois prochain. 2. Si mes amis 
y vont avec moi, nous ne partirons pas avant le 21 du 
mois. 3. Nous avons visité plusieurs pays l’été dernier: 
la Belgique, la Hollande, la Prusse, l’Autriche et l’Italie. 
4, Avez-vous jamais été en Espagne? 5. Oui, j’y ai été 
deux fois. 6. Dans deux ou trois ans, si nous sommes 
assez riches, nous irons au Canada, aux Etats-Unis, et au 
Mexigque. 7. Monsieur votre frere n’est-il pas allé passer 
Vhiver en Italie? 8. Non, monsieur, il est allé dans le 
midi de la France, 4 la petite ville de Cannes. 9, La 
laine d’Espagne, dit-on, est préférable 4 celle d’Angle- 
terre et a celle de Saxe. 10. Ces messieurs sont-ils 
venus du Japon ou d’Espagne? 11. Ces messieurs-ci 
sont venus d’Angleterre. 12. Avez-vous visité d’autres 
pays? 13. Lesquels? 14. Quel pays habitent les 
Espagnols ? 

(A) 1. When we were in Washington last year, we saw 
the president. 2. Napoleon III was the last emperor of 
France. 3. When we are in Europe next year, we shall 
visit the royal palace of Fontainebleau and also that of 
Versailles. 4. The Rhine is a much longer river than 
the Thames. 5. Paris, on the Seine, is the capital of 
France. 6. It is not the largest city in the world, but it 
is certainly the most beautiful. 7. London has a great 
many more inhabitants. 8. I have one brother that lives 
in Mexico, another in China, and a sister in Canada. 
9. We came from Canada. 10. Two friends of ours 
went to Europe six months ago. 11. They are spending 
the winter in Rome. 12. They have seen the pope, but 
they have not seen the King of Italy. 13. They have 
not yet been received at court. 14. Man’s heart is never 
satisfied. 15. The Hague is an interesting city; it is 
the capital of Holland. 16. Everybody is fond of 
Switzerland. 


a 


The Definite Article 169 


(B) 1. Is France larger than the United States? 2. Is 
it larger or smaller than Germany? 3. Which is the 


- smallest country in Europe? 4. Which is the largest ? 


5. In what country do we live? 6. Do we live in North 
or South America? 7. What is the capital of this coun- 
try ? 8. Who is the president now? 9. Where does 
he live? 10. Who has seen him? 11. Did you ever 
see a queen? 12. Has England a king or a queen ? 
13. Tell me the name of the Emperor of Germany. 
14. Have the French! a king or an emperor? 15, Is 
Chamonix in Switzerland orin France? 16. The French 
love France, and the English love England; what country 
do we love? 17. Are princes always happy? 18. Are 
there princesses who are unhappy? 19. Where is Lon- 
don? 20. Where is Glasgow? 21. Have you ever 


. been there? 22, What are the most useful metals ? 


23. Which are the most precious ? 


71 
The Definite Article (Continued). 


(1) The definite article is frequently used instead of 
the possessive adjective, when there is no possibility of 
a misunderstanding (Lesson 59). 


Il a levé les mains, he raised his hands. 
Elle s’est cassé le doigt, she broke her finger. 
Elle a le doigt cassé, she has a broken finger. 
' Il m’a saisi le bras, he seized my arm. 
(2) The definite article is used instead of a possessive 
adjective in expressions like the following: 
Elle est debout, le livre & la main, she is standing with the book in her 
hand. 
Il est parti, le chapeau sous le bras, he left with his hat under his arm 


1 Adjectives of nationality used as proper nouns begin with capitals. 


170 The Definite Article 


(3) It is used for a or an before nouns of weight, 
measure, or number; but par is used for a or an before 
time. 


Le miel cofite quinze sous la livre, honey costs fifteen cents a pound. 

Ce drap cofite un franc le métre, this cloth costs one franc per metre. 

Les crayons cofitent dix sous la douzaine, pencils cost ten cents a 
dozen. 

But , ’ 

Il gagne six frances par jour, he earns six francs per day. 

Il mérite deux mille francs par an, he deserves two thousand francs 
a year. 


(a) A similar use is that with the days of the week to express a 
regular occurrence. 


Le dimanche est le premier jour de la semaine. 
Que faites-vous le samedi? 
But 0 serez-vous samedi prochain? 


(4) It is also used with titles, professions, and before 
a proper noun preceded by an adjective (except in di- 
rect address), or after monsieur, madame, or mademoi- 
selle. 


Le président Carnot a été assassiné en 1894, President Carnot was 
assassinated in 1894, 

Bonjour, docteur, good-day, doctor. 

Bon soir, monsieur le comte, good evening, count, 

Le petit Henri est malade, liti/e Henry is ill. 


(5) Likewise, before adjectives used as nouns. 


Aimez-vous mieux le bleu que le jaune, do you prefer blue-to yellow ? 
Avez-vous appris l’espagnol, have you learned Spanish? 
Sait-il Vitalien, does he know Italian ? 


With the verb parler, the article is usually omitted before the 
unmodified name of a language, and it is always omitted after en. 


Parle-t-il bien anglais, does he speak English well ? 
Tt s’exprime bien en italien, he expresses himself well in Italian. 


The Indefinite Article 171 


(6) Regularly in the partitive article: du, de la, del’, 
des! (Lesson 38). 
Voici des livres ; en voulez-vous, here are books, will yee have some? 


Exceptions (de only): 


(a) In expressions denoting quantity, measure, and 
material (Lessons 34, 35, 36). 


Combien de paires de gants, how many pairs of gloves? 
Une table de bois, a wooden table. 


(6) After negative verbs (Lesson 40). 
Il n’y a pas d’argent, there isn’t any money. 
(c) Adjective before the noun (Lesson 41), 


Donnez-nous de meilleur pain, give us better bread. 
But Avez-vous du pain noir, have you any black bread? 


(d) After a verb, an adjective, or any expression, fol- 
lowed by de. | 3 

Se nourrir de noix, to live (feed) on nuts; @tre fatigué de livres, to be 

tired of books; avoir besoin d’amis, to need friends. 
The Indefinite Article. 

(1) With an unmodified predicate noun, denoting. a 
profession, a trade, or a nationality, un or une is 
omitted. 

Son pére est médecin; le mien est avocat, his father is a doctor; 
mine is a lawyer. 
Elle est Francaise,” she is a French woman. 


Exception: 
After voici, voila, c’est, or ce sont. 
Voici un médecin, here is a doctor, 
C’est une Allemande, she is (that is) a German woman, 


1 In meaning, des is the plural of un and une, Il aun livre; il a des 
livres. 
2 Notice again use of capitals with adjectives of nationality used as 


proper nouns, 


172 The Article 


le métier, the trade, the profession. le musicien, the musician. 


le professeur, the professor. la musique, the music. 

le peintre, the painter. l’étage (m.), the story (of a house). 
le ministre, the minister. parisien, Parisian. 

l’architecte, the architect. canadien, Canadian. 

le charpentier, the carpenter. hollandais, Dutch. 

le coiffeur, the barber. se coucher, to go to bed. 

le jardinier, the gardener. s’exprimer, to express one’s self. 
‘le dentiste, the dentist. enseigner, to teach. 


comme, as, like; (exclamation) how! 


1. Quelle est l’adresse de M. Grandet? 2. C’est 52 
rue St. Honoré. Il demeure au deuxiéme étage. 3. Le 
président et sa famille habitent la Maison Blanche. 
4, Ce Canadien est-il peintre ou musicien? 5. II n’est 
ni l’un ni l’autre, il est architecte. 6.11 est arrivé a 
quatre heures, la canne & la main. 7. Nous avons lu 
Vhistoire de Henri quatre. 8. N’avez-vous ni livre ni 
papier? 9. Je n’ai ni Yun nilautre. 10. Voyez-vous 
«es messieurs ? 11. Ce sont des professeurs anglais qui 
-sont venus visiter les écoles américaines. 12. Ce mon- 
-sieur-l4 est Hollandais. 13. Aimez-vous la musique ? 
14, Parlez-vous italien? 15. J’ai étudié Vitalien ily a 
longtemps, mais je ne sais pas le parler. 16. Quelle est 
‘VPadresse des Foulquier? 17. C’est 78 avenue de la 
‘Grande Armée, prés du Bois de Boulogne. 18, Avez- 
‘vous jamais vu le prince de Galles (Wales)? 19. Je 
‘n’ai jamais vu ni prince ni princesse. 20. Mon pére a 
vu le roi Edouard VII. 


' (A) 1. This American speaks French like a Parisian. 
2. Who says so? 3. The Parisians say so. 4. Say it 
in French. 5. He has also learned Italian, Spanish, 
and German. 6. I have an Amerjcan friend who speaks 
modern Greek well. 7. Does he express himself as well 
in Greek as in English? 8. She is an Englishwoman. 


The Article | 173 


9. Those are English professors, 10. There they are 
now. 11. When I saw her, she was sitting near the win- 
dow with a straw hat on her head. 12. I have a head- 
ache. 13. He has toothache and a sore foot. 14. Eggs 
are sometimes sixty cents a dozen. 15. How much does 
that (cela) cost? 16, That costs ten cents a pound. 
17. That costs dear. 18. We wrote to him three times 
a week. 19. He has black hair. 20. That carpenter 
you were speaking of builds a great many houses; he 
earns thirty dollars a week. 21. This poor French 
painter earns only nine hundred franesayear. 22. Span- 
ish and Italian are easy, but German is difficult for most 
Frenchmen. 23. Queen Victoria had the best heart in 
the world. 24, The wicked are always unhappy. 


(B) 1. Who hasagold watch? 2. Have you anything 
in your hand? 3. Anything for me? 4. How much 
do I owe you? 5. Who is-hungry? 6.Is any one 
sleepy? 7. Whoneedsmoney? 8. Doyou? 9. Does 
this man like children? 10. Do I live at your house ? 
11. Where do I live? 12. Did your brother live in 
Germany last year? 13. Are you studying German ? 
14. Have you been taught French? 15. Do you speak 
English? 16.Do you know Spanish? 17. What is 
your father’s trade ? 18. Is he a doctor or a lawyer? 
19. Do you like, languages? 20. Where is German 
spoken? 21. Are letters brought to you every day? 
22. At what time do you go to bed? 23. Who cuts 
your hair? 24, What is your address? 25. Where 
is little Mary to-day? 26. How much does butter 
cost? 27. Do you like cheese? 28. What color do 
you prefer? 29. Do you like it better than yellow ? 
30. When you are in France next summer, shall you 
speak French? 31. Will they answer you in English ? 


174 Duration of Time 


72 
How Long? 


(1) An action or state which began some time ago 
and is still going on, is expressed in French by the 
present tense. In such cases, how long=depuis quand 
(literally, since when). 

Depuis quand étes-vous ici, how long have you been here ? 

Je suis ici depuis trois mois, / have been here three months. 


Depuis quand travaille-t-elle, how long has she been working ? 
Elle travaille depuis une demi-heure, she has been working a half hour. 


(a) These ideas may ‘also be expressed by another 
idiom : 
Combien (de temps) y a-t-il que vous étes ici ? 
Il y a trois mois que je suis ici. 


Combien y a-t-il (de temps) qu’elle travaille ? 
Il y une demi-heure-qu’elle travaille. 


(2) If the action or state is entirely past, how long= 
combien de temps with the past indefinite (perfect). 

Combien de temps étes-vous resté ici, how long did you stay here? 

Je suis resté ici (pendant) trois mois, / stayed here three months. 


Combien de temps a-t-elle travaillé, how long did she work ? 
Elle a travaillé une demi-heure, she worked half an hour. 


Combien de temps may not be used with the simple 
imperfect to denote length of time. 

Pendant expresses the whole duration of an action 
or state from beginning to end. In this sense it may 
generally be omitted. Compare with depuis quand, 
which denotes action still going on. 


(3) If the action or state is future, how long = com- 
bien de temps with the future tense. 


Duration of Time oe 175 


Combien de temps serez-vous ici, how long shall you be here? 
Je serai ici trois mois, / shall be here three months. 

Combien de temps travaillera-t-elle, how long will she work? 
Elle travaillera une demi-heure, she will work half an hour, 


surtout, above all, especially. | seulement, only. 
done, then, therefore, pray. ensuite, a/lerwards, nezt. 


1. Je demeure & Glasgow depuis quinze ou seize ans. 
2. Henri y a demeuré pendant trois ans, de 1900 4 1903. 
3. Il était trois heures quand j’ai commencé mes exer- 
cices, 4. Il est maintenant quatre heures et demie; je 
travaille done depuis une heure et demie, 5. J’étudierai 
encore une demi-heure, et ensuite je visiterai ma tante 
qui est un peu malade depuis hier. 6. Votre cousin 
n’est-il pas &4 Londres depuis longtemps ?_ 7. Oui, mon- 
sieur, mon cousin demeure a Londres depuis trois mois. 
8. J’ai demeuré & Londres quinze jours, il y a bien long- 
temps. 9. J’étais alors trés jeune, et j’aimais le plaisir 
plus que le travail. 10. J’ai peu voyagé depuis, mais je 
pense que je visiterai bientot Paris. 11. Quand étes-vous 
allé 4 Edimbourg? 12. Il y aura trois mois 4 la fin de 
la semaine prochaine. 13. Combien y a-t-il de temps que 
votre frére est revenu? 14. I] yaquinze jours qu’il est 
arrivé de Bruxelles. 15. Combien de temps étes-vous 
restés 4 Paris? 16, Nous sommes restés trois jours 
& Marseille, deux & Lyon, deux 4 Dijon, et huit a 
Paris. 17. Combien de temps resterez-vous 4 Londres ? 
18. Quinze jours seulement. 


(A) 1. Is n’t it your uncle who lives in that old house? 
2. Yes, sir, it is he; he has lived in it for over twenty 
years. 3. How long have your father and mother been 
travelling in Europe? 4. They have been there for 
several months. 5. What cities have they visited? 
6. They have visited all of the most interesting cities of 


176 Duration of Time 


France, Germany, and Holland. 7. How long were they 
at the Hague ? 8. They were there two or three weeks. 
9. It is there that they read Dumas’s La Tulipe Noire 
for the first time. 10. They were there when you were, 
were they not? 11. Whenthey were in Paris, they sent 
us a beautiful gift. 12. Haven’t they been in Switzer- 
land yet? 13. They are there now. 14, How long 
have they been there? 15. For seven or eight weeks, 
I think. 16. Are they fond of the Alps? 17. Very; 
my father, especially. 18. Where will they spend the 
winter? 19. They will be in Rome four months; then 
they will go to Naples, where they will stay from the first 
of April until the fifth or sixth of May. 20. They will 
be in America before June first. ’ 


(B) 1. At what time did you come in? 2. What 
time is it now? 3. How long have you been here ? 
4. How long shall you stay here? 5. At what time did 
these pupils come to school this morning? 6. Did 
they come yesterday ? 7. How long did they stay? 
8. Who stayed the longer, you or I? 9. I was here 
an hour ago; where were you? 10. Were you alone ? 
11. Where do youlive? 12. Have you lived there long? 
138. How long? 14.I have been looking for my pen 
for ten minutes; have you seen it? 15. Who took it? 
16. Did n’t you know it was mine? 17. You have some 
friends who have been travelling for a long time, have 
you not? 18. Haven’t they always travelled a great 
deal? 19. How long were they in Canada last summer? 
20. How long have you studied French? 21. Who 
studies German? 22. How long has he studied it? 
23. How long did you study the seventy-first lesson ? 
24. When did you study it? 


The Past Definite Tense — 177 


73 
The Past Definite (Preterite). 
avoir. étre. donner. 

jus, J had. je fus, Z was. je donnai, J gave. 
tu eus. tu fus. tu donnas. 
il eut. il fut. il donna. 
nous efimes. nous fiimes. nous donnames. 
vous etites. vous fiites. vous donnates. 
ils eurent. ils furent. ils donnérent. 

finir. recevoir. vendre. 
je finis, 7 finished. je recus, J received. je vendis, J sold. 
tu finis. tu recus. tu vendis. 
il finit. il recut. il vendit. 
nous finimes. nous recfimes. nous vendimes. 
vous finites. vous recites. vous vendites. 
ils finirent. ils recurent. ils vendirent. 


Using the above paradigms as models, learn to conjugate 
the past definite of any regular verb; also, of the irregu- 
lar verbs already given: aller, j’allai, tu allas, efc.; faire, 
je fis, eic.; dire, je dis, efc.; savoir, je sus, e/c.; voir, je 
vis, etc. Observe that the only change of vowel occurs in 
the third person plural of the first conjugation. 


Use of Past Tenses. 


(1) We have seen (Lessons 10 and 67) that the con- 
versational past tense, denoting what happened, is the 
past indefinite (perfect). 

(2) We have also seen (Lesson 42) that the svn Vel 
is used to express a customary or continued past action, 
or a description of the state of things when something 
took place or while it was taking place; also with si in 


conditional clauses (Lesson 60). 
12 


178 The Past Definite Tense 


(3) The past definite is used only in a formal nar- 
rative! or historical style to denote an action or state 
which was definitely completed in past time. 


Study carefully the following examples : 


J’ai vu votre cousine il y a quelques jours, J saw your cousin a few 
days ago. 

Ou était-elle ? Elle était chez elle. 

Where was she? She was at home. 

Etes-vous allé la voir? did you go and see her? 

Quand j’étais & Paris, j’allais souvent a l’opéra. 

When I was in Paris, I often went (used to go) to the opera. 

Le prince Edouard dans cette bataille ne perdit pas soixante hommes. 

Prince Edward in that battle did not lose sixty men. 


Les anciens Egyptiens embaumaient les morts, les Grecs et les 


Romains les briilaient. 
The ancient Egyptians embalmed the dead, the Greeks and Romans 
burned them. 
On embauma le corps d’Alexandre et on le transporta en Egypte. 
They embalmed the body of Alexander and catried it to Egypt. 


le libraire, the book-seller. le paysan, the peasant, countryman. 
VYennemi (m.), the enemy. _louer, to praise. 

la bataille, the battle. couronner, to crown. 

une épée, a sword. s’écrier, to exclaim, to cry out. 


1. Le roi donna dix louis au paysan et lui pardonna 
sa faute. 2. Un officier blessé fut transporté chez lui, 
ou deux médecins furent appelés. 3. On demanda 4 
un petit garcon, pourquoi il désirait du sel; c’est, ré- 
pondit-il, pour la viande qu’on me donnera. 4. Aussi- 
tot qu’il eut fini son travail, il partit pour la campagne. 
5. Il me demanda pardon et m’assura qu’il me donnerait 


1 The past anterior (compound of the past definite) expresses an action 
immediately prior to that expressed by the past definite. It is used cnly 
after quand, aussitét que, & peine, etc. 

Aprés qu’il eut parlé, il s’assit, after he had spoken, he sat down. 

A peine fut-il arrivé que midi sonna, he had scarcely arrived when t 

struck twelve. 


The Past Definite Tense 179 


tout ce que je désirais. 6. La reine lui donna de beaux 
bijoux; ils étaient dans une boite d’or. 7. Quand nous 
étions jeunes, je travaillais pendant que ma sceur jouait. 
8. Elle chantait tous les jours. 9. Son maitre lui préta 
quinze francs et lui demanda s’il en était content. 
10. Voici la petite histoire que l’on m’a racontée: Il y 
‘avait une fois un homme qui était trés pauvre. LI avait 
une femme qui était malade depuis longtemps et cing 
enfants qui avaient toujours faim. Un jour une fée 
(a fairy) arriva et lui dit, “Mon pauvre ami, je vous 
apporte quelque chose dont vous avez besoin,” ec. 


1. The tree fell and killed the man who was cutting 
it. 2. Their daughter won the prize and received a 
beautiful book. 3. After the death of the queen, they 
crowned her son. 4. The old book-seller often told us 
stories, and one day he told us the story of his life. 
5. The poor man cut the bread and afterwards he gave 
the knife to a child that was standing near him. 6, My 
father says that he used to forget everything when 
he was at school. 7. Now he never forgets anything. 
8. Who won the battle, the English or the French? 
9. Napoleon lost the battle of Waterloo. 10. Was he 
not a great general in spite of that? 11. At last the 
general perceived the enemy. 12. He perceived that 
the soldiers were not far from the city which he was 
defending. 13. What did he do? 14. He seized his 
sword and cried, “ Let us receive them well!” 15. What 
happened then? 16. His men obeyed him immediately 
and defended the city. 17. The king praised the gen- 
eral and gave him a magnificent sword. , 


The names, descriptive past, given to the imperfect, and the narrative 
past, given to the past definite, in the Grandgent grammars, are highly 
suggestive of the proper use of these tenses. 


180 Peculiarities of the First Conjugation 


7% 
Peculiarities in Verbs of the First Conjugation. 


All the verbs of the first conjugation but two (aller, 
to go, and envoyer, to send) are regular, and conse- 
quently are conjugated like donner. A few present 
some peculiarities caused by changes made for the 
sake of pronunciation. These verbs are: — 

1st. Those having an e mute before their last syl- 
able, such as mener, lever, appeler, jeter. 

2d. Those having an é before their last syllable, as 
eélébrer, préférer, espérer. 

$d. Those ending in -yer. 


4th. Those ending in -cer or -ger. } See Lesson 75. 


E mute before a Final Syllable. 

Verbs of the first conjugation having an e mute 
in the syllable next before the ending of the infinitive 
change that e mute to é, when, in the course of the 
conjugation, the syllable following contains e mute, 


lever, to lift. 
Present INDICATIVE. Past DEFINITE 
je léve. je levai, 
tu léves. etc. 
il léve. Future. 
nous levons. je léverai, 
vous levez. ete. 
ils lévent. ConpDI!TIONAL. 
iMPERFECT INDICATIVE. je léverais, 
je levais. etc. 
tu levais, IMPERATIVE. 
etc. léve. 
Past INDEFINITE. levons. 


jai levé. levez. 


Peculiarities of the First Conjugation 181 


Exceptions : — Most verbs ending in -eler, as appeler, 
and -eter, as jeter, double the 1 or the f, instead of 
changing e mute to é, the effect on the pronunciation 


being the same. 


appeler, fo call ; jeter, to throw, 


Present Inpicartive. 
appelle, jette. 
appelles, jettes. 
appelle, jette. 
appelons, jetons. 
appelez, jetez. 
appellent, jettent. 

ImperFrect INDICATIVE. 


Past DerinirE. 
appelai, jetai. 
Forore, 
appellerai, jetterai. 
ConDITIONAL. 
appellerais, jetterais. 
IMPERATIVE, 
appelle, jette. 





appelais, jetais, appelons, jetons, 
etc, appelez, jetez. 
Acheter, to buy, geler, to freeze, and a few other verbs 
follow the rule for lever, instead of doubling 1 or t: 


jachéte, tu achétes, il achéte, nous achetons, etc. ; j’achéterai, ete. 
je géle, tu géles, il géle, nous gelons, etc. ; je gélerai, ete. 


Ei before a Final Syllable. 


All verbs of the first conjugation having an é in 
the syllable next before the ending of the infinitive 
change that 6 into é, when the following syllable con- 
tains e mute, except in the future and in the condi- 
tional. 


célébrer, to celebrate. 

Present InpicatTivs. Past DeritniTs. 
je célébre. je célébrai, 
tu célébres. ete. 

il célébre. Forure. 
nous célébrons. je célébrerai 
vous célébrez. tu célébreras, 


ils célébrent. etc. 


182 Peculiarities of the First Conjugation 


IMPERFECT INDICATIVE. CONDITIONAL. 
je célébrais, je célébrerais, 
etc. etc. 
Past INDEFINITE. : IMPERATIVE, 
jai célébré, célébre. 
ete. célébrons, 
célébrez. 


Note carefully that there is no change of accent in the future or 
conditional of verbs having é in the penult. 


mener,! to guide, to lead, to take. préférer, to prefer. 

amener, to bring (to escort hither). répéter, fo repeat. 

ramener, fo bring back. posséder, to possess, 
emmener, to take away. la bonne, the maid. 
promener, to take out for a walk, a drive,etc. la f€@te, the festival, the birth- 
se promener, fo go for a walk, a drive, ete. day. 

appeler, to call. la poupée, the doll. 
s’'appeler, to be called, to be named. le cas, the case. 

jeter, to throw. le chiffre, the figure, the num- 
acheter, to buy. ber. 

geler, to freeze. la glace, the ice. 

espérer, to hope. ailleurs, e/sewhere, 

régner, to reign. dailleurs, besides. 


fort (adv.), hard, very. 


1. Ma futtks sceur préfére ces poupées-ci a celles-la, 
mais je trouve celles-la bien plus belles que celles-ci. 
2. Est-ce que vous n’exagérez pas un peu? 3. J’exagére 
peut-étre quelquefois, mais je n’exagére pas dans ce cas-ci. 
4. Quand célébrerez-vous la féte de votrecousine? 65. Je 
pense que sa féte tombe le 13 du mois prochain, 6. Le 
13! c’est un bien vilain chiffre! Je préférerais le 12 ou 
le 14. 7. D’ailleurs le 13 est un dimanche, nous célébre- 
rons cette fétele12. 8. Espérons que le temps sera beau; 
année derniére nous avons eu un temps trés orageux. 

1 Distinguish carefully difference in meaning of mener and its com- 
pounds and porter and its corresponding compounds: porter, to carry, to 


bear; apporter, to bring; rapporter, to bring back; emporter, to carry 
away. 


Peculiarities of the First Conjugation 183 


9. Vous @tes bien content ce soir: il géle trés fort, vous 
patinerez demain. 10. Nous n’avons pas patiné l’hiver 
dernier; il n’a presque jamais gelé. 11. Ov achetez-vous 
vos livres et vos plumes? 12. J’achéte mes livres, mes 
plumes et mes journaux chez le libraire au coin de 
notre rue. 13.Comment t’appelles-tu, mon enfant ? 
14. Marie! c’est un bien joli nom; Marie, méne-moi prés 
de ta maman. 15. La bonne proménera les enfants ce 
soir; ils ne sont pas préts maintenant. 16. N’est-ce pas 
vous qui possédez tant de grandes maisons? 17. Non, 
monsieur, ce n’est pas moi, c’est mon frére. 


1. Would they not prefer these books tothose? 2. Let 
us hope that they will always be happy. 3. Do you 
not exaggerate his fortune? 4. I never exaggerate any- 
thing; he possesses many houses and lands. 5. I hope 
you will not forget the book I lent your sister on Tues- 
day last. 6. When will you celebrate my birthday ? 
7. [On] what day does it fall? 8. On the 13th of the 
month. I think itis alsoonaFriday. 9. Unfortunate 
[man], we shall never celebrate your birthday ; choose 
another day, if you please, but do not choose the 23d, 
because we shall be too busy that day. 10. If you bring 
your friends we will take them with us. 11. When will 
the maids take the children out to walk? 12.I shall 
buy thosé pictures for my mother. 13. Where are you 
taking my brother? 14.I am taking him to school 
15. Throw away that pear, it is very bitter. 16. Guess 
who called us when we were out walking. 17. I hope 
that we shall skate to-morrow. 18. Is it freezing a little 
_ this evening? 19.1 think it is freezing hard; it has 
been freezing for [the last] twenty-four hours. 20. The 
ice will be strong enough to-morrow. 


184 Pecularities of the First Conjugation 


75 


Verbs ending in -yer. | 
In verbs ending in -yer, the y becomes i before € 


mute. 

. However, verbs ending in -ayer may keep the y throughout or 
change to i before e mute: payer, to pay, je paye or je paie, je payerai 

or je paierai. In verbs in -eyer the y remains unchanged. 


employer, to employ, to use. 


PRESENT INDICATIVE. Past DeFrtnits. 
jemploie. jemployai. 
tu emploies. tu employas, 
il emploie. il employa. 
nous employons. nous employames. 
vous employez. vous employates. 
ils emploient. ils employérent. 
ImPeRFECT INDICATIVE. Future. 
jemployais, etc. jemploierai, etc. 
- nous employions, etc. ConDITIONAL PRESENT. 
Past INDEFINITE. jemploierais, etc. 
j'ai employé, IMPERATIVE. 
etc. emploie. 
employons. 
employez. 


Verbs ending in -cer or -ger. 


In a verb ending in -cer or -ger, c or g, being soft in 
the infinitive, must be kept soft throughout the verb. 
When, therefore, in any tense, ¢ or g would be followed 
by a or 0, a cedilla is placed under the c and a silent e! 
is placed after the g, to keep them soft. 

placer, to place; placant, placing ; nous placons, we place. 
manger, fo eat» mangeant, eating ; nous Mangeons, we eat, 


1 Observe that the @ inserted after g to keep it soft is merely an ortho- 
| graphical sign, and has no effect except on the quality of the g. See Intro- 
duction, page 8. 


Peculiarities of the First Conjugation 185 


commencer, to begin. 


protéger, to protect. 


Present INDICATIVE. 


je commence. 

tu commences, 

il commence. 

nous commencons. 
vous commencez. 
ils commencent. 


je protége. 

tu protéges. 

il protege. 

nous protégeons. 
vous protégez. 
ils protégent, 


ImperrivtT INDICATIVE. 


je commencais, je protégeais, 
etc, etc. 

nous commencions, nous protégions, 
etc. etc. 

Past Dertnite. 

je commencal, je protégeai, 
etc. etc. 

fls commencérent. ils protégérent. 


je commenceral. 


FurTurs. 


* je protégerai. 


ConDITIONAL PRESENT. 


je commencerais. 


appuyer, to support, to lean. 
aboyer, to bark. 
effrayer, to frighten. 
balayer, to sweep. 
un balai, a broom. 
annoncer, fo announce. 
prononcer, fo pronounce, 
menacer, to threaten. 
corriger, to correct, 
envoyer, to send. 

j enverrais. 


1, Essayez ce crayon-ci, c’est mon meilleur, 


je protégerais. 


déranger, to disturb. 

se déranger, fo disturb one’s self, to be 
disturbed, 

obliger, to oblige. 

le coin, the corner, 

le devoir, duty, exercise (lesson), task. 

sale, dirty. 

assez, rather, somewhat. 


Future and conditional, irregular: j’enverrai, 


2. Vrai- 


ment, il est trés bon; j’essaieral aussi votre pluie. 
3. Combien payez-vous vos plumes et voscrayons? 4. Je 
paie trés cher les plumes et les crayons que j’achéte cheg 


186 Peculiarities of the First Conjugation 


le libraire du coin. 5. Nettoyez un peu cette table, elle 
est toujours sale. 6. Monsieur, je nettoie cette table 
tous les matins. 7. Ce vilain petit chien que vous 
amenez toujours avec vous aboie presque tout le temps. 
8. On dit que les chiens qui aboient ne mordent jamais. 
9. Le proverbe est assez juste, mais votre chien a mordu 
hier le doigt de Charles. 10. Appuyez, s’il vous plait, 
ma chaise contre cette table. Merci. 11. Je mangeais, 
je pense, lorsque vous étes entré, 12. Vous mangiez, 
en effet, avec vos fréres et vos scours, mais je n’ai dé- 
rangé personne. 13. Nous ne pronongons pas les langues 
anciennes mieux que vous. 14. Si nous dérangeons 
votre frére, maintenant qu’il est occupé, il ne sera pas 
content. 15. J’achéterai cette montre la semaine pro- 
chaine; je n’ai pas assez d’argent aujourd’hui, 16. Pro- 
tégeons les malheureux. 17. Si vous menacez cet enfant, 
il ne travaillera plus. 18. Ne menacons personne. 


(A) 1. You will frighten your mother if you break 
that glass. 2. They would pay us this evening what 
they owe us, if they had money enough. 3. She is very 
lazy; she does not employ her time well. 4. If you pay 
my aunt before Saturday, I am certain that she will be 
rather pleased. 5. Why does he not send that book 
to his cousin? 6. Why will you not send my letters to 
your sister as soon as you receive them? 7. Those dogs 
bark all night. 8. Have you not cleaned my watch? 
9. Do not try his pen; itis a poorone. 10. My brother 
was eating his breakfast, when my aunt came in this 
morning. 11. He used to correct all my letters and all 
my exercises. 12. Let us not dine before seven o’clock. 
13. Let us always oblige our friends. 14. Formerly they 
pronounced very well. 15. Why do you aiways disturb 


Peculiarities of the First Conjugation 187 


your uncle? 16. When he was young he ate too often. 
17. They announced the sad news to their friends as 
soon as your letter arrived. 18. Don’t disturb yourself. 


(B) 1. What do we eat? 2. Who is reigning now in 
England? 3. Who throws my books out of (par) the 
window when I am out? 4. If you had a brother, who 
would take him to school? 5. Nobody. 6. Wouldn’t 
you? 7. Doyouskate? 8 When? 9. Shall youskate 
to-morrow? 10. Did you skate last winter? 11. Is 
-it freezing now? 12. Do we pronounce French well ? 
13. Do you try? 14. Do you know who sweeps this 
room? 15. Do you? 16. With what do they sweep? - 
17. Where do you buy books in this town? 18. Where 
do you buy yours? 19. Who pays [for]them? 20. Who 
is calling us? 21.[On] what day does your birthday 
come (fall)? 22. Who celebrates it? 23. Do you like 
ices? 24, Is there any one here who does n’t eat them ? 
25. Do dogs frighten you when they bark? 26. Do bark- 
ing dogs (dogs that bark) bite? 27. Shall you repeat 
what I have told you? 28. What’s your father’s name ? 
* 29. What’s yours? 30, How do you employ your time ? 
31. Do we always correct what we have written? 32. Do 
you go walking or riding? 33. When I am in Europe, 
what shall I send you? 34. At what time shall you get 
up to-morrow morning? 35. Is your name Charles or 
John? 36. Have you written these sentences well? 
37. Are you sure? 38. Who told you so? 


188 The Subjunctive Mode 


76 
THE SUBJUNCTIVE MODE, 
General Statement of its Use. 
(1) The subjunctive mode is rarely used in a principal 
clause.! It is used in a subordinate clause, when the prin- 
cipal clause implies necessity, uncertainty, or emotion. 


Il faut qu’elle soit punie. 
Itis necessary that she should be punished, or she must be punished. 
Je ne crois pas qu’il ait vu son fils, J do not think he has seen his son. 
J’ai peur qu’elle ne soit morte, J am afraid she is dead. 
(2) If, however, the thought expressed in the prin- 
cipal clause implies certainty or probability, the verb in 
the subordinate clause is in the indicative. Compare: 


Je pense que la santé est préférable a tous les biens. 

I think health is preferable to all riches. 

Je ne pense pas que la santé soit préférable a tous les biens. 
I do not think health is preferable to all riches. 

Observe that the conjunction que, by: which a sub- 
junctive is generally introduced, itself governs no 
mode. It is the thought contained in the verb of the 
principal clause that determines the mode used in the 
subordinate clause. 


PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 


avoir étre 
que j’aie. que nous ayons. que je sois. que nous soyons. 
que tuaies. que vous ayez. que tu sois. que vous soyez. 
qu’il ait. qu'ils aient. qu’il soit. qu’ils soient. 
IMPERATIVE. 
aie, have. ayons, let us have. sois, be. soyons, let us be. 
ayez, have. soyez, be. 


1 For the subjunctive in principal clauses, see Lesson 86. 

2 Instead of saying in English ‘‘/t is necessary that I should go,’ ‘‘ It is 
necessary that he should work to win,’ ete., say “J must go,’”? ‘* He must 
work to win,’’ etc. 


The Subjunctive Mode 


oe 


Impersonal Verbs. 


Impersonal verbs that do not imply certainty or 
probability are followed by the subjunctive. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 


il semble, it seems. 

il faut, 

il est nécessaire, 

il importe, oeP 

iS gat important, } ts ¢mportant, 
il convient, it is fitting, it 

il est saxrenitia’ is proper. 

il vaut mieux, \ it is better, or 

il est préférable,{ preferable. 

il se peut, it is possible, it 

il est possible,{ may be. 

il est juste, it is right. 

il est faux, if is false. 

‘il est bon, it is good. 

il est essentiel, ¢¢ is essential. 


tt is necessary. 


INDICATIVE. 


il me (lui, nous, etc.) semble, it seems 
to me (to him, to us, ete.). 

il parait, it appears, it is evident, at 
transpires. 

il résulte, \ it follows, 

il enuit, th result is, 

il est sir, 

il est certain, / 

il est évident, it is evident, plain. 

il est démontré, it is proved. 

il est clair, it is clear, obvious. 

il est manifeste, it is manifest. 

il est décidé, it is decided. 

il est vrai, it is true. 

il est probable, it is probable. 


it is sure, certain. 


il est indispensable, i/ is indispens- il est vraisemblable, i is likely. 


able. 
il est urgent, it is urgent. 
il est temps, if is time. 
il est heureux, it is fortunate. 


il est incontestable, it is incontestable. 
il arrive, it happens. 


Il semble, it seems, is also freauently followed by the indicative. 
This is the case when there is no doubt in the mind of the 


speaker. 


1. I] faut que mon frére ait ce livre aujourd’hui. 
3. Il me semble que vous avez 


est urgent qu’il l’ait. 


2. ll 


eu tort dans cette discussion; est-ce qu’on parle ainsi 4 
sa scour? 4.J’ai eu tort, c’est vrai, mais il est certain 
qu’elle m’a beaucoup dérangé. 4. I] parait que sa mére 
est malade depuis quinze jours. 6. Je leur ai sacrifié 
mon temps et mes ambitions ; faut-il encore quw’ils aient 
tout mon argent? 7. Se peut-il que M. votre cousin soit 


190 The Subjunctive Mode 


encore ici aprés cette affaire dont vous me parliez hier ? 
8. Il est essentiel que j’aie de l’argent avant huit heures; 
envoyez-le-moi. 9. Est-il indispensable que madame 
votre mére ait cette lettre cette semaine? 10. Oui, 
mademoiselle, c’est urgent; il faut qu’elle ait tous les . 
détails de l’affaire avant son départ. 11. I) est clair 
que vous avez sommeil; couchez-vous vite. 12. I] est 
vrai que je suis fatigué car j’ai beaucoup marché aujour- 
d’hui, et il est possible que j’aie sommeil. 15. Il est 
décidé qu’on ne donnera pas 4 votre ami la permission 
qu’il demandait. 14. Il se peut qu’elle ait acheté une 
nouvelle maison. 15. Il est probable qu’elle demeurera 
tout prés de nous. | 


1. Is it possible that I am wrong? 2. It is possible 
that you are wrong, but it is probable that you are:right. 
3. Is it right that he should be punished? 4. Yes, it is, 
(c'est) right; he has disobeyed his father and refused 
his sister everything she has asked him for. 5. It 
is right, then, that he be punished. 6.It may be 
that your sister and her friend have already arrived. 
7. I must have some paper, ink, aud pens at once. 
8. My father has been travelling for some time, and it 
is possible that he is nowin Paris. 9. It is time that 
I should have news of him (some of his news). 10. She 
_ must have her new dress to-night. 11. It is important 
for her to have it, but must she have it? 12. It is cer- 
tain that she will not have it before to-morrow. 13. Is 
it possible that they have not brought it? 14: It is 
evident that they have left it at home. 15.1 think that 
it is better that they have forgotten it; I am glad of it. 
16. Must you have that money soon? 17. Must you not 
have it to-day ? | . 


The Subjunctive Mode 191 


77 


Formation of the Present Subjunctive. 


There are two methods! of obtaining the present sub- 
junctive from the primitive tenses (or principal parts). ' 
Neither method is without exceptions, and neither 
applies to avoir or 6tre. 

First Method. Change -ant of the present participle 
to -e. In regular verbs of the third conjugation, e 
befcre v in the stem must be changed to oi. 


donnant: que je donne. 
recevant : que je recoive. 


Second Method. Drop -nt of the third person plural 
present indicative This rule applies to all regular 
verbs and to about twenty more of the irregular verbs 
than are covered by the first method, while the present 
subjunctive of only"two verbs, savoir and pleuvoir, may 
be obtained by the first method and not by the second. 


In other words, since the ending of the third person plural, -ent, is 
silent, when we pronounce the third person plural present indicative of 
most French verbs, we are also pronouncing the first person singular 
present subjunctive. 


ils donnent: que je donne. 
ils recoivent: que je recoive. 


1 Teachers will state to their pupils which method is to be followed. 
The other may be entirely ignored. 

2 In the principal parts, give the first person singular only of the present 
indicative, the pupil being required to know the tense so well that the third 
person plural is instantly ready for use in the formation of the present 
subjunctive. 


192 The Subjunctive Mode 


PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE OF REGULAR VERBS. . 
TERMINATIONS: -€, -€8, -€, -ions, -iez, -ent. 


These are also the terminations for all irregular verbs, except 
avoir and étre (Lesson 76). 


porter recev cir 
que je porte. que je regoive. 
que tu portes. que tu recoives. 
qu’il porte. qu'il recoive. 
que nous portions. que nous recevions. 
que vous portiez. que vous receviez. 
qu’ils portent. qu’ils recoivent. . 
finir vendre 
que je finisse. que je vende. 
que tu finisses. que tu vendes. 
qu il finisse. qu’il vende. 
que nous finissions. que nous vendions. 
que vous finissiez. que vous vendiez. 
qu'ils finissent. quw’ils vendent. 


Using these four verbs as models, be prepared to conju- 


gate the present subjunctive of my of the regular verbs 
previously given. 


There is no future subjunctive. The present sub- 
junctive is used to express both present and future 
time. 


1. On me dit qu’il est essentiel que vous arriviez a 
Londres avant le ler avril. 2. Il est bien important que 
je finisse, le plus t6t possible, tout ce que j’ai déja com- 
mencé; alors il sera possible que j’y arrive 4 temps 
(in time). 3. Vous lui avez désobéi: il est juste qu’on 
vous punisse. 4. Il] est évident que l’on nous attendra. 
5. Tl me semble qu’il n’est pas certain qu’on nous attende. 
6. Il est préférable que vous lui rendiez.ce livre vous- 
méme. 7. I] vaut mieux que nous restions ici ce soir 


The Subjunctive Mode 193 


8. Il est temps que vous fermiez vos livres. 9. Il 
est juste que vous me paylez ce que vous me devez. 
10. Est-il possible que je vous doive quelque chose ? 
11. Il est certain aue vous m’avez emprunté dix francs, 
ilyaplusdesix mois. 12. Se peut-il que vous l’oubliiez? 
13. 11 faut que nous nous le rappelions, n’est-ce pas ? 
14. Il est probable que ma sceur sera ici bientot. 15. I 
importe peu qu’elle soit avec nous. 16. Il vous semble 
que j’ai tort, mais je vous prouverai le contraire. 


1. Is it possible that you relate false stories? 2. It 
transpires that the story I was telling is not false. 3. It 
is fortunate for you that itistrue. 4. It seems as if you 
worked well, but I am not sure. 5. It seems to him 
that you are his friend. 6. It-is possible that you are 
mine too, but it seems to me that you are not. 7. It 
has been decided at last that we will give you the first 
prize. 8. Isit fitting that I should receiveit? 9. That 
letter must be sent [express two ways] before 1:30. 
10. We must begin as soon as she gets here. 11. Chil- 
dren must obey their parents. 12. It is probable that 
they will not always do it, and their parents must have 
a great deal of patience. 15. It is urgent that she 
answer the letter she received a few days ago. 14. It 
is possible that you are poorer than I, but it seems to 
me that you are much richer. 105. It is time for you 
to go to bed; it is eleven o’clock. 16. At what time 
must I get here to-morrow morning? 17. It is evident 
that you study several hoursaday. 18. It is good that 
you prepare your lessons so well. 19. If my father 
accepts your invitation, it will be possible for us to be 
at your house on Saturday next. 


13 


194 The Subjunctive Mode 


78 
Negative and Interrogative Verbs. 


(1) Verbs used negatively or interrogatively and im. 
plying uncertainty are followed by the subjunctive with 
the conjunction que; if there is no doubt in the mind 
of the speaker, the indicative is used. 


. Je crois qu'il est malade, J believe that he is ill. 

. Croyez-vous qu’il soit malade, do you believe that he is ill? 

. Je ne crois pas qu’il soit malade, J do not believe that he is ill. 

. Il n’est pas certain qu’il soit malade, it is not certain that he is ill. 

. Oubliez-vous qu’il est malade, do you forget that he is ill? 

. Saviez-vous qu’il était malade, did you know that he was ill? 

. Ne croyez-vous pas qu'il est malade, do you not believe that he is ill? 
. N’est-ce pas qu’il est malade, is n’t he ill? 


on Oo Fr © De 


Remarks on examples given above. 


1. I do not know that he is ill, but I do not doubt it. 

2. Iam asking for information because I am in doubt, hence the 
subjunctive, If, however, I believed that he was ill and if I were 
merely trying to find out if you also believed it, the indicative would 
be used. Croyez-vous que je suis malade? I ne croit pas que je suis 
ici. Croyez-vous que je feraicela? In these three examples there is 
no doubt in the mind of the speaker. 

8. I do not believe he is ill — doubt of the strongest kind. 

4, Impersonal verbs implying certainty or probability when used 
negatively or interrogatively imply doubt and require the subjunctive. 
Il ne me semble pas qu’il soit malade, but ne vous semble-t-il pas qu’il 
est malade? See 7 and 8. 

5 and 6. I have no doubt as to his being ill. 

7 and 8. A negative-interrogative calls for an affirmative answer. 
Ne dites-vous pas qu’ila tort? Ne trouvez-vous pas que cette petite 
fille est gentille ? 


(2) The subjunctive is not used after est-ce que? 
n’est-ce pas que? nor generally after such verbs as savoir,. 
to know, faire savoir, to let know, dire, to tell, apprendre, to 





The Subjunctive Mode — 195 


learn, to hear, to inform, informer, to inform, when 
they are used interrogatively or negatively, if there is 
no doubt in the mind of the speaker. 

The verb espérer takes the subjunctive only when 
used negatively or interrogatively. 


Croire (irregular), to believe, to think. 


PRESENT PARTICIPLE. Past PARTICIPLE. 
croyant. cru. 

Present INDICATIVE. ImperRFECT INDICATIVE. 
je crois. je croyais. 
ey sre ; Past DEFINITE. 

nee je crus. 
nous croyons. 
vous croyez. FurTuRE. 
ils croient. ; je croirai. 
Past INDEFINITE. é ConDITIONAL. 
j'ai cru. je croirais. 
trahir, to betray. prétendre, to pretend, 
regretter, fo regret.” de son mieux, one’s best. 
assez 
F \soinewohat: rather. 
un peu, | 


1. Mille. votre sceur espére, je crois, que vous lui en- 
verrez l’argent que vous lui avez promis. 2. Je ne crois 
pas que vous lui ayez prété le livre que vous lui réclamez. 
3. Supposez-vous que nous osions jamais lui en parler ? 
4, Oubliez-vous qu’elle est plus 4gée que nous? 5. Si 
vous étes puni, ne croyez pas que j’en sois la cause: je 
n’ai parlé de vous a personne. 6. Vous ne m’aviez pas 
dit que vous étiez indisposé: j’espére que vous vous portez 
mieux. 7. N’espérez pas que je trahisse mon ami pour 
vous faire plaisir. 8. Ne savez-vous pas que M, votre 
frére est revenu de Paris? 9. Ils se flattent que je 
répondrai 4 leur lettre, mais ils se trompent. 10. Elle 


196 The Subjunctive Mode 


ne croit pas que vous préfériez mon livre ausien. 11. Je 
vous demande pardon, mais je vous assure qu’elle a écrit 
six lettres depuis mon arrivée. 12. Ne vous imaginez 
pas que nous nous amusions ici sans vous; nous vous 
regrettons beaucoup et nous parlons de vous & chaque 
instant. 13. Je suppose que vous me défendrez si l’on 
m’attaque. 14. Je ne pense pas que l’on vous attaque, 
mais, si on le fait, je serai la et vous défendrai. 15. Je 
n’espére pas qu'il réussisse, mais je pense qu'il travaillera 
bien. 16. Croient-ils que je les attende? 17. Oui, mon- 
sieur, ils espérent que vous les attendrez. 


(A) 1. She does not think that her father has come. 
2. She thinks that her mother has come. 3. Does she 
think that we have come? 4. It may be that they have 
come. 5. She must finish her work at once. 6.1 do 
not pretend that hé is right, but I think you are wrong. 
7. 1 hope you will answer your sister’s letter; do you 
forget she is ill? 8. Ido not forget that she is ill, but 
I shall not answer her letter yet. 9. She thinks that 
you have forgotten her. 10. I do not suppose you will 
give her all that money. 11. She does not hope that 
her father will give her any, but I think that he will. 
12. I must have some paper, some ink, and a better pen. 
13. Did you tell them that I would thank them myself? 
14. Don’t you find [that] this water [is] very good? 
15. Do you believe that they are in London? 16. Do 
(est-ce gue) you believe that (cela)? 17. 1s (est-ce que) 
not that true ? 


(B) 1. Do you think that this subject is an easy one? 
2. You think that this subject is somewhat difficult, do 
you not? 3. Don’t you think that it’s very interesting ? 
4, Did you know that everybody believes that it is the 


The Subjunective Mode — 197 


most difficult in the whole French grammar? 5. Have 
I told you that the French [people] themselves are not 
always sure about it? 6. Is it possible that I have not 
told you that (cela)? 7. Must we study it? 8. You 
hope that soon you will find it easier, don’t you? 9. Do 
you hope that lam wrong? 10. Don’t you think I am 
right? 11. Do you think that English history is interest- 
ing? 12. Is it possible that French history is much more 
interesting ? 13. Does (est-ce gue) nobody know that we 
are here? 14. Does any one know that I have lent you 
some money? 15. Who told you that everybody knows 
it? 16. It seems to me that you have learned this lesson 
well; does it seem to you thatI am right? 17. Is it 
right for you to believe that? 


79 
Verbs of Emotion. 

(1) Words or phrases expressing will, wish, command, 
doubt, fear, expectation, prohibition, permission, com- 
plaint, joy, sorrow, surprise, or any other emotion, are 
followed by the subjunctive with the conjunction que: 


Je désire que vous lui parliez, J wish you to speak to him. 
Je défends que vous l’attendiez, J forbid you to wait for him. 


Vouloir (irregular), to wish. 


PRESENT PARTICIPLE. Past PARTICIPLE. 
voulant. voulu. 
PRssEntT INDICATIVE. ImperFecT INDICATIVE 

je veux. je voulais. , 

tu veux. Past Derinire. 

il veut. ; je voulus. 

nous voulons. <> Future. 

vous voulez. _ je voudrai. 


ils veulent. 


198 The Subjunctive Mode 


Past INDEFINITE. ConDITIONAL. 
jai voulu. je voudrais. 
je veux, J wish, want, command. 


je veux bien, J am willing, consent. 
je voudrais or je voudrais bien, J should like. 


Notice the difference in meaning between the present indicative anu 
the conditional of the verb vouloir. 


Il veut le faire, he wishes (wills, means) to do it. 

Il voudrait le faire, he would like to do it. 

Je veux étre & Paris avant le 1¢T mai, J wish (intend) to be in Paris 
before the first of May. 

Je voudrais y étre maintenant, J should like to be there now, or I 
wish I were there now. 


(2) In French, the subjunctive is always sed after 
verbs expressing wish or will, except only when both 
verbs (that is, the verb expressing wish or will and the 
verb depending on it) have the same person or persons 
for subjects; in which case the second verb is put in 
the infinitive. 


Je veux que vous restiez ici, 7 wish you to stay here. 
Il veut rester ici, he wishes to stay here. 


défendre, to forbid. ordonner, to command. 

répliquer, to reply. exiger, to demand, insist. 

souhaiter, to wish (to make a wish for). trouver bon, to approve. 
douter, to doubt. trouver mauvais, to disapprove. 


surpris, surprised. 


1. Je doute qu’il réussisse. 2. Je désire que vous 
m’attendiez. 3. Il veut que nous lui obéissions sans ré- 
pliquer. 4. Vous ordonnez qu’on vous obéisse. 5. Elle 
exige que nous vous attendions. 6. Je défends qu’on 
le punisse. 7. Je suis surpris que vous lui parliez encore 
aprés ce qu'il a dit et fait contre vous, 8. Je regrette 


The Subjunctive Mode | 199, 


beaucoup que vous m’ayez attendu, mais je vous assure 
que ce n’est pas,ma faute. 9. Adieu, monsieur, je 
souhaite que vous vous portiez bien. 10. Je désire que 
vous in’accompagniez, mais je ne l’exige pas. 11. Voulez- 
vous bien permettre que ma sceur et moi nous jouions 
un peu? 12. Je veux que vous restiez ici l’une et l’autre, 
vous n’avez pas encore appris vos legons. 13. Jé voudrais 
aller 4 la campagne, mais ce n’est pas possible. 14. Nous 
doutons fort qu’il vous attende. 15. Ma mére est bien 
aise que vous soyez enfin revenu. 16. Obéis, si tu veux 
qu’on t’obéisse un jour. — ( Voltaire.) 


1. They wish you to speak to me. 2. Do you wish 
to speak tome? 3. Does he wish me to speak to you ? 
4. He wishes to speak to me. 5. Do you wish him to 
speak to you about it? 6. Do you not wish her to sing 
that song? 7. No, I want you to sing it yourself. 
8. Does she wish to sing it? 9. I hope she will reply 
to my letter this week. 10.She forbids me to speak 
to you. 11. Are you not surprised that your brother 
has already come back? 12. Do you insist upon my 
being punished? 13. I consent to your playing a little, 
but you must stay here. 14. We wish we were in Paris. 
15. J wish to go there next summer. 16. They wish 
us to dine with them on Monday. 17. We regret that 
you have not received our letter. 18. She doubts that 
we shall arrive before her. 19. I want to work with 
you, and I want you to work with me. 20. Did you 
not know that I had met him? 21. Must I work all the 
time? 22.It is not probable that you will work too 
much. 


200 Lhe Subjunctive Mode 


80 
Ne and the Subjunctive. 


The following verbs meaning to fear, craindre, avoir 
peur, and trembler, and the two verbs prendre garde (to 
take care) and empécher (to prevent, to keep from) not 
only are followed by the subjunctive, but they also 
require ne before it. (See page 205.) 


J’ai peur qu'il ne réussisse, / fear that he will succeed. 
Empéchez qu’il ne réussisse, prevent his succeeding. 


But note that, after verbs of fearing used negatively 
or interrogatively, ne is omitted. 


Craignez-vous qu'il soit venu, are you afraid that he has come? 

Je crains qu’il ne soit venu, / am afraid that he has come. 

Je crains qu’il ne soit pas venu, J um afraid that he has not come. 

Je ne crains pas qu’il soit venu, / am not afraid that he has come. 

Je ne crains pas qu’il ne soit pas venu, / am not afraid that he hus not 


come. 
Craindre (irregular), to fear. 
PRESENT PARTICIPLE, craignant. Past PARTICIPLE, craint. 
PRESENT INDICATIVE. Imperrect INDICATIVE, 
je crains. je craignais. 
ta creins. Past DEFINITE. 
. il craint, je craignis. 
nous craignons. 
vous craignez. : Furore. 
ils craignent. je craindrai. 
Past INDEFINITE. CoNnDITIONAL. 
jai craint. je craindrais. 
le billet, the note. découvert, discovered (past part.). 
insulter, to insult. tranquille, tranguil, calm. 


soyez tranquille, rest assured, don’t worry. 
1. Je crains bien que vous ne vous soyez trompé. 
2. Je ne crains pas que vous perdiez votre belle montre, 
vous n’étes plus un enfant. 3. Soyez tranquille, j’em- 


The ‘Subjunctive Mode 201 


pécherai qu’on ne vous dérange. 4. Préférez-vous que 
je les punisse moi-méme? 5. Je le ferai bien, si vous le 
voulez, mais je crois qu'il vaut mieux que ce soit vous. 
6. Ils méritent bien que nous les corrigions, mais ne 
soyons pas trop sévéres. 7. Quoi! vous souffrez qu’on 
vous batte! un grand garcon comme vous! 8. Trouvez 
bon que je vous punisse quand vous le méritez: vous 


-m’en remercierez plus tard. 9. Je tremble que cette 


affaire ne soit découverte. 10. Ne craignez pas que je 


- vous afflige: je garderai tous mes chagrins pour moi seul. 


11. Ne me parlez pas ainsi, j’aime mieux que vous me 
grondiez. 12. Est-il possible que vous souffriez qu’on 
vous insulte? 13. Mon pére n’aime pas que vous voya-. 
giez seul. 14. Trouvera-t-il mauvais aussi que nous 
voyagionsensemble? 15. Je voudrais vous accompagner, 
mais jé crains bien qu’il ne s’y oppose; il veut que vous 
restiez ici. 


1. I fear you will lose the money which I have given 
you. 2. But my sister does not fear that you will lose 
it. 3.1 am afraid you are wrong. 4. Are you afraid 
that I have forgotten you? 5. I shall not suffer (souf- 
frirat) you to insult me. 6.I1 shall not punish her; 
I much prefer that she ask my pardon. 7. We shall 
prevent them from succeeding. 8. Do you disapprove 
of her not answering your note ? 9. Do you approve of 
their disobeying you? 10.1 tremble lest you should 
be discovered. 11. Do not fear that I shall be betrayed. 
12. She requires (exige or veut) metowait forher, 13. I 
hope you are better. 14. We are glad you are better. 
15. Does he know that you are much better to-day ? 
16. They want us to take a walk together. 17. They 
do not fear that we shall lose our way. 18. Take care 
( prenez garde) not to lose it. 


202 The Subjunctive Mode 


81 


Subjunctive in Adjective Clauses. 


(1) A relative pronoun (ou, in which, included) is 
followed by the subjunctive whenever doubt, uncer- 
tainty, or purpose is implied. 


Je cherche quelqu’un qui me rende service. + 

I am looking for some one who will oblige me. 
But 

J’ai un ami qui me rendra service. 

I have a friend who will oblige me. 


(2) The subjunctive is used after a superlative and 
after first, last, and only, unless the thought is stated as 
absolute fact. Accordingly, it is not used when the 
relative clause is merely explanatory or when the 
superlative is followed by de. 


C’est le plus beau livre qu’on ait jamais écrit. 
It is the finest book that was ever written. 
C’est le premier (dernier, seul) homme qui l’ait fait. 
He is the first (last, only) man that has done it. 
But 
C’est le plus beau des livres que j’ai lus. » 
It is the finest of the books that I have read. 
La meilleure éléve, qui était malade, n’a pas gagné le prix. 
The best pupil, who was sick, did not win the prize. 


Connaitre (irregular), to know, to be acquainted with, 


PRESENT PARTICIPLE. Past PARTICIPLE, 
connaissant. connu. 
PRESENT INDICATIVE. 
je connais. nous connaissons. 
tu connais. ; vous connaissez. 


il connait. ils connaissent. 





The Subjunctive Mode — 203 


IMPERFECT INDICATIVE. FUTURE. 
je connaissais. je connaitrai. 
Past DEFINITE. CoNDITIONAL. 
je connus. je connaitrais. 


Past INDEFINITE. j'ai connu. 


Paraitre, to appear, is conjugated like connaitre. 


1. Voila un beau cheval, c’est le plus bel animal que 
jaie jamais vu. 2. C’est, en tout cas, le plus beau des 
chevaux qui étaient hier surlechampdecourse. 3. Votre 
cousine est la femme la plus heureuse que je connaisse. 
4. Vous avez raison; c’est bien certainement la plus 
aimable des femmes que je connais. 5. De ces. trois 
officiers, c’est le plus jeune que vous connaissez, n’est-ce 
pas? 6.Il y a peu @hommes qui sachent supporter 
Vadversité. — 7. Cette “Histoire de France” est la meil- 
leure de celles que j’ai dans ma bibliothéque. 8. C’est, je 
crois, le seul livre sérieux quwils aient chez eux. 9. J’ai 
besoin d’une histoire qui soit intéressante pour les en- 
fants. 10. Cette ménagerie est la plus grande qui soit 
jamais venue ici. 11. Voici la plus belle de toutes les 
ménageries que j’ai vues, 12. J’irai dans un pays qui 
soit bon pour la santé. 13. Je connais un pays qui 
est bon pour la santé. 14. Votre frére est le premier 
qui soit arrivé. 15. Voila le meilleur éléve qui se soit 
jamais assis sur les banes de cette école. 


1. This is (voict) the most beautiful bird that we ever 
saw. 2. Do not cut this rose, it is the only one we have 
in our garden. 3. Give me back my French dictionary, 
please; itis the best one haveeverseen, 4. Itis always 
the best books that I choose. 5. We are now looking 
for a house where we shall be happy. 6. We have found 
a house where we shall be happy. 7. That is a portrait 
of his daughter, who died in 1900, 8. Is it the youngest 


204 The Subjunctive Mode 


of his daughters that is dead ? 


it is the tallest that I know. 
woman you know? 
that I know here. 
happiest. 
what he possesses ? 


9. Of these four ladies, 


10. Is n’t she the happiest 
11. She is the happiest of the women 
12. Of the women I know, she is the 
13. Is there a man who is content with (de) 
14. I know a man who is never 


unhappy, and yet (cependant) he possesses almost noth- 
ing. 15.1 have been visiting my friend, who is ill. 
16. Everybody desires friends that are faithful. 


82 


Subjunctive in Adverbial Clauses. 


(1) Certain conjunctions of purpose, condition, time, 
etc., are followed by the subjunctive. 


Compare the following lists of conjunctions taking respectively the 


subjunctive and the indicative. 
Subjunctive. 


avant que, before. 
jusqu’a ce que, Jn til, 
en attendant que, 
afin que, 
pour que, 
de sorte que, 
au cas que, in case (that). 
pourvu que, provided. 
supposé que, suppose. 
quoique 
bien que, 
encore que, 
soit que... ou que, either .. . or. 
non que, not (that). 
sans que, without. 
que,! used for one of the above con- 
junctions or for si, if. 


so that, in order that. 


although. 


Indicative. 
aprés que, after. 
pendant que, - 
esdin diate J white 
puisque, since. 
parce que, because, 
mena, yen 
quand, 
aussitét que, 
dés que, 
si, if, 
tant que, so long as. 

& mesure que, as, in propor- 
tion as. 

peut-étre que, perhaps. 

comme, as. 

que, used for one of the 

above conjunctions, except si. 


Jas soon as. 


1 For use of que see Lesson 87. 


The Subjunctive Mode — 205 


(2) Three conjunctions require not only the subjunc- 
tive, but also ne before it. 


& moins que, uniess. de crainte que 


do Nour whe, } for fear, lest. 


(3) The following conjunctive expressions also take 
the subjunctive. 
si (with adj. or adv.) . 
quelque(with adj. or pe ei - gr 
qui que, iliecec 
quoi que, whatever. 


} over 


1. Je suis venu moi-méme afin que vous me racontiez 
toute Vaffaire. 2. Il faut que tout soit prét avant que 
M. votre pére arrive. 3.Il me gronde (soit) que j’aie 
raison ou que j’aie tort. 4; Puisque vous étes beaucoup 
plus fort que moi, vous porterez les paquets. 5. Bien 
que vous soyez beaucoup plus 4gé que moi, j’ose dire que 
vous avez tort et que c’est moi quiairaison. 6. Nous 
travaillerons jusqu’a ce que vous arriviez. 7. Pourvu 
que j’aie votre approbation, je seraicontent. 8. Est-ce 
que vous croyez que vous l’insulterez sans qu’il vous 
punisse? 9. Supposé que votre chien me morde, est-ce 
que vous croyez que je ne lui donnerai pas de bons coups 
de pied? 10. Je ne vous raconterai pas l’histoire, de 
peur que vous ne la répétiez 4 votre cousin. 11. Je lui 
ai dit qu'il finisse son travail tout de suite. 12. Il 
m’avait dit qu’il avait déja fini son travail. 13. Faites- 
lui savoir que je veux le voir. 14. Le lion n’attaque 
jamais ’homme & moins qu’il ne soit provoqué. 


1. I like him although he does not always obey me. 
2. You must work until lam ready. 3. I do not think 
he will reply to your letter before we arrive from the 
country. 4. In case you need money, he will send you 
all of his. 5. Since he has a great deal more than I, 


206 The Subjunctive Mode 


I will accept his offer. 6. He will not give me the 
money he has promised me, unless I obey him. 7.1 
shall not punish you to-day, although you deserve it. 
' 8. He will go away (partira) lest we shall scold him. 
9. You must be diligent so that your mother may be 
pleased with you. 10. Although you have promised 
me a holiday, you have not givenittome. 11. I shall 
give you a beautiful book illustrated by Gustave Doré, 
provided you win the first prize in (de) French. 12.1 
shall not win that prize unless you help me a little. 
13. She does not dare to come here, for fear you will 
scold her. 14. She stayed at home until we had gone. 
15. I shall not look for your ring until (before) you 
look for it yourself. 16. He flatters us so that we may 
forgive him for what he has done. 17. If you get here 
before twelve and if (que) I am not ready, wait for me 
until I have finished my work. 18. I hope you will not 
wait too long. 19. Before he buys a house, he must 
have another thousand dollars. 20. However rich one 
may be, one never has money enough, 


83 
Present Subjunctive in Subordinate Clauses. 


The most common uses of the present subjunctive 
in subordinate clauses may be seen from the following 


summary : — 
Used after: Exceptions. 
Impersonal verbs, Fact and probability. 
Negative verbs, No doubt in the mind of the | 
Interrogative verbs, \ speaker. 
Verbs of emotion, etc. Espérer (affirmative). 
Superlatives, Followed by a genitive. 


prinioncksistuetens \ No doubt or purpose implied. 


Certain conjunctions. 


The Subjunctive Mode — 207 


Present Subjunctive of Irregular Verbs Already Used. 


For rules for determining the present subjunctive of a verb, see 
Lesson 77. 


dire voir aller vouloir 
que je dise. que je voie. que j’aille. que je veuille. 
que tu dises. voies. ailles, veuilles. 
qu’il dise. . voie. aille. veuille. 
que nous disions. voyions. allions. voulions. 
que vous disiez. voyiez. alliez. vouliez. — 
quils disent. voient. aillent, veuillent. 


The present subjunctives of faire, savoir, craindre, and connaitre 
are conjugated without change of stem: que je fasse, que je sache, que 
je craigne, que je connaisse. In envoyer and croire the same changes 
occur as in voir: que j’envoie, que je croie. 


Distinction between savoir and connaitre. 

Savoir means to know through the mind, to realize, to 
have learned, to know that something is so, to know how 
to. It never has a person for its object and may be 
followed by a conjunction or a verb. 

Savez-vous votre lecon, do you know your lesson? 

Combien de langues sait-il, how many languages does he know? 
Je sais qu’elle est ici, J know that she is here. 

Il sait lire et écrire, he knows how to read and write. 

Connaitre means to be acquainted with, to know by sight 
or by the other senses, to recognize. It may have a per- 
son or thing for its object, but can never be followed by 
a conjunction or a verb. 

Nous connaissons de vue ce monsieur, we know that gentleman by sight. 

Connaissez-vous les wuvres de Lamartine, do you know Lamartine’s 
works ? 

Je connais le dictionnaire de Littré, / know Littré’s dictionary. 

1. Il n’est pas absolument nécessaire que j’y aille, 
mais il est préférable dans mon intérét, et peut-€tre, aussi 


208 The Subjunctive Mode 


dans le vétre, que je.sois présent A la discussion. 
2. Adieu, mon ami; je souhaite que vous soyez toujours 
heureux. 3, Merci; j’espére que vous le serez aussi. 
4. On me dit que votre cousine, Yvonne, est la jeune 
fille la plus aimable qu’on ait jamais vue. 5. De toutes 
mes cousines, ¢’est certainement Yvonne qui est la plus 
charmante. 6. Qui que vous soyez, il n’est pas con- 
venable que vous soyez impoli. 7. Bien que vous soyez 
devenu riche et que vous connaissiez bien du monde, il faut 
que vous ne soyez pas trop fier, si vous voulez que 1’on 
vous aime. 8. Il importe qu’il sache ce que vous avez 
fait. 9.11 est temps que vous le lui disiez. 10. Je 
cherche un homme qui soit digne de grands honneurs. 
11. Ne croyez-vous pas que je vous connaisse, Monsieur? 
12. Doutez-vous qu’elle sache sa lecon? 13.11 me 
semble qu’elle- l’a bien préparée aujourd’hui. 14. Il 
parait que vous vous trompez quelquefois. 


1. They do not believe that she knows it. 2. They 
do know that she is acquainted with us. 3. If you go 
for a walk with us, you must be ready before ten. 4. I 
want you to see my friends when you are in Paris next 
year; they will wish to see you, I.am sure. 65. You 
must send them a note before you call so that you will 
find them at home. 6. If you do not do it, I am afraid 
that they will not be there. 7. Is it not probable that 
they will have come back from the shore before the first 
of August? 8. Whatever you may say, I shall never 
_ believe him to be guilty. 9. Do you think that he 
knows it? 10. Don’t you think I know him better 
than you do? 11. We wish no one to fear us, but we 
wish to be obeyed. 12.1 hope you believe it. 13.1 
doubt his sending them any money before we see him... 
14. Don’t you know that it is not certain you will suc- 





The Imperfect Subjunctive 209 


ceed? 15.Is there any one that is always happy? 
16. He is the best man I know. 17. He is also the 
only man that I know well. 18. You say that because 
you do not wish to appear proud of your friends. 


84 
The Use of the Tenses of the Subjunctive. 


(1) After the present or future in the principal clause 
or, in conversation, after the conditional, the present 
of the subjunctive is used; after any other tense, the 
imperfect subjunctive. 


Je voulais ql 
Je veux Jo‘voulng 
Je voudrai ‘qu'il le fasse. oe ieee : -qu’il le fit, 
Je voudrais Jat vouts 

J’avais voulu 

J’aurais voulu) 





(2) When the subjunctive is in a compound tense, 
the tense of the auxiliary avoir or étre depends on the ~ 
tense of the verb in the principal clause. 

Espérez-vous qu’il l’ait fait? 
Espériez-vous qtil l’efit fait ? 

(3) The imperfect subjunctive is avoided in French 
whenever possible. {f an infinitive construction cannot 
be substituted, the present subjunctive is used. 


Compare : 


Il empéchait que nous n’arrivassions & temps. 
Tl nous empéchait d’arriver & temps. 

Je voudrais que vous m’accompagnassiez. 

Je voudrais que vous m’accompagniez. 


1 In a formal, dignified style. 
14 


210 The Imperfect Subjunctive 


Imperfect Subjunctive. 

The imperfect subjunctive of any French verb may 
be formed by adding -se to the second person singular 
of the past definite. There are no exceptions to this 
rule. In all conjugations except the first, the first per- 
son singular of the past definite may be used instead 
of the second. 


Past DEFINITE. IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
1ST PERSON. 2D PERSON. 

donnai, donnas. que je donnasse. 

allai, allas. que j’allasse. 

recus, recus. que je recusse. 

eus, eus. que j’eusse. 

fus, fus. que je fusse. 

avoir. étre. donner. 
que j’eusse. que je fusse. que je donnasse. 
que tu eusses. que tu fusses. que tu donnasses. 
qu'il efit. qu’il fait. qu’il donnat. 
que nous eussions. que nous fussions. que nous donnassions. 
que vous eussiez. que vous fussiez. que vous donnassiez. 
qu’ils eussent. qu’ils fussent. qu’ils donnassent. 

finir. recevoir. vendre. 
que je finisse. que je recusse. que je vendisse. 
que tu finisses. que tu recusses. que tu vendisses. 
qu’il finit. qu'il reciit. qu'il vendit. 
que nous finissions. que nous recussions. que nous vendissions. 
que vous finissiez. que vous recussiez. que vous vendissiez. 
qu’il finissent. qu'ils recussent. qu’ils vendissent. 


Form and conjugate the imperfect subjunctive of other 
regular verbs and of the irregular verbs already given: 
dire, faire, savoir, aller, voir, croire, vouloir, ezc. 


1. Je veux que vous soyez plus attentif. 2. Je voudrais 
que vous soyez (fussiez) plus attentif. 3. Il est indis- 
pensable qu’il ait ses livres ce soir. 4. I] était indispen- 


\ 


The Imperfect Subjunctive 211 


sable qu’il efit ses livres ce soir. 5. Mon pére craint 
que vous ne soyez fatigué. 6. Mon pere craignait que 
vous ne fussiez fatigué. 7. Il est temps qu’il finisse sa 
lettre et qu’il l’envoie a la poste. 8. I] était temps qu’il 
- finit sa lettre et qu’il ’envoyat ala poste. 9. Je préfére 
qu’elle choisisse elle-méme ce qu’elle désire. 10. Je 
préférerais qu’elle choisit elle-méme ce qu'elle désire. 
11. J’ai préféré qu’elle choisit elle-méme ce qu’elle désirait. 
12. J’empécherai qu’il ne ferme la porte. 13. J’ai em- 
péché qwil ne fermat la porte. 14. C’est le plus beau 
morceau de musique que j’aie jamaisentendu. 15. C’était 
le plus beau morceau de musique que j’eusse jamais en- 
tendu. 16, Ne lui parlez pas de peur qu’elle ne fonde 
en larmes. 17. Je ne lui ai pas parlé de peur qu’elle 
ne fondit en larmes. 18.11 travaille beaucoup, bien 
quwil soit malade. 19. Il travaillait beaucoup, bien qu’il 
fait malade. 


1. It is time for her to choose (that she should choose). 
2. It was time for her to choose. 3. You are the only 
man whom (@ gui) she obeys. 4. You were the only 
man whom she obeyed. 5. It is certain that I am right. 
6. It was certain that I was right. 7. I should like to 
have him receive these letters in time (@ temps). 8. I 
wished him to receive those letters in time. 9. I shall 
not accept their invitation unless I have the permission 
of my father and mother. 10. Do you believe they are 
guilty? 11. Did you believe they were guilty? 12. He 
approves of my being (he finds good that I am) idle. 
13. He approved of my being idle. 14. Do you think 
that he is right? 15. Did you think that he was right ? 
16. [think that he is wrong. 17. I fear that he is wrong. 
18. I do not think he is wrong. 19.I did not think 
that he was wrong. . 20. I feared he was wrong. 


212 The Subjunctive Mode 


85 
Further Drill on the Subjunctive. 
Falloir and Pleuvoir. 


The verbs falloir, to be necessary, and pleuvoir, to rain, 
are impersonal. 


Falloir. Pleuvoir. 
Pres. Inpic. il faut. il pleut. 
ImperF. Inpic. il fallait. il pleuvait. 
Past DerrniTe. il fallut. il plut. 
Fourure. il faudra. il pleuvra. 
Pres. Conpir. il faudrait. il pleuvrait. 
Pres. Sups. qu'il faille. qu’il pleuve. 
ImprerF. Susy. qu il fallit. . qu’il plait. 


Plus and Davantage, more. 


Plus is always followed by the second term of the 
comparison. 


J’en ai plus que vous; j’en ai plus de cinquante. 
I have more than you; I have more than jifty. 


Exception: ne... plus. 
Je ne travaille plus: je n’en peux plus. 
I do not work any more: I can’t stand it any longer. 
After davantage, the second term of the comparison 
is understood. 
Il veut que je travaille davantage, he wants me to work more (than I do). 


1. Elle ne croit pas qu’il ait reeu tout cet argent ce 
matin. 2. Elle ne croyait pas qu’il eft recu tout cet 
argent ce matin. 3. Je souhaite que vous ayez ma lettre 
a&temps. 4. Je voudrais bien que vous ayez ma lettre 
& temps. 5. Il faut que vous l’ayez a temps. 6. Je 
veux qu’il étudie davantage. 7. Il fallait qu’il étudiat 
davantage. 8. Ne commencez pas la discussion avant 
que votre frére arrive. 9. Vous étes entré dans la dis- 


The Subjunctive Mode ~~ 218 


cussion avant que votre frére arrivat. 10. Il faudra que 
vous me rendiez ce livre. 11, Savez-vous qu'il pleut ? 
12. Quoiqu’il pleuve, nous ne resterons plus dans la 
maison. 13.11 faut que vous y restiez jusqu’é sept 
heures. 14. Croyez-vous qu’il faille que j’attende plus 
d’une heure? 15. I) faudra que vous travailliez davan- 
tage, si vous voulez @tre riche. 16. Il n’a pas osé entrer 
de crainte que l’heure ne fait passée. 17. Savez-vous 
s'il pleuvra? 18. Nous sommes heureux que vous soyez 
ici, 19. Nous voudrions que vous y restiez toujours. 
20. Merci, mon ami, j’espére y passer tout le reste de 
ma vie. 


(A) 1. Do you know whoTam? 2.1 do not believe 
that she has gone away. 3. What must hedo? 4. He 
must finish his work before we arrive. 5. What shall 
you do in case he repeats that story? . 6. I am glad that 
you are better to-day. 7. I wish you to lend me this 
book as soon as you have finished it. 8. Iam surprised 
that you have n’t finished it yet. 9. She fears we shall 
disobey her. 10. They feared we should disobey them. 
11. Do not fear that you will be disobeyed. 12. He was 
the best man Lever met. 13. I shall never forgive you, 
unless you stay here until you see him. 14. Is it prob- 
able that we shall see him soon? 15. Have you learned 
that his sister is dead? 16. Is it possible that you 
don’t know what has happened? 17. He says that you 
are wrong. 18. What do you wish me to do? 19.I 
insist on your knowing your lesson. 20. Are you sorry 
that I have n’t even (méme) looked at it? 21.1 do not 
know anybody that is as unfortunate as he, although 
he is rich. 22. What she says is true. 23. Whatever 
she may say, and however poor she inay be, it seems to us 
_ that she is happier than the other women that we know. 


214 Suibjunctive in Independent Clauses 


(L) 1. Who is the richest man you know? 2, Is he 
the only rich man you ever saw? 3. You are afraid 
that you will never be as rich as he, are you not? 
4. You never will be, unless you work more. 5. Do 
you think I amright? 6, Don’t you think I am older 
than you? 7. Isn’t it probable that Iam? _ 8. Did 
you know that we saw a friend of yours a few days ago ? 
9. Do you wish to go with me, or do you wish me to go 
alone? 10. Although we correct our sentences, isn’t it 
possible that there are some mistakes that we do not 
see? 11. Whatever he says, don’t you think it is right 
for him to do his duty? 12. Haven’t you told any one 
that I am here to-day? 138. Have you understood all 
we have said? 14. Do you wish me to give you some- 
thing to write? 15. Whai is the first French book you 
everread? 16. Have you read only one? 17. Do you 
know who wrote it? 18. Must I tell you the writer’s 
name ? 


86 
Subjunctive in Independent Clauses. 


(1) The subjunctive in an independent clause 
usually expresses a wish. Strictly speaking, the 
following examples consist of subordinate clauses, 
with the principal clauses suppressed. 


Ton regne vienne, ta volonté soit faite, Thy kingdom come, Thy 
will be done. 

Ainsi soit-il, so let it be! 

Vive l’empereur, long live the emperor! Three cheers Jor the 
emperor! 

Sauve qui peut, let him save himself who can (every man for himself). 

Dieu me soit en aide, God help me! 

Honi soit qui mal y pense, evil to him that evil thinks. 

Plut a Dieu que ce ne fit pas vrai, would to God it were not true # 


Subjunctive in Independent Clauses 215 


(2) The third persons singular and plural are used 
to fill out the paradigm of the imperative. 


SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
donnons, /et us give. 
donne, (do thou) give. donnez, give. 
qu’il donne, /et him give. qu’ils donnent, let them give. 


Que tout le monde fasse son devoir, /et everybody do his duty. 


(3) Observe the use of the present subjunctive of 
savoir to express a softened assertion: 


Je ne sache rien de plus charmant, / know nothing more charming. 
Est-il venu quelqu’un pendant mon absence? Pas que je sache. 
Has any one come during my absence? Not that I know of. 

Tl se porte bien, autant que je sache, he is well, so Yar as I know, 


Also: Qui vive? Who yoes there ? 
Dussé-je mourir, je le ferai, Were I to die, I shall do it. 
Soit! or Qu’il en soit ainsi! So be it! 


(4) The pluperfect subjunctive (j'eusse fait, je fusse 
allé, etc.) is sometimes used in an elevated style in both 
parts of a conditional sentence. 


Tl est vrai, s’il m’efit cru, qu’il n’efit point fait des vers. (Boileau.) 

It is true, if he had believed me, he would have made no verses. 

Si le sombre empire de Pluton se fit entr’ouvert, je n’aurais pas 
été saisi, je l’avoue, d’une plus grande horreur. (Fénélon.) 

If the dark empire of Pluto had half opened before me, I should not have 
been seized, I admit, with greater horror, 

0 Fabricius, qu’efit pensé votre grande Ame, si, pour votre malheur, 
rappelé & la vie, vous eussiez vu la face pompeuse de cette 
Rome, sauvée par votre bras. (./. J. Rousseau.) 

O Fabricius, whut would your great soul have thought, if, unhappily for 
yourself, recalled to life, you had seen the gorgeous appearance of 
this Rome, saved by your arm! 


la paix, peace. bénir, to bless. 
la lune, the moon. faché, sorry, vexed, angry. 
domestique (m. or f.), the servant. 


216 Sulbjunctive in Independent Clauses 


1 Cet homme était toujours bien méchant. 2. Périsse 
sa mémoire! 3. Elle doutait que vous fussiez arrivé 
avant elle. 4. Plit a Dieu que je ne fusse pas venu! 
5. Qui Vefit dit! Qui Veit cru! 6. Exigez-vous que 
je fasse ce que je ne veux pas faire? 7. Qui que vous 
soyez, n’attendez pas que Dieu vous nourrisse sans que 
yous travailliez vous-méme. 8. Que tout le monde se 
léve aussit6t qu’il entrera. 9. Croyez-vous que tout 
soit prét? 10. Vous étes la seule femme que je con- 
naisse ici. .11. Leur avez-vous dit que nous voulons 
qu’ils achétent les places? 12. La sentinelle s’écrie, 
“Qui vive!” 13. Trouvez-vous que cette ville soit plus 
belle que Londres? 14. Ne trouvez-vous pas que Paris 
est magnifique ? 15. Je ne sache rien de plus beau que 
ce jardin. 16. Je regrette qu’il vous ait racomte vette 
histoire fausse. 17. Dieu vous pardonne! 


1. It is possible that my father is not the best man 
in the world, but it seems to me that he is the best man 
that I know or have ever seen. 2. God bless you! You 
have spoken well. 3.1 don’t suppose that you believe 
it. 4. Has anybody ever visited the moon? 5. No- 
body, so far as I know. 6. Did you know that it was 
raining? 7. Never mind (n’importe); letit rain! 8. I 
should like to have it rain two or three hours. 9. Do 
you hope it will freeze to-night? 10. We are looking 
for a servant that is faithful. 11. We have one that 
is always faithful. 12. We are very sorry that you 
haven’t one also. 13. Do you think I am right when 
I say that this music is the best we ever heard ? 
14. Whatever you do, do it well. 15. You wish it, so be 
it. 16. The king is dead; longlivetheking! 17. Peace 
be with you! 18. Is it possible that you do not know 
your brother’s best friends ? 


The Subjunctive with Que 217 


- 87 


(1) Que may be used to avoid the repetition of any 
conjunction, It requires the subjunctive only when 
it stands for a conjunction that requires the subjunctive, 
or for si. 


Comme je n’ai pas beaucoup d’argent, et que je suis un peu malade, 
je ne ferai pas ce voyage. 

As I have not much money, and as I am not very well, I shall not take 
that journey. 

Venez ici que nous vous grondions, come here, so we may scold you. 

S’il vient et que je ne sois pas & la maison, faites venir mon frére. 

If he comes and I am not at home, send for my brother. 


(2) Ne is required before the following verb when que stands for 
& moins que, avant que, sans que, jusqu’a ce que, de peur que, and de 
crainte que (also depuis que and ily a... que). 
Je ne partirai pas d’ici que vous ne m’ayez tout raconté. 
I shall not leave this place till you have told me everything. 
Prenez garde (de peur) qu’il ne vous voie, take care lest he see you. 
Il y a deux mois que je ne l’ai vu, J have not seen him for two months. 


Venir (irregular), to come. 


PRESENT PARTICIPLE. Past PARTICIPLE. 
venant, coming. - venu, come. 
Pres. Inpic. Past Der, Pres. Susy, 
je viens. je vins. que je vienne. 
tu viens. tu vins. que tu viennes. 
il vient. il vint. qu'il vienne. 
nous venons. nous vinmes. que nous venions 
vous venez. vous vintes. que vous veniez. 
ils viennent. ils vinrent. quils viennent, 
Imperr. INDIC. FourTure. Imperr. Sung. 
je venais. je viendrai. que je vinsse. 
Past Inver. ConpirT. PREs. que tu vinsses. 
je suis venu. je viendrais. qu’il vint, etc. 


Tenir, to hold, is conjugated like venir. 


218 The Subjunctive with Que 


1. Nous regrettons beaucoup que vous soyez malade | 
ce matin. 2. J’espére que vous vous portez un peu 
mieux maintenant. 3. Je souhaite que vous vous portiez 
bien demain. 4. Qu’avez-vous donc, mon ami? Ilya 
bien quinze jours que nous ne vousavonsvu. 95. Croyiez- 
vous que je fusse malade? 6, Je craignais que vous 
ne le fussiez. 7. Ils ne partiront pas sans que nous les 
voyions. 8. Qui que vous soyez, votre devoir est 
Wobéir & la loi. 9. Qui que ce soit que vous blamiez, 
vous avez tort. 10. Plait 4 Dieu que le sacrifice de ma 
vie pit sauver lasienne. 11. Je ne joue jamais avec lui 
que je ne perde. 12. Faites-lui savoir que je suis parti. 
13. Je voudrais que vous, prépariez mieux vos lecons. 
14. Il est possible que je le fasse quand je serai plus 
figé, 15. Je désire que vous n’attendiez plus, il faut 
que vous commenciez tout de suite. 16. C’est dommage 
que nous soyons si pauvres. 17. Il est probable que 
nous ne le serons pas toujours. 


1. Are you afraid he will come? 2. Do you think 
he will? 3. What do you want me todo? 4. I want 
you to study more. 5. When she comes, we shall be 
very happy. 6.1 beg your pardon, but I am happy that 
she isn’t here. 7. Would she be happy if she knew 
that? 8. Do not tell it to her for fear she will be un- 
happy. 9.If they come this afternoon, and I am not 
here, they will wait for me, will they not? 10. What- 
ever you do, do not stay here any longer. 11. Although 
you are wise, it is possible that you are mistaken. 12.1 
told him that, so that he might know it. 13. Three 
cheers for France! 14. Do you approve of my aunt’s 
travelling alone in Europe? 15.1 didn’t know that 
she was going alone. 16.1 thought she was going with 
some friends of yours. 17.1 am sorry you do not 


The Infinitive 219 


know her. 18. Are you afraid it will rain to-morrow ? 
19. What shall you do if it rains? 20. I do not know 
whether it will rain or not, but I must finish my work. 
21. I hope it will not snow. 22. Do you forget that we 
are older than you? 


88 
THE INFINITIVE. 

An infinitive may be used in the nominative or in 
the objective case, or it may be used after such prepo- 
sitions as de, a, par, pour, aprés, sans, avant de, etc. 

The Infinitive without a Preposition. 

(1) An infinitive may be the subject or a predicate 

nominative. 


La voir, c’est l’aimer, to see her is to love her. 
A quoi sert tarder, what is the use of delaying? 
Promettre et tenir sont deux. , 
It is easier to promise than to perform. 
Il faut parler, it is necessary to speak. 
In the last example, parler is the logical subject of il faut. 


_ (2) An infinitive may be the direct object. Of the 
verbs requiring no preposition,! learn the following : 


aimer mieux, fo like better. pouvoir, to be able. 
aller, to go. préférer, to prefer. 
compter, to intend. prétendre, to pretend. 
croire, to believe. regarder, to look at. 
désirer, to desire, to wish. * savoir, to know how. 
écouter, to listen. sembler, to seem. 
entendre, to hear. venir, fo come. 
espérer, to hope. voir, to see. 

faire, to make. vouloir, to wish. 
laisser, to /et. il faut, it is necessary. 
oser, to dare. il vaut mieux, it is better. 


1 The complete list will be found on page 348. 


220 : The Infimtive 


Aller and venir, followed by an infinitive without a 
preposition, sometimes have the meaning of go and, come 
and. 

Tl est allé lui parler, he went and spoke to her. 
Elle est venue nous aider, she came and helped us. 


Than before an infinitive is expressed by que de. 


Il vaut mieux rire que de pleurer, it is betier to jaugh than to cry. 


The Infinitive with Pour. 
(3) When the English to means in order to, for the 
purpose of (especially unfulfilled purpose), it is ex- 
pressed by pour. 


Elle viendra pour nous rendre visite, mais nous serons partis. 
She will come to visit us, but we shall be gone. 


(4) .An infinitive without a preposition is sometimes 
used as an exclamation, a question, or an imperative. 
a 


Que faire, what’s to be done? 
Agir ainsi, act thus! 
Voir page 60, see page 60. 


Note also: Je ne sais que faire, J do not know what todo. 
Pouvoir, to be able (can, may). 


PRESENT PARTICIPLE, pouvant. Past PARTICIPLE, pu. 


Pres. Inpic. Pasr Der. Pres. Susu. 
je peux, je puis. je pus. que je puisse. 
tu peux. tu pus. que tu puisses. 
il peut. il put. qu’il puisse. 
nous pouvons. nous pfimes. que nous puissions. 
vous pouvez. vous piites. que vous puissiez. 
ils peuvent. ils purent. qu ils puissent. 
ImMPeRF. INDIC. Furure.  Imperr. Suggs. | 
je pouvais. je pourrai. que je pusse. 
Past INDEF. ConpitT. PREs. que tu pusses, 


jai pu. je pourrais. qu’il pit, ete, 


The Infinitive ) 221 


1. J’aimerais mieux lui parler que de luiécrire. 2. Elle 
est allée voir son oncle, qui est arrivé ce matin de Paris. 
3. Quand comptez-vous partir? 4. Pouvez-vous venir 
nous voir ce soir ou demain matin? 5. N’espérez pas 
me tromper; vous n’étes pas assez malin pour cela. 
6. Est-ce que vous avez osé lui dire nne pareille chose ? 
7. Il ne veut pas aller vous voir. 8. Nous ne voulons pas 
dire que vous avez tort. 9. Pourquoi ne veniez-vous pas 
nous voir plus souvent lorsque nous demeurions si prés 
de vous? 10. Je l’ai vu passer sous nos fenétres, mais 
je n’ai pas osé Vappeler. 11. Nous ne vivons pas pour 
manger, mais nous mangeons pour vivre. 12. Elles 
viennent me parler. 13. Elles sont venues pour me 
parler, mais elles ne m’ont pas trouvé. 14. J’ai fait tout 
mon possible pour gagner son amitié, mais il parait que 
je n’ai pas réussi. 15. Maintenant,que faire? 16. Vou- 
loir, c’est pouvoir. 17. Voir la derniére page de ce livre. 
18. Ces hommes-la croient toujours parler 4 des soldats. 


1. We went and saw (we went to see) our aunt this 
morning; she is much better. 2. Do you intend to leave 
on Friday ?' 3. [hope toseeyou!on Thursday. 4. She 
did not dare to look at them. 5, She does not wish to 
come to-day, unless you think that she will find her 
father here. 6. Seeing is believing. 7.I like better 
to leave to-day than stay until the eleventh. 8. She 
will not be willing to accompany us. 9. They may come 
and see us this morning. 10. They came to see us last 
evening, but we were out. 11. We shall do our very 
best? to receive him withhonor. 12. He said that to 
deceive me. 13. She did it to please you. 14.1 do 
not knowhowtothankher. 15.Thankher? 16. They 


1 A pronoun is placed before the verb of which it is the object. 
2 See French sentence 14, above 


222 The Infinitive with De 


went to London in order to see you. 17. Do you think 
they can return soon? 18. It seems to me that you 
are mistaken; I do not believe that I am acquainted 
with this lady. 19. You do not seem to believe what 
I say. 20. Let them come! I would rather see them 
to-day than to wait until a week from Friday. 21. May 
Icome too? 22. You may eome, and you may bring all 
your friends with you. 


89 
The Infinitive with the Preposition de. 

(1) Certain verbs require de before the infinitive. 
With most of these verbs the true meanings of de, o/, 
from, concerning, are implied. The following are 
among those most frequently used:? 


cesser de, to cease to. éviter de, to avoid. 

commander de, to command to.  négliger de, to neglect to. 
conseiller de, to advise to, ordonner de, to order to. 

craindre de, to feur to. permettre de, to allow to. 
défendre 2 de, to forbid to. promettre de, to promise to. 

diro de, to tell to. recommander de, to recommend to 
é6crire de, fo write to. refuser de, to refuse to. 

essayer de, to try to. remercier de, to thank for. 


venir de, to have just. 


(2) The verb avoir followed by a .noun requires de 
before the next verb, if that verb cannot be changed 
into an infinitive passive: 
avoir la bonté de, to have the kind- avoir l’intention de, to intend to. 


ness to, to be so good as to. avoir raison de, to be right to. 
avoir le courage de, to huve the avoir tort de, to be wrong to, 
courage to. avoir peur de, fo be afraid to. 


t A more complete list is given in the appendix, page 348. 


2 Défendre, to defend, takes the accusative; défendre, to forbid, the 
dative. 


The Infinitive with De 223 


avoir l’audace de, to have the au- avoir besoin de, to need to. 


dacity to. avoir coutume de, to be accustomed 
avoir le plaisir de, to have the pleas- to. 
ure of (doing). avoir envie de, to have a mind ora 
avoir l’occasion de, to have an op- wish to, to feel like. 
portunity to. 


(3) An adjective preceded by the impersonal verb 
il est, il était, etc., requires de before the infinitive : 


Tl est difficile de faire ce que vous désirez. 
It is difficult to do what you wish. 


Mettre, to put, to put on. 


PRESENT PARTICIPLE, mettant. Past PARTICIPLE, mis. 


PRESENT INDICATIVE. 
je mets, tu mets, il met, nous mettons, vous mettez, ils mettent. 


Past DEFINITE, je mis. 


se mettre, to place one’s self, to sit. permettre, to permit. 

admettre, to admit. promettre, to promise. 

commettre, to commit. soumettre, to submit. 
omettre de faire, to omit doing. 


absurde, absurd. sonner, to ring. 
la discussion, the discussion. vouloir dire, to mean. 


1. Il a cessé de travailler au mois de janvier dernier. 
2. Je ne vous conseille pas de l’attendre, il n’arrive jamais 
& temps. 3. Est-ce que vous craignez de lui parler? 
C’est homme le plus aimable du monde. . 4. Je vous 
défends de sortir. 5. N’essayez pas de me tromper. 
6. Il a refusé de nous accompagner. 7. Elle n’a pas 
eu le courage d’entrer. 8. Il est plus facile de dire cela 
que de le faire. 9. J’ai eu l’occasion de faire la con- 
naissance de M™- votre tante; c’est une charmante 


1 Hereafter only tenses that cannot be formed regularly will be given. 


224 The Infinitive with De 


vieille dame. 10. Je pense que vous avez eu tort de 
Jui reprocher cette action, il ne vous le pardonnera jamais. 
11. Oui avez-vous coutume de vous promener? 12. Avez- 
vous absolument besoin de les voir? 18. Est-ce que 
vous avez peur de venir avec nous? 14, Je pense qu’il 
serait utile de leur annoncer votre retour. 15, I] m’a 
écrit de lui envoyer tout ce qu’il a laissé chez nous. 
16. Vous a-t-il ordonné de le faire? 17. Permettez-lui 
de venir vous voir demain. 18. Je vous remercie de 
ce conseil et je vous promets de le suivre. 19. Qui 
est-ce qui vous permet de parler? 20. Qu’est-ce que 
cela veut dire ? 7 


1. He promises to start for London with me this 
evening. 2.I had the pleasure of meeting your uncle 
lastnight. 3. Theytriedtodeceiveme. 4. She refused 
_to come with me. 65. Did he avoid speaking to us? 

6. Have the kindness to ring. 7. You are right to for- 
get that discussion. 8. We havea mind to go to the sea- 
shore at the beginning of next week. 9.1 hope you 
will not have the boldness to ask him for more money. 
10. Be so good as to shut the door. 11. It is time to 
set out. 12. It is absurd to speak so (ainsi). 18. She 
neglects writing [infinitive] to us. 14. We had the 
pleasure of seeing your mother this morning. 15. Do 
not forbid his coming with us. 16. You are the only 
one who has encouraged us in our labors. 17. Allow 
me to take your watch. 18. Promise to give it back 
tome. 19. Put on your hat and gloves, and we will 
go fora walk. 20. Will you promise to take me to the 
theatre this evening? 21. I cannot promise you (it). 
22. Do not omit more than two of these sentences. 
23. What do you mean? 24,I mean that I cannot 
allow you to be idle. 


The Infinitive with A 225 


: 90 
The Infinitive with the Preposition a. 


(1) Certain verbs require 4 before the following 
infinitive. In many of these verbs the true meanings . 
of a, to, at,in, are implied. Such are:? | 


aider &, to help to. engager &, to induce to. 

aimer &, to like to. enseigner &, to teach to. 
s’appliquer a, to apply one’s selfto, s’habituer &, to get accustomed to. 
apprendre &, to learn, to teach to.  imviter a, to usk, invite to. 


s’attendre a, /o expect to. se mettre &, to begin to. 

consentir &, to consent to. renoncer &, to renounce, to give up. 

décider a, to persuade to, réussir &, fo succeed in. 

se décider &, to decide to. tarder A, to be late in, to delay in. 
venir &, to chance to. 


(2) The verb avoir followed by a noun requires 4 
before the next verb, if that verb can be changed into 
the infinitive passive. 

J’ai une lettre & ecrire, J have a letter to write (meaning to be written), 
Iis ont une maison a louer, they have a house to let (meaning to be let). 
Compare with Lesson 89, (2). 


(3) An adjective preceded by c’est, c’était, or cela est, 
cela était, requires 4 before the next verb (passive idea). 
aa det teanalonitetee, is dict to do. (meaning, to be done. 

Compare with Lesson 839, (3). 


(4) Like a number of other verbs, commencer and continuer take 
either de or &; with these two verbs & seems to be the more commonly 


used, regardless of meaning. 


1 See list in the Appendix, page 350. 
15 


226 The Infinitive with A 


(5) Observe the following examples of venir: 


Il est venu m’en parler, he came and spoke to me about it. 

Elles viennent d’arriver, they have just arrived. 

Si elle vient 4 finir avant nous, if she happens to jinish before we do. 

Ils sont venus nous voir, mais nous venions de sortir, they came to see 
us, but we had just gone out, 


Ecrire, to write. 
PRESENT ParTICIPLE, écrivant. Past ParTIcipte, écrit. 


PRESENT INDICATIVE. 
jécris, tu écris, il écrit, nous écrivons, vous écrivez, ils écrivent. 


Past DEFINITE, j’6crivis, etc. 


1. Elle s’est appliquée 4 me tourmenter hier soir et ce 
matin. 2, Ne vous attendez pas & le voir avant midi 
et demi. 3. Ils n’ont pas consenti a me laisser rester 
ici. 4, Vous ont-ils enfin décidé & venir jouer avec 
nous? 6, J’ai consenti 4 les visiter l’un aprés l’autre. 
6. Il ne s’est pas encore habitué & faire cing repas par 
jour. 7. M™* votre mére m’a invité 4 diner chez vous ce 
soir; j’ai accepté son invitation avec beaucoup de plaisir. 
8. Il y a deux ans que j’ai renoneé 4 fumer, 9. Avez- 
vous enfin réussi & rencontrer ce’ monsieur qui vous 
écrit si souvent? 10. Il me semble que vous avez beau- 
coup tardé & venir. 11. Avez-vous beaucoup 4 faire ce 
matin? 12. J’ai trois lettres 4 écrire et deux personnes 
& visiter. 13. Il est difficile de faire tout cela en si peu 
de temps. 14. Oui, c’est plus facile a dire qu’a faire. 
15. Tout le monde se mit 4 chanter et Adanser. 16. Je 
viens de finir ce que j’avais 4 faire. 

1. They have letters to write. 2. I have nothing to 


fear. 3. Have you any money to give her? 4. I have 
invited them to dine with us. 5. She is always late in 


The Subjunctive and the Infinitive 227 


getting here. 6. He succeeded in winning the second 
prize. 7. Do you consent (consentez-vous) to see him ? 
8. That is not easy to do. 9.I intend to write to him 
on Saturday next. 10. What has induced you to 
doit? 11. When will you give up asking him for 
money? 12. What a beautiful apple! Is it good to 
eat? 13. Everybody likes totravel. 14, Have n’t they 
a house to sell? 15. No, sir, but they have one to let. 
16. How long have you been writing? 17.I wish to 
teach you to speak this language. 18.I cannot help 
you to learn it unless you will write a great many sen- 
tences every day. 19. You must get accustomed to 
studying five or six hours a day. 20. That is strange 
to hear. 21. It is possible that Iam mistaken, but I fear 
you have forgotten what I told you to do. 22.1 beg 
your pardon, sir, but we have just done it. 23. Write 
me your name at the bottom (aw bas) of this paper. 


91 
The Subjunctive and Infinitive Modes Compared. 


When the subjunctive mode can be avoided.by using 
the infinitive in the secondary clause, as in the follow- 
ing cases, it should be done, since the frequent use of 
the subjunctive makes the style heavy. 

(1) When two verbs have the same person for sub- 
ject, the second is generally in the infinitive. See 
Lesson 79, (2). 


Est-ce que vous craignez de lui parler, do you fear to speak to him? 
Je voudrais bien étre & votre place, J wish I were in your place. 


228 The Subjunctive and the Infinitive 


(2) If the two clauses have the same person for sub- 
ject, the conjunction which joins them may often be 
changed to a preposition, and the verb following will in 
consequence be in the infinitive « 


CONJUNCTION. | PREPOSITION, 
afin que, in order that, afin de. 
pour que, in order that, pour. 
avant que, before, avant de. 
sans que, without, sans. 
& moins que, unless, & moins de. 
de crainte que, Sor fear that, lest, de crainte de. 
de peur que, for fear that, lest, de peur de. 
jusqu’’ ce que, till, until, jusque. 
Venez me voir avant de lui écrire, come to see me before you write to 
him. 
Il ne sortira pas de peur de vous rencontrer, he will not go out lest he 
should meet you. 


Aprés is used with the perfect of the infinitive. 


Les enfants courent dans le jardin aprés avoir fini leurs devoirs. 
The children run in the garden after finishing their tasks. 


(3) Falloir. If the subject of must is a noun, falloir 
is followed by the subjunctive; if the subject is a per- 
sonal pronoun, or if the statement is general, falloir may 
be followed by the infinitive. 


Tl faut que Jean le fasse, John must do i. 
Tl faut qu’il le fasse, | ; 
Ti lui fant le faire, [Oo ™"* = 
Tl me (vous, leur) faut le faire, I (you, they) must do it. 
Il faut qu’on le fasse, | one must do it, or 
Tl faut le faire, it must be done. 

Observe also: 
Ti leur faut de l’argent, they must have (want) money. 
Tl faut un dé & ma seeur, my sister needs a thimble. 
Un homme comme il faut, a gentleman. 


The Suljunctive and the Infinitive 229 


Courir, to run. 


PRESENT PARTICIPLE. Past PARTICIPLE. 
courant. couru. 
PRESENT INDICATIVE. 
je cours, tu cours, il court, nous courons, vous courez, ils courent. 
Fourure. Past DEFINITE. 
je courrai. é je courus. 
ConDITIONAL, je courrais. 


. Mourir, to die. 
PRESENT PARTICIPLE, Past PARTICIPLE. 
mourant. mort. 
PRESENT INDICATIVE. 
je meurs, tu meurs, il meurt, nous mourons, vous mourez, ils meurent. 
FUTURE. Past DEFINITE. 
je mourrai. je mourus. 
PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
que je meure, que tu meures, qu'il meure, que nous mourions, que vous 
mouriez, qu’ils meurent. 
| IMPERATIVE. 
meurs, Mourons, mourez. 


Notice the doubled r in the future and conditional of courir and 
mourir, distinguishing in pronunciation these forms from those of the 
present and imperfect. 


1. Mon pére a ordonné que les enfants descendissent au 
salon. 2. Mon pére a ordonné aux enfants de descendre 
tout de suite au salon. 3. Elle commande que je lui 
achéte un journal francais. 4. Elle m’a commandé de 
lui acheter un journal frangais. 65. Je ne sortirai pas 

avant qu'il nous ait donné sa parole. 6. Je ne sortirai 
: pas avant d’avoir obtenu votre promesse. 7. Il craint 
qu’elle ne meure. 8.I1 craint de mourir. 9. Elle dit 
vous avoir écrit. 10. Elle dit que vous m’avez écrit. 
11. Elle me dit de vous écrire. 12.11 prétend avoir 
raison. 13.11 prétend que je n’ai pas raison. 14, Il 


230 The Present Participle 


croit avoir bien fait. 15. Il croit que vous avez bien fait. 
16. Je crois vous avoir écrit. 17. Que faut-il faire pour 
gagner la vie? 18.11 faut travailler. 19. Combien de 
temps faut-il pour apprendre a parler francais? 20. Cela 
dépend de bien des choses. 21. Le vieux roi mourut en 
1693, & Page de quatre-vingts ans, 


1.I fearIamwrong. 2%.Ifeared I waswrong. 3.1 
am sorry I am late (étre en retard). 4.1 was sorry I 
was late. 5. She has ordered me to punish yon 6. The 
doctor has ordered that I should run a little every day. 
7. I think I have seen you this morning. 8. I thought I 
had seen yousomewhere. 9. He pretends he has spoken 
to you. 10. He will not try it for fear he should make 
a mistake. 11.1 shall speak to him before I write to 
you. 12. I wish I were in the country that I might 
(pour pouvoir) rest. 13. It is time to finish your letter. 
14. Is it possible to do that? 15. That is impossible to 
do. 16. Must one always do one’s best? 17. Must you 
stay here long? 18. He now believes she is dead. 
19. He says that he does not believe me. 20. We (on) 
must not believe all we hear. 21. The poor old woman 
of whom I was speaking to you the other day died 
yesterday. 22. The pupils are running in the yard 
behind the school. 


92 
The Present Participle. 
A present participle may be used either as an adjec-* 
tive or as a verb. 
(1) As an adjective, a present participle follows and 
agrees with the noun that it modifies. 


Ces hommes prévoyants ont apercu le danger, these farsighted men 
have perceived the danger. 


The Present Participle 231 


(2) As a verb, it is invariable and usually refers to 
the subject. 

Ces hommes, prévoyant le danger, se sont mis sur leurs gardes. 

These men, foreseeing the danger, put themselves on their guard. 

(3) En, in, while, by,—is the only preposition that 
may be used with a present participle. With other 
prepositions, where the participle is used in English, 
the infinitive is required in French. 

En prévoyant le danger, ces hommes se sont sauvés. 
By foreseeing the danger, these men saved themselves, 


Commencons par lire en (or le) frangais. 
Let us begin by reading in (or the) French, 


Tout is sometimes used before en to emphasize the continuity of the 
action. ° 


Tout en mangeant, il lisait la philosophie. 
Even while eating, he read philosophy. 

(4) After the following verbs the present participle 
is generally used in English, and the infinitive in French. 
Instead of the infinitive, a tense of the indicative with 
qui may be used with all except paraitre and sembler : — 


apercevoir, to perceive. sentir, to feel. 
écouter, to listen. voir, to see. 
entendre, to hear. paraitre, to appear. 
regarder, to look at. sembler, to seem. 


je ’entends chanter, I hear him singing, je Yentends qui chante. 
je le vois jouer, I see him playing, je le vois qui joue. 
je l’ai vu jouer, I saw him playing, je Vai vu qui jouait. 


Lire, to read. 


PRESENT PARTICIPLE. Past PARTICIPLE. 
lisant. , lu. 
PRESENT INDICATIVE, 
je lis, tu lis, il lit, nous lisons, vous lisez, ils lisent, 


Past Derinirz, je lus. 


232 The Present Participle 
Rire (irregular), to laugh. 


PRESENT PARTICIPLE. Past PARTICIPLE. 
riant. ri. 
PRESENT INDICATIVE. 
je ris, tu ris, il rit, nous rions, vous riez, ils rient. 


Imperrect INDICATIVE. Past DEFINITE. 
je riais, je ris, 
etc. etc. 
nous riions, nous rimes, 
etc. etc. 


rire de, to laugh at. 

1. J’ai vu courir votre frére. 2. J’ai vu votre frére 
quicourait. 3. J’entends rire ma sceur. 4. J’entends 
ma sceur qui rit. 5. Regardez-le marcher ; est-ce qu’il 
ne vous semble pas boiter? 6. Ecoutez-le rire; il me 
semble que ce rire est peu naturel. 7. Il travaille en 
chantant et en causant avec tout le monde. 8. Ces mes- 
sieurs sont vraiment amusants. 9. Ces messieurs vous 
amusent, n’est-ce pas? 10. Le champ de bataille était 
couvert de soldats mourants. 11. Ces photographies 
sont bien ressemblantes. 12. Voila un chien qui aboie. 
13. Je ne l’entends pas aboyer. 14. Tout en refusant, 
elle semble accepter. 15. De quoi riez-vous? 16. Je 
ris des lettres que je lis. 17. Ne riez pas de moi, je 
vous prie. 18. I] n’y a que les 4mes aimantes qui 
soient propres a l’étude de la nature. (Bernardin de 
St. Pierre.) 


1. I hear your brotherspeaking. 2. I heard him speak- 
ing to his friend. 3. Did you see him running with those 
children? 4. We have watched him eating. 5. We 
looked at it while [we were] eating. 6, Did I hear you 
singing this morning? 7. This lady is truly amusing. 
8. Whom issheamusing? 9. By amusing us, she enjoys 
herself. 10. What acharming lady! 11. She is alsoa 


So = 





The Past Participle 238 


very obliging person. 12. They came without bringing 
us what we asked for. 13. There they are; they are read- 
ing the papers. 14.1 read while eating. 15. [One’s] 
appetite comes while eating. 16, This woman appears 
to suffer [the infinitive or the adjective]. 17. The 
stories we read are often very amusing. 18. For two 
hours I have been walking here, and I have met only one 
person I know. That was an old friend of mine, and I 
was glad to see her. 19.I do not think her uncle is 
dead; I think I saw him walking here yesterday. 
20. Always reflect before speaking. 21. Our neighbor’s 
daughter died this morning. 22. What are you read- 
ing? 23. Whom are you laughing at? 24. We are 
not laughing at you, I assure you. 


ee 
The Past Participle. 

(1) A past participle used as an adjective agrees with 
the noun or pronoun to which it relates. 

(2) A past participle used with avoir agrees with a 
preceding direct object; with étre, it agrees with the 
subject, except in the case of pronominal verbs (which 
are conjugated with étre instead of avoir) when it 
follows the rule for avoir. (Lessons 25, 30, and 67.) 


Study the following examples and state why each past participle is 
variable or invariable. 


Qui a écrit les lettres que vous avez recues ce matin ? 

Who wrote the letters that you received this morning ? 

Sont-elles bien écrites? Non, madame, ce sont des lettres mal écrites. 
Are they well written? No, madam, they are poorly written letters. 
Votre scour s’est-elle blessée? Oui, elle s’est blessée au doigt. 

Has your sister hurt herself? Yes, she has hurt her finger. 


234 The Past Participle 


Voici les choses désirées. Nous avons déja fini. 

Here are the things wanted. We have already finished. 

La dame que j’ai entendue chanter est une de vos amies. 
The lady that I heard sing is one of your friends. 

Comment avez-vous trouvé les chansons qu’elle a cliantées ? 
What did you think of the songs that she sung ? 

Les chansons frangaises que j’ai entendu chanter sont belles. 
The French songs that I heard sung were beautiful. 

Ils se sont imaginé des choses fausses. 

They imagined untrue things. 

Savez-vous quelles sont les choses fausses qu’ils se sont imaginées ? 
Do you know what the untrue things are that they imagined ? 

I nous a donné une boite; ou 1’a-t-on mise ? 

He has given us a box ; where has it been put ? 


J’ai entendu dire, J have heard (that). 
J’ai vu faire, J have seen done. 
Se faire mal, to hurt one’s self. 


Collective Nouns. 


A collective noun representing the whole number of 
the persons or things mentioned requires its verb, ad- 
jective,and pronoun in the singular ; otherwise the verb, 
adjective, or pronoun is in the plural. In general, 
collective nouns preceded by le or la take the singular ; 
preceded by un or une, the plural. 


Le comité s’est réuni, the committee met. 

Une douzaine de membres étaient absents, a dozen members were 
absent. 

La foule des spectateurs que j’ai vue était immense. 

The crowd of spectators that I saw was immense. 

Une foule d’enfants le suivaient partout. 

A crowd of children followed him everywhere. 


La plupart and the adverbs of quantity (beaucoup, etc.) 
followed by a plural noun require the plural. 


La plupart des enfants sont aimables, most children are lovable. 


eee Se Ae , he 


OO —— OO — 





The Past Participle 235 


Année, journée, matinée, or soirée is used to express the 
whole duration of the year, day, morning, or evening, 
with its attendant circumstances; otherwise, an, jour, 
matin, or soir is used. 

Study carefully the following examples : — 


On travaille toute l'année, toute la journée, toute la matinée, toute 
la soirée. 

A man works the whole year, all day long, all the morning, all the 
evening. 

On paie & un ouvrier sa journée. 

A workman is paid for his day’s work. 

On nous souhaite une bonne et heureuse année. 

They wish us a good and happy year. 

Des années de sécheresse (d’abondance). 

Years of drought (of abundance). 

L’année (la journée) est belle (pluvieuse). 

The year (the day) is fine (rainy). 

L’année prochaine mon frére aura vingt et un ans. 

Next year my brother will be twenty-one years old. 

Un événement a eu lieu l’an 1870, tel jour, un matin, un soir. 

An event took place in the year 1870, on such a day, one morning, one 
evening. 

Le soleil se léve le matin et se couche le soir. 

The sun rises in the morning and sets in the evening. 

Il y a trois ans (jours) que nous ne l’avons vu. 

It is three years (days) since we saw him. 

Il gagne douze mille cing cents francs par an. 

He earns twelve thousand five hundred francs a year. 

Un jour de féte; le jour de l’an; tous les soirs (jours). 

A holiday ; New Year’s day ; every evening (day). 


1. Ils sont bien recus. 2. Elles sont venues. 3. Ils 
sont convaincus que j’ai eu tort de vous parler de l’affaire, 
4, Ma mére est enchantée de vous revoir. 65. A peine 
arrivés 4 Paris, l’empereur d’Allemagne et ses fils sont 
allés au spectacle ; une grande foule de Parisiens les ont 
vus passer. 6. Nous avons lu vos deux romans frangais. 


236 The Past Participle 


7. Les avez-vous finis? 8. Nous avons lu toute la 
journée, et nous comptons les finir ce soir. 9. Ot avez- 
vous mis mes pantoufles? 10. Je les ai mises sur une 
chaise; est-ce que vous ne les trouvez pas? 11. La plu- 
part des soldats se sont bien défendus. 12. Pendant 
une année entiére elles se sont défendu tout amusement. 
13. Ces deux hommes se sont querellés, mais aprés ils se 
sont donné la main. 14. J’ai entendu dire que madame 
votre mére est revenue ce matin. 15. Qui a fait mal a 
cette petite fille? 16. Elle s’est fait mal elle-méme. 
17. Est-ce que vous vous rappelez cette piéce que nous 
avons vu jouer un soir 4 la Comédie Francaise? 18. Oui, 
et je me rappelle aussi les acteurs que nous avons vus 
jouer. 19. Est-il vrai que la vertu timide soit souvent 
opprimée ? 


1.I have heard that your sisters have arrived. 
2. Yes, they arrived yesterday morning. 3. A large 
number (nombre, m.) of their friends came to see them 
last evening. 4. The evening wasabeautifulone. 5.1 
received last Friday the letter you wrote me on Tuesday. 
6. I have sent it to my sister. 7. Have you written 
her? 8. Yes, but she hasn’t answered me yet. 
9. She has received your letter, I am sure, and she will 
answer it as soon as possible. 10. I have kept most of 
the letters she ever wrote me. 11. My cousins, Mary 
and Jane, have often written to each other. 12. I have 
seen their letters; it seems to me that they are not very 
interesting. 13.The books he dropped are mine. 
14. Who dropped them? 15. Who are those men I[ saw 
walking in your garden? 16. We always had a good 
time at home when we were young. 17. What a fine 
morning! 18. This gentleman’s house has been closed 
for a month; his family has gone to the country or to” 





Aller, Devoir, and Faire 237 


the seashore. 19. A crowd of children were running 
and playing in the yard behind the school. 20. The 
crowd of men and women who were watching the chil- 
dren play was still larger. 21. What has happened ? 
22. A poor old lady has fallen in the street in front of 
our house. 23. Did you see her fall? 24. I am afraid 
she hurt herself. 


94 
Aller. 


(1) The present or imperfect of aller followed by an 
infinitive shows that the action is to take place imme- 
diately. 

Je vais partir, J am just (on the point of) starting. 
Nous allions sortir, we were about to go out. 


(2) Aller also means to fit, to suit, to become. 


Ce chapeau ne vous va pas, that hat does not fit (or become) you. 
Cela ne va pas, that won’t do. 


Aller au-devant de, io go to meet. 

S’en aller, to go away, is conjugated like aller: 
je m’en vais, je m’en allais, je m’en allai, je m’en irai, 
je m’en irais, que je m’en aille, que je m’en allasse. 
Imperative: va-t’en, allons-nous-en, allez-vous-en. 


Savoir and Pouvoir. 


Savoir must be used instead of pouvoir in the sense of 
to know how, to have learned to. 


Compare: II sait lire and il peut lire aujourd’hui. 
Savez-vous danser? and pouvez-vous danser ce soir? 


1 For other uses of aller see pages 153, 220. 


238 Aller, Devoir, and Faire 


Devoir. 


Followed by an infinitive, devoir has many shades of 
meaning. 


PresEntT. Je dois le faire, J am (intend, have) to do tt. 
IMPERFECT. Je devais le faire, J was to do it. 

Past Inver. J’ai di 
Past Der. Je dus 
Conpit. Pres. Je devrais le faire, J ought to do it. 
ConpiT. Past. J’aurais di le faire, J ought to have done it. 


le faire, J had to do it. 


If supposition is implied : 
Vous devez étre trés fatigué, you must be, very tired (I suppose). 
Vous avez dil étre bien content, you must have been well pleased. 

The imperfect subjunctive (dussé-je, dit-il, etc.) at the beginning of 

a clause means even though: 

Dussé-je 6tre blamé, je vous soutiendrai, even though I should be 
blamed, I shall support you. 

Diit-elle en mourir, elle le fera, were she to die for it, she will do it. 


Faire. 


(3) Faire followed by the infinitive means fo cause, to 
get, to have, or to order something done. 


Il m’a fait travailler, he made me work. 

Nous ferons venir le médecin, we shall send for the doctor. 

Oui, faites-le venir, yes, have him come, send for him. 

Je fais batir une maison, J am having a house built. 

J’ai fait batir une maison, J have had a house built. 

On le fera nommer capitaine, they will get him made a captain. 
Il s’est fait couper les cheveux, he has had a hair-cut. 

J’ai fait faire un pardessus, J have had an overcoat made. 


(4) When the infinitive used with faire has a direct 


object, the subject of the infinitive is in the dative 
case.t 
1 The verbs laisser, entendre, voir, are usually followed by the same 


construction as faire: Laissez lire les éléves. Laissez-leur (or -les) lire 
le frangais. 


Aller, Devoir, and Faire 239 


Je leur fais lire le francais, J have them read French. 

Je fais lire le francais & mes éléves, / have my pupils read French. 
Je le leur fais lire, / have them read it. 

Faites-le-leur lire, have them read it. 


But: Je fais lire mes éléves, J have (make) my pupils read. 
Je les fais lire, J have them read, 


(5) Recall impersonal use of faire to express the 
state of the weather (Lesson 51): il fait chaud, froid, 
beau, etc. 


il fait jour, it is daylight. il fait du brouillard, it is foggy. 
il fait sombre, it 7s dark. il fait humide, it is damp. 
il fait de la pluie, it is rainy. il fait sec, it is dry. 


il fait de Ja poussiére, it is dusty. il fait frais, it is cool. 
But: Le temps est beau, l’air est froid, etc. 


(6) Observe also the following idiomatic uses of 
faire : 
se faire 4, to accustom one’s self to. faire peur &, to frighten. 
défaire, to undo, to overthrow. faire pitié, to ercite pity. 
se défaire de, to get rid of. faire plaisir 4, to afford pleasure to. 
faire place 4, to make room for. _ faire faillite, to fail. 
faire naufrage, to be shipwrecked. 
faire un voyage, to take a journey. faire un pas, to take a step. 
faire un kilométre, un mille, to walk a kilometer, a mile. 
faire une promenade, un tour, un tour de promenade, to take a walk. 
faire un tour de jardin, to take a turn in the garden. 
aller faire des emplettes, to go shopping. 
faire le sourd, to pretend to be deaf. faire le difficile, to be particular, 
faire le mort, to feign death, to keep _—ihard to please. 
still, faire l’enfant, to be childish. 


1. Dépéchez-vous, nous nous en allons. 2. Vous vous 
en allez? Mais vous venez d’arriver. 3. Je ne sais ni 
que dire ni que faire. 4. Monsieur, j’ai mal a la main 
droite; je n’ai pu écrire mon théme, mais je sais trés 
bien mes lecons. 65. Si vous pouviez le leur faire finir 


240 Aller, Devoir, and Faire 


avant le 1* du mois prochain, ils pourraient partir le 
lendemain. 6. Vous devez é@tre trés occupé. 7. Vous 
devriez le savoir. 8. Elle n’aurait pas df sortir sans 
attendre ma permission. 9. Quand devez-vous partir 
pourla campagne? 10. Je l’ai fait venir chez moi, et je 
lui ai fait écrire une longue lettre. 11. Savez-vous que 
vous nous faites peur avee vos histoires de revenants; 
allez-vous-en. 12. Quand cet enfant parle 4 son chien, il 
dit toujours, “Va-t’en.” 13. Nous allions faire une petite 
promenade ce matin, mais il a commencé a pleuvoir, et 
nous avons dfi rester chez nous toute la matinée. 
14. Vous avez di étre trés faché. 15. Laissez-moi 
sortir, je dois faire des emplettes avant le diner. 
16. Qui vous a appris tout ce que vous savez? C'est 
lui, 17. Qui lui? 18. Mon frére ainé; je sais que 
vous le connaissez depuis longtemps. 19. Comment 
vont vos deux sceurs? 20. Cette femme riche, dont on 
vient de parler, ne fait que s’amuser tout le temps. 
21. Comment vas-tu, mon cher petit ami? 22. Voici un 
joli livre de photographies; veux-tu que je te le fasse 
voir ? 


(A) 1. She was to pay (rendre) us a visit to-day, but 
we haven’t seen her yet. 2. I am not surprised that 
you haven’t seen her; she had to go away over a week 
ago. 3. Did they tell you that your friend Henry had 
arrived in America safe and sound (sain et sauf) ? 
4, He has not gone there, so far.as I know. 5. You 
frighten these children with your faces (grimaces). 
6. Those men were shipwrecked on the second of April, 
1890. 7. I shall have him punished by (par) his father. 
8. That man ought to have his hair cut. 9. Don’t you 
think it is far too long? 10. He says he will have it 
cut to-morrow. 11. I should like to have a coat made. 


Aller, Devoir, and Faire 241 


12. Shall I send for a tailor? 13.I heard that his 
uncle has failed, but I hope it’s not true. 14. Come 
for a stroll in the garden, and you will see what beauti- 
ful roses we have. 15. Show (/fuwire voir) them to us. 
16. No one can,tell how the thing happened. 17. She 
can read and write, and she is only seven. 18. When 
my brother was young, my father made him study every 
evening. 19. He made all of his children do their 
duty. 


(B) 1. How are you? 2. 1am very well, thank you; 
how are you (and you)? 3, Really? What is the 
matter with you? 4. What are you going to do now? 
5. Is this hat becoming to me? 6. Do you think (find) 
that it fits him better? 7. When are you going away? 
8. Why do you go away so soon? 9. We are going to 
the theatre this evening; can’t you go (there) with us ? 
10. Youare busy! Whatare you goingtodo? 11. Are 
you never at liberty? 12. Would you like to go with 
us? 13. Can you speak Spanish? 14. Have you ever 
learned to read it? 15. Can’t you dance? 16. Can 
you not dance this evening? 17. Do you owe him a 
dollar? 18. When are you to pay it? 19. Ought you 
to pay itsoon? 20. Ought you not to have paid it long 
ago? 21. Has he ever asked you for it? 22. Don’t 
you think he needs it? 23. You will give it to him at 
once, won’t you? 24. What kind of weather is it 
to-day? 25. Aren’t you hard to please? 26. Don’t 
you do anything but work? 27. Do you like to go 
shopping? 28. Do you get up before the sun rises ? 


16 


242 formation of Tenses 


95 


Formation of Tenses. 


The five tenses from which we may form the other 
parts of regular verbs and of most of the irregular verbs 
are called primitive tenses, or principal parts. They 
are as follows: Infinitive, Present Participle, Past 
Participle, Present Indicative, Past Definite. 


By the use of + and — signs, the Porn AnOn of tenses may be clearly 
shown by the following 


Table. 


+ ai = Furure.} 

+ ais = ConpiTIONAL Present} 

— ant -+ ons = Ist person plural PRESENT 
INDICATIVE. 

— ant + ais = Imperrect INDICATIVE. 

— ant + e = PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Past PARTICIPLE: after avoir or é6tre = Compound Tenses. 

Ist person sing. = 2d person sing. IMPERATIVE. 

(3d person plural—nt= Pres. ScssuncTIve.)? 

Past Der.: 2d person sing. + se = IMpeRFECT SUBJUNCTIVE. 


INFINITIVE, { 


PRES. PARTICIPLE, 


Pres, INDICATIVE, { 


Example: Suivre, to follow. 


: ‘je suivrai, Forure. 
Suivre,{.  .. . 
je suivrais, CONDITIONAL PREs, 
nous suivons, Ist person plural PRESENT INDICATIVE. 
Suivant,~ je suivais, Imperrect INDICATIVE. 


que je suive, Present SUBJUNCTIVE. 


1 See page 102. 2 See page 191. 


Formation of Tenses 243 


(jai suivi, Past INDEFINITE. 

javais suivi, PLurerrect InpDICcATIVE. 

jeus suivi, Past ANTERIOR. 

jaurai suivi, Furcore Perrecr. 

Suivi, { j’aurais suivi, ConpiTIonaL Perrecr. 

que j’aie suivi, Perrecr (Past) SupsuncTIve, 
que j’eusse suivi, PLuPpERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
avoir suivi, Perrect INFINITIVE. 

ayant suivi, Perrecr PARTICIPLE. 

suis, IMPERATIVE. 

(que je suive, Present SussunérIve.) 

je suivis: que je suivisse, Imperrect SuBJuNCTIVE. 





je suis 


Form the tenses of the following irregular verbs from 
their principal parts: 


Dormir, to sleep, dormant, dormi, je dors, je dormis. 

Also: partir, to go out, sortir, to go away, servir, to serve, se re- 
pentir (de), to repent, sentir, to fee/, mentir, to (tell a) lie, s’endormir, 
to go to sleep, etc., and their compounds. : 

Observe that the final consonant of the stem is dropped in the sin- 
gular of the Present Indicative of these verbs: pars, sers, sens, etc. 


Offrir, to offer, offrant, offert, j’offre, j’offris. 


Also: souffrir, to suffer, ouvrir, to open, couvrir, to cover, and their 
compounds. 


Prendre, to take, prenant, pris, je prends, je pris. 


PRESENT INDICATIVE. PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
je prends. nous prenons. que je prenne. que nous prenions. 
tu prends. vous prenez. que tu prennes. que vous preniez. 
il prend. _ils prennent. qu'il prenne. qu'ils prennent. 


Also the compounds of prendre: apprendre, to learn, to teach, com- 
prendre, to understand, entreprendre, to undertake, etc. 


Plaindre, to pity, plaignant, plaint, je plains, je plaignis. 

Also: se plaindre, to complain, and all verbs in -aindre, -eindre, 
-oindre, such as craindre, fo fear, peindre, to paint, éteindre, to extin- 
guish, teindre, to tint, atteindre, to reach, oindre, to anoint, joindre, to 
join, etc. 


244 Formation of Tenses 


Naitre, to be born, naissant, né, je nais, je naquis. 

Like connaitre and paraitre, this verb has f in the stem everywhere 
before t. 

Plaire, to please, plaisant, plu, je plais, je plus. 

Third singular, present indicative, il plait. 

Also: se taire, to be silent (no? in third sing., present indicative). 

Vivre, to live, vivant, vécu, je vis, je vécus. 

Battre, to strike, battant, battu, je bats, je battis. 


Also: se battre, to fight, combattre, to combat, etc. 


Conduire, to conduct, conduisant, conduit, je conduis, je 
conduisis. 
Also all verbs in -uire (instruire, traduire, produire, introduire, etc.), 


except luire, to shine (past participle, lui, and no past definite), and 
nuire, to injure (past participle, nui). 


Passive Voice. 


(1) As in English, any tense of the Passive Voice of 
a transitive verb is the same as the corresponding tense 
of the auxiliary verb followed by the past participle of 
the verb in question. See Appendix, page 330. 


Elle est aimée de tout le monde, she is loved by everybody. 
Nous avons été recus avec honneur, we were received with honor. 


(2) The passive is used far less frequently than in 
English, its place being taken by on with the active or 
by a reflexive construction. 


On m’a dit que ce n’est pas vrai, J have been told that it’s not true. 

On leur a donné des livres, some books have been given to them. 

La porte s’ouvre, mais personne n’entre, the door is opened, but no one 
comes in, 

Cela ne se dit pas, no one says that. 


Formation of Tenses 245 


1. Nous partirons pour Edimbourg le 27, nous arrive- 
rons 4 Glasgow le 28, et nous en repartirons le 30 pour 
VIrlande. 2. Ne vous repentez-vous pas d’avoir offensé 
un de vos meilleurs amis? 3. Voici mon porte-monnaie; 
servez-vous-en, je vous prie. 4. N’ouvrez pas cette 
fenétre; j’ai peur d’un courant d’air. 65. En hiver je 
souffre toujours du froid. 6. Connaissez-vous beaucoup 
de monde ici? 7. Moi? je n’y connais. personne. 
8. Madame N. est née & Dinan, en Bretagne, le 12 février, 
1881, d’une famille honnéte et ancienne. 9. Napoléon 
naquit en 1769 et mourut en 1821. 10. Il faut qu’on 
prenne les choses comme elles viennent et les hommes 
comme ils sont. 11. Apprenez ces vers par cour. 
12. La plupart des hommes estiment ce qu’ils ne com- 
prennent pas. 13. Vous me promettez de faire cela, 
n’est-ce pas? 14. Qui est-ce qui vous permet de parler ? 
15. Allez devant; je suis 4 vous, et je vous suis. 
16. Qui vivra verra. 17. De qui vous plaignez-vous ? 
18. Desquels de ses amis se plaint-elle? 19. Voici 
Vatelier ou un grand artiste peignait. 20. Cela ne plait 
pas &4toutle monde. 21. Il parait que vous vous plai- 
siez 4 Paris, lorsque vous y demeuriez. 22. Comment 
traduit-on cette phrase? 23. Faites taire votre chien. 
24. Ne comprenez-vous pas ce que je veux dire? 
25. Avez-vous jamais entendu ceci ? — je ne suis pas ce 
que je suis; 81 j’étais ce que je suis, je ne serais pas ce 
que je suis. 


(A) 1. Take an umbrella, if you go out; it will rain 
in less than (before) an hour. 2. Follow us; do not 
follow them. 3. Take me to Mr. B’s house; I am to 
see him on (pour) business. 4. Those boys quarrel very 
often. 5. Ihave forbidden them to fight. 6. Tell him 
to hold his tongue. 7. Is it polite to say, “ Hold your 


246 Formation of Tenses 


tongue”? 8. My brother has been given a gold watch. 
9. My grandfather always falls asleep while reading the 
newspaper. 10. Let us not fall asleep while we are read- 
ing; we are too young todothat. 11. Your cousin is not 
areasonable man; nothing pleases him. 12. I know that. 
he always complains of everything. 13. Let us offer 
these flowers to (our) mother; they are the most beauti- 
ful ones we have ever offered her. 14. But they are not 
the most beautiful that have ever been given her. 
15. If you wish us to open our books, please tell us at 
what page we are to open them. 16. You may open 
them at page 196. 17. Z know this man, but you have 
never even seen him. 18. What [difference] does that 
make ? 19. Don’t be childish; put on your hat and go 
and take a walk with them. 20. Alfred Tennyson was 
born in 1810; Macaulay was born in 1800 and died in 
1858. 21. They were’ great writers. 22. Michael 
Angelo (Michel-Ange) and Rubens painted magnificent 
pictures. 


(B) 1. At what time do you start for school [in] the 
morning? 2. Do you understand what is said to you in 
French? 3. When French is spoken, do you translate 
it into English or do you think in French? 4. What 
ought one to do? 5. Do you wish to have the door 
opened ? 6. Who opens it in the morning? 7. Don’t 
you pity him? 8. Do you know what you are saying ? 
9. I am told that Bénoit and Co. (Compagnie = Cie.) have 
failed; do you know anything about it? 10.1 was 
told the same thing a few days ago; do you suppose 
it is true? 11. How should one always behave (se con- 
duire)? 12. What has been given you? 13. Of what 
do you complain? 14.Do I complain of you? 
15. Have you a dog? 16. Does it follow you? 


Relative and Interrogative Pronouns 247 


17. Would it like to follow you everywhere? 18. Can 
you guess what I have in my hand? 19. Do you want 
me to tell you what itis? 20. Has this book ever been 
translated ? 


96 


Summary of Relative and Interrogative Pronouns. 
Relative pronouns. 


NOMINATIVE, qui, who, which, that. 
de qui, of whom. 
dont, of whom, of which, whose. 
’ | duquel, de laquelle, \ of whom, of which, 
desquels, desquelles, { = whose. 
DatTIveE, & qui, to whom. 
psc ase on, \ whom, to which. 
ACCUSATIVE, que, whom, which, that. 


GENITIVE 


Interrogative pronouns. 


PERSONS. THINGS. 
NOMINATIVE. 
quit qui est-ce quit who? qu’est-ce qui? what? 
GENITIVE. 
de qui? of whom ? de quoi? of what? 
duquel? de laquelle ? \o which duquel? de laquelle? ie which 
desquels? desquelles? / (one(s))? des quels ? desquelles ? / (one(s))? 
DATIVE. 
& quit to whom? & quoi? to what ? 
auquel? a laquelle? )\ to which auquel ? & laquelle? to which 
auxquels? auxquelles? { (one(s))? auxquels? auxquelles? { (one(s))? 
ACCUSATIVE. 
qui? qui est-ce que ? whom ? que ? qu’est-ce que? what? 


quoi? what? used alone as an 
exclamation or as the object 
of a verb understood. 


For the use of these pronouns, refer to Lessons 17, 
46, 53, 54, 55, 81. 


248 Indefinite Adjectives and Pronouns 


Indefinite Adjectives and Pronouns. 


The following are adjectives only: 


chaque, each, every. certain, certain.1 

quelque, some; pl., few. différent(e)s, ; 
quelconque (after the noun), whatever. divers, hivorses, (2270S 
maint, many a. méme, self, same, even. 


Also: quel .. . que (with subjunctive of 6tre), 
quelque . . . que (with subjunctive), 
For quelque as an adverb, see Lesson 82, 


whatever. 


Chaque homme; il y a quelque temps; des livres quelconques; 
maintes fois; une certaine histoire; différentes (diverses) affaires; 
Ja méme justice (the same justice); la justice méme (justice herself ); 
aujourd’hui méme; quelles que soient ses idées; quelques amis qu’il 
ait; quelque petites qu’elles soient. 


The following are pronouns only: 


chacun(e), each, each one. rien, nothing. 
quelqu’un(e), some one, any one. personne, nobody. 
quelques-uns (unes), some, few. on, one, people, etc. (Lesson 39). 
quelque chose, something. autrui, others (with preposition only), 
Chacun de ces hommes; on le dit; les bétises que l’on dit; les 
fautes d’autrui. 
Quelqu’un, quelque chose, personne, and rien take de before an ad- 
jective. Donnez-moi quelque chose de joli, give me something pretty. 
N’avez-vous rien de plus joli, have you nothing prettier ? 


The following are adjectives or pronouns: 


aucun(e), (ne with verb) tel(le), such. 
nul(le), autre, other. 
no, nobody. set titles 
ar un(e), ie ae ese every, whole, all. 
plusiers, several. | tous, toutes, 


Aucune (nulle, pas une) femme ne le croit; sans aucune faute; 
aucun d’eux ne ]’accepte; j’en ai plusieurs; de tels hommes; des lits tels 
quels (such as they are); monsieur un tel (J/r. So and So); tel pére, 


1 For position and meaning of certain, différent, divers, and méme, see 
page 351. 


Indefinite Adjectives and Pronouns 249 


tel fils; tous les hommes sont mortels ; c’est tout ; nous sommes tous! 
ici; tous les deux (tous deux); l’un et l’autre; autres temps, autres 
meeurs (customs) ; il y en a d’autres ; vous autres soldats (you soldiers). 


Tout, guite, wholly. 


Tout used as an adverb varies for the sake of euphony 
before a feminine adjective beginning with a consonant 
or an h aspirate. | 

Elle est toute surprise, she is quite surprised. 
Elles sont toutes honteuses, they are greatly ashamed. 
But: Elle est tout aimable, she is very agreeable. 
Tout poli qu’il est, however polite he is. 
Observe indicative. 


Soi (rarely used), one’s self, himself. 


Soi, the disjunctive form of se, generally refers to 
on, chacun, personne, etc., and is used only with a prep- 
osition. 

Chacun pour soi, every man for himself. 
On est heureux lorsqu’on est content de soi. 
One is happy when one is satisfied with one’s self. 


1. Avez-vous encore le moindre doute? Aucun. 
2. Tout éléve aime un maitre aimable. 3. Chaque éléve 
de cette classe admire. 4. Chacun a sa maniére de 
voir. 5. Onnedoit passe moquerd’autrui. 6. D’autres 
prendraient cela d’une autre facon. 7. Il n’y a personne 
qui n’en soit faché. 8.11 n’y a pas une personne 
qui n’en soit fachée. 9. Nous sommes tous 4 vous. 
10. Nous sommes tout 4 vous. - 11. Ecoutez! qu’on me 
laisse tout seul! 12. Ces messieurs sont tout préts. 
13. Le crime traine aprés soi des remords. 14. La 
valeur, tout héroique qu’elle est, ne suffit pas pour faire 


1 g pronounced when tous is a pronoun. 


250 Relative and Interrogative Pronouns 


des héros. 15. Toute ville a ses coutumes. 16. Toutes 
les villes de la France ont quelque chose d’intéressant. 
17. Toute confiance est dangereuse, si elle n’est pas entiére. 
18. Pouvez-vous traverser la chambre sans rien regarder ? 
19. Lisez avec beaucoup de soin les quelques pages qui 
suivent. 20. Qui que ce soit qui vous l’ait dit, il s’est 
trompé. 21. On ne fait pas toujours ce qu’on doit 
faire. 3 


(A) 1. He has been waiting here a long time for 
some one. 2. We Americans are never content with 
what we possess. 3. Give me any (a) book what- 
ever. 4, Do you think she is quite happy? 5. A cer- 
tain man was speaking to me about various things, and 
he asked me what I have just asked you. 6. No man is 
perfect. 7. What were you looking for in the kitchen ? 
8. I was looking for something to eat. 9. Something 
good, I suppose. 10. Such is the kindness of this 
gentleman, that we no longer need anything. 11. Who- 
ever [see page 205] you may be and whatever you may 
do, your duty is to obey the law (oi, f.), 12. Whatever 
your intentions. [f.] may be, you must not forget the 
rights of others. 18, Has he no fault? 14. Both are 
guilty. 15. Every man is mortal. 16. Did you ever 
see such a man? 17. Every friend that he used to 
have has forgotten him. 18.I know nobody more 
agreeable than his wife. 19. We have heard that said 
many a time, bat we do not believe it. 20. His brothers 
are quite happy. 21. His sisters are quite sad. 


(B) 1. Whom have you met to-day? 2. What are you 
going to do now? 38, What are you thinking of? 
4, Did I ask you of whom or of what you are thinking ? 
5. Has any one found a key? 6.1 thank you for 


Position of Adjectives and Adverbs 251 


returning it to me; did you find it yourself? 7. The 
woman whose son died yesterday is very poor, is she 
not? 8. Isn’t the one whose sons are living, poorer 
still? 9. Who is it that you are working for? 
10. What do you write with? 11. Do you wish me to 
give you what I have in my pocket? 12. Who is the 
boy I saw you speaking to this morning? 13. Is he 
the one you were telling me about yesterday? 14. What 
is this book? 15. Whose is it? 16. What color is 
it? 17. Which of these books are yours? 18. Which 
is the best? 19. What is that? 20. What is a cat? 
21. Whose friend is that man? 22. However rich 
people may be, are they always sure of being happy ? 
23. Who says that? 24. Have you nothing new to 
tell us ? 


97 
Position of Adjectives. 


Adjectives generally follow their nouns, especially : 


(1) Adjectives denoting a physical quality :— shape, 
color, taste, etc. 


Une table ronde; une maison blanche; un homme boiteux (/ame) ; 
une femme malade; de l’eau froide (chaude, fraiche); une orange 
douce; la téte et les pieds nus (head and feet bare). 


Note that like demi in demi-heure, half-hour, nu is invariable before 
the noun: nu-téte, bareheaded ; nu-pieds, barefooted. 


(2) Adjectives denoting nationality, religion, or office. 


La langue francaise; un prétre catholique; un ministre protestant; 
un décret impérial. 


252 Position of Adjectives and Adverbs 


7 (3) Adjectives taken in a literal rather than in a 
figurative sense. 


un abime profond, a deep abyss. un profond silence, a deep silence. 
un cheval noir, a black horse. un noir soupcon, a dark suspicion. 
une maison chére, an expensive house. une chére amie, a dear friend. 

une histoire vraie, a true story, une vraie histoire, a regular yarn. 


For other adjectives with meanings varying according to position, 
see page 351. 


(4) Present or past participles used as adjectives. 


une personne charmante; un garcon obéissant; une porte fermée; 
le Paradis perdu; une bataille. perdue. 

(5) In an exclamation and in the expression plus... 
plus, the more .. . the more, etc., the adjective stands 
after the verb. 

Que le temps est beau, how beautiful the weather is ! 


Plus on est riche, moins on est heureux, the richer a man is, the less 
happy he is. 


Observe use of de after que, how many, how much! 
Que de fois je l’ai vu, how many times I have seen him! 


ADVERBS. 
Adjectives used as Adverbs. 
An adjective used as an adverb is invariable. 


parler bas (haut), to speak low (loud). tenir bon, to stand firm. 

chanter juste (faux), to sing in (out of) tune. aller droit, to go straight. 

sentir bon (mauvais), to smell good (bad). arréter court, to stop short. 

viser haut, to aim high. voir clair, to see clearly. 
Il l’a fait exprés, he did it purposely. 


Formation from Adjectives. 


To form an adverb from an adjective, add -ment to the 
masculine if the adjective ends in a vowel ; if it ends in 
a consonant, add -ment to the feminine. 


Position of Adjectives and Adverbs 253 


poli, poliment, politely. - doux, . doucement, gently. 


facile,  facilement, easily. cruel, cruellement, cruelly. 


For further rules and exceptions, see Appendix, page 353. 


Position. 


When used with an infinitive, mieux, bien, mal, jamais, 
toujours, pas, plus, and trop generally precede the verb. 
(See Lesson 58.) 


mieux écrire, bien parler, mal prononcer, ne jamais se tromper, ne 
pas rire, ne plus manger, trop courir. 


Observe that regularly both parts of the negative 
stand before the infinitive. Personne and que follow. 


Elle voudrait ne parler & personne, she would like to speak to nobody. 
Je crois n’en avoir que deux, / think I have only two. 


Comparison. 
(6) Adverbs are compared like adjectives (Lesson 
44), except that in the superlative le is invariable. 
souvent ; plus souvent; le plus souvent. 


(7) The adverbs bien, mal, peu, corresponding to bon, 
mauvais, petit, are irregularly compared : 


bien, weil. mieux, better. le mieux, the best. 
mal, badly, ill. pis, worse. le pis, the worst. 
peu, little. moins, /ess. le moins, the /east. 


de mal en pis, from bad to worse. 

tant mieux (pis) pour moi, so much (all) the better (worse) for me. 

(8) Zhe before a comparative is not expressed in 
French. 


Plus on est riche, plus on a de soucis, the richer a man is, the more 


cares he has. 
Plus il travaille, moins il réussit, the more he works, the less he suc- 
ceeds. 


254 Position of Adjectives and Adverbs 


(9) Than before a tense of the indicative is expressed 
by que... ne. 7 


Nous sommes plus riches que vous ne pensez, we are richer than you 
think. 

Elle est plus studieuse qu’elle ne l’était autrefois, she is more studi- 
ous than she was formerly. 


But, if the first clause of the sentence is negative or interrogative, 
or if there is an adverb between que and the verb, the ne is left out. 


N’agissez pas autrement que vous parlez, do not act otherwise than 
you speak. 

Croyez-vous qu’un homme puisse étre plus heureux que vous ]’étes 
depuis trois mois? Do you think that a man can be happier than you 
have been for the last three months ? 

Elle est plus malheureuse que lorsqu’elle demeurait chez vous, she 
is more unhappy than she was when she lived with you. 


S’asseoir, to s2t down. 
PRESENT PARTICIPLE, s’asseyant. Past PARTICIPLE, assis. 


PRESENT INDICATIVE. 


je m’assieds, tu t’assieds, il s’assied, nous nous asseyons, vous vous 
asseyez, ils s’asseyent. 


Past DEFINITE, je m’assis. FurTuRg, je m’assiérai. 


PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 


que je m’asseye, que tu t’asseyes, qu’il s’asseye, que nous nous 
asseyions, que vous vous asseyiez, qu’ils s’asseyent. 


IMPERATIVE, assieds-toi, asseyons-nous, asseyez-vous. 


seoir, to suit, to become. asseoir, toseat. étre assis, to be sitting. 


1. Donnez-vous la peine de vous asseoir. 2. Quis’est 
assis le premier? 38. Me voila assis; maintenant je suis 
prét’a regarder tout ce que vous voulez me faire voir. 
4, OU voulez-vous que je m’asseye maintenant? Par 
terre? 5. Quoiqu’il soit empereur, il a commis plus de 


Position of Adjectives and Adverbs 255 


crimes que le dernier misérable enfermé dans ses prisons. 
6. Je crains, mon ami, que vous n’exagériez un peu votre 
connaissance du francais; j’ai découvert plus de dix 
fautes dans votre derniére lettre. 7. J’aime A croire 
que vous ne les avez pas faites exprés. 8. J’ai cruelle- 
ment souffert du froid tout le temps qu’a duré l’expédition 
malheureuse. 9. I] me semble que votre oncle est beau- 
coup plus riche qu’il ne l’était il y a six ans. 10. Je 
sais qu’il n’est pas moins riche qu’il l’était l’année der- 
niére. 11. Croyez-moi, plus vous vous abstiendrez de 
ces bruyants plaisirs, plus vous serez heureux. 12. Vous 
avez fait plus de progrés que je ne l’espérais. 13. Nous 
nous sommes assises pour nous reposer quelques minutes, 
et on nous a apporté tout ce qu’il y avait de bon dans la 
maison. 14. Asseyez-vous la immédiatement. 15. Qui 
alu Le Roman d’un Jeune Homme Pauvre? 16. Ilya 
dans cette ville quatre prétres catholiques et plusieurs 
pasteurs protestants. 


1. This’ man acts better than he speaks. 2. He is 
richer than people think: 3. The distance is less! than 
you pretend. 4. Is there any one ill at your house ? 
5. Do you wish to sit down or do you wish us to sit 
down? 6. Where are you going to sit? 7. Fortu- 
nately, some of the ladies are already seated. 8. Let us 
all sit down here at this little round table and take some 
coffee. 9. Have you no better coffee? 10. Bring us 
some cold water too, please. 11. That gentleman has a 
-bottle of red wine. 12.She is a far more charming 
woman than she used to be. 13. Really, you rarely see 
a woman more worthy of being loved. 14. She is also 
more learned than I had thought. 15. The more you 
attack ? him, the more we shall defend him. 16. The 


1 Adjective. 2 Future of attaquer. 


256 Negation 


richer a man is, the less free he is. 17. We are all glad 
that wars* are becoming less numerous than they used 
to be. 18. He reads better than he writes, but that is 
not saying* much. 19. Can’t he write better? 20. Try 
not to write badly. 21. What beautiful roses! how 
good they smell! 22. Have you seen our new servant ? 
23. My doctor has advised me not to read any more at 
night. 24. Get away now! you will not have anything 
more. 25.1 beg you not to say that. 26.1 believe 
he says it purposely. 


98 
Negation. 


(1) The use and position of the most common nega- 
tive expressions have already been noted: ne... pas, 
rien, personne, etc. 


Elle ne me le donne pas. Elle n’a plus d’argent. 

Elle n’a pas chanté. Elle n’a guére d’esprit. 

Elle n’a rien dit. N’a-t-elle ni plumes ni crayons? 
Elle n’a vu personne. Que fait-elle? Rien. 

Elle n’a que des amis. Qui voit-elle? Personne. 


Plus d’argent, no more money. 


For position of negative adverbs used with the infinitive, see page 253. 


(2) For the use of ne without pas or point, see Les- 
sons 80 and 82; also (9) of the preceding lesson. 


Ne is also commonly used alone as a negative: 

(a) With the verbs pouvoir, oser, cesser, savoir, and 
sometimes bouger, ¢o stir, when they are not especially 
emphatic. 

Je ne sais que faire, J don’t know what to do, 


Je ne bougerai de 1a, Z shall not stir. 
Je ne puis le faire, J cannot do it. 


1 guerre (f.). 2 vouloir dire. 


. 





Negation 257 


But generally pas is used with the form je peux: Je ne peux pas le 
faire. Ne is always alone in je ne saurais (je ne peux pas) and je 
ne sais quoi. 

(b) In asubordinate clause when the principal clause 
is negative in meaning. 7 

Je n’ai rien qui ne vous appartienne, J have nothing that belongs to you. 


(c) After si used negatively and meaning wvless. 

Jirai le trouver, si vous n’y allez vous-méme, / shall go and jind 
him, if you do not go (unless you go) yourself. 

(d) After que beginning a negative sentemce and 
meaning why, or after qui in exclamations. 


Que n’est-il venu, why did n’t he come ? 
Que ne lui avez-vous dit tout ce qui s’est passé? Why didn’t you 
tell him ail that took place ? 


Compare witl use of pourquoi, which asks for the reason, while 
que .. . ne is exclamatory in meaning. 

(ce) After depuis que or il ya... que, followed by 
the past indefinite with a negative. 
y a dix jours que je ne l’ai vu, tt is ten days since I saw him, or I 
have n't scen him for ten days, 

If the verb is not in the past indefinite, pas or point 
must be used. 


Il y a dix jours que nous ne nous parlons pas, we have not spoken 
to each other for ten days. 

Il y avait dix jours que nous ne nous parlions pas, we had not 
spoken to each other for ten days. 


(7) After peu s’en faut, or after il s’en faut negative or 
interrogative. 


‘Peu s’en faut qu’il ne le fasse, he comes very near doing it. 
Il ne s’en faut pas (de) beaucoup qu'il ne réussisse, he comes very 
near succeeding. 


17 


258 Negation 


Oui and si, yes ; non, no. 


Oui assents, but si disputes a negative. 


Vous étes prét, n’est-ce pas? Oui, monsieur. You are ready, are 
you not? Yes, sir. 

Il n’est pas ici. Si, madame, il est ici. He is not here. Yes, 
madam, he is here. 

Vous n’avez plus d’argent. Mais si, j’en ai beaucoup. You have na 
more money. Why yes, I have a great deal, 

Partez-vous toujours pour la Suisse? Non,monsieur. Are you still 
planning to-start for Switzerland? No, sir. 


Cultivage the habit of using monsieur, madame, mademoiselle, much 
more frequently than in English, especially with yes and no, which are 
rarely heard alone in France. 

Observe the use of que before oui, si, or non, after verbs of saying, 
thinking, etc. 

Dites-vous que oui ou que non? Moi, je dis que oui. Do you say 
yes or no? TI say yes. ‘ 


Ne . .. que and seulement, only. 


Only may be expressed by ne. . . que when it refers 
to the complement of a verb. 


Je n’en ai que deux, 


J’en ai deux banana have only two, 


Il ne fait que jouer, 


Il joue seulement, Je does nothing but play. 


But Venez seulement, only come. 
Deux seulement, s'il vous plait, only two, please. 
Seulement mes amis y assisteront, only my friends will be present. 


1. Plus d’argent, done plus d’amusement. 2. N’im- 
porte; j’aime mieux ne pas m’amuser. 3. Moi aussi. 
4, J’aime & croire que vous n’avez pas répété ce que je 
vous ai dit il y a quelques jours. 5. Je n’ai dit mot a 
personne, et je n’en parlerai pas de ma vie. 6. Elle n’en 
parlera pas non plus. 7. Nimoinon plus. 8. Ecoutez 


Negation 259 


seulement, vous apprendrez beaucoup. 9. Seulement 
votre frére est arrivé ce soir. 10. Vous n’étes done pas 
allée & ce bal, mademoiselle? 11. Si fait, j’y suis allée. 
12. Rien n’empéche d’étre naturel tant que l’envie de le 
paraitre. 13. Voulez-vous bien ne pas bailler (yawn) ? 
14. Est-ce que vous vous rappelez ce que dit Maxime? 
— “Mon nom n’est pas plus & vendre qu’d louer.” 
15. C’est quand on lui a offert une femme riche en 
échange de son titre. 16. Il n’avait pas d’amis; il 
n’avait que des connaissances. 17. Est-ce que vous 
n’avez des connaissances que dans cette ville? ‘18. Qui 
de nous n’a ses défauts! 19. Que ne nous a-t-il appelés 
& son secours? 20. Pauvre ou non, elle est toujours 
-heureuse. 21. L’honnéte homme ne trompe jamais 
personne. 22. Nous le ferons non seulement pour lui, 
mais aussi pour ses amis. 23. I] n’y a rien que cet 
enfant ne sache. 24. C’est un enfant terrible probable- 
ment. 25. Je viens de recevoir de leurs nouvelles; ils 
se plaignent de ne pas vous voir. 26, Maintenant ils ne 
sont que sept. ‘ 


1. How many men came when you did (= with you) ? 
2. There were only three. 3. Only three? 4. You 
have n’t met any of them yet, I suppose. 5. Yes, I have 
met one. 6.He has no more money. 7. He has no 
more money than you, you mean (vouloir dire). 8. Yes, 
of course (bien entendu). 9. I have told her never to go 
out in the evening without inviting me to accompany 
her. 10. He likes nobody, and nobody likes him. 
11. He prefers not to be agreeable. 12. Neither his 
parents nor his brothers will defend him. 13. They 
dare not do it. 14. They know that they would be 
wrong to do so. 15. They zive him no money, but he 
never ceases to ask them fu. some. 16. It is more than 


260 The Use of De 


six months since they gave him any. 17. Do not say 
anything about it, because it may not betrue. 18. Why 
didn’t you say that sooner? 19. He will certainly 
punish the children who do not obey him. 20.1 say 
no; he never punishes anybody. 21. This boy reads 
French better than he writes it. 22. 1 think not, sir. 
23. I say yes; what I said is absolutely true. 24. He 
ought to read well; that is all he does all day long. 
25. Yes, he does nothing but read. 26.1 told you that 
so as not to deceive you. 27. Let us say no more about 


it; let’s forget it! 28. There are things one can never © 


forget. 29. For ten days I haven’t thought of it one 
single time. 30. It is only seven o’clock; you have 
time to do that. 31. We cannot eat; we are neither 
hungry nor thirsty. 382. Nor they either. 33. When 
we go for a walk together, you do nothing but run; I 
cannot walk so fast. 34. There is nothing he does not 
try to do to please us. : 


99 
The Use of De. 


(1) We have seen de used as of or from, as some or 
any in the partitive article, as than before a numeral, 
by denoting measure, 7m after a superlative, and with 
the infinitive after certain verbs. 


Il est loin ici. Elle est plus grande que moi de deux pouces. 
Avez-vousdelamonnaie? La plus haute de la ville. 
Plus de cing cents. Permettez-moi de parler. 


(2) De is also used in the sense of dy after certain 
verbs used in the passive, such as étre aimé, hai (hated), 
craint, estimé, honoré, vu, regardé, apercu, suivi, accom- 
pagné, précédé, etc. 


a 








The Use of De 261 


Par may also be used with these verbs and throws 
the emphasis upon the performer of the action. 


On dit qu’elle a été vue de tout le They say she was seen by every- 


monde. body. 
Je demande par qui elle a été vue. J usk by whom she was seen. 
Elle est aimée de tous. She is loved by everybody. 
Elle est aimée par ses enfants. She is loved by her children. 


Le général est suivide ses troupes. The general is followed by his troops. 
Il est suivi par les troupes enne- He is followed by the troops of the 
mies. enemy. 


(5) De means with after a large number of adjectives 
denoting sowrce, separation, feeling, etc., such as: absent, 
plein, libre, malade, content, heureux, fier, siir, faché, surpris, 
couvert, etc. 

Elle est ravie de votre succés, she is delighted with (at) your success. 


(4) Observe also the following uses of de: 


le chemin de Tours, the road to Tours. 

la ville de Paris, the city of Paris. 

le royaume de Suéde, the kingdom of Sweden, 

un homme de talent, a man of talent. 

quelque chose de beau, something beautiful. 

rien de plus beau, nothing more beautiful. 

tout ce qu’il y a de plus bean, the most beautiful. 


avoir l’air de, to appear. profiter de, to profit by. 
dépendre de, to depend upon. s’approcher de, to approach. 
blamer de, to blame for. savoir gré de, to be grateful for. 
féliciter de, to congratulate upon. se douter de, to suspect. 

se méler de, to attend to. se passer de, fo do without. 

_ (se) rire de, to /augh at. s’emparer de, to take possession of. 
se moquer de, to make fun of. s’agir de, to be a question of. 
remercier de, to thank for. se repentir de, to repent (of). 
se souvenir de, to remember. se soucier de, to care about. 


se nourrir de, mourir de faim, etc., to starve, etc. 
vivre de, connaitre de vue, to know by sight. 
jouir de, to enjoy. pleurer de colére, to weep with 
se réjouir de, to rejoice at. anger. 


to iive on. 


262 ‘The Use of De 


faire de, to do with. 
faire signe de la main, to make a sign with the hand. . 
mourir de la main de, to die by the hand of. 


e’en est fait de, it’s all up with. de bonne heure, early. 

que de, how many! how much! de bon appétit, with a good appe 

de trop, too many, in the way. tite. 3 

de plus, besides. 7 de mon temps, when I was young. 

de ce cété, on this side. du vivant de, during the lifetime of. 

de part et d’autre, on the part of de cette maniére, in this way. 
both. jamais de la vie, never (emphatic). 

de toutes parts, on all sides. le lendemain de, the day after. 


tenir de son pére, to take after his father. 

si j’6tais de vous, if I were in your place. 
changer, to change (transform). 

changer de chapeau, to change one’s hat. 

changer d’avis, to change one’s mind. 

changer — en —, fo change — into — 

manquer, to fail, lack, want. 

manquer de respect &, to be lacking in respect for. 
mon ami me manque, / miss my friend. 

j'ai manqué le train, J /ost the train. 


prés de, near (time or place). faute de, for want of. 

auprés de, beside (place or com- hors de, out of. 
parison). 7 le long de, along. 

@’aprés, according to, after, from. vis-a-vis de, opposite to. 


1. L’éloquence est un art trés sérieux, destiné a in- 
struire, 4 réprimer les passions, a corriger les mceurs, et 
& soutenir les lois. 2. La condition des comédiens était 
infame chez les Romains, et honorable chez les Grecs. 
3. Il a de son cédté quelque chose a dire, il me semble. 
4, De mon temps les choses ne se passaient pas ainsi. 
5. Au moment ou la course des chevaux va commencer, 
toute la foule se range des deux cdtés de la rue. 
6. Moliére, a dix ans, était orphelin de mére. 7. Il s’en 
faut de beaucoup que vous soyez aussi A4gé que votre 
frére. 8. Ce malade n’a rien mangé depuis quatre 
iours. 9. La tragédie du Cid est de Corneille. 10. Cet 


The Use of De | 263 


homme-la est aimé de tous ceux qui le connaissent; 
celui-ci est aimé par ses voisins. 11. La grande salle 
se remplit de monde. 12. Ila payé son audace de sa 
liberté, et enfin de sa vie. 13. Pour former l’imparfait 
de l’indicatif, on change la terminaison -ant du participe 
présenten-ais. 14. Une troisiéme personne est toujours 
de trop. 15. Tantale mourut de soif. 16. On a peint 
ce beau tableau d’aprés nature. 17. Aprés la pluie le 
beau temps. 18. Adieu, charmant pays de France! 


‘(A)1.I remember you. 2. Do you remember him 
(her, it)? 3. 1fI were in your place, I would n’t do it. 
4. Those children have light hair and blue eyes; they 
all take after their mother. 5. The old beggar (mendi- 
ant) was always followed by his little dog. 6. The 
beggar was driven away by our dog. 7. Go and change 
[your] hat. What for? 8.Some one has hurt this 
child, 9. Who has hurt him? 10. Nobody; he is cry- 
ing with anger. 11. What is it [all] about? 12. Dur- 
ing my father’s lifetime that never happened. 13. J 
rejoice at your good fortune; shall I congratulate you 
on it? 14. That depends; on what? 15.1 do not 
need to tell you that. 16. Come nearer (approach) the 
table. 17. Let us cross the street; there are fewer 
people on the other side. 18. That makes no difference; 
I prefer to walk on this side. 19. The teacher that died 
yesterday was loved by everybody, especially by her 
pupils. 20. That old man is so miserly (avare) that he 
does without a Christmas tree (arbre de Noél). 21.1 
don’t care. 22. It is not polite to say that. 


(B)1. Do you remember me? 2. Do you think I re- 
member you? 3. Do I blame you for your mistakes ? 
4. Ought we to profit by the mistakes of others? 
5. Do you repent for what you have done? 6. At what 


a” ae oa The Use of A 


time does the train for 





start? 7. Do you get up 


early? 8. Do you enjoy playing? 9. What do we 


live on? 10. Do you take after your father or your 
mother? 11. Are you proud of it? 12. Do you know 
that lady? 13. Only by sight. 14. Why do you 
make fun of your friends? 15. Have you nothing 
better todo? 16. May I congratulate you on what has 
happened? 17. Have n’t you anything new to tell us? 
18. Are you surprised at it? 19. Are you glad of it? 
20. Can some of these sentences be expressed in more 
than one way? 21. Express ?an dix-huit cent soixante 
in another way. 


100 
The Use of A. 


Besides the uses of @ already given (to, at, in, with 
infinitives, etc.), we may also note the following: 

(1) After many adjectives such as accoutumé, attentif, 
sourd, docile, supérieur, etc. 

(2)- With the definite article to denote a physical 
quality, a habit, the dress, ete. 

un homme au regard timide, a man with a timid look. 


une femme aux cheveux chatains, a woman with dark-brown hair. 
du potage au lait, milk soup, 


(3) Between two nouns to denote use, purpose, fit- 
ness, or style. 


une machine & coudre, a sewing-machine. 
un couteau a papier, a paper-knife. 

un bateau & vapeur, -a steamboat. 

un moulin & vent, a windmill. 

du papier & lettres, letter-paper. 

wn fer & cheval, a horse-shoe. 


é 


—o 
"7 
7 


The Use of A 


265 


Compare un pot & fleurs, a flower-pot, with un pot de fleurs, a pot 
of flowers ; un verre & vin, a wine-glass, with un verre de vin, a glass 


of wine; ete. 
(4) Observe also: 
croire &, to believe in. 
penser &, to think of. 
rca to dream of. 
assister &, to be present at. 
toucher a, to touch, to meddle with. 
prendre gofit a, to take aliking for. 
prendre part &, to share in. 
prendre plaisir a, to take pleasure 
in. 
fouler aux pieds, to trample under 
Soot. 
aller & toute vapeur, to go at full 
steam, 
vendre & la livre, to sell by the 
pound. 
fait & la main, made by hand. 
c’est & vous & (de) parler, it’s 
your turn to speak. 
en vouloir 4, to have a grudge 
against, to dislike. 
étre & l’heure, to be on time. 
& votre montre, by your watch. 
c’est-2-dire, that is to say. 
& ce soir, good-bye until this eve- 
ning. 
au revoir, ) 920¢-bye until I have 
the pleasure of see- 
au plaisir,) ing you again. 
le 5 mars, au soir, on the evening 
of March 5th. 
& dessein (exprés), purposely. 
& tort, wronyly. 
& haute voix, aloud. 
& voix basse, in a low tone. 


& merveille, wonderfully, 

au plus, at ‘he most. 

au plus vite, as quickly as possible, 

au contraire, on the contrary. 

au fait, indeed ; in fact. 

& droite (gauche), on (or to) the 
right (left). 

comme & l’ordinaire, as usual. 

& genoux, on one’s knees, kneeling. 

au doigt, on the finger. 

& mes dépens, at my expense. 

& bon marché, cheap, 

& Veil nu, with the naked eye. 

étre & la mode, to be in style. 

& table, to (at) the table. 

au rez-dle-chaussée, on the ground 


Jloor, 

au premier (étage), on the first 
story. 

& travers, across, through. 

& cité de, beside. 

& Vexception de, except. 

au dela de, beyond. 

au-dessus de, above. 

au-dessous de, below. 

au lieu de, instead of. 

autour de, arvund, 

& moi! h elp ? 

au secours! 

au voleur! thieves! or stop thief! 

au feu! fire! 

& l’assassin! murder! 

& la bonne heure! ail right ! good! 

& nous deux, monsieur! now, sir! 


266 


The Use of A 


& and de. 


servir, fo serve. 

servir a, to be (used) for. 

servir de, to serve as or instead of. 
se servir de, to make use of. 
marier, to murry, give in marriage. 
se marier, to get married. 

se marier & (avec) to marry, take 
épouser, in marriage. 


jouer, to play. 

jouer & un jeu, to play a game. 

jouer d’un instrument, fo play an 

instrument. 

jouer aux cartes, 4 la balle, au 
cache-cache; jouer du violon, 
de la fifite, jouer (or toucher) 
du piano. 


Interjections of frequent use are: 


allons! come! 
voyons! look here! 
tiens! indeed! 

’ tenez! hold! 


en avant! forward! 
gare! look out ! 
courage! cheer up! 
hélas! alas! 


par exemple! the idea! 


1. Prenez la peine de vous mettre 4 table, monsieur. 
2. Marie, apportez-nous trois verres a vin et trois tasses_ 
a& thé; nous resterons ce soir dans la salle & manger. 
3. Est-ce que vous consentez a lui donner ce joli papier a 
lettres? 4. Non, certainement, je ne le lui donnerai 
pas. J’en ai besoin moi-méme. 5. Je placerai sa 
photographie au-dessus de ce tableau, et la vétre au- 
dessous. 6. I] fait froid aujourd’hui; il n’y a que deux 
degrés au-dessus de zéro. 7, Mon oncle a marié sa fille 
la semaine derniére, et j’ai assisté aux noces. 8. Avec 
qui s’est-elle mariée? 9. Avez-vous jamais lu La Dame 
aux Camélias? 10. Je Vai lu et je Vai vu jouer par 
Mme. Bernhardt. 11. Etes-vous accoutumé 4 voir les 
piéces frangaises? 12. Préférez-vous les comédies ou 
les tragédies? 13. Vous avez vu les deux Coquelins, 
n’est-ce pas? 14. Je n’ai pas vu Coquelin ainé, mais 
jai vu Coquelin cadet plusieurs fois. 15. Cet accident 
a été fatal A toutes mes espérances. 16. Quel dommage! 
17. A-t-il gagné ou perdu a faire cela? 18. Comment! 


The Use of A 267 


il touche du piano? 19. On peut toucher du piano et 
étre honnéte homme. 20. Courage, camarade, le dia- 
ble est mort! 


(A) 1. That beautiful child with large black eyes and 
black hair is my little nephew. 2. Here are some books 
I bought cheap; I paid only two dollars apiece for them. 
3. It strikes me they were dear. 4. There are a great 
many windmills in Holland. 5. Don’t touch! 6. We 
are amusing ourselves at your expense. 7. Butter is 
always sold by the pound. 8. How much does it cost a 
pound? 9. What kind (espéce, f.) of boat is that? 
10. It is a steam-boat. 11. It arrives at ten o’clock and 
it is on time, to-day, as usual. 12. What is that gray- 
haired man doing? 13. He is selling flower-pots. 
14. Beyond the Alps lies (se trowver) Italy. 15. One 
must always be ready to die for one’s country (patrie, f.). 
16. His friends are deaf to all his prayers (priére, f.) 
17. They used to share in his good fortune, but now that 
he is unfortunate, that is to say, now that he is poor, 
_ they never come to see him. 18. They used to take 
pleasure in his company. 19. It seems to me they avoid 
meeting him. 20. Alas, how true that is! 21. On the 
contrary, sir, his old friends do not neglect him; they 
often go to his house, but he is never at home. 22. It 
is thought that he keeps his door locked purposely. 
23. It is probable that he is too proud to see them. 


(B) 1. Do you like to read aloud? 2. Why don’t you 
work a little instead of playing all the time? 3. Did 
you ever find a horse-shoe when you were (while) out 
walking? 4. When you go home do you turn to the 
right or to the left ? 5. Do you live on this side of the 
street? 6. Have you any letter-paper to lend me? 
7. What instrument do you play? 8. Is it easy to learn 


268 The Use of A 


to play the piano? 9. What is a sewing-machine for? 
10. Are you always attentive to what is being said to 
you? 11. Who is the gentleman with the broad 
shoulders? 12. Do you believe in ghosts? 13. Who 
has ever been present at a wedding? 14. What time is 
it by your watch? 15. What is a pen used for? 
16. When you travel do you find that the trains are 
always on time? 17. Explain to us the difference be- 
tween adiew and au revoir. 18.I1f we were playing 
cards and if I said to you C’est & vous, would you under- 
stand what I meant? 19, Do you live on the first or 
second story ? 


101 
The Prepositions En and Dans. 


En has a vague and general meaning and is rarely 
used with the definite article; dans has a precise and 
limited meaning and takes an article. 


Observe: en prison, dans cette vieille prison; en danger, dans un 
grand danger ; en voiture, dans une belle voiture; en France (pas en 
Angleterre), dans la France (pas hors de, outside of, la France) ; docteur 
en philosophie or en médecine, but docteur or bachelier és lettres, és 
sciences (és contraction of en les); en haut, upstairs, en bas, downstairs, 
en lair, in the air. 

Also: agir en chrétien, en prince, to act like a Christian, like a 
prince ; il a parlé en maitre, he talked like a master, but il m’a traité 
de prince, he treated me as if I were a prince. 


A, dans, and en. 


A la maison, at home, dans la maison, in the house (pas hors de la 
maison); & Paris, at or in Paris, dans Paris, inside of Paris; & 1a ville, 
in the city (not in the country), dans la ville, inside the city, en ville, in 
town (not at home). 


Some Prepositions of Time or Place 269 


Depuis, pendant, pour, dans, en, in expressions of time. 

Depuis marks the beginning of a period of time; pen- 
dant, its whole duration, and is often omitted; pour, the 
time allotted for an action; dans, the time at the end of 
which an action will take place; en, the time taken to 
perform the action, 


Il était & Rome depuis huit jours, he had been in Rome a week, 

Il y est resté pendant quinze jours, he stayed there a fortnight. 

Il y est allé le lendemain pour trois mois, he went there next day for 
three months. 

Il partira dans une semaine, he will go in a week. 

Il finira son travail en trois jours, it will take him three days to finish 
his work. 

Dés, a partir de, and depuis. 

Dés, from, since, no later than, and & partir de, from 
—on, are used only of time; depuis is used of either 
time or space. 

Dés le 1°" janvier, depuis avant-hier, & partir de ce jour; dés demain, 
no later than to-morrow, & partir de demain, from to-morrow on; depuis 


Paris jusqu’au Havre, from Paris to Havre; depuis le premier jusqu’ 
au dernier, from the first to the last, 


Vers and envers. 


Vers expresses direction or time; envers, feeling or 
* behavior. 


Il est allé vers la ville, he went towards the city ; vers trois heures, 
about three o’clock ; cruel envers les pauvres, harsh to the poor. 


Observe also: 


a vrai dire, fo tell the truth. regarder par, to look through. 

pour ainsi dire, so to speak. par le temps qu’il fait, in this weather. 
pour affaires, on business. entre les mains de, in the hands of. 
dans Vile, on the island. chez les Francais, among the French. 


dans l’esealier, on the stairs. en méme temps, at the same time. 
boire dans, fo drink from. jusqu’ici, hitherto, 


270 Some Prepositions of Time or Place 


Form from the principal parts all the tenses of the fol- 
lowing erregular verbs : 
Fuir, to flee, fuyant, fui, je fuis, je fuis. 
Vétir, to clothe, vétant, vétu, je vets, je vétis. 
Valoir, to be worth, valant, valu, je vaux, je valus. 
PRESENT INDICATIVE. FUTURE, je vaudrai. 
je vaux. nous valons. PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE, que je vaille, 
tu vaux. vous valez. 
il vaut. ils valent. 


Boire, to drink, buvant, bu, je bois, je bus. 
PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE, que je boive. 


Suffire, to be enough, suffisant, suffi, je suffis, je suffis. 

Vaincre, ‘o conquer, vainquant, vaincu, je vaines, je vainquis. 
In the verb vaincre, ¢ is changed to qu before every vowel except u. 
Also convaincre, to convince. 


1. We shall start for the country to-morrow morning 
at 7.45. 2. We intend to come back to the city about 
nine in the evening. 3. If you will not be here before 
that time, I think I will dine in town. 4, Do you wish 
me to wait for you at the station? 5. I have done all I 
could to convince him. 6. Now it is possible to go to 
Chicago in eighteen hours. 7. Mr. N. will start for 
England in a fortnight; he has to go there on business. 
8. I have explained all that to you once; that is suffi- 
cient. 9. Look out of the window, please, and tell me 
what you see. 10.I can see nothing at all in this 
weather, that is to say, nothing very interesting. 
11. Nothing but rain, I suppose. 12. To tell the truth, 
it has done nothing but rain during the last two or three 
weeks. 13. You mean two or three days, do you not? 
14. Does it seem to you as if I exaggerate? 15. Yes, 
many times. . 16. We had our breakfast upstairs this 
morning. 17. What [difference] does that make to me? 
18. It makes no difference (nothing). 19. We must be 


_o eT 
5 i: 





“ OS a ee 


Some Prepositions of Time or Place 271 


polite towards everybody. 20. Try, and you will con- 
quer all these difficulties. 21. Do you know Mrs. M. ? 
22. I have just had the pleasure of making her acquaint- 
ance. 23. You must have known her by sight for a 
long time. 24. How well she sings, doesn’t she? 
25. How much patience one must have with pupils that 
do not work! 26. Almost everybody drinks wine while 


travelling in France. 27. Do you drink coffee from a 


glass, or fromacup? 28. That’s enough to make you 
laugh, isn’t it? 29. [He] laughs (fut.) best (well) who 
laughs (fut.) last. 30. Better (is worth) late than 
never. 31. How is it (comment cela se fait-il) that you 
know nothing of what has happened? 32. When you 
write to him, give (make) him my regards (friendships), 


REVIEW EXERCISES 


I 


1. 1. Fresh water; the dry land; old newspapers; 
her blue ribbons; what beautiful sweet flowers! 2. You 
will need courage. 3. I have a headache this evening; 
I can neither sing nor play. 4. We have no jewels, but | 
our friends have some. 5. What friends? 6. Those 
who live in that fine new house. 7. Whoseisit? 8. It 
is theirs; their father gave it to them. 9. Tell me 
whom you have seen to-day. 10. What! you have seen 
her? 11.1 have never read those books, but I have 
read these, and I like them better than any others I 
know. 12.I founda great manythere. 13. Let us not 
speak of ittoherortothem. 14. My father and mother 
left England on the Ist of May, 1891. 15. Columbus 
(Colomb) was an Italian. 16. He served the King of 
Spain faithfully. 17. Naturally, we think that he car- 
ried off a great victory by discovering the new world. 
18. Cardinal Mendoza was a faithfal friend of Columbus, 
and often invited him to his house. 19. I should like 
you to go for a walk with me at twenty minutes to three. 
20. He loves nobody, and nobody loves him. 


2. 1. Nobody is ever forgotten. 2. We must not be- 
lieve all that is said. 3. Do you doubt my having suc- 
ceeded? 4. I do not doubt your succeeding some (one) 
day. 5. We do not wish to tell him all our business, 
although he is our uncle. 6. Why don’t you wish him 
to know what has happened? 7. We fear he will refuse 
to let us do what we desire. 8. I hope you will not try 


Review Exercises 7 273 


to deceive him. 9. We want more money. 10. You 
will be obliged to write all this before you go. 11. If 
you wish to go soon, you must work as fast as possible. 
12. You must be very hungry after so long a walk. 
13. Wait till we come back. 14. How many favors (ser- 
vices) he has done (rendered) me! 15. You make (ren- 
der) him very happy by saying that. 16.1 see what 
you are doing; stop it at once. 17. How pleasant that 
remembrance must be to you! 18. Run and tell him 
we have arrived. 19. When you go to get your hat, 
kindly bring me mine. 20. Can’t you get along 
without it? 


_ 3.- 1. If you would like to know those gentlemen, I 
should be glad to present youto them. 2. You ought to 
introduce me to her; it was a friend of mine that intro- 
duced her to you, was it not? 3. Do you wish to go 
with me or do you wish me to leave alone? 4, Why 
does that boy beat his dog so? 5. He beats it to make 
it obey him. 6. What do you think of that? 7. What 
have you to tell us? 8. Walk as far as the house or 
until you meet him. 9. This gentleman must be a pro- 
fessor of modern languages. 10. Yes, he is my brother’s 
professor of French. 11. They have gone to France, to 
Paris. 12. Have you a postage stamp (timbre-poste, m.) 
forme? 13. We understand nearly every word he says. 
14. Do you know those ladies? 15. We know their 
names. 16. What makes your friends laugh? 17. This 
teaisalmost cold; bring me another cupofit. 18, How- 
ever interesting our books may be, they do not make us 
forget our absent friends. 19. I should like to spenda 
few days in Scotland next summer. 20. We visited 
that magnificent church on the His day of our arrival 


(arrivée, f.). 
18 


274 Review Exercises 


4. 1. Some men are esteemed by everybody, even by 
their enemies. 2. Did you tell them that I should be 
here on Monday? 3. What do you do on Sunday? 
4, We shall always be ready to go to church at a quarter 
past ten. 5. What makes you wait solong? 6. Let us 
start right away. 7. Napoleon III. was born April 20, 
1808. 8. He became emperor in 1852. 9. How good 
that flowersmells! 10. Speak louder, please. 11. Why 
don’t you study more? 12. We used to have ‘five 
horses; we have sold two and now we have only three. 
13. When you began to study music, how many lessons 
did you have a week? 14. When shall we have the 
pleasure of seeing you again? 15. As soon as our 
friends have gone. 16. What are they playing now at 
the Théatre-Frangais? 17. When we reach Paris, we 
shall look for a house near the Champs-Elysées. 
18. How sick you look! 19. Go to bed early this even- 
ing. 20. 1 want you to get up before six. 


5. 1.I have lost my new silk umbrella. Why, no, 
there itis! 2. Would you dare to use any of his books, 
if you needed them? 3. When you are ready to go to 
Europe next year, remember me. 4.1 have a great 
many addresses to give you. 5. This man bores (en- 
nuyer) everybody with his stories. 6. What a tiresome 
man! 7. Our neighbors are always in style. 8. Why 
do you never shut the door? 9. When we lived in New 
York, we met him very often. 10. As soon as we reach 
Liverpool, we must send letters to our friends in America. 
11. Always reflect before acting. 12. Next time I shall. 
not accept your excuses. 13. I would do it if I could. 
14. Could n’t you do it if you would? 15. You ought 
not to have asked that. 16. You have not answered his 
letter yet. 17. I shall answer it to-morrow. 18. Serve 


Risin Liaise 


us at once; we are in a hurry. 19. We do not live to 
eat; we eat to live. 20. Follow us; do not follow 
them. 


6. 1. Those gentlemen wear gloves in summer as well 
as in winter. 2. You must keep on writing until you 
can show me a page written well enough to satisfy (satis- 
faire) me. 3.1 make a great many mistakes, it is true, 
but I write better than you think. 4. That makes me 
smile (sourire). 5. Be silent! 6. Does he know how 
to play chess (échecs)? 7. That is a game he has never 
learned. 8. I have heard that it is the most difficult of 
all games. 9. They had just left when their friends 
arrived. 10. What do your friends do during the 
holidays (vacances)? 11. Do you need anything? 
12. What? 13.1 am looking for a few souvenirs that 
will please my friends. 14. Although we were very 
tired, we could not sleep last night. 15. It was too 
cold perhaps. 16. We were not cold. 17. Louis XIV. 
was seventy-seven years old when he died. 18. One day 
I gave some money to a blind [man], but he gave it back 
to me, saying, “I do not take Canadian pieces.” 19. He 
wasn’t blind; he was deaf and dumb (sourd-muet). 
20. It is easy to learn these rules, but it is still easier to 
forget them. 


7. 1. Do you think that French is easy to learn? 
2. His health is very good now; it is far better than it 
was formerly. 3. Iam very glad of it. 4. Everybody 
is mistaken sometimes. 5. Our servant has gone to (the) 
market (marché, m.). 6. Where are the letters I told 
you to write? 7.1 finished them long ago. 8. Whom 
do you see coming? 9.I can’t see any one now, 
10. Our examinations (examen, m.) are always very 
hard. 11. That is the most beautiful song I have ever 


276 | Review Exercises 


heard sung. 12. He has promised to spend two or three 
weeks at our house, provided his father consents to it, 
13. If I were sure that he would consent, I should invite 
a few other friends to come at the sametime. 14. Is 
there nobody that can tell me what I ought to do? 
15. When we were in Europe last year, we received a 
great many letters from our friends, which (ce gui) made 
us very happy. 16. I do not know whether we shall re- 
ceive so many, now that we have come home again. 
17. You talk too loud; do you think lam deaf? 18.1 
do not think you are. 19. Don’t you know that I am 
not? 20. I do. 


8. 1. Tell us something new. I don’t know anything 
new to tell you. 2.I1f we had a few francs (of) more, 
we should have money enough to buy that little gold 
watch. 3. It costs ten francs too much. 4. How long 
is that chain? 65. It is twenty inches long. 6. Can’t 
you remember anything? 7. If you are neither hungry 
nor thirsty, do not wait for us any longer. 8. Are n’t 
you afraid you will be hungry before one o’clock ? 
9. 1am not. 10. We wish we had something good to 
eat. 11. It is possible we may find something at the 
station. 12. We almost missed the train. 13. It was 
your fault. 14.1 don’t care. 15. You ought to be 
ashamed of your conduct. 16. Do not scold me; 
this is (cest aujourd’hui) my birthday. 17. This little 
girl has learned to write well. 18. How old is she? 
19. She is only seven. 20. Who wrote to tell you of 
our friend’s death ? 


9. 1. Walk in front of me, I beg of you. 2. It is 
your place to go first. 3. What (quoi de) more fortu- 
nate than what happens to you? 4. “What a lot of 
books!” he said tome. 5. What do you find in these 


Review Exercises | 277 


woods? 6. Nothing but tall trees. 7. I often used to 
go to the little old white church when I was in the coun- 
try. 8. Let us speak to him about it when he comes, 
9. France is a beautiful country ; its inhabitants speak 
French. 10. Brittany (la Bretagne) is perhaps the most 
interesting part of the whole country. 11. Tell us, 
please, what that signifies. 12. Which of those two 
churches do you admirethe more? 13. Whoever (it may 
be that) did that, he will never come back. 14. The 
books of which he spoke to you are in the dining-room. 
15. Where is the little boy to whose father you gave a 
franc? 16. I don’t know anything about it. 17. We 
know what you are thinking of. 18. Which of those 
knives are the heaviest? 19. You will see him as 
you go from here. 20.1 know I shall, unless I start 
too late. 


10. 1. Whatis your name? 2. My name is Arthur; 
what is yours? 3. However great kings may be, they 
are what we are. 4. Whoseisthiscane? 5. It’s not 
mine,for I have mine. 6.It must be one of his. _ 7. It 
is possible that it belongs to that gentleman with whose 
son you were just speaking. 8. Don’t keep it; give 
it back to him. 9. What is the matter with him? 
10. Nothing, so far as I know. 11. He was not afraid 
it would rain} he was afraid that he would find there 
a certain person he did not wish to see. 12. They 
have nothing to live on. 13. That is probably because 
they have spent more money than they have earned. 
14, What is that to you? 15. It’s all the same to me. 
16. It would be better for him to do it. 17. Have you 
ever seen anything like [it]? 18. No, I never have. 
19. He did his best to please us. 20. It does not 
matter. 


278 Review Exercises 


11. 1. Everybody has left. 2. Finish writing your 
letter at once. 3. Have you counted these sentences ? 
4. How many are there? 5. The sun is shining for 
every one. 6. In summer the days are longer than in 
winter. 7. The museum of the Louvre in Paris is the 
largest and most beautiful one in Europe. 8. Don’t you 
hear the noise in the street? 9. Haven’t you heard 
what it is? 10.1 have never even heard of it. 
11. He never hears (has news) from his niece, unless 
he writes to her. 12. If you had put that book on 
my desk, it would be there still. 13. This is more 
than I need. 14. My life is at stake. 15. Shall we 
walk or ride this morning? 16. As you please (fut. of 
vouloir). 17. The English travel a great deal on the _ 
Continent, although they do not like to cross the Chan- 
nel, 18. If you had ever crossed it yourself, you would 
not blame them. 19.1 have done so more times than 
you think. 20. You are not to repeat to any one what 
you’ have been told. 21. They must be sorry to know 
of your illness, 22. Come and pay (make) us a visit 
soon. 23. Before he went away, he told me he would 
be back in a week. 24. Do not speak to us now; we 
are reading something very interesting. 25. Do not 
read so loud; there is some one sick in the next room. 
26. We have not seen each other for ten on twelve years. 
27. Many things have happened since you saw her. 
28. Name the most interesting French books you have 
ever read. 29. Only rich people put up at that hotel. 
30. These sentences are much easier to write than you 
pretend. | 


Review Exercises 279 


IL 
Sentences selected from college entrance examinations. 


1. 1. Come and see me Monday, the twenty-second 
of June. 2. He will give you some books if you obey 
him. 3. She came to me saying, “Give me some red 
roses.” 4, We often think of you and your sick friend. 
5. Who is it? What is it? Tell me of what you are 
thinking. Whom do you see? What does he say? 
6. What is electricity (électricité)? I don’t know what 
itis. 7. In which house does he live, the wooden one 
or the marble one? 8. Here are his two new books; 
which do you prefer? 9.I saw him go out two hours 
ago. It is now five o’clock. 10. Don’t let him see 
them. 11. Make him read it. He has written it him- 
self. 12. What you say is true, I have heard it said. 
13. Sit down if you please, he will come soon. 14. Give 
them some. Give it to them. Don’t give any to him 
or to her. Present me to them. 15. He introduced 
himself to us. 16. What fine apples! Give me six. 
17. Two thousand seven hundred and ninety-one men 
were killed in that battle. 18. He was hungry and 
stole a dollar from that old lady. 19. How well he 
sings! How beautiful it is! 20. Have the windows 
closed, it is cold to-day. 


2. 1.I wish he wouldcome. I must see him at once. 
_ 2.1 am afraid they will come without hats. 3. He has 
hurt himself. They say he broke his arm. 4. The 
prettiest child in town has yellow hair and blue eyes. 
5. Whose is that ancient book? Is it yours or your 
brother’s? 6. Please give this pen and paper to your 


280 Renew Exercises 


friend, and tell him to keep them till to-morrow. 
7. Has any one come? No one has come. 8. Have 
you any letters forme? JI have two, and there is also 
a package for you. 9. It will be mine before to-morrow. 
10. You must not doit. 11.1 do not think he did it. 
12. He has hurt his foot. 13. Let us eat, drink, and 
be merry. 14. The man whose house you will see. 
15. His wife was at the same time his friend. 16. George 
Washington was born on the twenty-second of February, 
seventeen hundred and thirty-two. 17.1 have more 
money than he has, because he has none atall. 18. Al- 
though he did it, he will not do it again. 19. When 
can I see you? 20. I shall be at home to-morrow even- 
ing at seven o’clock; bring your friends, and I will 
take you all to the theatre. 


3. 1. Have you written the letter which I dictated to 
you this morning? 2. I have written it and I have sent 
it to the person to whom it was addressed. 3. Was 
there an answer to it? No, there was not. 4. Have 
they been waiting for us long? 5.I believe they 
have been waiting since ten minutes tothree. 6. Where 
are they now? 7. They are all in the dining-room. 
8. Well, let them come in, I am ready to see them. 
9. Do you know what they want? 10. They want. to 
speak to you about their work. 11. What is the matter 
with you? 12. Whatare youabout? 13. If he would 
but doit! 14. Mind yourown business. 15. The story 
goes that he did it. 16. I happened to be near him 
at the time. 17. You had better not do that again. 
18. How long is it since you have heard from him? 
19. It is all up with me. 20. Stand still. 


4. 1. Whatis that to him? 2, It is in vain for you 
to doit. 3.Ishall not be able to go with you unless 


Review Exercises , 281 


you return with me. 4. They would like to take the 
king prisoner. , 5. You read much, but you say nothing. 
6. I shall soon know French. 7. If he or she had given 
them the letter yesterday, I should already have received 
it. $8. It is true. 9. What is true? 10. It is true 
that the king is dead. 11. You must go away from 
here. 12. There are six or seven men in that room, 
but I do not see any boy there. 13. If. she were to 
speak quickly (rapidement), I should not answer her. 
14. Do not come with me, but go away. 15. Tell me 
what Task you. 16. Ask your father for it. 17. Ask 
them who is with them. 18. I shall not be able to give 
it to him. 19.I give it to you. 20. What have you 
given him? 


5. 1. I shall goto France. 2. You must know your 
lesson. 3. I shall know it (7. e. the lesson). 4. I want 
you todo it. 5. I ought to give him some. 6.1 was 
here when he came. 7. Must you go so soon? 8 I 
should take him there if he would go. 9Q. It is better 
that you should give it to her. 10, What have I done 
to make you detest me? 11. Whenever I see her I am 
happy. 12.IfI sawthemIshould be happy. 13. Ido 
not think he will do it. 14. They did not want him to 
have it done. 15. Let us eat all we can. 16.1 have 
already called him andIamealling him now. 17. I work 
as much as he does. 18. What is more rare (exquis) 
than a day in June! 19. He says that this book is a 
better one than that book, and yet I like that one better. 
20. Should we have had to do it ? 


6. 1. I cannot tell you how glad I should be to see 
him. 2.It was not worth doing. 3.I should have 
wanted him to come. 4. He would have to go. 6. Al- 


282 Review Hxercises 


though I am young, Iam brave. 6. Do what you can, 
and never mind what people say. 7.1 want you to 
come with me to my father’s house. _ 8. It would be 
better for him not to do it. 9. Tell him that he may 
come with us, if his father is willing. 10. Should you 
not have done it before? 11. I have not many more 
sentences (p/rase) to write. 12.1 am afraid you are 
tired. 13. Which season do you like best? 14. Give 
me some apples. I have no apples. 15. Have you my 
pens ? No, I have not seen them. 16. Did your sister 
go with you? No, she remained with my mother. 
17. The weather is very fine for the season, is it not? 
18. Did you look at the ice on the lake in passing? Yes, 
the ice is good, and we can soon skate. 19. Do you like 
to skate? Yes, but I cannot go skating this evening. 
20. I must stay at home. 


7. 1. You can amuse yourself reading. 2.1 have 
left all my books at school. 3. If I had them, I should 
prepare my lessons for to-morrow. 4. If I do not pre- 
‘pare them, the master will not be pleased. 5. If you 
wish to study, I will lend you my books. 6.I1f you 
were to lend them to me I should be very glad; I should 
study the whole evening. 7. I do not wish to lose my 
time. 8. Where is the pen I gave you yesterday? 
9. I do not know what I did with it. 10. He died in 
eighteen hundred and seventy-nine, while his parents 
were living in Europe. 11. I see what you are doing. 
12. What am I doing? 13. Go to her and speak to her. 
14. Do not speak to her. 15. Do not speak to him or to 
her. 16.1 beg you not to do it.. 17. I must see what 
will result from it. 18. You and he are always good 
friends. 19. Time is money. 20. He is the only man 
who can do it. 


Review Exercises | 283 


8. 1. While I was eating, he camein. 2. Assoonas 
I had finished drinking, I went out of the house. 
3. When will this cruel war be over? 4. He does not 
distinguish what is mine from what is his and what is 
hers. 95. He is my old friend. 6.I have told you of 
the one I have always called and still call my brother. 
7. He had to do it. 8. Have you any good friends? 
9. Do you prefer this book or that one? 10. Let us go 
away. 11.1 told him never to give meany. 12. If he 
does it I shall be happy, but not if she does it. 13. I 
have been looking for you for three days. 14. Ask her 
for it now or never speak of it to her. 15. Neither gold 
nor silver can make us happy. 16. You understand 
what I mean. 17. I am the only one older than he. 
18. You have got to do it. 19. As I was calling him, 
he came out of the house. 20. As soon as I had called 
him, he came out of the house. 


9. 1.I do not think that he will be able to do it. 
2. You and I will walk together. 3.1 made the ac- 
quaintance this morning of a man who asked me if I 
believed in the central fire. 4. Columbus conceived 
that by going towards the west he could reach the East 
Indies. 5. He believed the earth to be round, which 
was then a new idea. 6. He thought, however, that it 
was much smaller than it really is. 7. Whatever the 
sun may be, it is not inhabited. 8.1 fear you may not 
be welcome here. 9. Things are going from bad to 
worse. 10.1 think very highly of him. 11. What is 
he up to now? 12. However skilful he may be, he 
will not succeed. 13. There is no day which does not 
give proof of it. 14. What dol care? 165.1 fell in 
with a man who made me fall into the water, and so we 
fell out. 16. There is no cause for laughter. 17. So 


284 Review Exercises 


much the better for you. 18. Say what you think. 
19. I came, I saw, I conquered. 20. He has never done 
anything worth while. 


10. 1. You see what it is to be a stranger. 2. No 
traveler, so far as I know, has mentioned it. 3. Hardly 
had he spoken when the carriage stopped. 4. Up to 
that time, few people had left the city. 5. We are to 
read that book together, are we not? 6. Have you ever 
read it before? 7.1 read it about a year ago, when I 
was at my uncle’s; but [ have forgotten the subject. 
8. I do not know anybody who is willing to do it. 
9. He who has overcome his passions has won (remporter) 
a great victory. 10. Every one for himself. 11.-I do 
not know what you are thinking of. 12. Wait until he 
has come. 13. He writes better than he _ speaks, 
14. What is the use of that? 15. Speak of anything 
whatsoever. 16. I am surprised that he did not bow to 
(saluer) that gentleman. 17. I asked them if she would 
come to-day, but they would not answer. 18. Seventy 
and twenty-three make ninety-three (write out the num- 
bers in full). 19.1 am working only to help you. 
20. I thank you most heartily for all your kindness. 


(a) I came to Cambridge a week ago and met your 
brother. He took me to his room in college and then 
asked me to accompany him to his home, where we 
should find the rest of the family. You were not there, 
but I had the pleasure of seeing your father, mother, 
and two sisters. After talking for some time, your 
brother and sisters and I went for a walk, during which 
they showed me many interesting things. 

(6) The fatal day arrived at last. Inglesant had 
passed a sleepless night; he had not the slightest fear of 
death, but excitement (émotion) made sleep impossible. 


Review Exercises | 285 
He thought often of his brother, but he had learned that 
he was in Paris alone; and even had he been in England 
(Angleterre) he felt no especial desire to see him. Mary 
Collet he thought of night and day, but he knew it was 
impossible to obtain permission to see her, and he was 
tired of fruitless requests. He was weary of life and 
wished the excitement over, that he might be at rest. 
It struck him that the greatest harshness (dureté) was 
used towards him: his food (nowrriture) was poor and 


no one was admitted to him. But he did not wonder at 
this. 


| 286 Selections for Reading 


SELECTIONS FOR READING. 


ie 1. Un Dréle de Prisonnier. 


“A moi,' 4 moi! mon capitaine, criait un soldat, a 
“moi! je tiens un prisonnier.— Eh bien, lui dit le capi- 
taine, améne-le.— Je ne demande pas mieux;? mais il 


ne veut pas me laisser aller.” 
Ce 


2. Comment on devient Maréchal de France. 


Le-maréchal Lefebvre * avait un camarade de régiment 
‘qui vint le voir un jour et qui admirait, non sans un 
/sentiment d’envie, son bel hotel, ses belles voitures, sa 
-nombreuse livrée,* ses magnifiques appartements, tout 
_~y, le train enfin d’un grand dignitaire de l’empire: ‘ Par- 
~ bleu, lui dit-il, il faut avouer que tu es bien heureux, 

et que le ciel t’a bien traité! — Veux-tu, lui répondit le 

maréchal, avoir tout cela ? — Oui, certainement. — La 

chose est trés simple: tu vas descendre dans la cour de 

mon hotel; je mettrai 4 chaque fenétre deux soldats 

qui tireront sur toi. Si tu échappes aux balles, je te 

donnerai tout ce que tu m’envies. C’est comme cela 
— que je l’ai obtenu.” 


3. L’Opération Inutile. 


Un officier anglais ayant recu une balle dans la jambe, 
fut transporté chez lui, ot deux médecins furent appelés. 


1 Help! 
2 J ask nothing better, or, I wish I could 
8 Pronounced Lefevre. 
4 His great number of servants. 
“ 











Selections fi ead 287) 


Pendant huit jours Ns ne” figgsf que! sonder et fouiller 
la plaie. L/officier, quisouffrait beaucdup, leur demanda 
e¢ qu’ils cherchaient: “Nous cherchon la balle qui yous 
a blessé. —C’est trop fort! ? s’écria le \patient, pourquoi 
ne le disiez-vous pas plus tot? je l’ai dans ma poche.” 





4. A Quoi Sert*® La Vaccine? 


Un homme trés erédule disait qu’il n’avait pas de con- 
fiance dans la vaccine. “A quoi sert-elle, ajoute-t-il; je 
connais un enfant beau comme le jour, que sa famille 
avait fait vacciner... eh bien! il est mort deux jours 
aprés...— Comment! deux jours aprés ?...— Oui... il est 
tombé du haut d’un arbre, et s’est tué raide... Faites 
done vacciner vos enfants aprés cela!” 


5. Scéne d’Omnibus. 


La scéne se passe * dans un omnibus, & Paris. Deux 
vieilles dames sont assises l’une 4 cdté de l’autre. L’une 
veut que la portiére soit fermée, l’autre la veut ouverte. 
On appelle le conducteur pour décider la question. 
“Monsieur, dit la premiére, si cette fenétre reste ou- 
verte, je suis sfire d’attraper un rhume qui m’emportera. 
— Monsieur, si on la ferme, je suis certaine de mourir 
d’un coup d’apoplexie.” Le conducteur ne savait que 
faire,® lorsqu’un vieux monsieur, qui jusque la s’était 
tenu tranquille dans un coin de la voiture, le tira d’em- 
barras. “QOuvrez done la portiére, mon cher ami, cela 
fera mourir l’une; puis vous la fermerez, cela nous 
débarrassera de l’autre, et nous aurons la paix.” 


1 They did nothing but. 8 Of what use is. 
2 That is too much ! 4 Takes place. 
5 Did not know what to do. 


288 Selections for Reading 


6. Le Docteur Abernethy, 


Le docteur Abernethy était bien connu par son laco- 
nisme. I1 détestait les longues consultations et les dé- 
tails inutiles. Une dame, connaissant cette particularité, 
se présente chez lui pour le consulter sur une grave bles- 
sure qu’un chien lui avait faite au bras. Elle entre sans 
rien dire, découvre la partie blessée, et la place sous les 
yeux dudocteur. M. Abernethy regarde un instant, puis 
il dit: “ Egratignure ? — Morsure. — Chat ? — Chien. — 
Aujourd’hui ? — Hier. — Douloureux ? — Non.” 

Le docteur fut si enthousiasmé de cette conversation, 
qu’il aurait presque embrassé la dame. 

Il n’aimait pas non plus qu’on vint le déranger la nuit, 
Une fois, qu’il se couchait 4 une heure du matin de fort 
mauvaise humeur, parce qu’on était venu le faire lever? 
4 minuit, il entendit la sonnette retentir. “ Qu’y a-t-il? 
s’écria-t-il avee colére. — Docteur... vite! vite!... Mon 
fils vient d’avaler une souris. — Eh bien, dites-lui d’avaler 
un chat et laissez-moi tranquille!” fit? le docteur, en se 
recouchant. 


7. Swift et le Domestique 


Un jour un ami de Swift lui envoya un magnifique 
turbot. Le groom chargé de la commission s’était déja 
maintes fois acquitté de pareils messages sans avoir 
jamais rien requ de Swift. Fatigué d’une besogne aussi 
peu lucrative, il déposa brusquement le poisson sur une 
table en s’écriant: “ Voici un turbot que vous envoie mon 
maitre. — Plait-il ?* repartit aussitét Swift. Est-ce ainsi 


1 Some one had come to call him up. 
2 Said. 
8 What do you say? 


Selections for Reading 289 


que tu remplis tes fonctions? Tiens, prends ce sidge; 
nous allons changer de réle, et téche, une autre fois, de 
mettre a profit ce que je vais t’enseigner.” Swift alors 
s’avance respectueusement vers le domestique, qui s’était 
assis dans un large fauteuil, et lui dit, en lui présentant 
le turbot: “ Monsieur, je suis chargé par mon maitre de 
vous prier de bien vouloir accepter ce petit cadeau. — 
Vraiment ? reprit effrontément le valet, c’est trés aimable 
& lui; et tiens, mon brave gargon, voici trois francs pour 
ta peine.” : 
Swift s’empressa de congédier le groom. 


8. Le Cheval Trop Court. 


Lalande, musicien de la chapelle de Versailles, était 
connu comme un homme jovial et qui aimait beaucoup 
le plaisir. Jeune, il lui prit envie, pendant la semaine 
sainte, d’aller figurer 4 Longchamps.? Il va trouver 
Mousset, loueur de chevaux, retient un cheval richement 
caparaconné, et donne neuf francs 4 compte sur dix-huit,? 
le prix convenu. Sorti de l’écurie, il rencontre un ami 
qui lui parle d’une partie de Longchamps, dans sa voi- 
ture avec deux amis. ‘Si seulement, dit Lalande, je 
pouvais retirer les neuf francs que je viens de donner! 
En tout cas, allons chez Mousset, et nous verrons... M. 
Mousset, montrez-moi encore une fois le cheval que je 
vous ai loué. — Monsieur, le voici. — Savez-vous, mon- 
sieur Mousset, que ce cheval-la est bien court ? — Com- 
ment, Monsieur, bien court ?— Mais certainement...” 
Puis s’adressant 4 son ami: “ Voila bien ma place, voila 
la tienne, voila celle de Daigremont... Mais ot done se 


1 To go and cut a figure at Longchamps, a race-course outside of Paris. 
2 Nine francs on account, out of eighteen. 
19 


290 Selections for Reading 


placera Mondonville, et cependant il vient avec nous ?—= 
Comment, Monsieur, vous montez & quatre ?}— Mais 
oul. — Tenez, voila votre argent; allez chercher un cheval 
ailleurs; je ne loue pas le mien pour qu’on )’éreinte.” 


g 9. Junot et Bonaparte. 


Un jour, pendant le siége de Toulon, un commandant 
dartillerie, venu de Paris depuis peu de jours pour 
diriger les opérations du siége, demanda au lieutenant 
du poste un jeune sous-officier qui efit en méme temps 
de l’audace et de l’intelligence. Le lieutenant appelle 
aussitot La Tempéte,? et Junot se présente. Le com- 
maudant fixe sur lui cet wil qui semblait déj& connaitre 
les hommes. “Tu vas quitter ton habit,’ dit le com- 
mandant, et tu iras la, porter ces ordres.” [1 lui indi- 
quait de la main un point plus éloigné de la céte, et lui 
expliqua ce qu’il voulait de lui. Le jeune sergent devint 
rouge comme une grenade, ses yeux étincelérent. “Je ne 
suis pas un espion, répondit-il au commandant; cherchez 
un autre que moi pour exécuter ces ordres.” Et il se 
retirait. “Tu refuses d’obéir ? lui dit l’officier supérieur 
d’un ton sévére; sais-tu bien 4 quoi tu t’exposes ? — Je 
suis prét & obéir, dit Junot, mais j’irai 14 ot vous m’en- 
voyez avec mon uniforme, ou je n’irai pas.” Le com- 
mandant sourit, en le regardant attentivement. “ Mais 
ils te tueront! reprit-il.— Que vous importe?* Vous 
ne me connaissez pas assez pour que cela vous fasse de 
la peine, et quant & moi, ga m’est égal... Allons, je pars 
comme je suis, n’est-ce pas ?” Alors il mit la main dans 


1 You mean to ride four together ? 

2 The Tempest, a nickname given to Junot, 
8 You are to change your clothes. 

4 What is that to you? 


Selections for Reading 291 


sa giberne. “Bien! avec mon fusil et ces dragées-la,! 
du moins la conversation ne languira pas, si ces messieurs 
veulent causer.” 

Et il partit en chantant. Aprés son départ: “Com- 
ment s’appelle ce jeune homme? demanda [lofficier 
supérieur. — Junot.— I] fera son chemin.” Alors le 
commandant inscrivit son nom sur ses tablettes. On a 
facilement deviné que l’officier d’artillerie était Napoldéon. 

Peu de jours aprés, se retrouvant 4 cette méme bat- 
terie, Bonaparte demanda quelqu’un qui efit une belle 
écriture ; Junot sortit des rangs et se présenta. Bona- 
parte le reconnut pour le sergent qui avait déja fixé son 
attention. ‘ Il lui témoigna de l’intérét, et lui dit de se 
placer pour écrire sa lettre sous sa dictée. Junot se mit 
sur l’épaulement méme de la batterie.2 A peine avait-il 
terminé sa lettre, qu’une bombe lancée par les Anglais 
éclate & dix pas, et le couvre de terre ainsi que la lettre. 
“Bien, dit en riant Junot, nous n’avions pas de sable 
pour sécher l’encre.” Bonaparte arréta son regard sur le 
jeune sergent; il était calme et n’avait pas méme tres- 
sailli. Cette circonstance décida de sa fortune. 


x 


10. La Plus Grande Ganache de l’Empire. 


Un jour Napoléon, fort mécontent 4 la lecture d’une 
dépéche de Vienne, dit 4 Marie-Louise, “Votre pére 
est une ganache.” Marie-Louise, qui ignorait beaucoup 
de termes francais, s’adressa au premier chambellan: 
“L’empereur dit que mon pére est une ganache, que veut 
dire cela?”* A cette demande inattendue, le courtisan 
balbutia que cela voulait dire un homme sage, de poids, 

1 These sugar-plums; that is, the cartridges. 


2 The very crest of the fort. 
8 What does that mean? 


292 Selections for Reading 


de bon conseil. A quelques jours de 1a,! et la mémoire 
encore toute fraiche de sa nouvelle acquisition, Marie- 
Louise présidait le conseil de famille. Voyant la discus- 
- gion plus animée qu’elle ne voulait, elle interpella, pour 
y mettre fin, M. R..., qui, a ses cédtés,? bayait aux cor- 
neilles.® “C’est & vous & nous mettre d’accord dans 
cette occasion importante, lui dit-elle; vous serez notre 
oracle, car je vous tiens pour la plus grande ganache de 
Vempire.” 


11. Joseph II et le Sergent. 


L’empereur Joseph II n’aimait ni la représentation ni 
Vappareil. Un jour, revétu d’une simple redingote bou- 
tonnée,* accompagné d’un seul domestique 4 cheval® et 
sans livrée, il était allé, dans une caléche a deux places qu’il 
conduisait lui-méme, faire une promenade du matin dans 
les environs de Vienne. Comme il reprenait le chemin 
de la ville, il fut surpris par la pluie. 

Il en était encore éloigné, lorsqu’un piéton, qui re- 
gagnait aussi la capitale, fait signe au conducteur d’arré- 
ter, ce que Joseph II fait aussitot. “ Monsieur, lui dit le 
militaire (car c’était un sergent), y aurait-il de l’indiscré- 
tion & vous demander une place 4 cété de vous ? cela ne 
vous génerait pas prodigieusement, puisque vous étes seul 
dans votre caléche, et ménagerait mon uniforme que je 
mets aujourd’hui pour la premiére fois. — Ménageons 
votre uniforme, mon brave, lui dit Joseph, et mettez-vous 
la. D’ou venez-vous ?— Ah! dit le sergent, je viens de 


1 A few days afterwards. 

2 At her side. 

8 Was gaping at the crows, that is, was staring into the air. 
4 Dressed in a plain frock coat, buttoned up close. 

5 On horseback. 


Selections for Reading 293 


chez un garde-chasse de mes amis,! od j’ai fait un fier 
déjeuner. — Qu’avez-vous done mangé de si bon? — 
Devinez. — Que sais-je,? moi; une soupe & la biére ? — 
Ah! bien, oui, une soupe; mieux que ca. — De la chou- 
croute ? — Mieux que ca. — Une longe de veau ? *—— Mieux 
que ga, vous dit-on.— Oh! ma foi, je ne puis plus deviner, 
dit Joseph. — Un faisan, mon digne homme, un faisan 
tiré sur les plaisirs* de Sa Majesté, dit le camarade en 
lui frappant sur le genou.—Tiré sur les plaisirs de Sa 
Majesté, il n’en devait étre que meilleur.5 — Je vous en 
réponds.” _ 

Comme on approchait de la ville, et que la pluie tom- 
bait toujours, Joseph demanda 4 son compagnon dans 
quel quartier il logeait, et ou il voulait qu’on le descendit. 
“Monsieur, c’est trop de bonté, je craindrais d’abuser 
de... — Non, non, dit Joseph, votre rue ?” — Le sergent, 
indiquant sa demeure, demanda & connaitre celui dont il 
recevait tant d’honnétetés. “A votre tour, dit Joseph, 
devinez. — Monsieur est militaire, sans doute ? — Comme 
dit monsieur. — Lieutenant ? — Ah! bien, oui, lieutenant; 
mieux que ca. — Capitaine ? — Mieux que ca. — Colonel, 
peut-étre ? — Mieux que ga, vous dit-on.— Comment! s’é- 
crie le sergent, en se rencognant aussitét dans la caléche, 
seriez-vous feld-maréchal ? — Mieux que ca.— Ah! mon 
Dieu, c’est ’empereur! — Lui-méme, dit Joseph, se dé- 
boutonnant pour montrer ses décorations.” I] n’y avait 
pas moyen de tomber & genoux dans la voiture; |’inva- 
lide *® se confond en excuses et supplie l’empereur d’arré- 
ter pour qu'il puisse descendre. “Non pas, lui dit 
Joseph; aprés avoir mangé mon faisan, vous seriez trop 

1 A game-keeper, a friend of mine. 2 How do I know? 

8 A loin of veal. 4 The pleasure grounds, the preserves. 


5 There ought to be nothing better. 
6 The veteran. 


294 Selections for Reading 


heureux de vous débarrasser de moi aussi promptement ; 
“jentends bien que vous ne me quittiez qu’& votre porte.” 
Ht il l’y descendit. 


FOUR FABLES BY LA FONTAINE. 


La Cigale et la Fourmi. 


La cigale ayant chanté 

Tout l’été, 
Se trouva fort dépourvue? ° 
Quand la bise fut venue ?: 
Pas un seul petit morceau 
De mouche ou de vermisseau. 
Elle alla crier famine 
Chez la fourmi sa voisine, 
La priant de lui préter 
Quelque grain pour subsister 
Jusqu’dé la saison nouvelle. 
«‘ Je vous paierai, lui dit-elle, 
Avant l’ofit,® foi d’animal, 
Intérét et principal.” 
La fourmi n’est pas préteuse : 
C’est 14 son moindre défaut.* 
‘Que faisiez-vous au temps chaud ? 
Dit-elle 4 cette emprunteuse. 
— Nuit et jour a tout venant® 
Je chantais, ne vous déplaise.® 
— Vous chantiez ? j’en suis fort aise. 
Eh bien! dansez maintenant.” 


1 Found herself greatly in need. 

2 When the north wind (i. e. winter) had come. 

8 Out for aout. 5 To every one that came. 
# The least of her faults. 6 Muy it not dispiease you. 


Selections for Reading 295 


Le Corbeau et le Renard. 


Maitre? corbeau, sur un arbre perché, 
Tenait en son bec un fromage. 
Maitre renard, par l’odeur alléché,? 
Lui tint 4 peu prés ce langage : ® 
“‘Hé! bonjour, monsieur du* corbeau ! 
Que vous étes joli! que vous me semblez beau! 
Sans mentir, si votre ramage® 
Se rapporte 4 votre plumage,® 
Vous étes le phénix™ des hotes de ces bois.” 
A ces mots le corbeau ne se sent pas de joie; °® 
Et, pour montrer sa belle voix, 
Il ouvre un large bec, laisse tomber sa proie. 
Le renard s’en saisit, et dit: ‘‘ Mon bon monsieur,?® 
Apprenez que tout flatteur 
Vit aux dépens de celui qui l’écoute : 
Cette lecon vaut bien un fromage, sans doute.” 
Le corbeau, honteux et confus, 
Jura, mais un peu tard, qu’on ne |’y prendrait plus.” 


1 A title given to barristers, solicitors, and attorneys. 
2 Allured, attracted. 
8 Expressed himself somewhat after this manner. 
4 A title of honor. 
5 Song. 
6 Corresponds to your plumage. 
7 The fabulous bird that when burnt would rise again from its ashes. 
8 Is beside himself with joy. 
9 Fellow. 
0 That no one would ever catch him that way again, 


296 Selections for Leading 


La Grenouille qui veut se faire aussi Grosse que le Bouf, 


Une grenouille vit un boeuf 
Qui lui sembla de belle taille.* 
Elle, qui n’était pas grosse en tout comme un ceuf, 
Envieuse, s’étend, et s’enfle, et se travaille? 
Pour égaler l’animal en grosseur ; 
‘Disant: “ Regardez bien, ma sceur; 
Est-ce assez? dites-moi? n’y suis-je point encore ? 
— Nenni.*— M’y voicidone ?— Point du tout. — M’y voila? 
—Vous n’en approchez point.” La chétive pécore * 
S’enfla si bien qu’elle creva. 
Le monde est plein de gens qui ne sont pas plus sages: 
Tout bourgeois veut batir comme les grands seigneurs. 
Tout petit prince a des ambassadeurs, 
Tout marquis veut avoir des pages. 


Le Rat de Ville et le Rat des Champs. 


Autrefois le rat de ville 

Invita le rat des champs, : 
D’une fagon fort civile, 

A des reliefs d’ortolans.® 


Sur un tapis ® de Turquie 
Le couvert se trouva mis.” 
Je laisse 4 penser la vie 

Que firent ces deux amis. 


1 Fine size. 

2 Tries as hard as she can. 

8 Not by any means. 

4 The poor litile creature. 

5 Scraps of ortolans, —a bird considered a table delicacy in France. 
6 Turkish carpet. 

7 The table was set. 


Selections for Reading 


Le régal? fut fort honnéte, 
Rien ne manquait au festin; 
Mais quelqu’un troubla la féte 
Pendant qu’ils étaient en train.? 


A la porte de la salle 

Ils entendirent du bruit: 
Le rat de ville détale ; ® 
Son camarade le suit. 


Le bruit cesse, on se retires . 
Rats en campagne* aussitdt; 
Et le citadin de dire:® 

«‘ Achevons tout notre roét.® 


— C’est assez, dit le rustique; 
Demain vous viendrez chez moi. 
Ce n’est pas que je me pique’ 
De tous vos festins de roi: 


Mais rien ne vient m’iaterrompre ; 
Je mange tout a loisir. 

Adieu done. Fi du plaisir 

Que la crainte peut corrompre! ” 


1 The feast. 

2 In the midst of it. 

8 Scampers away. 

4 Back at their business. 

5 Historical infinitive: says, 

6 Our roast, called generally le réti. 
7 That I can boast. 


297 


—- 298 Selections for Reading 


La Marseillaise. 


RovuceT pE L’Iste (1760-1836). 


Allons, enfants de la patrie, 

Le jour de gloire est arrivé! 
Contre nous de la tyrannie 
L’étendard sanglant est levé. 
Entendez-vous dans les campagnes 
Mugir ces féroces soldats ? 

Ils viennent jusque dans nos bras, 
Egorger nos fils, nos compagnes! 


Aux armes, citoyens! formez vos bataillons! 
Marchons, marchons ! 
Qu’un sang impur abreuve nos sillons! 


APPENDIX OF FORMS AND RULES. 


I. THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 



































SINGULAR, PLURAL. 
Before a consonant or Before a vowel or || Before all 
h aspirate. Ah mute. nouns. 
Masculine. | Feminine. | Masc. or Fem. 
the le la |e les 
of the, or , 
rom it Aa: du de la de I des 
to the, at the, au a la al aux 
THE NOUN. 


II. The gender of inanimate objects. 


A short and satisfactory rule fo the gender of French 
nouns is as follows: 
Nouns having the following terminations are femi- 


nine : — 
ale, ole, ule; ure, ére, eur; 
rre, lle, ie, ié; é6e, ue, ion; 
be, ce, de; fe, ne, pe ; 
se, te, té; ve, he, aison. 
As cathédrale, école, nature, faveur, terre, conversation, clémence, 
cité, beauté, moitié, marche, maison, liaison. 


All other nouns are masculine. 
As port, cheval, café, crime, village. 
There are, of course, exceptions to this rule, but it holds good in 95 


cases out of 100. 
Observe that the rule does not apply to nouns evidently denoting 
males, as prince, homme, etc.; or to nouns evidently denoting females, 


as princesse, dame, etc. 


300 Appendia 


III. Formation of the feminine in nouns representing 
animate beings. 


Nouns representing animate beings usually have a 
particular form for each sex, and their feminine, like 
the feminine of adjectives, is more or less regularly 
formed : 


un Francais, a Frenchman, une Francaise. 
un Prussien, a Prussian, une Prussienne. 
un jardinier, a gardener, une jardiniére. 
un baron, a baron, une baronne. 
un jumeau, a twin, une jumelle. 
un époux, a husband, une épouse. 

un compagnon, a companion, une compagne. 


(1) Those ending with an e mute are the same for 
both genders: 


un Russe, a Russian, une Russe. 
un esclave, a slave, une esclave. 
un artiste, an artist, une artiste. 


PRINCIPAL EXCEPTIONS. 


un abbé, an abbot, une abbesse. 
un ane, an ass, une &nesse. 

un comte, a count, une comtesse. 
un hite, a host, une hitesse. 
un maitre, a master, une maitresse. 
un négre, a negro, une négresse. 
un prétre, a priest, une prétresse. 
un Suisse, a Swiss, une Suissesse. 
un tigre, a tiger, une tigresse. 
un traitre, a traitor, une traitresse.- 


(2) Substantives ending in -eur and derived from a 
present participle change -eur into -euse: 
le danseur (from dansant), the dancer, la danseuse. 


le plaideur (from plaidant), the suitor, la plaideuse. 
le buveur (from buvant), the drinker, la buveuse. 


Formation of the Feminine of Nouns 301 


(3) Substantives ending in -teur, and which are not de- 
rived from a present participle, change -teur into -trice: 


l’accusateur, the accuser, l’accusatrice. 
l’acteur, the actor, l’actrice. 
Vinstituteur, the teacher, l'‘institutrice. 


Add to these: le débiteur, debtor ; l’'inspecteur, the inspector ; l’exé- 
cuteur, the executor; Vinventeur, the inventor; le persécuteur, the 
persecutor. 

(4) Some in -eur change it into -eresse for the feminine, such as: 
Venchanteur, the enchanter, Yenchanteresse ; le pécheur, the sinner, la 
pécheresse ; le vengeur, the avenger, la vengeresse; le défendeur, the 
defendant, la défenderesse ; le chasseur, the hunter, la chasseresse. — 
Chanteur has two feminines, chanteuse and cantatrice: the latter is 
used only of professional singers. Empereur makes impératrice; gou- 
verneur, gouvernante; serviteur, servante; compagnon, compagne ; 
héros, héroine ; dieu, déesse; duc, duchesse. Témoin is used for both 
genders, and also auteur, poéte, philosophe, peintre, juge, guide, etc., 
and even possesseur, successeur, and professeur. Ange, angel, is 
always masculine. 

(5) Some nouns originally feminine keep that gender, even when 
applied to man: la dupe, the dupe; la sentinelle, the sentry; la recrue, 
the recruit ; la victime, the victim; la personne, the person; la ganache, 
the blockhead ; la connaissance, the acquaintance, etc. 

(6) Some names of animals form their feminine irregularly : 


le bélier, the ram, la brebis. 
le bouc, the he-goat, la chévre. 
le cheval, the horse, la jument. 
le mouton, the sheep, la brebis. 
le sanglier, the wild boar, la laie. 

le singe, the monkey, la guenon. 
le canard, the duck, la cane. 

le chat, the cat, la chatte. 
le mulet, the mule, la mule. 
le perroquet, the parrot, la perruche. 
le loup, the wolf, la louve. 
le dindon, the turkey, la dinde. 
le boeuf, the ox, la vache. 


le coq, the cock, la poule. 


302 Appendix 


(7) Most of the names of animals have only one form for both 


genders: such are: 
ALL MASCULINE. 


le castor, the beaver. le cigne, the swan. 
le chamean, the camel. le hibou, the owl. 
Vécureuil, the squirrel. le vautour, the vulture. 
Véléphant, the elephant. le merle, the blackbird. 
le léopard, the leopard. le saumon, the salmon. 

ALL FEMININE. 

la baleine, the whale. Valouette, the lark. 
la girafe, the giraffe. Vhirondelle, the swallow. 
la panthére, the panther. la perdrix the partridge. 
Vhyéne, the hyena. la pie, the magpie. 
la souris, the mouse. la tortue, the tortoise. 


To all these nouns, when we wish to determine the sex, we add 
mle or femelle: la panthére male, la panthére femelle; 1l’éléphant 
male, l’éléphant femelle. 

(8) Some nouns are of double gender; for example: 


un(e) artiste, an artist. un(e) esclave, a slave. 
un(e) enfant, a child. un(e) camarade, a comrade. 
un(e) malade, a patient. un(e) propriétaire, an owner. 


(9) A number of nouns change their meaning according to the 
gender ; the following are a few of them: 


MASCULINE. FEMININE. 
book, livre, pound, 
page (attendant), page, page (of a book). 
veil, voile, sail, 
turn, trick, tour, tower. 
post, position, poste, post-office. 
pendulum, pendule, clock. 
critic, critique, criticism. 
politician, politique, polatics, 
handle, manche,! sleeve. 
mode, mood, mode, fashion. 
cabin-boy, mousse, m0S8. 
guide, guide, rein. 
stove, poéle, Srying-pan. 


4 La Manche, the English Channel, 


Formation of the Plural 303 


IV. Formation of the plural. 
Nouns and adjectives form their plural by adding s to 
the singular: Lesson 31. 


Excrprions.— (1) Nouns and adjectives ending in s, 
x, z,in the singular, are the same in the plural: Lesson 
31. 

(2) Nouns and adjectives ending in -au or -eu take x 
in the plural: Lesson 31. 

But the noun landau, a /andau (sort of carriage), and the adjective 
bleu, d/ue, take s in the plural. 

(8) Nouns and adjectives in -al change al into aux; 
Lesson 31. 


But s is added in the plural to the nouns bal, carnaval, chacal, régal, 
and to the adjectives amical, fatal, final, glacial, initial, matinal, naval, 
pénal, théatral, and a few others seldom used. 

(4) The following nouns ending in -ail change ail into 
aux: 


le bail, the lease, les baux. 

le corail, the coral, les coraux. 
l’émail, the enamel, les 6maux. 

le soupirail, the air-hole, les soupiraux. 
le travail, the work, the labor, les travaux. 
le vitrail, the glass window, les vitraux. 


Bétail, cattle, has no plural ; bestiaux is the plural word for cattle. 


(5) Seven nouns ending in -ou take x: 


le bijou, the jewel, les bijoux. 
le caillou, the pebble, les cailloux. 
le chou, the cabbage, les choux. 
le genou, the knee, les genoux. 
* Ie hibou, the owl, les hiboux. 
le joujou, the toy, les joujoux. 


le pou, the louse, les poux. 


304 Appendia 


(6) Aieul, ciel, and wil, generally make aieux, ancestors; cieux, 
heavens ; yeux, eyes. But aieul makes aieuls when it means the pa- 
ternal and maternal grandfathers; ciel makes ciels when it means the 
testers of beds, the roofs of quarries, or “ skies” in painting ; and in 
the cases when oil does not mean properly eye, it makes eils, as, des 
ewils-de-beuf, oval windows. 

(7) Foreign words, which have not yet been naturalized in France 
by custom, remain invariable, such as: des alibi, des errata, des in- 
folio, des in-quarto, des post-scriptum, des fac-simile, des Te-Deum, etc. 

But the following take the mark of the plural: des bravos, des 
duos, des trios, des numéros, des opéras, des zéros, des impromptus, 
des échos, des déficits, etc. 


(8) Plural of compound nouns. 


GENERAL Ruxes. — To form the plural of a compound 
noun: 


(a) If the noun is composed of two nouns or an adjective and a 
noun, connected by a hyphen, both parts are made plural. 


le chou-fleur, the cauliflower, les choux-fleurs. 

l’oiseau-mouche, the humming-bird, _les oiseaux-mouches. 

le petit-fils, the grandson, les petits-fils. 

le beau-frére, the brother-in-law, les beaux-fréres. 

le grand-pére, the grandfather, les grands-péres, 
But la grand’mére, the grandmother, les grand’méres. 

une demi-heure, a half hour, des demi-heures. 


(b) If the noun is composed of two nouns connected by a preposition 
and hyphens, the first noun only is made plural. 
le chef-d’ cuvre, the masterpiece, les chefs-d’ceuvre. 
larc-en-ciel, the rainbow, les arcs!-en-ciel. 


(c) If the noun is composed of a noun and a verb, adverb, or prepo- 
sition, the noun only takes the sign of the plural. 


le tire-bouchon, the corkscrew, les tire-bouchons. 
lVarriére-grand-pére, the great-grandfather, les arriére-grands-péres. 


Some compound nouns have a plural form when their meaning is 
singular: le cure-dents, the tooth-pick ; le casse-noisettes, the nut-cracker ; 
le porte-clefs, the turnkey ; un essuie-mains (or main), a towel. 


1 g not heard. 


Formation of the Feminine of Adjectives 305 


_ (d) If the noun is composed of two verbs or of any two invariable 
words, it remains unchanged in the plural, 


le oui-dire, hearsay, les oui-dire. 
le dit-on, saying, rumor, les dit-on. 
le passe-partout,  pass-key, les passe-partout. 


THE ADJECTIVE. 
V. Pormation of the feminine of adjectives. 


GENERAL Rute. — To form the feminine of adjectives, 
add e mute to the masculine (Lesson 4). 

Exceptions.— (1) Adjectives ending with e mute in 
the masculine are the same in the feminine (Lesson 4). 

(2) Adjectives ending in -el, -en, -on, -et, double the 
last consonant, and take an e mute after it (Lesson 56), 

(3) Ten other adjectives also double their last conso- 
nant in the feminine (Lesson 56). 

(4) Adjectives ending in -f change f into ve (Lesson 
56). 

(5) Adjectives ending in -x change x into se (Lesson 
56). 

(6) Adjectives ending in -eur, and derived from a pres. 
ent participle, change eur into euse: flatteur (from flat- 
tant), flatteuse ; grondeur (from grondant), grondeuse. 

(7) Adjectives ending in -teur, and not derived from 
a present participle, change teur into trice: 

Profanateur, profanatrice; corrupteur, corruptrice. 

Adjectives ending in -érieur, not belonging to either of the above 
exceptions, follow the general rule: inférieur, inférieure; ultérieur, 
ultérieure. Add to these meilleur, majeur, and mineur, 

(8) Many adjectives form their feminines irregularly 


(see Lesson 56). 
20 


306 


Appendia 


The plural of adjectives is formed in the same way as 
that of nouns (see page 67). | 


For the comparison of adjectives see Lesson 44. 


VI. Possessive adjectives. 






































SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
Masculine. Feminine. Both genders. 
My, mon. ma. mes. 
Thy, ton. ta. tes. 
His, her, its, son. 82. ses. 
Our, notre. nos. 
Your, votre. vos. 
Their, leur. leurs. 
VII. Demonstrative adjectives. 
MASCULINE. FEMININE, 
SINGULAR. | Before a consonant. | Before a vowel | Before any letter. 
or h mute, 
This or that, ce. cet. cette. 
.: ~~ — | 
PLURAL. 
These or those, ces. 





VIII. Numeral adjectives, 


For cardinal and ordinal numbers, see Lessons 21 and 


23. 


¢ 
1 Mon, ton, and son, are used instead of ma, ta, and ga before a feminine 
word beginning with a vowel or h mute. 








The Pronoun 307 


THE PRONOUN. 
Definition. 


A pronoun is a word used instead of a noun to avoid 
its repetition ; while an adjective accompanies a noun to 
qualify it or determine it. 

In the sentence ma plume est bonne, la tienne est bonne aussi, ma 
is an adjective determining the noun plume, that is to say, expressing 
whose pen it is; la tienne, on the contrary, is a pronoun standing for 


ta plume and is used to avoid the repetition of that noun, which would 
be disagreeable to the ear. 


IX. Possessive pronouns. 




















SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
Masculine. | Feminine. Masculine. Feminine. 

Mine. le mien. la mienne. | les miens. | les miennes. 

Thine. le tien. la tienne. les tiens. | les tiennes. | 
His, hers, its, | le sien. la sienne. les siens. | les siennes. 

Ours, | le or la notre. les noétres. 

Yours, le or la votre. les votres. 

Theirs, le or la leur. les leurs. 














xX. Demonstrative pronouns. 





SINGULAR. PLURAL. 


Masculine. | Feminine. | Masculine. | Feminine. 


This (one) 
That (one) celui. celle. ceux. celles. 























For use of Demonstrative pronouns, see Lessons 19 
and 20; for Relative and Interrogative pronouns, see 
Lesson 96; for Personal pronouns, see Lesson 62. 


308 


Appendia 


THE VERB. 
Auxiliary Verbs. 


(to have) and étre (to be). 





= 


PINEDIVE PRESENT. 
“(LNFINITIF PRESENT.) 
aveir, to have. 


PARTICIPLP PRESENT. 

(PARTICIPE PRESENT.) 
ayant, having 

INDICATIVE PRESEN. 
(INDICATIF PRESENT. 

j'ai, [ have, am having. 

tu as. 

il or elle a. 

nous avons. 

vous avez. 

ils or elles ont. 


IMPERFECT. 
(IMPARFAIT.) 


javais, J had, was having, used 
tu avais. 

il or elle Avait. 
nous avions. 

vous aWiez. 

ils oy elles avaient. 


PAST DEFINITE. 
(PASSE DEFINI.) 
jeus, J had. 
/ tu eus. 
~ il or elle eut. 
nous efimes. 
vous efites. 
ils or elles eurent. 


[to have. 


There are only two auxiliary verbs in French, avoir 


XI. Avoir. 


INFINITIVE PAST. 
(INFINITIF PASSE.) 
avoir eu, to have had. 


PARTICIPLE PAST. 
_(PARTIOIPE PASSE.) 
eu, had. 

PAST INDEFINITE. 
(PAss& INDEFINI.) 


j’ai eu, Z have had, I had. 
tu as eu. | 
il or elle a eu. 
n0us avons eu. 
ous aVeZ eu. 
or elles ont eu. 


PLUPERFECT. 
PLUS-QUE-PARFAIT.) 


javais eu, J had had. 
tu avais eu. 

il or elle avait eu. 
nous avions eu. 

vous aviez eu. ‘ 
ils or elles avaient eu. 


PAST ANTERIOR, 
(PASSE ANTERIEUR.) 


j’eus eu, J had had. 
tu eus eu. 

il or elle eut eu. 
nous efimes eu. 

vous efites eu. 

ils or elles eurent eu. 


The Verb Avoir 


FUTURE, 
(FUTUR.) 


jaurai, J shall have. 
tu auras. 

il or elle aura. 

nous aurons, 

vous aurez. 

ils or elles auront. 


CONDITIONAL PRESENT, 
(CONDITIONNEL PRESENT.) 


jaurais, J should have, 
tu aurais. 

il or elle aurait. 

nous aurions. 

vous auriez. 

ils or elles auraient. 


SUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT, 
(SUBJONCTIF PRESENT.) 
(that) I (may) have, etc. 


que j’aie. 

que tu aies. 

qu’il or qu'elle ait, 
que nous ayons. 
que vous ayez. 
qu’ils (elles) aient. 


SUBJUNCTIVE IMPERFECT. 
(SUBJONCTIF IMPARFAIT.) 


(that) I might have, (that) I had, etc. 


que j’eusse. 

que tu eusses. 

qu’il or qu’elle efit. 
que nous eussions. 
que vous eussiez. 
qu’ils (elles) eussent. 


1 The subjunctive has no English equivalent. Its translation depends 


upon the preceding construction. 


FUTURE ANTERIOR. 
(FUTUR ANTERIEDR.) 


jaurai eu, J shall have had. 
tu auras eu. 

il or elle aura eu. 

nous aurons eu. 

vous aurez eu. 

ils or elles auront eu. 


CONDITIONAL PAST. 
(CONDITIONNEL PASSE.) 


j’aurais eu, J should have had. 
tu aurais eu. 

il or elle aurait eu. 

nous aurions eu, 

vous auriez eu. 

ils or elles auraient eu. 


SUBJUNCTIVB PAST, 
(SUBJONCTIF PASsé.) 
(that) I (may) have had, ete. 


que j’aie eu. 

que tu aies eu. 

qu il or qu’elle ait eu. 
que nous ayons eu. 
que vous ayez eu. 
qu’ils (elles) aient eu. 


SUBJUNCTIVE PLUPERFECT. 


(SUBJONCTIF PLUS-QUE-PARFAIT.) 


(that) I (might) have had, ete, 


que j’eusse eu. 

que tu eusses eu. 

qu’il or qu’elle efit eu. 
que nous eussions eu, 
que vous eussiez eu. 
qu’ils (elles) eussent eu. 


309 


310 


Appendix 


IMPERATIVE. 
(IMPERATIF.) 


SINGULAR. 
(SINGULIER.) 


aie, have (thou). 
(qu'il ait, let him have.) 3 


PLURAL. 
(PLURIEL.) 
ayons, let us have. 
ayez, have. 
(qu’ils aient, Jet them have.)* 


XII. Avoir used interrogatively. 


INDICATIVE PRESENT, 
have I ? 
ai-je ? 
as-tu ? 
a-t-il ? a-t-elle % 
avons-nous ? 
avez-vous ? 
ont-ils ? ont-elles % 


IMPERFECT. 
had I? 

avais-je? — 
_ avais-tut 
avait-il? avait-elle ? 
avions-nous ? 
aviez-vous ? 
avaient-ils? avaient-elles ? 


PAST DEFINITE. 
had I? 

eus-je ? 
eus-tu % 
eut-il? eut-elle ? 
efilmes-nous % 
efites-vous ? 
eurent-ils ? eurent-elles ? 


PAST INDEFINITE. 
have I had? had I? 

ai-je eu? 

as-tu eu 3 

a-t-il eu? a-t-elle eu? 

avons-nous eu ? 

avez-vous eu ? 

ont-ils eu? ont-elles eu ? 


PLUPERFEOT. 
had I had? 


avais-je eu ? 

avais-tu eu ? 

avait-il eu? avait-elle eu ? 
avions-nous eu ? 
aviez-vous eu ? 

avaient-ils (elles) eu ? 


PAST ANTERIOR, 
had I had? 


eus-je eu 3 

eus-tu eu? 

eut-il eu ? eut-elle eu? 
efimes-nous eu ? 
efites-vous eu ? 
eurent-ils (elles) eu? 


1 Third person, present subjunctive, used as imperative, 


The Verb Avoir 311 


FUTURE. 
shall I have? 

aurai-je ? 
auras-tu ? 
aura-t-il? aura-t-elle ? 
aurons-nous ? 
aurez-vous ? 
auront-ils ? auront-elles ? 


CONDITIONAL PRESENT. 


should I have? 
aurais-je 3 
aurais-tu ? 
aurait-il? aurait-elle 4 
aurions-nous % 
auriez-vous ? 
auraient-ils (elles) ? 


FUTURE ANTERIOR. 
shall I have had ? 


aurai-je eu? 

auras-tu eu? 

aura-t-il eu? aura-t-elle eu? 
aurons-nous eu ? 

aurez-vous eu? 

auront-ils (elles) eu ? 


CONDITIONAL PAST. 
should I have had ? 
aurais-je eu? 
aurais-tu eu ? 
aurait-il eu? aurait-elle eu ? 
aurions-nous eu ? 
auriez-vous eu ? 
auraient-ils (elles) eu? 


OBSERVATION FOR ALL VERBS USED NEGATIVELY. — Instead of 
pas, put point for a stronger negation, jamais for never, and plus for 


no more or no longer, (See Lesson 98.) 


XIII. Avoir used negatively. 


INDICATIVE PRESENT. 
I have not, 

je n’ai pas. 

tu n’as pas. 

il or elle n’a pas. 

nous n’avons pas. 

vous n’avez pas. 

ils or elles n’ont pas, 


IMPERFECT. 

T had not. 
je n’avais pas. 
tu n’avais pas. 
il or elle n’avait pas. 
nous n’avions pas. 
vous n’aviez pas. 
il or elles n’avaient pas. 


PAST INDEFINITE. 
I have not had, I did not have. 
je n’ai pas eu. 
tu n’as pas eu. 
il or elle n’a pas eu. 
nous n’avons pas eu. 
vous n’avez pas eu. 
ils or elles n’ont pas et. 


PLUPERFECT. 
I had not had. 


je n’avais pas eu. 

tu n’avais pas eu. 

il or elle n’avait pas en. 
nous n’avions pas eu. 

vous n’aviez pas eu. 

ils or elles n’avaient pas eu. 


312 Appendia 


PAST DEFINITE. 
je n’eus pas, J had not. 
tu n’eus pas. 

il or elle n’eut pas. 

nous n’efimes pas. 

vous n’eiites pas. 

ils or elles n’eurent pas. 


FUTURE. | 

IT shall not have. 
je n’aurai pas. 
tu n’auras pas. 
il or elle n’aura pas. 
nous n’aurons pas. 
vous n’aurez pas. 
ils or elles n’auront pas. 


CONDITIONAL PRESENT. 
I should not have. 
je n’aurais pas. 
tu n’aurais pas. 
il or elle n’aurait pas. 
nous n’aurions pas. 
vous n’auriez pas. 
ils or elles n’auraient pas. 


SUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT. 
(that) I may not have. 

que je naie pas. 
que tu n’aies pas. : 
qu’il or qu’elle n’ait pas. 
que nous n’ayons pas. 
que vous n’ayez pas. 
qu’ils (elles) n’aient pas. 


SUBJUNCTIVE IMPERFECT. 


(that) I might not have. 
que je n’eusse pas. 
que tu n’eusses pas. 
qu’il or qu’elle n’etit pas. 
que nous n’eussions pas. 
que vous n’eussiez pas. 
qu ils (elles) n’eussent pas. 


PAST ANTERIOR. 
je n’eus pas eu, J had not had. 
tu n’eus pas eu. 

il or elle n’eut pas eu. 

nous n’efimes pas eu. 

vous n’efites pas eu. 

ils or elles n’eurent pas en. 


FUTURE ANTERIOR. 
I shall not have had. 
je n’aurai pas eu. 
tu n’auras pas eu. 
il or elle n’aura pas eu. 
nous n’aurons pas eu. 
vous n’aurez pas eu. 
ils or elles n’auront pas eu. 


CONDITIONAL PAST. 
I should not have had. 
je n’aurais pas eu. 
tu n’aurais pas eu. 
il or elle n’aurait pas eu. 
nous n’aurions pas eu. 
vous n’auriez pas eu. 
ils or elles n’auraient pas eu. 


SUBJUNCTIVE PAST. 

(that) I may not have had. 
que je n’aie pas eu. 
que tu n’aies pas eu. 
qu’il or qu’elle n’ait pas eu. 
que nous n’ayons pas eu. 
que vous n’ayez pas eu. 
qwils (elles) n’aient pas eu. 


SUBJUNCTIVE PLUPERFECT. 
(that) I might not have had. 
que je n’eusse pas eu. 
que tu n’eusses pas eu. 
qu il or qu’elle n’efit pas eu. 
que nous n’eussions pas eu. 
que vous n’eussiez pas eu. 
qu’ils (elles) n’eussent pas eu. 


[he Verb Avoir Bas 


IMPERATIVE. 
SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
7 n’ayons pas, /et us not have. 
n’aie pas, do not have. n’ayez pas, do not have. 
(qu'il n’ait pas, /et him not have.) (qu’ils n’aient pas, let them not have.) 


XIV. Avoir used negatively and interrogatively. 


INDICATIVE PRESENT. 


have I not ? 
n’ai-je pas ? 
n’as-tu pas ? 
n’a-t-il (elle) pas ? 
- Wavons-nous pas? 
n'avez-vous pas? 
n’ont-ils (elles) pas ? 


IMPERFECT. 
n’avais-je pas? hud I not? 
etc. 


PAST DEFINITE, 
n’eus-je pas? had I not ? 
etc. 


FUTURE. 
shall I not have ? 
n’aurai-je pas ? 
etc. 


CONDITIONAL PRESENT. 


should I not have ? 
n’aurais-je pas ? 
etc. 


PAST INDEFINITE. 
have I not had? 

n’ai-je pas eu? 

n’as-tu pas eu? 

n’a-t-il (elle) pas eu? 

n’avons-nous pas eu? 

n’avez-vous pas eu? 

n’ont-ils (elles) pas eu? 


PLUPERFECT. 
n’avais-je pas eu ? had I not had? 
etc. 


PAST ANTERIOR. 
n’eus-je pas eu? had I not had? 
etc. 


FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

shall I not have had ? 
n’aurai-je pas eu ? 
etc. 


CONDITIONAL PAST. 

should I not have had? 
n’aurais-je pas eu? 
etc. 


by 
& 








314 


étre, to be. 


PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 


étant, being. 


INDICATIVE PRESENT. 


\, Lam. 
je suis. 
tu es. 
il or elle est. 
nous sommes. 
vous étes. 
ils or elles sont. 


IMPERFECT. 

I was, used to be, ete. 

ais r 
tu étais. 


“Seeeeah 


: elle était. 


is 





je fus. 
tu fus. 
il or elle fut 

nous fiimes 

vous fiites, 

ils or elleg furent. 


| FUTURE. 
shall be, ete. 

je serai. | 

tu seras. 

il or elle sera. 

nous serons. 

vous sereg. 

ils or elles seront. 


a 


“fai 6t6. 


Appendia 


XV. Etre. 
INFINITIVE PRESENT. 


INFINITIVE PAST. 
avoir 6t6, to have been. 


| PARTICIPLE PAST. 
j : 
f été, been. 
PAST INDEFINITE. 
I have been, I was. 


tu as été. 

il or elle a été. 
nous avons été. | 
vous avez été. 

ils or elles ont été. 


PLUPERFEOT. 
I had been. 

javais été. 

tu avais été. 

il or elle avait 6té. 

nous avions été. 

vous aviez été. 

ils or elles avaient 6té. 


PAST ANTERIOR, 
I had been. 
jeus été. 
tu eus été. 
il or elle eut été. 
nous efimes été. 
ots efites été. 
ils or elles eurent été. 


FUTURE ANTERIOR. 
I shall have been. 

j’aurai été. 

tu auras été. 

il or elle aura été. 

nous aurons été. 

vous 2urez 6té. 

ils or elles auront été. 


The Verb Etre 316 


CONDITIONAL PRESENT. 
I should be. 
je serais. 
tu serais. 
il or elle serait. 
nous serions. 
vous seriez. 
ils or elles seraient. 


SUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT. 
(that) I (may) be. 

que je sois. 

que tu sois. 

qu’il or qu’elle soit. 

que nous soyons. 

que vous soyez. 

qu’ils (elles) soient. 


SUBJUNCTIVE IMPERFECT. 


(that) I (might) be. 
que je fusse. 
que tu fusses. 
qu’il or qu’elle fit. 
que nous fussions. 
que vous fussiez. 
qu’ils or qu’elles fussent. 


CONDITIONAL PAST. 
I should have been, 
jaurais été. 
tu aurais été. 
il or elle aurait été. 
nous aurions été. 
vous auriez été. 
ils or elles auraient été. 


SUBJUNCTIVE PAST. 
(that) I (may) have been. 

que j’aie été. 

que tu aies été. 

qu’il or qu’elle ait 6té. 

que nous ayons été. 

que vous ayez été. 

qu’ils (elles) aient été. 

SUBJUNCTIVE PLUPERFECT. 

(that) I (might) have been. 

que j’eusse été. 

que tu eusses été. 

qu’il or qu’elle efit été. 

que nous eussions été. 

que vous eussiez été. 

qu ils or qu’elles eussent été. 


IMPERATIVE. 
SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
soyons, let us be. 
sois, be. soyez, be. 


(qu’il soit, let him be.) 


(qu’ils soient, /et them be.) 


XVI. Etre used interrogatively. 


INDICATIVE. 
am I? 

suis-je ? 

es-tu ? 

est-il ? est-elle ? 

sommes-nous ? 

étes-vous ? 

sont-ils ? sont-elles ? 


PAST INDEFINITE. 
have I been? was I? 

ai-je été? 

as-tu été? 

a-t-il été? a-t-elle été? 

avons-nous 6té ? 

avez-vous été? 

ont-ils été ? ont-elles 6té? 


316 
IMPERFECT. 
was I ? 
étais-je ? 
étais-tu ? 


était-il? était-elle ? 
étions-nous ? 

étiez-vous ? 

étaient-ils? étaient-elles? 


PAST DEFINITE. 
was I? 

fus-je ? 
fus-tu ? 
fut-il? fut-elle ? 
fiimes-nous ? 
fites-vous ? 
furent-ils ? furent-elles ? 


FUTURE. 
shall I be ? 

serai-je ? 

seras-tu ? 

sera-t-il? sera-t-elle ? 

serons-nous ? 

serez-vous ? 

seront-ils ? seront-elles ? 


CONDITIONAL PRESENT. 
should I be? 

serais-je ? 
serais-tu ? 
serait-il? serait-elle ? 
serions-nous ? 
seriez-vous ? 
seraient-ils ? seraient-elles ? 


Appendix 


PLUPERFECT. 
| had I been? 

avais-je été? 
avais-tu été? 
avait-il été? avait-elle 6té? 
avions-nous été ? 
aviez-vous été ? 
avaient-ils (elles) été? 


PAST ANTERIOR. 
had I been? 

eus-je 6té? 
eus-tu été ? 
eut-il été? eut-elle été? 
efimes-nous été ? 
efites-vous été? 
eurent-ils (elles) été ? 


FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

shall I have been? 
aurai-je 6té? 
auras-tu été? 


aura-t-il 6té? aura-t-elle été? 


aurons-nous été? 
aurez-vous 6té ? 
auront-ils (elles) été? 


CONDITIONAL PAST. 
should I have been? 
aurais-je été ? 
aurais-tu été? 


aurait-il été? aurait-elle-été ? 


aurions-nous 6té? 
auriez-vous 6té ? 
auraient-ils (elles) été? 


The Verb Etre 317 


XVII. Etre used negatively. 


INDICATIVE PRESENT. 


I am not. 
je ne suis pas. 
tu n’es pas. 
il or elle n’est pas. 
nous ne sommes pas. 
vous n’étes pas. 
ils or elles ne sont pas. 


IMPERFECT. 
I was not. 

je n’étais pas. 

tu n’étais pas. 

il or elle n’était pas. 

nous n’étions pas. 

vous n’étiez pas. 

ils or elles n’étaient pas. 


PAST DEFINITE. 


I was not. 
je ne fus pas. 
tu ne fus pas. 
il or elle ne fut pas. 
nous ne filmes pas. 
vous ne fiites pas. 
ils or elles ne furent pas. 


FUTURE. 
I shall not be. 

je ne serai pas. 

tu ne seras pas. 

il or elle ne sera pas. 

nous ne serons pas. 

vous ne serez pas. 

ils or elles ne seront pas. 


PAST INDEFINITE. 
I have not been, I was not. 
je n’ai pas été. 
tu n’as pas été. 
il or elle n’a pas 6té6. 
nous n’avons pas été. 
vous n'avez pas été. 
ils or elles n’ont pas été. 


PLUPERFECT. 
I had not been. 

je n’avais pas été. 
tu n’avais pas été. 
il or elle n’avait pas été. 
nous n’avions pas été. 
vous n’aviez pas été. 
ils or elles n’avaient pas été. 


PAST ANTERIOR. 
I had not been. 

je n’eus pas été. 

tu n’eus pas été. 

il or elle n’eut pas été. 

nous n’efimes pas été. 

vous n’efites pas été. 

ils or elles n’eurent pas 6té. 


FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
I shall not have been. 

je n’aurai pas été. 

tu n’auras pas été. 

il or elle n‘aura pas 6té. 

nous n’aurons pas été. 

vous n’aurez pas été. 

ils or elles n’auront pas été. 


318 


CONDITIONAL PRESENT. 


I should not be. 
je ne serais pas. 
tu ne serais pas. 
il or elle ne serait pas. 
nous ne serions pas. 
vous ne seriez pas. 
ils or elles ne seraient pas. 


SUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT. 


(that) I may not be. 
que je ne sois pas. 
que tu ne sois pas. 
qu’il (elle) ne soit pas. 
que nous ne soyons pas. 
que vous ne soyez pas. 
qu’ils (elles) ne soient pas. 


SUBJUNCTIVE IMPERFECT. 


(that) I might not be. 
que je ne fusse pas. 
que tu ne fusses pas. 
qu’il or qu’elle ne fit pas. 
que nous ne fussions pas. 
que vous ne fussiez pas. 


Appendix 


CONDITIONAL PAST. 


I should not have been. 
je n’aurais pas été. 
tu n’aurais pas été. 
il or elle n’aurait pas été. 
nous n’aurions pas été. 
vous n’auriez pas été. 
ils or elles n’auraient pas été. 


SUBJUNCTIVE PAST. 


(that) I might not have been. 
que je n’aie pas été. 
que tu n’aies pas été. 
qu il (elle) n’ait pas été. 
que nous n’ayons pas été. 
que vous n’ayez pas été. 
qu’ils (elles) n’aient pas été. 


SUBJUNCTIVE PLUPERFECT. 


(that) I might not have been, 
que je n’eusse pas été. 
que tu n’eusses pas été. 
qu’il or qu’elle n’efit pas été. 
que nous n’eussions pas été. 
que vous n’eussiez pas été. 


qu’ils (elles) ne fussent pas. qu’ils (elles) n’eussent pas 6té. 


IMPERATIVE. 


SINGULAR. PLURAL, 


ne soyons pas, Jet us not be. 
ne soyez pas, be not, do not be. 
(qu’ils ne soient pas, let them not be.) 


ne sois pas, do not be. 
(qu’il ne soit pas, let him not be.) 


The Verb Etre 


319 


XVIII. Etre used negatively and interrogatively. 


INDICATIVE PRESENT. 


am I not ? 
ne suis-je pas? 
n’es-tu pas? 


n’est-il pas? n’est-elle pas? 


ne sommes-nous pas ? 
n’étes-vous pas’? 
ne sont-ils (elles) pas? 


IMPERFECT, 
was I not? 
n’étais-je pas? 
etc. 


PAST DEFINITE. 


was I not ? 
ne fus-je pas? 
etc. 


FUTURE. 
shall I not be? 
ne serai-je pas? 
etc. 


CONDITIONAL PRESENT. 


should I not be ? 
ne serais-je pas? 
etc. 


PAST INDEFINITE. 
have I not been? was I not ? 

n’ai-je pas été? 

n’as-tu pas été? 

n’a-t-il pas 6té? n’a-t-elle pas été? 

n’avons-nous pas 6té? 

n’avez-vous pas 6té? 

n’ont-ils (elles) pas 6té? 


PLUPERFECT. 
had I not been? 
n’avais-je pas été? 
etc. 


PAST ANTERIOR. 
had I not been ? 
n’eus-je pas été? 
etc. 


FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

shall I not have been? 
n’aurai-je pas été? 
etc. 


CONDITIONAL PAST. 
should I not have been? 
n’aurais-je pas 6té? 
etc. 


320 Appendia 


XIX. Terminations of the Four Regular Conjugations. 

















; : x sf 
see ze 3 == s 
3 3 ee 5 28 e 8 
p S . > Q as g 2 
ee ee ae % ar & A 
o Ry 
e ais ai 
es ais as 
e ait a 
1. 4 ant é ons ions ames 
ez iez ates 
ent aient érent 
is ais is 
is ais is 
b z it ait it 
2. ” (iss ant - issons ions {mes 
issez iez ites 
issent aient irent 
s ais us 
s ais us 
; t ait ut 
3 oN ant be ous ions fimes 
ez iez fites 
ent aient urent 
Ss ais is 
8 ais is 
mall aon ait it 
4 a ant be ons ions {mes 
ez iez ites 
ent aient irent 


























Observations on these terminations. 


(1) All verbs in the French language terminate in the same way in 
four of their tenses : — 

The present participle in -ant. 

The imperfect and the conditional in -ais, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, -aient. 

The future in -ai, -as, -a, -ons, -ez, -ont. 

(2) The endings of the future and of the conditional are always 
preceded by r. 


— 9 


Terminations of Regular Conjugations 32] 

















: Le Sy 
: : 3 ss 
= s S 88 s§ 
e E : 34 se 
3 S a BN 
as ais e asse 
as ais e es asses 
a ait e€ e at 
ons ions ons ions assions 
eZ iez eZ iez assiez 
ont aient ent ent assent 
ai ais isse isse 
as ais is isses isses 
a ait isse isse it 
ons ions issons issions issions 
ez iez issez issiez issiez 
ont aient issent issent issent 
ai ais e usse 
as ais 8 es usses 
a ait € e fit 
ons ions ons ions ussions 
ez iez eZ iez ussiez 
ont aient ent ent ussent 
ai ais e isse 
as ais 8 es isses 
a ait e e€ it 
ons ions ons ions issions 
eZ iez eZ iez issiez 
ont aient ent ent issent 




















(8) The termination of the past participle is most important, as all 
gays tenses are formed by that participle preceded by avoir or 

tre. 

(4) Three forms of the imperative are like the corresponding per- 
sons of present indicative. It must, however, be remarked that the s 
of the second person singular of the present indicative in verbs of the 
lst conjugation does not appear in the imperative. The third person, 
singular and plural, is taken from the present subjunctive. 

21 


- 322 Appendia 


XxX. The Four Conjugations. 


First. Second. 
Verbs in -er. Verbs in -ir. 


PRESENT INFINITIVE. 
porter, to carry. finir, to finish. 


PAST INFINITIVE. 


avoir porté. avoir fini. 


PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 


portant. finissant. 


PAST PARTICIPLE. 
porté. fini. 


PRESENT INDICATIVE. 


je porte. je-finis. 

tu portes. tu finis. 

il porte. il finit. 

nous portons. nous finissons. 
vous portez. vous finissez. 
ils portent. ils finissent. 


PAST INDEFINITE, 


j'ai porté. jai fini. 

tu as porté. tu as fini. 

il a porté. il a fini. 

nous avons porté. nous avons fini. 
vous avez porté. vous avez fini. 


ils ont porté. ils ont fini. 


—  . 


The Four Conjugations 


Third. 


Verbs in -oir. 


Fourth. 


Verbs in -re. 


INFINITIF PRESENT. 


recevoir, to receive. 


rendre, to give back. 


INFINITIF PASSE. 


avoir recu. 


avoir rendu. 


PARTICIPE PRESENT. 


recevant. 


rendant. 


PARTICIPE PASSE. 


rendu. 


INDICATIF PRESENT. 


je recois. 

tu recois. 

il recoit. 

nous recevons. 
vous recevez. 
ils recoivent. 


je rends. 

tu rends. 

il rend. 

nous rendons. 
vous rendez. 
ils rendent. 


PASSE INDEFINI. 


j'ai regu. 

tu as recu. 

il a regu. 

nous avons recu. 
vous avez requ. 
ils ont recu. 


jai rendu. 

tu as rendu. 

il a rendu. 

nous avons rendu. 
vous avez rendu. 
ils ont rendu. 


323 


324 


A ppendia 


IMPERFECT INDICATIVE (Descriptive Past). 


First. 


je portais. 

tu portais. 

il portait. 
nous portions. 
vous portiez. 
ils portaient. 


j’avais porté, 
tu avais porté. 
il avait porté. 


PLUPERFECT. 


nous avions porté, 


vous aviez porté. 
ils avaient porté. 


Second. 
je finissais. 
tu finissais. 
il finissait. 
nous finissions. 
vous finissiez. 
ils finissaient. 


j’avais fini. 

tu avais fini. 

il avait fini. 
nous avions fini. 
vous aviez fini. 
ils avaient fini. 


PAST DEFINITE {Preterite or Narrative Past). 


je portai. je finis. 

tu portas. tu finis. 

il porta. il finit. 

nous portames. nous finimes. 

vous portates. vous finites. 

ils portérent. ils finirent. 
PAST ANTERIOR. 

j’eus porté. jeus fini. 

tu eus porté. tu eus fini. 

il eut porté. il eut fini. 

nous efimes porté. nous efimes fini. 


vous efites porté, 
ils eurent porté. 


vous efites fini. 
ils eurent fini. 


The Four Conjugations 


IMPARFAIT DE L’INDICATIF. 


Third. 


je recevais. 

tu recevais. 

il recevait. 
nous recevions. 
vous receviez. 
ils recevaient. 


Fourth. 


je rendais. 

tu rendais. 

il rendait. 
nous rendions. 
vous rendiez. 
ils rendaient. 


PLUS-QUE-PARFAIT DE L’INDICATIF. 


javais regu. 

tu avais recu. 

il avait recu. 
nous avions recu. 
vous aviez recu. 
ils avaient regu. 


je recus. 

tu recus. 

il recut. 

nous reciimes. 
vous recites. 
ils recurent. 


javais rendu. 

tu avais rendu. 

il avait rendu. 
nous avions rendu. 
vous aviez rendu. 
ils avaient rendu. 


PASSE DEFINI. 


je rendis. 

tu rendis. 

il rendit. 

nous rendimes. 
vous rendites. 
ils rendirent. 


PASSE ANTERIEUR. 


j’eus recu. 

tu eus recu. 

il eut recu. 

nous efimes recu. 
vous efites recu. 
ils eurent recu. 


j’eus rendu. 

tu eus rendu. 

il eut rendu. 

nous efimes rendu. 
vous efites rendu. 
ils eurent rendu. 


$26 


326 


First. 


je porterai. 

tu porteras. 

il portera. 
nous porterons. 
vous porterez. 
ils porteront. 


Appendia 


Second. 
je finirai. 
tu finiras. 
il finira. 
nous finirons. 
vous finirez. 
ils finiront. 


FUTURE ANTERIOR. 


j'aurai porté. 
tu auras porté. 
il aura porté. 


nous aurons porté. 


vous aurez porté. 
ils auront porté. 


j’aurai fini. 

tu auras fini. 

il aura fini. 
neus aurons fini. 
vous aurez fini. 
ils auront fini. 


CONDITIONAL PRESENT. 


je porterais. 

tu porterais. 

il porterait. 
nous porterions. 
vous porteriez. 
ils porteraient. 


je finirais. 

tu finirais. 

il finirait. 
nous finirions. 
vous finiriez. 
ils finiraient. 


CONDITIONAL PAST. 


jaurais porté. 
tu aurais porté. 
il aurait porté. 


nous aurions porté. 
vous auriez porté. 
ils auraient porté. 


j’aurais fini. 

tu aurais fini. 

il aurait fini. 
nous aurions fini. 
vous auriez fini. 
ils auraient fini. 


The Four Conjugations 327 


FUTUR. 
Third. Fourth. 

je recevrai. je rendrai. 
tu recevras. tu rendras. 
il recevra. il rendra. 
nous recevrons. nous rendrons. 
vous recevrez. vous rendrez. 
ils recevront. ils rendront. 


FUTUR ANTERIEUR (PASSE). 


j’aurai recu. jaurai rendu. 

tu auras recu. tu aucas rendu. 

il aura recu. il aura rendu. 
nous aurons recu. nous aurons rendu. 
vous aurez recu. vous aurez rendu. 
ils auront recu. ils auront rendu. 


CONDITIONNEL PRESENT. 


je recevrais. je rendrais. 

tu recevrais. tu rendrais. 

il recevrait. il rendrait. 
nous recevrions. nous rendrions. 
vous recevriez. : vous rendriez. 
ils recevraient. ils rendraient. 


CONDITIONNEL PASSE. 


jaurais recu, J should have received. j’aurais rendu. 


tu aurais recu. tu aurais rendu. 

il aurait recu. : il aurait rendu. 
nous aurions recu. nous aurions rendu. 
vous auriez recu. vous auriez rendu. 


ils auraient recu. ils auraient rendu. 


328 


Appendix 


SUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT. 


First. 
que je porte. 
que tu portes. 
qu’il porte. 
que nous portions. 
que vous portiez. 


Second. 
que je finisse. 
que tu finisses. 
qu’il finisse. 
que nous finissions. 
que vous finissiez. 


qu’ils portent. qu’ils finissent. 
SUBJUNCTIVE PAST. 

que j’aie porté. que j’aie fini. 

que tu aies porté. que tu aies fini. 

qu’il ait porté. qu’il ait fini. 


que nous ayons porté. 


que vous ayez porté. 


qu’ils aient porté. 


que nous ayons fini. 
que vous ayez fini. 
qu’ils aient fini. 


SUBJUNCTIVE IMPERFECT. 


que je portasse. 

que tu portasses. 
qu’il portat. 

que nous portassions. 
que vous portassiez. 
qu’ils portassent. 


que je finisse. 

que tu finisses. 
qu’il finit. 

que nous finissions. 
que vous finissiez. 
qu’ils finissent. 


SUBJUNCTIVE PLUPERFECT. 


que j’eusse porté. 
que tu eusses porté. 
qu’il efit porté. 


que nous eussions porté. 
que vous eussiez porté. 


qu’ils eussent porté. 


IMPERATIVE, 


porte. 

(qu’il porte). 
portons. 

portez. . 
(qu’ils portent). 


que j’eusse fini. 

que tu eusses fini. 
qu’il efit fini. 

que nous eussions fin’ 
que vous eussiez fini. 
qu’ils eussent fini. 


finis. 

(qu’il finisse). 
finissons. 
finissez. 

(qu ils finissent). 


The Four Conjugations 329 


SUBJONCTIF PRESENT. 


Third. 
que je recoive. 
que tu recoives. 
qu’il recoive. 
que nous recevions. 
que vous receviez. 
qu’ils recoivent. 


Fourth. 
que je rende. 
que tu rendes. 
qu’il rende. 
que nous rendions. 
que vous rendiez. 
qu’ils rendent. 


SUBJONCTIF PASSE. 


que j’aie regu. 

que tu aies recu. 
qu’il ait recu. 

que nous ayons recu. 
que vous ayez recu. 
qu’ils aient recu. 


que j’aie rendu. 

que tu aies rendu. 
qu’il ait rendu. 

que nous ayons rendu, 
que vous ayez rendu. 
quils aient rendu. 


IMPARFAIT DU SUBJONCTIF, 


que je recusse. 

que tu recusses. 
qu’il reciit. 

que nous recussions. 
que vous recussiez. 
qu’ils recussent. 


que je rendisse. 

que tu rendisses. 
qu’il rendit. 

que nous rendissions. 
que vous rendissiez. 
qu’ils rendissent. 


PLUS-QUE-PARFAIT DU SUBJONCTIF, 


que j’eusse recu. 

que tu eusses recu. 
qu’il efit regu. 

que nous eussions recu. 
que vous eussiez regu. 
qu’ils eussent recu. 


recois. 

(qu’il recoive). 
recevons, 
recevez. 

(qu’ils recoivent). 


que j’eusse rendu. 

que tu eusses rendu. 
qu’il efit rendu. 

que nous eussions rendu 
que vous eussiez rendu. 
qu ils eussent rendu. 


rends. 

(qu’il rende). 
rendons. 

rendez. 

(qu’ils rendent). 


330 Appendix 


XXI. Peculiarities in verbs of the first conjugation. 


All the verbs of the Ist conjugation, but two, are regular, and con- 
sequently conjugated like porter. But a few, besides those which have 
been seen in Lessons 74, 75, present some peculiarities: 

(1) Verbs in -ier, such as prier, crier, oublier, have two consecutive 
i’s in the 1st and 2nd persons plural of the imperfect indicative and 
present subjunctive: priions, priiez, criions, criiez, oubliions, oubliiez ; 
the first i belongs to the root, the second to the termination. 

(2) In verbs in -yer, after the y of the root, there is an i belonging 
to the termination in the same parts of the verb: employions, 
employiez. 


XXII. The Passive Form. 


Verbs have two Voices, namely : — 
The Active Voice, when the subject does something, 
as, — 


mon pére me punit, my father punishes me. 
mon pére m’a puni, my father has punished me. 


The Passive Voice, when the subject has something 
done to it, as, — 


je suis puni par mon pére, J am punished by my father. 
j'ai été puni par mon pére, J was punished by my father. 


Only transitive verbs have a passive voice. The passive is used 
much less frequently than in English, its place being taken by on with 
the active or by a reflexive construction. See page 244. 


Conjugation of the passive verb étre frappé. 


PRESENT INFINITIVE. PAST INFINITIVE. 


tre frappé, to be struck. avoir été frappé, to have been struck, 


Conjugation of a Reflexive Verb 331 


PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 


étant frappé, being struck. 


PRESENT INDICATIVE. 


I am struck, ete. 
je suis frappé (6c). 
tu es frappé (ée). 
il (elle) est frappé (6e). 
nous sommes frappés (é6es). 
vous 6tes frappés (é6es). 
ils (elles) sont frappés (6es). 


IMPERFECT. 


I was struck. 


j’étais frappé (6e). 


PAST PARTICIPLE. 
ayant été frappé, having been struck. 


PAST INDEFINITE, 


I have been struck, I was struck, ete. 
j'ai 6té frappé (ée). 

tu as été frappé (ée). 

il (elle) a 6té frappé (ée). 

nous avons été frappés (ées). 

vous avez 6té frappés (ées). 

ils (elles) ont été frappés (ées). 


PLUPERFECT, 


I had been struck. 
javais 6té frappé (6). 


XXIII. Conjugation of a reflexive verb. 


PRESENT INFINITIVE. 


se laver, to wash one’s self. 


PRESENT PARTICIPLE,. 


se lavant, washing one’s self. 


PRESENT INDICATIVE, 


I wash myself. 
je me lave. 
tu te laves. 
il se lave. 
nous nous lavons. 
vous vous lavez. 
ils se lavent. 


IMPERFECT. 


I was washing myself. 
je me lavais. 


PAST INFINITIVE. 


8’6tre lavé, to have washed one’s self. 


PAST PARTICIPLE. 


s’étant lavé, having washed one’s self 


PAST INDEFINITE. 


I have washed myself. 
je me suis lavé (ée). 
tu t’es lavé (6c). 
il (elle) s’est lavé (6e). 
nous nous sommes lavés (ée8). 
vous vous étes lavés (ées). 
ils (elles) se sont lavés (ées). 


PLUPERFECT. 


I had washed myself. 
je m’étais lavé (ée). 


332 | Appendia 


IMPERATIVE. 
lavons-nous, let us wash ourselves. 
lave-toi, wash thyself. lavez-vous, wash yourselves (yourself). 
(qu’il se lave, let him wash himself.) (qu’ils se lavent, let them wash them- 
selves.) 


Observe that the pronoun object is placed after the imperative. See 
Lesson 63, (2). If the imperative is negative, the pronoun is placed 
before, according to the general rule, as: 


ne nous lavons pas, Jet us not wash ourselves. 
ne vous lavez pas, do not wash yourselves (yourself). 


XXIV. Conjugation of a reciprocal verb. 


PRESENT INDICATIVE. 


Speaking of two per- Speaking of more 

sons only. than two. 
nous nous flattons l’un l'autre, les uns les autres. 
vous vous flattez l'un l’autre, les uns les autres. 
ils se flattent l’un l’autre, les uns les autres. 


All through the conjugation, put lune l’autre if speaking of two 
feminine subjects, and les unes les autres if speaking of more than 
two. , 


‘ PAST INDEFINITE. 
nous nous sommes flattés lun l’autre, les uns les autres. 
vous vous 6tes flattés l’un l’autre, les uns les autres. 
ils se sont flattés l'un l’autre, les uns les autres. 

IMPERFECT. 
nous nous fiattions lun l’autre, les uns les autres. 
vous vous flattiez l’un l'autre, les uns les autres. 
ils se flattaient Pun l’autre, les uns les autres. 


and so on to the 
IMPERATIVE AFFIRMATIVE. 


flattons-nous Yun l’autre, les uns les autres. 
flattez-vous lun l’autre, les uns les autres. 
quw’ils se flattent lun l’autre, les uns les autres, 


Conjugation of a Reciprocal Verb 338 


IMPERATIVE NEGATIVE. 


ne nous flattons pas Yun l'autre, les uns les autres, 
ne vous flattez pas Pun l'autre, les uns les autres. 
qu’ils ne se flattent pas Yun l’autre, les uns les autres. 


If the reciprocal verb requires the preposition a before 
its object, it is conjugated in this way :— 


PRESENT INDICATIVE. 
We speak to each other. 


nous nous parlons lun & l'autre, les uns aux autres. 
vous vous parlez lun & l’autre, les uns aux autres. 
ils se parlent Yun & l’autre, les uns aux autres. 


If the reciprocal verb requires any other preposition 
before its object, the preposition is likewise placed be- 
tween l’un and l'autre, or les uns and les autres, as; — 


PAST INDEFINITE. 


We fought against each other. 
nous nous sommesbattus l’uncontrel’autre, les uns contre les autres. 
vous vous étes battus lYuncontrel’autre, les uns contre les autres. 
ils se sont battus Yun contre l’autre, les uns contre les autres. 


Irregular Verbs 








334 
INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLES. PRESENT INDICATIVE. 
& 
Absoudre, absolvant j absous nous absolvons 
to absolve absous (m.) | tu absous vous absolvez 
absoute (f.) | ilabsout ils absolvent 
Acquérir, acquérant jacquiers nous acquérons 
to acquire acquis, -e tu acquiers vous acquérez 
il acquiert ils acquitrent 
Aller, allant je vais nous allons 
to go allé, -e tu vas vous allez 
il va ils vont 
Assaillir, assaillant jassaille nous assaillons 
to assail assailli, -e tu assailles vous assaillez 
il assaille _ ils assaillent 
Asseoir, asseyant jassieds nous asseyons 
to seat assis, -e tu assieds vous asseyez 
il assied ils asseyent 
Avoir, ayant j'ai nous avons 
to have eu, -e tu as vous avez 
ila ils ont 
Battre, battant je bats nous battons 
to beat battu, -e tu bats vous battez 
il bat ils battent 
Boire, buvant je bois nous buvons 
to drink bu, -e tu bois vous buvez 
il boit ils boivent 
Bouillir, bouillant je bous nous bouillons 
to boul bouilli, -e tu bous vous bouillez 
il bout ils bouillent 
Clore, no pres. part, | je clos 
to close clos, -e tu clos no plural 
il clét 
Conclure, concluant je conclus nous concluons 
to conclude conclu, -e tu conclus vous concluez 
ilconclut ils concluent 














Irregular Verbs 


335 








PAST DEF. IMPF,. & FUT. PRES. SUBJUNCTIVE. IMPERATIVE. 
wanting j’absolvais | que j’absolve absous 
j’absoudrai absolvons 
absolvez 
j’acquis j'acquérais | que j’acquitre acquiers 
j’acquerrai | que nous acquérions| acquérons 
qu’ils acquiérent acquérez 
j’allai j allais que j’aille va 
jirai que nous allions allons 
qu’ils aillent allez 
j’assaillis | j’assaillais que j’assaille assaille 
j assaillirai assaillons 
| assaillez 
j’assis j’asseyais que j’asseye assieds 
j’assiérai que nous asseyions | asseyons 
(j’asseyerai) | qu’ils asseyent asseyez 
(j’assoirai) 
j’eus j’avais que j’aie aie 
jaurai que nous ayons ayons 
qu’ils aient ayez 
je battis je battais que je batte bats 
je battrai battons 
battez 
je bus je buvais que je boive bois 
je boirai que nous buvions buvons 
qu’ils boivent buvez 
je bouillis | je bouillais | que je bouille bous 
je bouillirai bouillons 
* bouillez 
wanting wanting que je close clos 
je clorai 
je conclus | je concluais | que je conclue conclus 
je conclurai concluons 
concluez | 























336 _ Irregular Verbs 
INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLES. PRESENT INDICATIVE. 
Conduire, conduisant | je conduis nous conduisons 
to conduct conduit, -e | tuconduis vous conduisez 
ilconduit ils conduisent 
Confire, confisant je confis nous confisons 
io preserve confit, -e tu confis vous confisez 
il confit ils confisent 
Connaitre, connaissant| je connais nousconnaissons 
to know connu, -e tu connais vous connaissez 
ilconnait ils connaissent 
- Conquérir, to conquer, is conjugated like acquérir 
Construire, io construct, | is conjugated like conduire 
Coudre, cousant je couds nous cousons 
to sew cousu, -e tu couds vous cousez 
il coud ils cousent 
Courir, | courant je cours nous courons 
to run couru tu cours vous courez | 
il court ils courent 
Couvrir, couvrant je couvre nous couvrons 
to cover couvert, -e | tu couvres vous couvrez 
il couvre ils couvrent 
Craindre, craignant j|jecrains nous craignons 
to fear craint, -e tucrains vous craignez 
il craint ils craignent 
Croire, croyant je crois nous croyons 
to believe cru, -€ tu crois vous croyez 
* il croit ils croient 
Croitre, croissant | je crois nous croissons 
to grow cra, crue tu crois vous croissez 
il croit és croissent 
Cueillir, cueillant je cueille nous cueillons 
to gather cueilli, -e tu cueilles vous cueillez 
il cueille ils cueillent 























Irregular Verbs 337 
PAST DEF. IMPF. & FUT. PRES. SUBJUNCTIVE, IMPERATIVE. 
je conduisis| je conduisais | que je conduise conduis 
je conduirai conduisons 
conduisez 
je confis je confisais | que je confise confis 
je confirai confisons 
confisez 
je connus | je connaissais} que je connaisse connais 
je connaitrai connaissons| 
connaissez 
je cousis | je cousais que je couse couds ~ 
je coudrai cousons 
cousez 
je courus | je courais que je coure cours 
je courrai courons 
courez 
je couvris | jecouvrais | que je couvre couvre 
je couvrirai couvrons 
couvrez 
je craignis | je craignais | que je craigne crains 
je craindrai craignons 
craignez 
je crus je croyais que je croie crois 
je croirai que nous croyions ~ | croyons 
croyez 
je cris je croissais | que je croisse crois 
je croitrai croissons 
croissez 
je cueillis | jecueillais | que je cueille cueille 
je cueillerai cueillons 
cueillez 

















22 

















338 Irregular Verbs 
INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLES. PRESENT INDICATIVE. 
Cuire, cuisant is conjugated like conduire 
to cook cuit, -e 
Déchoir, wanting je déchois nous déchoyons 
to fall, decline | déchu, -e tu déchois vous déchoyez 
il déchoit ils déchoient 
Devoir, devant je dois nous devons 
to owe, must | afi, due tu dois vous devez 
il doit ils doivent 
Dire, disant je dis — nous disons 
to say dit, -e tu dis vous dites 
il dit _ ils disent 
Dormir, dormant _ je dors nous dormons 
to sleep dormi tu dors vous dormez 
il dort ils dorment 
Echoir, échéant 
to fall due échu, -e il échoit 
Ecrire, écrivant j’écris nous écrivons 
to write écrit, -e tu écris vous écrivez 
il écrit ils écrivent 
Envoyer, envoyant j’envoie nous envoyons 
to send envoyé, -e tu envoies vous envoyez 
il envoie ils envoient 
Etre, étant je suis nous sommes 
to be été tu es vous étes 
il est ils sont 
Faillir, to fail, | wanting 
to just miss | failli il faut ils faillent 
Faire, faisant je fais nous faisons 
to do fait, -e tu fais vous faites 
il fait ils font 
Falloir, wanting 
io be necessary| fallu il faut 
Fleurir, florissant all regular except pres. part. 
to flourish fleuri and imperf. ind. 





Irregular Verbs 

















339 
PAST DEF. | IMPF. & FUT. | PRES. SUBJUNCTIVE. | IMPERATIVE. 
Or it may be used in the infinitive 
with faire as an auxiliary 
je déchus | je déchoyais | que je déchoie déchois 
je décherrai déchoyons 
déchoyez 
je dus je devais que je doive dois 
je devrai que nous devions devons 
devez 
je dis je disais que je dise dis 
je dirai disons 
: dites 
je dormis | je dormais que je dorme dors 
je dormirai dormons 
dormez 
il échut All other forms are wanting 
j écrivis j écrivais que j’écrive écris 
j écrirai écrivons 
écrivez 
jenvoyai | j’envoyais que j’envoie envoie 
j enverrai envoyons 
envoyez 
je fus ]’étais que je sois sois 
je serail que nous soyons soyons 
qu’ils soient soyez 
je faillis je faillais 
je faudrai 
je fis je faisais que je fasse fais 
je ferai faisons 
faites 
il fallut il fallait 
il faudra qu’il faille 
; je florissais 
fleurir, to blossom, is | regular throughout 








340 


Irregular Verbs 





INFINITIVE. 














PARTICIPLES. PRESENT INDICATIVE. 
Frire, wanting je fris 
to fry frit, -e tu fris 
il frit 
Fuir, fuyant i becomes y before a vowel 
to flee fui cxcept before -e, -es, -ent. 
Gésir, gisant nous gisons 
to lie vous gisez 
il git ils gisent 
Hair, haissant je hais nous haissons 
to hate hai tu hais vous haissez 
il hait ils haissent 
Inclure, incluant otherwise 
to include inclus, -e. like conclure 
Introduire, to introduce | is conjugated like conduire 
Joindre, io join is conjugated like craindre, 
Lire, lisant je lis nous lisons 
to read lu, -e tu lis vous lisez 
il lit ils lisent 
Luire, luisant is conjugated like conduire 
to shine lui except past participle 
Maudire, maudissant | je maudis nous maudissons 
to curse maudit, -e tu maudis vous maudissez 
il maudit ils maudissent 
Mentir, to lie is conjugated like dormir 
Mettre, mettant je mets nous mettons 
to put mis, -€ tu mets vous mettez 
il met ils mettent 
Moudre, moulant je mouds nous moulons 
to grind moulu, -e tu mouds vous moulez 
il moud ils moulent 
Mourir, mourant je meurs nous mourons 
to die mort, -e tu meurs vous mourez 
il meurt ils meurent 





























Irregular Verbs 341 
PAST DEF. | IMPF. & FUT. | PRES. SUBJUNCTIVE. | IMPERATIVE. 
All other forms are con| jugated with faire 
je frirai 
il gisait 
Rarely used except in epitaphs : 
ci-git, here lies ; ci-gisent, here lie. 
je hais 
All regular | except singular| of pres. ind. 
substituting | oi for ai 
je lus je lisais que je lise lis 
je lirai ‘ lisons 
lisez 
wanting 
je maudis | je maudissais| que je maudisse maudis 
je maudirai maudissons| 
maudissez 
je mis je mettais que je mette mets 
je mettrai mettons 
mettez 
je moulus | je moulais | que je moule mouds 
je moudrai moulons 
moulez 
je mourus | je mourais que je meure meurs 
je mourrai que nous mourions | mourons 
qu’ils meurent mourez 























842 Irregular Verbs 

INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLES. PRESENT INDICATIVE. 
Mouvoir, mouvant je meus nous mouvons 

to move mf, mue tu meus vous mouvezZ 

il meut ils meuvent 

Naitre, naissant conjugated like connaitre, 

to be born né, -e except past definite 
Nuire, nuisant like conduire, except past 

to injure nui participle 
Offrir, to offer conjugated like couvrir 
Ouir, used only in the infinitive and 

to hear oul, -e compound tenses 
Ouvrir, to open conjugated like couvrir 
Paitre, paissant conjugated like connaitre 

to graze no past part. 
Paraitre, to appear conjugated like connaitre 
Partir, partant conjugated like dormir 

to set out parti, -e 
Peindre, peignant conjugated like craindre, - 

to paint peint, -e substituting ei for ai 
Plaindre, plaignant conjugated like craindre 

to pily plaint, -e 
Plaire, plaisant je plais nous plaisons 

to please plu tu plais vous plaisez 

il plait ils plaisent 

Pleuvoir, pleuvant 

to rain plu il pleut 
Pourvoir, pourvoyant| je pourvois nous pourvoyons 

io provide pourvu, -e tu pourvois vous pourvoyez 

; il pourvoit ils pourvoient 

Pouvoir, pouvant je peux (puis) nous pouvons 

to be able pu tu peux vous pouvez 


il peut ils peuvent 





Irregular Verbs 


343 








PAST DEF. | IMPF. & FUT. | PRES. SUBJUNCTIVE, . | IMPERATIVE. 
je mus je mouvais que je meuve meus 
je mouvrai | que nous mouvions | mouvons 
qu’ils meuvent mouvez 
je naquis 
wanting 
je plus je plaisais que je plaise plais 
je plairai plaisons 
plaisez 
il pleuvait 
il plut il pleuvra qu'il pleuve 
je pourvus | je pourvoyais| que je pourvoie pourvois 
je pourvoirai pourvoyons 
pourvoyez 
je pus je pouvais que je puisse wanting 





je pourrai 




















344 Irregular Verbs 
INFINITIVE., PARTICIPLES. PRESENT INDICATIVE. 
Prendre, prenant je prends nous prenons 
to take pris, -e tu prends vous prenez 
ilprend ils prennent 
Se repentir, se repentant| conjugated like dormir 
io repent repenti, -e 
Résoudre, résolvant je résous 
to resolve résolu, -e conjugated like absoudre 
résous 
Rire, riant je ris nous rions 
to laugh ri tu ris vous riez 
il rit ils rient 
Saillir, 
to project, conjugated like assaillir 
to gush forth, | regular like finir 
Savoir, sachant je sais nous savons 
to know Su, -e tu sais vous savez 
il sait ils savent 
Sentir, sentant je sens 
to feel senti, -e conjugated like dormir 
Seoir, 
to suit il sied ils siéent 
Servir, servant je sers 
to serve servi, -e conjugated like dormir 
Sortir, sortant je sors 
to go out sorti, -e conjugated like dormir 
Souffrir, souffrant je souffre 
to suffer souffert, -e conjugated like couvrir 
Suffire, suffisant je suffis 
to suffice suffi conjugated like confire 
Suivre, suivant je suis nous suivons 
to follow suivi, -e tu suis vous suivez 
il suit ils suivent 














Irregular Verbs 


345 








PAST DEF. IMPF. & FUT. PRES. SUBJUNCTIVE. IMPERATIVE. 
je pris je prenais que je prenne prends 
je prendrai | que nous prenions | prenons 
qu’ils prennent prenez 
je résolus | je résolvais | que je résolve résous 
je résoudrai résolvons 
résolvez 
je ris je riais que je rie ris 
je rirai que nous rlions rions 
qu’ils rient riez 
je sus je savais que je sache sache 
je saurai sachons 
sachez 
je sentis 
No past def. | il seyait qu il siée 
il siéra 
je servis 
je sortis 
je souffris 
je suffis 
je suivis je suivais que je suive suis 
je suivrai suivons 





| 











suivez 























346 Irregular Verbs 
nt INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLES. PRESENT INDICATIVE, 
Se taire, se taisant je me tais - 
to be silent tu, -e tute tais rest like plaire 
il se tait 
Tenir, tenant je tiens nous tenons 
to hold tenu, -e tu tiens vous tenez 
il tient ils tiennent 
Traire, trayant je trais nous trayons 
to milk trait, -e tu trais vous trayez 
il trait ils traient 
Tressaillir, tressaillant | je tressaille 
to start, tremble| tressailli, -e conjugated like assaillir 
Vaincre, vainquant je vaincs nous vainquons 
to overcome vaincu, -e tu vaincs vous vainquez 
il vaine ils vainquent 
Valoir, valant je vaux nous valons 
to be worth valu, -e tu vaux vous valez 
il vaut ils valent 
Venir, venant je viens 
to come venu, -e conjugated like tenir 
Vétir, vétant je véts nous vétons 
to clothe vétu, -e tu véts vous vétez 
il vét ils vétent 
Vivre, vivant je vis nous vivons 
to live vécu tu vis vous vivez 
il vit ils vivent 
Voir, voyant je vois nous voyons 
to see vu, -e tu vois vous voyez 
il voit ils voient 
Vouloir, voulant je veux nous voulons 
to be willing | voulu, -e tu veux vous voulez 
il veut ils veulent 





Irregular Verbs 


547 








PAST DEF. IMPF. & FUT. PRES. SUBJUNCTIVE, IMPERATIVE, 
je me tus 
je tins je tenais que je tienne tiens 
nous tinmes | je tiendrai que nous tenions tenons 
ils tinrent que vous teniez tenez 
No past def. | je trayais’ que je traie trais 
je trairai que nous trayions | trayons 
que vous trayiez trayez 
je tressaillis 
je vainquis | je vainquais | que je vainque vaines 
. je vaincrai vainquons 
c becomes qu| before every | vowel but u vainquez 
je valus je valais que je vaille vaux 
je vaudrai que nous valions valons 
que vous valiez valez 
je vins 
je vétis je vétais que je véte véts 
je vétirai vétons 
vétez 
je vécus je vivais que je vive vis 
je vivrai vivons 
vivez 
je vis je voyais que je voie vois 
je verrai que nous voyions voyons 
qu’ils voient voyez 
je voulus_ | je voulais que je veuille veuille 
je voudrai que nous voulions | veuillons 
qu’ils veuillent veuillez 

















348 


Appendix 


XXV. List of verbs governing the infinitive without a 


accourir, to hasten. 
affirmer, to affirm. 
aimer mieux, to prefer. 
aller,to go, tobeabout to. 
apercevoir, to perceive. 
assurer, to assert. | 
avoir beau, to be in 
vain. 
avouer, to confess. 
compter, to expect. 
concevoir, to conceive, 
to represent to one’s 
self. 
confesser, to confess. 
courir, fo run. 
croire, to believe. 
daigner, to deign. 
déclarer, to declare. 
déposer, to depose (as 
a witness). 
désirer, to desire. 


preposition. 


devoir, to be to, to have 
to, must. 

écouter, to listen. 

entendre, to hear. 

envoyer, /o send, 

espérer, to hope. 

faillir, to come near 
(doing). 

faire, to cause, to get, 
to have. 

falloir, to be necessary. 

s’imaginer, to fancy. 

laisser, to allow, to 
let. 

mener, to take. 

nier, to deny. 

observer, to observe. 

oser, to dare. 

ouir, to hear. 

paraitre, to appear. 


* 





penser, to be near to. 


‘ 


pouvoir, to be able, 
préférer, to prefer. 
prétendre, to pretend, 
rapporter, to relate. 
reconnaitre, to 
knowledge. 
regarder, to look at. 
retourner, to go back. 
revenir, to come back. 
savoir, to know how (to 
be able). 
sembler, to seem. 
sentir, to feel. 
souhaiter, to wish. 
soutenir, to maintain. 
témoigner, to testify. 
valoir mieux, to be bet- 
ler, 
venir, to come. 
voir, ¢o see. 


vouloir, to be willing. 


ac- 





XXVI. List of verbs requiring de before an infinitive. 


s’abstenir, to abstain. 
accorder, to permit. 
achever, to finish. 
affecter, to affect. 
ambitionner, to be am- 
bitious to. 
s’apercevoir, to per- 
ceive. 
appréhender, to appre- 
hend, to fear. 
avertir, to warn. 
s’aviser,to bethink one’s 
self, to think (of). 





blamer, to blame for. 

briiler, to be impatient. 

cesser, to cease. 

charger, to charge. 

se charger, to under- 
take. 

choisir, to choose. 


se contenter, to be sat- 
isfied. 4 
craindre, to fear. 
erier, fo cry out. 
dédaigner, to 
dain. 
défendre, to forbid. 


dis 


commander, to com-|se dépécher, to hasten. 


mand. 
conjurer, to entreat. 
conseiller, to advise. 
consoler, to console 


for. 


détester, to detest. 

dire, éo tell, to bid. 

discontinuer, to dis- 
continue. 

écrire, to write. 





List of Verbs requiriny De before an Infinitive 349 


s’efforcer, to exert one’s 
self, to try. 

éluder, to elude. 

empécher, to prevent. 

s’ennuyer, to be bored 
with. 

s’enorgueillir, to be 
proud. 

entreprendre, to un 
dertake. 

essayer, lo try. 

s’étonner, to wonder at. 


éviter, to shun, to 
avoid. 
s’excuser, to excuse 


one’s self from. 
faire bien, to do well. 
feindre, to pretend. 
féliciter, to congratu- 
late. 
finir, to finish. 
se flatter, to flatter 
one’s self, to hope. 
frémir, to shudder. 
gager, to wager. 
se garder, to take care 
not to. 
gémir, to groan. 
géner, to trouble. 
gronder, to scold for. 
se hater, to make haste. 
s’imaginer, to take into 
one’s head. 
s’indigner, to be indig- 
nant. 


inspirer, ¢o inspire. 

interdire, to forbid. 

jouir, to enjoy. 

jurer, to swear. 

louer, to praise for. 

mander, to bid. 

manquer, to fail to. 

méditer, to contem- 

> plate. 

se méler, to interfere, 
to meddle. 

menacer, to threaten. 

mériter, to deserve. 

mourir, to die ; to long. 

négliger, to neglect. 

obliger, to oblige, to do 
a service. 

obtenir, to obtain. 

\s’occuper, to be intent 
on. 

offrir, to offer. 

omettre, to omit. 

oublier, to forget. 

ordonner, to prescribe. 

pardonner, to forgive. 

parier, to bet. 

parler, to speak. 

se passer, to do without. 

permettre, to permit. 

persuader, to persuade. 

se piquer, to pride one’s 
self on. 

plaindre, to pity. 

ise plaindre, to com- 

plain. 





|se presser, to hasten. 
prier, to request, to beg. 
projeter, to intend. 
promettre, to promise. 
proposer, to propose. 
Se proposer, fo purpose, 
protester, to protest. 
recommander, to rec- 
ommend. 
redouter, to fear. 
refuser, to refuse. 
regretter, to regret. 
se réjouir, to rejoice. 
remercier, to thank. 
se repentir, to repent. 
reprocher, to reproach. 
se réserver, to reserve 
to one’s self a right, 
résoudre, to resolve. 
rire, to laugh. 
risquer, to risk. 
rougir, to blush. 
sommer, to summon. 
se soucier, to mind, to 
care. 
soup¢onner, to suspect, 
se souvenir, to remem- 
ber. 
suggérer, to suggest. 
tacher, to try. 
tenter, to attempt. 
trembler, to fear. 
se vanter, to boast. 
venir, to have just. 











300 


Appendix 


XXVII. List of verbs requiring 2 before an infinitive. 


s’abaisser, to stoop to. 
aboutir, to end in. 
s’accorder, to agree in. 
s’accoutumer, to ac- 
custom one’s self. 
s’acharner, to be eager, 
to be determined. 
admettre, to admit. | 
s’aguelrir, to inure. 
aider, to help. 
aimer, to like. 
s’amuser, to 
one’s self. 
appeler, to call. 
s’appliquer, to apply. 
apprendre, to learn, to 
teach. 
s’appréter, to prepare 
one’s self. 
aspirer, to aspire. 
assigner, to summon. 
assujettir, to compel. 
s’assujettir, to submit. 
s’attacher, to be deter- 
mined. 
s’attendre, to expect. 
autoriser, to authorize. 
s’avilir, to stoop. 
avoir, to have. 
balancer, to hesitate. 
se borner, to confine 
one’s self. | 
chercher, to seek, to 
iry. 
commencer, to begin. 
Se complaire, to de- 
light in. 


amuse 


condamner, to con- 
demn. 
condescendre, to con- 
descend. 
consentir, to consent. 
consister, fo consist in. 
conspirer, to conspire. 
se consumer, lo ruin 
one’s health. 
contribuer, to contrib- 
ule. 
convier, fo invite. 
coiiter, to cost, 
décider, to persuade. 
se décider, to decide. 
descendre, to stoop. 
destiner, to destine, to 
design. 
déterminer, to induce. 
se déterminer, to deter- 
mine, to resolve. 
dévouer, to devote. 
disposer, fo prepare, to 
Sit. 
se disposer, to prepare. 
dresser, to train. 
employer, fo employ, 
to occupy. 
encourager, fo encour- 


age. 
engager, to induce. 
sengager, to bind 
one’s self, 
s’enhardir, to make 


bold, to venture. 
enseigner, to teach. 
s’entendre, to know 


s’étudier, to apply one’s 
self. 

exceller, to excel. 

exciter, do urge. 


one’s self. 

exhorter, to exhort. 

s’exposer, (0 expose 
one’s self. 

se fatiguer, to fatigue 
one’s self. 


igagner, to gain by. 


habituer, to accustom. 
se hasarder, éo venture. 
hésiter, to hesitate. 
instruire, to instruct. 
inviter, to invite, to ask. 
se mettre, to set about, 
to begin. 

s’obstiner, fo persist in 
occuper, to occupy, to 


employ. 

s’occuper, to be en- 
gaged. 

s’offrir, to offer, to 
stand forth. 


s’opiniatrer, to be obsti- 
nate. 

parvenir, to succeed in. 

passer, to spend in, 

pencher, to lean. 

penser, to think of. 

persévérer, to perse 
vere. 

persister, to persist. 

se plaire, to delight. 

plier, to bend. 








concourir, to concur. 


how. 


porter, to induce. 


s’exercer, to exercise 


eas, 2 = 


List of Verbs requiring A before an Infinitive 351 


prendre plaisir, /o take|renoncer, to renounce. 


pleasure in, 
préparer, to prepare. 
se préparer, to prepare 
one’s self, 

. prétendre, to aspire. 
provoquer, to provoke. 
réduire, to reduce. 
se refuser, to refuse 

one’s. self, not to 


se résigner, fo resign, 
to submit one’s self. 
se résoudre, to re- 
solve. 
réussir, to succeed. 
servir, to serve. 
songer, to think of. 
suffire, to be sufficient. 
tarder, to delay, to be 





travailler, to work, to 
study, to endeavor. 

se tuer, fo kill one’s 
self, to take much 
trouble. 

venir, to chance, to 
happen. 

viser, to aim, to aspire. 

vouer, to devote. 

se vouer, to devote, to 





admit. long. apply one’s self. 


XXVIII. Adjectives which change their signification ac- 
cording as they are placed before or after the noun. 


Bon. Un homme bon, a good man; un bon homme, a simple 
man; un bon mot, a pun; une bonne parole, a good word. 
Brave. Un homme brave, a brave man; un brave homme, a 
worthy man. 

Certain. Une chose certaine, a positive thing; une certaine chose, 
a particular thing. 

Cher. Mon cher ami, my dear friend; une maison chére, a costly 
house. 

Commun. Une voix commune, a common voice; d’une commune 
Voix, unanimously. 

Dernier. Le mois dernier, last month; le dernier mois, the last 
month (of the year, of my stay in London, etc.). 
Différent; divers. Les différentes (diverses) choses, various 
things; les choses différentes (diverses), different things. 
Faux. Une fausse clef, a skeleton key; une clef fausse, a wrong 
key; une fausse porte, a secret door; une porte fausse, a false 
door. 

Furieux. Un furieux menteur, a terrible liar ; un homme furieux, 
an enraged man. 

Galant. Un galant homme, a well-bred man; un homme galant, 
a man polite to ladies. 


352 Appendix 


Gentil. Un gentilhomme, a nobleman; un homme gentil, a de. 
lightful, polite man. 


Grand. Un grand homme, a great man; un homme grand, @ tall 
man. But if, after grand homme, some other external quali- 
ties are added, it means fall: C’est un grand homme blond, bien 
fait. In like manner if, after un homme grand, gome moral * 
qualification is added, grand does not refer to the size: Un 
homme grand dans ses desseins. Le grand air, noble manners; 
Vair grand, a noble look. 


Haut. Le haut ton, an arrogant manner ; le ton haut, a loud voice. 


Honnéte. Un honnéte homme, an honest man; un homme hon- 
néte, a polite man. 


-Mauvais. Le mauvais air, vulgar appearance; l’air mauyais, ill- 
natured look. 


Méchant. Une méchante épigramme, @ poor epigram; une épi- 
gramme méchante, a wicked epiyram. 


Méme. La méme femme, the same woman; les rues mémes, 
even the streets, or the very streets. 


Mortel. Un mortel ennemi, @ deadly enemy; Vhomme mortel, 
mortal man. ; 


Neuf. Un habit neuf, a new-made coat; un habit nouveau, a coat 
of new fashion ; un nouvel habit, another coat. 


Nouveau. Le nouveau vin, wine different from that which was 
drunk before, newly broached wine; du vin nouveau, wine newly 
made. 


Pauvre. When placed before the noun, it has the various signi- 
fications which the word poor has in English: assister un 
pauovre vieilard, une pauvre veuve, un pauvre homme, means to 
assist one in poverty; le pauvre enfant, les pauvres innocents, 
le pauvre animal, are termsof endearment; un pauvre orateur, 
de pauvre vin, are terms of contempt. When placed after the 
noun it always signifies poverty: un homme pauvre, a needy 
man. | 


Petit. Un petit homme, a little man; un homme petit, a mean 
man. Observe that petit has its natural meaning when placed 
before the noun, its figurative, when placed after. It is the 
reverse with grand. 


The Adverb 353 


Plaisant. Un plaisant conte, an unlikely, absurd tale; un conte 
plaisant, an amusing story. Un plaisant homme, a ridiculous 
man; un homme plaisant, a humorous man. 


Propre. Mon propre habit, »% own coat; un habit propre, a 
clean coat. 

Seul. Unseul homme, a single man; un homme seul, a man alone. 

Triste. Un triste homme, a poor kind of a man; un homme 
triste, a sorrowful man. 


Vilain. Un vilain homme, a disagreeable man; un homme cork 
vilain, an ugly man. 


XXIX. THE ADVERB. 
Formation of adverbs from adjectives. 


Most adjectives may be made into adverbs by adding 
-ment : 

(1) To the masculine, if it ends with a vowel: poli, 
poliment; sage, sagement. 

Exceptions. —Impuni makes impunément; prodigue, prodigale- 


ment; traitre, traitreusement. Aveugle, conforme, énorme, incom- 
mode, opiniatre, and uniforme change e mute into 6: aveuglément, etc. 


(2) To the feminine, if the masculine ends with a 
consonant: 


Pur, purement; franc, franchement; sec, séchement; complet, 
complétement ; heureux, heureusement; actif, activement. 


Exceptions. — Gentil makes gentiment. Commun, confus, diffus, 
exprés, importun, obscur, précis, profond, end in -ément instead of 
-ement: communément, confusément, etc. 

The adjectives beau, nouveau, fou, mou, being derived from bel, 
nouvel, fol, mol, are considered as ending with a consonant, and make 
bellement, nouvellement, follement, mollement. 


(3) If the masculine ends in -ant or -ent, nt is changed 
into -mment, and the last two syllables are pronounced 
. amant: méchant, méchamment; prudent, prudemment. 


Exceptions. — The three adjectives lent, présent, véhément, make 


lentement, présentement, véhémentement. 
23 


EXTRACTS FROM AN ORDER REGARDING 
THE CHANGES IN 


FRENCH SYNTAX AND ORTHOGRAPHY 


Adopted by the Minister of Public Instruction, February, 1901. 


Le Ministre de ]’Instruction publique et des Beaux-Arts, 

Vu l’article 5 de la loi du 27 février, 1880; 

Vu V’arrété du 31 juillet, 1900; 

Le Conseil supérieur de l’Instruction publique entendu, 

Arréte: 

ARTICLE 1*t. — Dans les examens ou concours dépendant du 
Ministére de l’Instruction publique, qui comportent des épreuves 
spéciales d’orthographe, il ne sera pas compté de fautes aux candi- 
dats pour avoir usé des tolérances indiquées dans la liste annexée 
au présent arrété. 

La méme disposition est applicable aul jugement des diverses 
compositions rédigées en langue francaise, dans les examens ou 
concours dépendant du Ministére de l’Instruction publique qui 
ne comportent pas une épreuve spéciale d’orthographe. 


Pluriel des noms propres. — La plus grande obscurité 
régnant dans les régles et les exceptions enseignées dans 
les grammaires, on tolérera dans tous les cas que les noms 
propres, précédés de l’article pluriel, prennent la marque 
du pluriel. Ex.: les Corneilles comme les Gracques, — 
des Virgiles (exemplaires) comme des Virgiles (éditions). 

Il en sera de méme pour les noms propres de personnes 
désignant les ceuvres de ces personnes. Ex.: des Meis- 
sonvers, 


Pluriel des noms empruntés a d’autres langues. — 
Lorsque ces mots sont tout 4 fait entrés dans la langue 
frangaise, on tolérera que le pluriel soit formé suivant la. 
régle générale. Ex.: des eaéats comme des déficits. 

354 


Modifications in Syntax 358 


Noms composés. — Les mémes noms composés se ren- 
contrent aujourd’hui tantdt avec le trait d’union, tantdt 
sans trait d’union. I1 est inutile de fatiguer les enfants 
4, apprendre des contradictions que rien ne _ justifie. 
L’absence de trait d’union dans l’expression pomme de 
terre n’empéche pas cette expression de former un vérita- 
ble mot composé aussi bien que chef-d’@uvre, par exemple. 
Ces mots pourront toujours s’écrire sans trait d’union. 

Article partitif.— On tolérera du, de la, des, au lieu de 
de, partitif, devant un substantif précédé d’un adjectif. 
Ex.: de ou du bon pain, de bonne viande ou de la bonne 
viande, de ou des bons fruits. 


Adjectif construit avec plusieurs substantifs. — Lors- 
qu’un adjectif qualificatif suit plusieurs substantifs de 
genres différents, on tolérera toujours que l’adjectif soit 
construit au masculin pluriel, quel que soit le genre du 
substantif le plus voisin. Ex.: appartements et chambres 
meublés. On tolérera aussi l’accord avec le substantif le 
plus rapproché. Ex.: un courage et une fot nouvelle. 


Nu, demi, feu.— On tolérera l’accord de ces adjectifs 
avec le substantif qu’ils précédent. Ex.: nw ou nus pieds, 
une demi ou demie heure (sans trait d’union entre les 
mots), few ou feue la reine. 


Adjectifs numéraux.—Vingt, cent. La prononciation 
justifie dans certains cas la régle actuelle, qui donne un 
pluriel 4 ces deux mots quand ils sont multipliés par un 
autre nombre. On tolérera le pluriel de vingt et de cent, 
méme lorsque ces mots sont suivis d’un autre adjectif 
numéral. Ex.: quatrevingt ou quatrevingts dix hommes ; 
quatre cent ou quatre cents trente hommes. 

Le trait d’union ne sera pas exigé entre le mot désig- 
. nant les unités et le mot désignant les dizaines. Ex.: 
dix sept. 


7 


306 Modifications in Syntax 


Dans la désignation du millésime, on tolérera mille au 
lieu de mil, comme dans l’expression d’un nombre. Ex.: 
Lan mil huit cent quatre vingt dix ou lan mille huit cents 
quatre vingts dix. 


Tout.— On tolérera l’accord du mot tout aussi bien de- 
vant les adjectifs féminins commengant par une voyelle 
ou par une /# muette que devant les adjectifs féminins 
commengant par une cdnsonne ou par une A aspirée. Ex.: 
des personnes tout heureuses ou toutes heureuses ; Passem- 
blée tout entiére ou toute entiére. 


Trait d’ union. — On tolérera l’absence de trait d’union 
entre le verbe et le pronom sujet placé aprés le verbe. 
Ex.: est a? 


Accord du verbe quand le sujet est un mot collectif. — 
Toutes les fois que le collectif est accompagné d’un com- 
plément au pluriel, on tolérera l'accord du verbe avec le 
complément. Ex.: un peu de connaissances suffit ou suf- 
Jisent. 


C’est, ce sont. — Comme il régne une grande diversité 
d’usage relativement 4 Vemploi régulier de c’est et de ce 
sont, et que les meilleurs auteurs ont employé ¢es¢ pour 
annoncer un substantif au pluriel ou un pronom de la 
troisiéme personne au pluriel, on tolérera dans tous les 
cas ’emploi de c’es¢ au lieu de ce sont. Ex.: cest ou ce 
sont des montagnes et des précipices. 


Participe passé.—TI] n’y a rien 4 changer & la régle 
d’apras laquelle le participe passé construit comme épi- 
théte doit s’accorder avec le mot qualifié, et construit 
comme attribut avec le verbe étre ou un verbe intransitif 
doit s’accorder avec le sujet. Ex.: des fruits gdtés ; ils 
sont tombés ; elles sont tombées. 

Pour le participe passé construit avec l’auxiliaire avoir, 
lorsque le participe passé est suivi soit d’un infinitif, soit 


Modifications in Syntax 357 


d’un participe présent ou passé, on tolérera qu’il reste 
invariable, quels que soient le genre et le nombre des 
compléments qui précédent. Ex.: les fruits que je me 
suis laissé ou laissés prendre ; —les sauvages que Von a 
trouvé ou trouvés errant dans les bois. Dans le cas ob 
le participe passé est précédé d’une expression collective, 
on pourra & volonté le faire accorder avec le collectif ou 
avee son complément. Ex.: la foule Phommes que 7’ ai 
vue OU vus. 


Ne dans les propositions subordonnées. — L’emploi de 
cette négation dans un trés grand nombre de propositions 
subordonnées donne lieu 4 des régles compliquées, diffi- 
ciles, abusives, souvent en contradiction avec l’usage des 
écrivains les plus classiques. ' 

Sans faire de régles différentes suivant que les proposi- 
tions dont elles dépendent sont affirmatives ou négatives 
ou interrogatives, on tolérera la suppression de la néga- 
tion ne dans les propositions subordonnées dépendant de 
verbes ou de locutions signifiant: 

Empécher, défendre, éviter que, etc, Ex.: défendre 
qguon vienne ou qu’on ne vienne ; 

Craindre, désespérer, avoir peur, de peur gue, etc. Ex.: 
de peur qui aille ou qwil n’aille ; 

Douter, contester, nier que, etc. Ex.: je ne doute pas 
que la chose soit vraie ou ne soit vraie. 

On tolérera de méme la suppression de cette négation 
apres les comparatifs et les mots indiquant une comparai- 
son: autre, autrement que, etc. Ex.: Vannée a été meil- 
leure qu’on Vespérait ou qu'on ne Vespérait ; les résultats 
sont autres qu’on le croyait ou qu’on ne le croyait. 

De méme, aprés les locutions @ moins que, avant que. 
Ex.: & moins qu’on accorde le pardon ou quwon n’accorde 
le pardon. 





VOCABULARY 


——_+o0o—_—_ 
a Frangais-Anglais ac 
a, has. il y a, there is, there [{accés, m. fit, attack. 

are; ago. accident, m. accident. 


a, to, at, in. 

abandonner, to abandon. 
abeille, /. bee. 

abhorré de, abhorred by. 
abondant, -e, abundant. 
d’abord, at first. 

aboyer, to bark. 

abreuver, to water, to soak. 
absent, -e, absent. 


absolument, entirely, abso- 
lutely. 

s’abstenir (de), to abstain 
(from). 


abstinence, /. abstinence. 
abuser, to abuse, to deceive. 
accepté, -e, accepted. 
accepter, to accept. 





accompagner, to accompany. 

accord, m. agreement. 

accoutumer, to accustom. 

accueil, m. reception, wel- 
come. 

accueillir, to receive, to wel- 
come. 

accuser, to accuse. 

acheté, -e, bought. 

acheter (4), to buy from. 

achever, to finish. 

acier, m. steel. 

acquérir, to acquire. 

s’acquitter, to perform. 

acte, m. act. 

actif, active, active. 

action, f. engagement, action. 





a English-French 


a, an, un, une, 

to be able, pouvoir. 

about, environ, pres. de. 
around, autour de. 

absent, absent, -e. 

absolutely, absolument. 

to abstain, s’abstenir (de). 

absurd, absurde. 

abundant, abondant, -e. 





ac 


to accept, accepter. 

to accompany, accompagner. 
according to, selon. 

on account of, a cause de. 

to accuse, accuser. 

to accustom, habituer. 

to act, agir. 

active, actif, active. 

acute, aigu, -é. 


359 


ad 


adjectif, m. adjective. 
admettre, to admit. 
admirer, to admire. 
adresse, /. address. 
adresser, to send to. 
resser (4), to address. 
adverbe, m. adverb. 
adversité, /. adversity. 
affaire, f. affair, matter. 
affliger, to afflict, to distress. 
affreux, -se, frightful. 
afin de, in order to (with infin.). 
afin que, so that (with subjunc.). 
Afrique, f. Africa. 
moyen Age, Mid- 


s’ad- 


agé, -e, old, aged. 

agi, behaved. 

agir, to act, to behave. 
agneau, m. lamb. 

agréable, pleasant, agreeable. 
aide, f. help. 


Frangais-Anglais 





al 


aieul, m. grandfather; aieuls, 
-m, grandfathers; aieux, m. 
ancestors. 

aigu, aigué, sharp, acute. 

aiguille, f. needle. 

ailleurs, elsewhere. d’ailleurs, 
besides. 

aimable, amiable, kind. 

aimer, to like, to love. 
mieux, to prefer. 

ainé, -e, elder, oldest. 

ainsi, thus, so. 

aise, bien aise, glad. 

allé, -e, gone. 

allécher, to allure. 

Allemagne, /. Germany. 

allemand, -e, German. 

aller, to go. 

allons! come! 

allumer, to light, to kindle. 

allumette, f. match. 

almanach, m. almanac. 


aimer 





ad 


address, adresse, /. 
to address, adresser, s’adres- 
ser a. | 
admire, admirer. to — 
one’s self or each other, 
s’admirer. 
to admit, admettre. 
adverb, adverbe, m. 
to advise, conseiller. 
affair, affaire, f. 
to affirm, affirmer. 
to be afraid, avoir peur, crain- 
dre. 
Africa, |’ Afrique, /. 
after, aprés. 
afternoon, aprés-midi, f. 


to 


Linglish-French 





afterwards, ensuite. 

again, encore, de nouveau. 

against, contre. 

age, Age, m. 

aged, Agé, -e. 

agitated, ému, -e. 

ago, il y a. 

agreeable, aimable, agréable. 

ale, biére, /. 

all, tout, -e, tous, toutes. not 
at all, pas du tout, point. 

to allow, permettre. 

almost, presque. 

alone, seul, -e. 

already, déja. 

also, aussi. 


360 


al 


alors, then, at that time. 

les Alpes, f. the Alps. 

ambition, /. ambition. 

ame, /. soul, spirit. 

amener, to bring (a person), 

américain, -e, American. 

Amérique, /. America. 

ami, m., amie, /. friend. 

amitié, /. friendship. 

amusant, -e, amusing. 

amuser, to amuse. s’amuser, 
to enjoy one’s self. 

amusement, m. fun. 

an, m. year. 

ananas, m. pineapple. 

ancien, ancienne, old, ancient. 

anglais, -e, English. 

Angleterre, /. England. 

animal, m. animal. 

animé, -e, animated. 

année, f. year. lannée der- 
niére, /. last year. 

annoncer, to announce. 


Frangais- Anglais 





ap 


aoatt, m. August. 

apercevoir, to perceive. 

apoplexie, /. apoplexy. 

appareil, m. form, display. 

appartement, m. rooms. 

appartenir, to belong. 

appeler, to call, to summon, 
s’appeler, to call one’s self, 
to be called. 

appétit, m. appetite. 

appliqué, -e, diligent. - 

s’appliquer, to apply one’s self. 

apporté, -e, brought. 

apporter, to bring. 

apportez-moi, bring me. 

apprendre, to learn, to inform. 

appris, -e, learnt. 

approbation, /. approbation. 

s’approcher de, to go up to, 
to come near. 

approuver, to approve. 

appui, m. support. 

appuver, to support, to rest on. 





al 


although, quoique, bien que. 
always, toujours. 

ambition, ambition, /. 
America, |’ Amérique, /. 
American, américain, -e, 
amiable, aimable. 

among, parmi. 

to amuse, amuser. 
amusing, amusant, -e, 

an, un, une. 

ancestor, aieul, plur. aieux. 
ancient, ancien, -ne, 

and, et. 

anecdote, anecdote, /. 
anger, colére, /. 


English-French 





ap 


angry, faché, rageur, -euse. 
to get angry, se facher. 

animal, animal, m.; béte, /. 

to announce, annoncer. 

answer, réponse, /. 

to answer, répondre (a). 

any, du, de la, de I’, des; 
en. 

any one, quelqu’un, 

anything, quelque chose. 

anywhere, quelque part. 

apiece, la piéce. . 

to appear, sembler, paraftre, 

appetite, appétit, m. 

apple, pomme, f. 


361 


ap 


aprés, after, afterwards (time 
only). aprés-demain, the 
day after to-morrow. aprés- 
midi, f. afternoon. 

arbre, m. tree. 

architecte, m. architect. 

ardemment, eagerly. 

ardoise, /. slate. 

argent, m. money, silver. 

argument, m. argument, 

Aristote, m. Aristotle. 

arracher, to tear out, to pullup. 

arréter, to stop. 

arrivé, -e, arrived. 

arrivée, f. arrival. 

arriver, to arrive, to happen. 

arroser, to water. 

article, m. article. — défini, 
definite. article; — indéfini, 
indefinite article. 


Francais-Anglais 





at 
artillerie, f. artillery. 
Asie, f. Asia. 
assemblée, f. assembly, meet- 
ing. 
asseoir, to seat. s’asseoir, to 
sit down. 


assez, enough; rather, some- 
what. 

assiette, f. plate. 

assigner, to assign. 

assis -e, seated, sitting. 

assister a, to be present at. . 

assurer, to affirm, to maintain. 

atelier, m. workshop, studio, 

attaquer, to attack. 

attendre, to wait (for); ex- 
pect. se faire—, to be long 
in coming, 

attentif, attentive, attentive. 

attention, /. attention, notice, 





ap 


to approve, approuver, trouver 
bon. 

April, avril, m. 

architect, architecte, m. 

architecture, architecture, /. 

arm, bras, ™. 

arm-chair, fauteuil, m. 

army, armée, /. 

arrival, arrivée, f. 

to arrive, arriver. 

arrived, arrivé, -e, 

article, article, m. 

artist, artiste, m. or f. 

as, comme, aS... as, aussi 
. - . que. as for, quant 4. 
as many, as much, autant. 
as. soon as, dés que, aussitét 
que. as usual, comme & 

- Pordinaire. 


English-French - 





at 
to be 


ashamed, honteux, -se, 
—, avoir honte., 

Asia, |’ Asie, /. 

to ask, to ask for, demander. 


to — back, redemander, 
to — pardon, $demander 
pardon Aa. 


to assassinate, assassiner. 

to assure, assurer. 

astonishing, étonnant, -e. 

at, 4. at last, enfin. at once, 
tout de suite. at present, a 
présent. 

to be attached to, se tenir a. 

to attack, attaquer. 

to attend to, se méler de; soi- 
gener. f 

attention, attention, f.; (good 
care), bons soins, m, 


362 


at 


attentivement, attentively. 

attirer, to attract; to drag. 

attraper, tor catch. 

au, to the, at the. 
at the least. 

aucun, -e, any. 

audace, /f. audacity. 

au-devant, before. 

aujourd’hui, to-day. 

auparavant (adv.), before. 

auquel, a laquelle, auxquels, 
auxquelles, to which, to 
whom. 

aussi, also, as; at beginning of 
a clause, therefore, and so. 

aussité6t, immediately, at once. 

aussit6t que, as soon as. 

autant, as much, as many. 

auteur, m. author. 

automne, m. autumn. 

autre, other. 

autrefois, formerly. 

autrement, otherwise, 

Autriche, f. Austria. 

autrichien, m. -enne, f. an 
Austrian. 

aux, to the, at the. 

il y avait, there was, there were. 


au moins, 


Frangais-Anglais 





avaler, to swallow. 

plus avancé, better off. 

avancement, m. promotion. 

avancer, to advance. 

avant (prep. of time), before. 
avant-hier, the day before 
yesterday. 

avec, with. 

avenue, /. avenue. 

avertir, to warn, to notify. 

aveugle, blind. 

avocat, m. lawyer. 

avoir, to have. 

avouer, to confess, to admit. 

avril, m. April. 

ayant, having. 


bagage, m. luggage. 
bague, /. ring. 

baisser, to stoop, to lower. 
bal, m. ball, dance, party. 
balai, m. broom. 

balayer, to sweep. 
balbutier, to stammer. 
balle, f. ball, bullet. 
balustrade, /. railing. 
banane, /. banana. 





at 


attentive, attentif, -ve. 
audacity, audace, /. 
August, aotit, m. 

aunt, tante, /. 

Austria, |’ Autriche, f. 
Austrian, autrichien, -ne. 
author, écrivain, auteur, m. 
autumn, automne, m. 
avenue, avenue, f/f. 

to avoid, éviter. 


English-French 





ba 


bad, mauvais, -e; vilain, -e. 
bad boy, mauvais sujet, m. 


badly, mal. 

bag, sac, m. travelling —, 
sac de nuit. 

baggage, bagage, m. 

baker, boulanger, m. 

ball, balle, f. (plaything); bal, 


m. (dancing party). 
banana, banane, /f. 


363 3 


ba 

banc, m. bench. 

bas, basse, low. au bas, at 
the foot. . 

bataille, /. battle. 

bataillon, m. battalion. 

bateau, m. boat. bateau a 
vapeur, steamer. 

batir, to build. 

baton, m. stick. 

batterie, /. battery. 

battre, to beat, to flap. se 
battre, to fight. 

battu, -e, beaten. 


Frangais-Anglais 





be 


beau, bel, belle, beautiful, fine, 
handsome. 

beaucoup, much, many, a great 
deal, plenty. 

beau-frére, m. brother-in-law. 

bec, m. beak. 

Belgique, *. Beigium. 

belle-sceur, f. sister-in-law. 

benin, -igne, benign, kindly. 

besogne, /. task, job. 

besoin (avoir), to be in need, 
to need. 

béte, f. beast, animal. 





ba 


barber, coiffeur, m. 

bargain, marché, m. 

to bargain for, marchander. 

to bark, aboyer. 

barn, grange, /. 

basket, panier, m.; corbeille, /. 
battle, bataille, f. 


to be, étre. (health), se porter, 
aller. — well, se porter 
bien. — ill, se porter mal. 


afraid, 
ashamed, 


avoir peur. — 

avoir honte. 

cold, avoir froid. 
hungry, avoir faim. — off, 
s’en aller. — right, avoir 
raison. — sleepy, avoir som- 
meil. — thirsty, avoir soif. 
— in want, avoir besoin. 
— warm, avoir chaud. — 
wrong, avoir tort. 

bear, ours, m. 

to bear, porter. 

beast, béte, /. 

to beat, battre. 

beautiful, beau, belle. 


Linglish-French 





be 


because, parce que. because 
of, A cause de. 

to become, devenir. 

become (part.), devenu, -e. 

bed, lit. m. to go to —, se 
coucher. 

bee, abeille, /. 

been, été. 

beer, biére, /. 

before (prep. of time), avant; 
(prep. of place), devant, en 
présence de; (adv. of time), 
auparavant; (conj.), avant 
que; (followed by an infin.), 
avant de, avant que de. 

to begin, commencer, se mettre 


beginning, commencement, m. 
to behave, agir. 

behind (prep. of piace), derriére. 
to believe, croire. 

Belgium, la Belgique. 

to belong, appartenir, étre 4. 
bench, banc, m. 

benign, bénin, -igne. 


364 


be 


béte (adj.), stupid. 

beurre, m. butter. 

bévue, /. blunder. 

bibliothéque, /. library. 

bien, well, very, a great many, 
most; much, quite; indeed. 
eh bien! well! bien aise, 
glad. 

bientét, soon. 

biére, /. beer. 

bijou, m. jewel. 

billet, m. note. 

bise, f. north wind. 

blamer, to blame. 

blanc, blanche, white. 

blé, m. wheat. 

blessé, -e, wounded. 

blesser, to wound. 

blessure, /. wound. 


Frangais-Anglais 





bleu, -e, blue. 

boeuf, m. ox. 

boire, to drink. 

bois, m. wood, grove. 

boite, f. box. 

boiter, to limp, to walk lame. 

bombe, /. bomb. 

bon, bonne, good, kind. 

bonheur, m. happiness, pleas- 
ure. 

bonhomme, m. fellow, “ little 
man,” 

bonne, /. maid, servant, nurse- 
maid. 

bonté, f. goodness. 

bord, m. edge, bank, shore. 
au bord de la mer, at the 
coast. 

bottine, /. boot. 





be 


besides, d’ailleurs. 

best (adj.), le meilleur; 
le mieux. 

better (adj.), meilleur; (adv.), 
mieux. 

better off, plus avancé. 

to be better (health), se porter 
mieux, aller mieux. to be 
worth more, valoir mieux. 

to betray, trahir. to — one’s 
self, se trahir. 

between, entre. 

to bid, commander, dire. 

big, gros, -se. 

bill, billet, m. 

billion, billion, m.; milliard, m. 

bird, oiseau, m. 

birthday, féte, f., féte de nais- 
sance, 


(adv.), 


365 


English-French 





to bite, mordre. 

bitter, amer, -ére. 

black, noir, -e. 

blackboard, tableau noir, m. 
to blame, blAdmer. — one’s 
- self or each other, se bl4mer. 
to bless, bénir. 

blind (adj.), aveugle. 

blue, bleu, -e. 

to blush, rougir. 
boarding-school, pension, /. 
boat, bateau, m. 

body, corps, m. 

boldness, audace, /. 

bonnet, chapeau, m. 

book, livre, m. 

bookseller, libraire, m. 


boot, bottine, /. ~ 
| Bk 
1 86. 


born, né, -e. 


bo Frangais- Anglais 


bouche, f. mouth. 

boucle d’oreille, f. earring. 
boulanger, m. baker. 
bouquet, m. bouquet. 
bourgeois, m. shopkeeper. 


bourse, f. purse. la Bourse, 


stock exchange. 
bout, m. end, extremity. 
bouteille, f. bottle. 
bouton, m. button. 
bracelet, m. bracelet. 
bras, m. arm. 
brave, brave; honest. 
braver, to brave, to defy. 
brebis, /. sheep, ewe. 
bref, bréve, short, brief. 
Brésil, m. Brazil. 
Bretagne, /. Brittany. 
bride, /. bridle. 
broche, /. brooch. 





brosse, /. brush. 

brosser, to brush. 

brouillard, m. fog. 

bruit, m. noise, report, rumor. 

bréler, to burn. 

brun, -e, brown. 

brusquement, rudely, bruskly. 
bruyant, -e, noisy, boisterous. 

bu, -e, drunk. 


¢a (a familiar contraction for 
cela), that. ga et la, here 
and there. 

cabaret, m. tavern. 

caché, -e, hidden. 

cacher, to hide, to conceal. 

cadeau, m. present. 

cadet, -te, younger, junior. 

café, m. coffee. 





bo English-French by 


to borrow, emprunter (a). 
bottle, bouteille, f. 
bought, acheté, -e. 
bouquet, bouquet, m. 
box, boite, /. 

boy, garcon, m, 

bracelet, bratelet, m. 





to breakfast, déjeuner, 


breast, poitrine, f.5 sein, m. 


bridge. pont, m. 
brief, bref, bréve. 


to bring, amener, apporter. 


bring me, apportez-moi. 
bring back, ramener. 


to 





broad, large. 

brooch, broche, /f. 

broom, balai, m. 

brother, frére, m 

brother-in-law, beau-frére, m. 

brown, brun, -e. 

to brush, brosser. 

to build, bAtir. 

building, édifice, m.; b&timent, 
m. 

business, affaires, f. plur. 

busy, occupé, -e. 

but, mais. but for, sans. 

butter, beurre, m. 

button, bouton, m. 

to buy, acheter. 

by, par. byfar,de beaucoup. by 
that road, par cette route. 


366 


ca Francais-Anglais ce 
cage, f. cage. cas, m. case, circumstance. | 


cahier, m. copy-book, note- 
book. 

caisse, f. box. 

caisse d’épargne, savings-bank. 

caléche, /. carriage. 

calme, calm. 

camarade, m. comrade. 

campagne, f. country; cam- 
paign. a la campagne, in 
the country. 

canadien, -enne, Canadian. 

canif, m. penknife. 

canne, /f. cane. 

caparaconné, caparisoned. 

capitaine, m. captain. 

capitale, f. capital. 

captiver, to captivate; to take 
up. 

car (conj.), for. 

carafe, f. carafe, decanter. 





en tout cas, at any rate. 


casque, m. helmet. 


casser, to break. 

cathédrale, f. cathedral. 

cause, f. cause. Aa — de, on 
account of, because of, 

causer, to talk, to chat. 

causeur, talkative. 

ce, cet, cette, this, that. ce 
qui, ce que, what (rel.). ce 
sont, they are, those are. 

ceci, this (thing). 

céder, to yield, to give way or 
place. — le pas, to give 
precedence. 

cela, that (thing). 

célébre (adj.), celebrated, fa- 
mous. 

célébrer, to celebrate. 


celle, f. that, this. celle-ci, 





cargaison, /. cargo. this, thisone. celle-la, that, 
carré, -e, square. that one. 
ca English-French ce 


cabbage, chou, m. 

cage, cage, sf 

cake, giteau, m. 

to call, appeler. 
self, s’appeler. 
passer chez. 

calm, tranquille. 

can (to be able), pouvoir; (to 
know how), savoir. 

Canada, le Camada. 

Canadian, canadien, -enne. 

cane, canne, f. 

cannon shot, coup de canon, m. 

to captivate, captiver. 

carafe, carafe, f. 


to — one’s 
to — on, 





care, soin, m. good care, bons 
soins. 

to care about, se soucier de. 

carpenter, charpentier, m. 

carpet, tapis, m. 

carriage, voiture, f. — 

to carry, porter. to carry off, 
emporter, remporter. 

case, cas, m. 

cat, chat, m.; chatte, f. 

to catch cold, s’enrhumer, 

to cease to, cesser de. 

to celebrate, célébrer. 

celebrated, adj. célébre. 

cent, sou, m. 


367 


ce 


celles, f. those, these. celles- 
ci, these. celles-la, those. 

celui, m. that, this. celui qui, 
he who. celui-ci, the latter, 
this, thisone. celui-la, that, 
that one. 

cent, hundred. 

centime, m. centime, 
one-fifth of a cent. 

cependant, however, 
while. 

certain, -e, certain. 

certainement, certainly. 

ces (adj.), these, those. 

cesser, to cease. 

c’est, he is, she is, it is. 

cet, cette. See ce. 

ceux, m. those, these. 
these, the latter. 
those, the former. 

chacun, -e, each, every one. 

chagrin, m. grief, trouble. 

chagrin, -e, sad, vexed, sorry. 

chaine, f. chain. 

chaise, f. chair. 

chaleur, f. warmth, heat. 

chambellan, m. chamberlain. 

chambre, /. room. 

champ, m. field. — de course, 
race-course. 


about 


mean- 


ceux-ci, 
ceux-la, 


Francais-Anglais 





changement, m. change. 

changer, to change. 

chanson, /. song. 

chanter, to sing. 

chapeau, m. hat. 

chapelle, f. chapel. 

chaque, each, every. 

charger, to load, to charge. 

Charles, m. Charles. 

charmant, -e, charming. 

charmé, -e, delighted. 

charpentier, m. carpenter. 

chasse, /. hunt. | 

chasser, to drive, to hunt. 

chasseur, m. huntsman. 

chat, m. chatte, /. cat. 

chaud, -e, hot, warm. avoir 
chaud, to be warm. 

chauffer, to warm. 

chemin, m. way, road. 

cher, chére, dear. 

cherché, -e, looked for, sought. 

chercher, to look for, to seek, 
to try to find. 

Chersonése, /. Chersonese. 

chétif, -ive, paltry. 

cheval, m. horse. 

cheveux, m. pl. the hair. 

chez, at, in, or to, the house of. 

chien, m. dog. 





ce 


certain, certain, -e. 
certainly, certainement. 
chain, chaine, f. 

chair, chaise, /. 

chalk, craie, /. 

to change, changer. 

to charge, accuser de, 
Charles, Charles, m. 


English-French 





ch 


charming, charmant, -e. 
chat, causer. 

cheap, 4 bon marché. 
cheek, joue, /. 

cheer, three cheers! vive! 
cheerful, gai, -e. 
cheerfully, gaiement. 
cheese, fromage, m. 


368 | 


ch 


chiffre, m. number. 
Chili, m. Chili. 
Chine, /. China. 
choisi, -e, chosen. 
choisir, to choose. 
choix, m. choice. 


chose, /. thing. autre —, /. 


something else. 
choucroute, /. sour-crout. 
ci, here. 
' ciel, m. heaven, sky. 
cigale, /. grasshopper. 
cinq, five. 
cinquante, fifty. 
cinquiéme, fifth. 
circonstance, /. ciroumstance, 
cirque, m. circus. 
ciseaux, m. pl. scissors. 
citadin, m. townsman. 


Francais-Anglais 





citoyen, m. citizen. 

civil, -e, polite. 

clair, m. light. 
moonlight. 

clair, -e (adj.), clear, obvious. 

clameur, /. noise. 

classe, f. class. 
classroom. 

clé, f. key. 

clef, f. key. 

clergé, m. clergy. 

clou, m. nail. 

coeur, m. heart, courage. de 
tout mon —, with all my 
heart. 

coiffeur, m. barber. 

coin, m. corner. 

colére, f. anger, passion. 

colonel, m. colonel. 


clair de lune, 


salle de —, 





ch 


chest, poitrine, /. 

child, enfant, m. or /f. 

chin, menton, m. 

China, la Chine. 

choice, choix, m. 

to choose, choisir. 

chosen, choisi, -e. 
Christmas, Noél, m. 
church, église, /. 

circus, cirque, m. 

city, ville, /. 

city hall, hdtel de ville, m 
to claim, réclamer. 

class, classe, /. 

classroom, salle de classe, /. 
clean, adj. net, nette. 

to clean, nettoyer. 

clever, habile; malin, maligne. 
to close, fermer. 


Linglish-French 





co 


closed, fermé, -e. 

cloth, drap, m. 

clothes for the wash, linge, m. 
coast, bord (m.) de la mer. 
coat, habit, m. 

coffee, café, m. 


cold, froid. to be —, avoir 
froid. to have a —, étre 
enrhumé. to take —, s’en- 
rhumer. 


to collect, ramasser. 

collection, collection, f. 

color, couleur, /. 

to comb, peigner. 

to come, venir; (part.), venu, -e. 
— back, revenir; (part.), re- 
venu, -e. — in, entrer. — 
down, descendre; (part.), 
descendu, -e. 


369 


co 


combattre, to fight. 
combien, how much, how many. 
combien de temps, how long. 
comédien, m. actor. 
comique, comical. 
commandant, m. commander, 
commandé, -e, ordered. 
commander, to order, to bid. 
comme, as, like, how. —@ 
Vordinaire, as usual. 
commencer, to begin, to com- 
mence. 
comment, how, what. 
commettre, to commit. 
commission, /. errand. 
compagne, /. comrade. 
compagnon, m. companion. 
complet, -pléte, complete. 
complétement, completely. 
composé, -e, composed. 
comprendre, to understand. 
compte, m. account. 
compter, to count, to intend. 


Frangais-Anglais 





co 


concevoir, to conceive, to plan. 

concourir, to take part. 

condition, /. position. 

conducteur, m. driver, guide, 
conductor. 

conduire, to take to; to drive. 
se — , to behave. 

conduite, /. conduct. 

confiance, f. confidence. 

confier, to trust, to intrust. 

se confondre, to be lost in, to 
become confused. 

confus, -e, confused. 

congédier, to dismiss. 

connaissance, /. acquaintance, 
knowledge. 

connaitre, to know, to judge. 

conquérir, to conquer. 

conseil, m. advice; council. 

conseiller, to advise, to recom- 
mend, 


consentir, to consent. 


constamment, constantly. 





co 


come! voyons! allons! 

to command, commander. 

to commence, commencer, se 
mettre a. 

to commit, commettre. 

committee, comité, m. 

common, ordinaire. 

company, compagnie, /. 

to compel, contraindre. 

to complain, se plaindre. 

complete, complet, compléte. 

to complete, achever, terminer. 

completely, complétement. 

comrade, camarade, m. or f.; 
ami, m. 


English-French 





to conceal, cacher. . 

to conceive, concevoir. 

to concern, regarder. 

to condemn, condamner, 

condition, condition, /. 

conduct, conduite, /. 

to confess, avouer. 

conscience, conscience, f. 

to consent, consentir (&), vou- 
loir bien. 

to consider, trouver. 

Constantinople, Constantino- 
ple, m. 

constantly, constamment. 

construction, construction, f. 


370 


co 


consulter, to consult. 
content, -e, satisfied, pleased. 
conter, to relate. 
continuellement, continually. 
continuer, to continue. 
contraindre, to compel. 
contraire, contrary, reverse. 
au—, on the contrary. 
contre, against, contrary to. 
convaincre, to convince. 
convaincu, -e, convinced. 
convenable, becoming, proper. 
convenablement, properly. 
convenir, to agree. il 
vient, it is proper. 
convenu, -e, appointed, agreed 
upon. 
conversation, f. conversation. 
corail, m. coral. 
corbeau, m. crow. 
corbeille, f. basket. 


con- 


Francais-Anglais 





co 


corriger, to correct, improve. 

corrompre, to taint. 

céte, /. coast. 

cété, m. side. a—, near, on 
one side. de lautre—, on 
the other side. 

cou, m. neck. 

se coucher, to go to bed, to lie 
down. 

coude, m. elbow. 

couleur, /. color. 

coup, m. shot, blow, stroke. 


—de canon, cannon-shot. 
—de pied, kick. tout a— 
suddenly. 


coupable, guilty. 

coupé, -e, cut. 

couper, to cut, to cut off 

cour, f/f. court, court-yard, 
yard. 

courage, m. courage. 





cordialité, /. cordiality. courant, m. current. courant 
Cordoue, /. Cordova. d’air, draught. 
corps, m. body. courir, to run. 
correspondance, f. correspond-|couronner, to crown. 
ence. cours, m. course. 
co English-French co 
contented, content, -e. corner, coin, m. 
continent, continent, m. to correct, corriger. 
continually, continuellement. | to cost, cofiter. 
to contradict, contredire. to cough, tousser. 
contrary, contraire,m, on the | to count, compter. 
—, au contraire. country, pays, m.; (in dis- 


conversation, conversation, /. 
cook, cuisiniére, /. 

cool, frais, fraiche, 

copper, cuivre, m. 
copy-book, eahier, m, 
cordiality, cordialité, f. 





tinction from the town), cam- 
pagne, f. in the country, 4 la 
campagne. 

courage, courage, m., coeur, m, 

course, cours, ™. 

court, cour, f. 


871 


co 


course, f. errand; race. 

court, -e, short. 

courtisan, m. courtier. 

cousin, m., -e, f. cousin. 

couteau, m. knife. 

cofiter, to cost. 

coutume, f/f. habit. avoir —, to 
be accustomed. 

couturiére, f. dressmaker. 

couvert, -e (de), covered (with). 

couvrir, to cover. 

craie, f. chalk. 

craindre, to fear. 

crainte, /. fear. 

crayon, m. pencil. 

crédule, credulous, 

créer, to create. 

créme, /. cream, 

crever, to burst. 

cri, m. cry. 

crier, to cry, to cry out, to 
shout. s’écrier, to exclaim. 

crime, m. crime, 

croire, to believe. 

cruel, -le, cruel. 


Frangais-Anglais 





de 
cruellement, cruelly. 
cueillir, to gather, to harvest, 
cuiller, f. spoon. 
cuir, m. leather. 
cuirasse, f. cuirass. 
cuisine, f. kitchen. 
cuisiniére, f. cook. 
cuivre, m. copper. 
curieux, -se, curious. 


dame, /. lady. 

Danemark, m. Denmark. 

dans, in. 

danse, /. dance. 

date, f. date. 

davantage, more. 

de, of, from, in, with, by; some, 
any; than. 

dé, m. thimble. 

débarrasser, to rid. 

se débattre, to struggle. 

débiter, to recite. 

debout, standing up. 

déboutonner, to unbutton. 





co 


courtier, courtisan, m. 

cousin; cousin, m., cousine, /. 

cow, vache, /. 

cream, créme, /. 

to crown, couronner, 

cruel, cruel, -le. 

to cry, crier; (to weep), pleurer. 

cunning, malin, maligne, 

cup, tasse, f,. 

to cure, guérir. 

to curse, maudire, 

to cut, couper; 
abattre. 


cut down, 


English-French 





de 


to dance, danser, 

to dare, oser. 

date, date, f. 

daughter, fille, /. 

day, jour, m., journée, f., every 
—,touslesjours. all—, toute 
la journée. — before yester- 
day, avant-hier, m. 

to dazzle, éblouir. 

dead, mort, -e. 

deaf, sourd, -e. 

a great deal, beaucoup, bien. 

dear, cher, chére. 


372 


de 


décembre, m. December. 
décevoir, to deceive. 

décider, to decide; persuade. 
décoration, f. decoration. 
décourager, to discourage. 
découvert, -e, discovered. 


découvrir, to uncover. se—, 
to take off one’s hat. 

dédire, to contradict. 

défaut, m. fault, defect. 

défendre, to forbid. se—, to 


defend one’s self or. each 
other; to deny one’s self. 
défendu, -e, forbidden. 
définitivement, positively. 
dégofit, m. dislike. 
déja, already. 
déjeuner, m. breakfast. 
déjeuner, v. to breakfast. 
de |’, de la, of the; some, any. 


délicieux, -se, delicious, de- 
lightful. 

demain, m. to-morrow. 

demande, /. inquiry. 

demander, to ask (for). se—, 


to ask one’s self, to wonder. 
démarche, /. step. 
déménager, to move. 


Frangais- Anglais 





de 


demeure, /. dwelling. 

demeuré, -e, lived. 

demeurer, to remain, to live, to 
dwell. 

demi, -e, 4 demi, half. demi- 
douzaine, /f. half-dozen. 
demi-livre, f. half-pound. 

demoiselle, f. young lady, un- 
married lady. 

démontrer, to prove. 

dent, f. tooth. 

dentelle, /. lace. 

dentiste, m. dentist. 

départ, m. departure. 

dépéche, f. despatch. 

dépécher, to hasten. 

dépendre de, to depend upon. 

dépens, m. pl. expense.. 

déplaire, to displease. 

déposer, to lay down. 

dépourvu, -e, unprepared. 

depuis, since, for, from. de- 
puis quand, how long. 

déranger, to disturb. 

dernier, derniére, last; 
most, worst. 

derriére, behind (of place). 

des, of the, from the; some, any. 


ut- 





de 


death, mort, /. 

decanter, carafe, f. 

' to deceive, tromper, décevoir. 
December, décembre, m. 

to decide, se décider. 
decidedly, décidément, 

to declare, déclarer. 

deep, profond, -e. 

defect, défaut, m. 

to defend, défendre, 


French-English 





de 


definite, defini, -e. 

to delay, tarder. 

delicious, délicieux, -se. 
Denmark, le Danemark. 
dentist, dentiste, m. 

to depart, partir. 

departed, parti, -e. 

to depend upon, dépendre de. 
depth, profondeur, /. 

to descend, descendre. 


373 








de Francais-Anglais di 
désagréable, disagreeable. devoir, m. duty. 
descendre, to come down, to/|devoir, v. to owe, must. 

let out, get out. diable, m. devil. 
déserter, to desert. diamant, m. diamond. 
déserteur, m. deserter. dictée, f. dictation. 
désirer, to wish. dictionnaire, m. dictionary. 
désobéir, to disobey. Dieu, God, the Lord; the 
désolé, -e, grieved. heavens. 
désormais, in future, hence-| différent, -e, different. 

forth. difficile, difficult. 
dés que, as soon as. difficulté, f. difficulty. 
dessin, m. design, drawing. digne, worthy. 
dessus, upon, above. dignitaire, m. dignitary. 
détail, m. detail. dimanche, m. Sunday. 
détaler, to pack up. dimensions, /. dimensions, 
déterminer, to determine, diner, m. dinner, 
détester, to detest. diner, v. to dine. 
détruire, to destroy. dire, to say. 
deuil, m. mourning. diriger, to direct. 
deux, two. discret, discréte, discreet, 
deuxiéme, second. discussion, /. discussion. 
devant, before (of place), disgrace, f. displeasure. 
devenir, to become. disparaitre, to disappear. 
devenu, -e, become. disparu, -e, disappeared, 
deviner, to guess. disposé, -e, inclined. 
de English-French di 


to deserve, mériter (de). 
to desire, désirer. 

desk, pupitre, m. 

detail, détail, m. 

to detest, détester. 
diamond, diamant, m. 
dictionary, dictionnaire, m, 
did. See do. 

to die, mourir. 
differently, autrement. 
difficult, difficile. 
difficulty, difficulté, f. 
diligent, appliqué, -e. 





dimensions, dimensions, /- 

to dine, diner. 

dining-room, salle a ps. i. 

dinner, diner, m.. 

dirty, sale, 

disapprove, trouver mauvais. 

to discover, découvrir. 

discussion, ‘discussion, f. 

to disobey, désobéir (a). 

displeasure, déplaisir, m., dis 
grace, f. 

disposition, caractére, m. 

distance, distance, f. 


374 


di 

dit, -e, said. 

divin, -e, divine. 

dix, ten. 

dix-huit, eighteen. 

dixiéme, tenth. 

dix-neuf, nineteen. 

dix-sept, seventeen. 

docteur, m. doctor. 

doigt, m. finger. 

domestique, m. or f. servant. 

dommage, m. harm, injury. 
c’est dommage, that is too 
bad. 

don, m. gift. 

donc, then, so, therefore. 

donné, -e, given. 

donner, to give, to ascribe. 
donner dans, to come into; 
to strike. 

donnez, give. 


Frangais-Anglais 





du 


dormi, slept. 

dormir, to sleep. 

doué, -e, gifted. 

douleur, /. grief, pain. 

douloureux, -se, painful. 

doute, m. doubt. sans—, doubt- 
less, of course. 

douter, to doubt. 

doux, douce, sweet, gentle. 

douzaine, f. dozen. 

douze, twelve. 

douziéme, twelfth. 

drap, m. cloth. 

droit, m. right. 

droit, -e (adj.), straight. 

droite, f. right hand. 4 droite, 
on or to the right. 

droiture, f. uprightness. 

dréle, m. rogue, scamp. 

dréle (adj.), odd, queer. 





dont, of which, of whom,j|du, of the, from the; some, 
whose. any. 
di Linglish-French dr 


to disturb, déranger. 

to do, faire, (of one’s health) 
se porter. — one’s hair, se 
coiffer. to do without, se 
passer de. (Asan ausiliary.) 
He knows better than I do, 
Il le sait mieux que moi. 
(In urging, rendered by done 
or prier.) Do speak to me! 
Parlez-moidonc! (In reply- 
ing.) [Did he say so?] Her 
did. Mais oui. [He came 
yesterday.] Did he? Vrai- 
ment? 

doctor, médecin, m. 





dog, chien, m. 


doll, poupée, f- 

domestic, domestique, m. or f. 
done, fait, -e. 

door, porte, f. 

to doubt, douter. 

dozen, douzaine, f. 

draught, courant d’air, m. 
drawer, tiroir, m, 
drawing-room, salon, m, 

dress, robe, /. 

dressed, mis, mise; habillé, -e 
dressmaker, couturiére, /. 

to drink, boire. 

to drive, aller en voiture. 
drunk, bu, -e. 

dry, sec, séche, 


375 





du Francais-Anglais el 
di, due, due, must, been| écrire, to write. 

obliged. écrit, -e, written. 
duel, m. duel. écriture, f. handwriting. 
duquel, de laquelle, desquels, | écrivain, m. writer. 

desquelles, of which. écurie, f. stable. 
dur, -e, hard. édifice, m. building. 
durer, to last. Edimbourg, m. Edinburgh. 

édition, f. edition. 
effet, effect, fact, deed. en—, 

eau, f. water. truly, indeed. 
échapper, to escape. effrayer, to frighten.  s’ef- 
écharpe, /. scarf. frayer, to be frightened. 
échouer, to fail. effrontément, impudently. 
éclat, m. brightness, lustre. égal, -e, equal. cela m/’est 
éclater, to burst. égal, it is all the same to me. 
école, f. school. égarer, to mislay. s’égarer, 
écossais, -e, Scotch, Scotch-| to lose one’s way. 

man, église, f. church. 
Ecosse, f. Scotland. égorger, to cut the throat of. 
écouter, to listen. égratignure, /. scratch. 
écran, m. screen. eh bien! well! 
s’écrier to, exclaim. élaboré, -e, contrived. 





du 


in a duel, en duel. 
dumb, muet, muette. 
during, pendant. 
dust, poussiére, /. 
Dutch, hollandais, -e., 
duty, devoir, m. 

to dwell, demeurer, 
dying, mourant, -e, 


each, chaque, ad7., chacun, pron. 
each other, l|’un l’autre. 

to earn, gagner, 

ear-rings, boucles d’oreilles, /. 
earth, terre, f. 

easily, facilement. 


English-French 





el 


easy, facile; (calm), tranquille. 

to eat, manger. 

eaten, mangé, -e. 

edge, bord, m. 

Edinburgh, Edimbourg, m. 

effect, effet, m. in—(in reality), 
en effet. 

effort, effort, m. 

egg, ceuf, m. 

eight, huit. 

eighteen, dix-huit. 

eighth, huitiéme. 

eighty, quatre-vingts. 

either, l’un ou |’autre; 
negation), non plus. 

elbow, coude, m. 


(after 


376 


el 


éléphant, m. elephant. 

éléve, m. or f. pupil. 

elle, f. she, her, it. elle-méme, 
f. herself. elles, f. they, 
them. elles-mémes, them- 
selves. 

éloigné, -e, distant. 

embarras, m. perplexity. 

embrasser, to embrace. 

emmener, to lead away. 

s’émouvoir, to be moved. 

s’emparer de, to take posses- 
sion of. 

empécher, to hinder, to pre- 
vent. 

empereur, m, emperor, 

empire, m. empire. 

emplette, /, purchase, 

employer, to employ. 

emporter, to carry off. 

s’empresser, to hasten. 

emprunter (4), to borrow 
(from), ; 

emprunteur, m., emprunteuse, 
jf. borrower. 

ému, -e, moved, agitated. 

en (pron.), some, any; of it, of 
him, of her, of them, for it; 
hence, thence. 

en (prep.), in, while, at. 


Frangais-Anglais 





en 


enchanté, -e, delighted. 

encore, still, as yet, again; 
too. — un, another. 7 

encourir, to incur, 

encre, f. ink. 

encrier, m. inkwell. 

enfant, m. or f. child. 

enfermer, to shut up. 

enfin, at last. 

enfler, to swell. 

enlever, to carry off. 
lever, to rise. 

ennemi, m, enemy. 

s’enquérir, to inquire. 

s’enrhumer, to catch cold. 
étre enrhumé, -e, to have a 
cold. 

enseigner, to teach. 

ensemble, together, 

ensuite, afterwards, next. 

s’ensuivre, to follow, to re- 
sult. 

entendre, to hear; to mean, 
—dire, to hear; to learn. 
bien entendu, of course. 

enthousiasmé, carried away. 

entourer, to surround. 

entre, between. 

entré, -e, entered, come in. 

entreprise, f. undertaking. 


s’en- 





el 


elephant, éléphant, m. 
eleven, onze. 

eleventh, onziéme. 
elsewhere, ailleurs. 
emperor, empereur, m. 

to employ, employer. 
empress, impératrice, /f. 
encourage in, encourager &. 


English-French 





en 

end (conclusion), fin, f.; (ex 
tremity), bout, m. 

to end, finir, achever, 

enemy, ennemi, m. 

engaged, occupé, -e. 

England, |’ Angleterre, f. 

English, anglais, -e. 

engraving, gravure, f. 


377 


en 

entrer (dans), to go in, to enter. 

entretenir, to converse, to 
entertain. 


envers, towards. 

envie, f. desire, fancy; envy. 

envier, to envy, to begrudge. 

envieux, -se, envious. 

environs, m. neighborhood. 

envoyer, to send. 

épais, épaisse, thick. 

épaisseur, /. thickness. 

épaule, f. shoulder. 

épée, f. sword. 

épingle, f. pin. 

époque, f. period. 

éprouver, to feel, to experience. 

épuisé, -e, exhausted. 

éreinter, to break the back. 

Ernest, m. Ernest. 

erreur, /. mistake. 

es, art (pres. ind., 2d per. sing. 
of étre). 

escalier, m. staircase. 

espace, m. space. 

Espagne, /. Spain. 

espagnol, -e, Spanish. 

espéce, f. kind, sort. 

espérer, to hope, to expect. 

espion, ™. spy. 

esprit, m. spirit, wit, 

* essayer, to try. 


Frangais-Anglais 





et 


essentiel, -le, 
terial. 

est, is; belongs. n’est-ce pas? 
is it not? is it? il en fut 
surpris, n’est-ce pas? he was 
surprised at it, wasn’t he? 
le train n’est pas arrivé, 
n’est-ce pas? the train isn’t 
in, is it? je n’ai rien dit, 
n’est-ce pas? I didn’t say 
anything, did I? 

est, m. east. ) 

estimer, to esteem, to value 
highly, 

et, and. 

établir, to establish, to secure, 

étage, m. story (ofa house), floor, 

étant, being. 

état, m. condition, 

les Etats-Unis, m. the United 
States. 

été, m. summer. 

été (part.), been. 

éteindre, to put out. 

étendard, m. standard. 

étendre, to stretch. 

étinceler, to flash. 

étonner, to astonish, 

étourdi, -e, heedless, 

étrange, strange. 

étre, m. being. 


essential, ma- 





en 


to enjoy one’s self, s’amuser. 
enough, assez, 

to enter, entrer (dans). 
enterprise, entreprise, /. 

to entreat, prier, supplier. 
equal, égal, -e. 

equality, égalité, f. 


English-French 





ev 


Ernest, Ernest, m. 
error, faute, f., erreur, f. 
essential, essentiel, -elle. 
to establish, établir. 
even, méme. 

evening, soir, ™, 

event, événement, m, 


378 


et 


étre (v.), to be. é6tre a, to 
"belong to; to be busy about. 
en étre. Oi en étes vous? 
how far have you got? j’en 
suis pour mes peines, I had 
my trouble for nothing. il 
n’en est rien, it’s nothing of 
the sort. c’est que. venez- 
vous? c’est que nous ne 
pouvons pas, are you com- 
ing? The fact is we can’t. 
See est. 
étroit, -e, narrow. 
étude, /. study. 
étudier, to study. 
eu, had. 
Europe, /. Europe. 
eux, they, them. 
themselves. 
événement, m. event. 
éventail, m. fan. 
éventualité, /. contingency. 
évident, -e, evident. 


eux-mémes, 


_ Francais-Anglais 





exactitude, f. punctuality. 

exagérer, to exaggerate. 

examiner, to examine. 

excepté, except. 

excuse, /. excuse. 

excuser, to excuse. 

exécuter, to execute. 

exemple, m. example. par —, 
for instance; you don’t say 
so! 

exercice, m. exercise, drill. 

exiger, to demand, to require, 
to insist upon. 

expédition, /. expedition. 

expérience, /. experience. 

expliquer, to explain. 

s’exposer, to expose 
self. 

exprés, purposely. 

expression, f/. expression. 

exprimer, to express: 

extravagance, f. extravagance, 

extréme, extreme. 


one’s 





ev 


ever, jamais, 

every, tout, -e, tous, toutes; 
chaque. 

everybody, tout le monde. 

every one, chacun; tout le 
monde, 

everything, tout, m. 

everywhere, partout. 

evident, évident, -e. 

exactly, précisément. 

to exaggerate, exagérer, 

example, exemple, m. 

excellent, excellent, -e, 

to exclaim, s’écrier. 

excuse, excuse, /, 


English-French 





ey 


to excuse, excuser, 

exercise, exercice, m., théme, 
m. 

to expect (before a noun), at- 
tendre; (before an infin.), 
s’attendre a. 

expense, dépens, m. plur. 

experience, expérience, f, 

to experience, éprouver. 

to explain, expliquer. 

to express, exprimer, 

to extol, vanter, louer, 

extremity, extrémité, f, bout, 
m. 

eye, ceil, m.; pl. yeux. 


879 


fa 

face, f. face, surface. en face 
de, opposite. 

facher, to vex. se—, to get 


angry. 

facile, easy. 

facilement, easily. 

facgon, /. fashion, way. 

faim, f. hunger. avoir—_, to 
be hungry. 

faire, to do, to make. — beau 
(temps), to be fine (weather). 
—le malade, to pretend to 
be ill. — dire, to send word. 
avoir beau —, to be no use 
trying. — faire, to get or 
have done; — batir, to build. 
— savoir, to let know. 
des affaires, to do business. 
— de son mieux, to do one’s 
best. ne — rien, to make 
no difference. 

faisan, m. pheasant. 

fait, m. fact, act. 

fait, v. does, makes. 

fait (part.), done, made, shaped. 

falloir, to be necessary, must, 
want. 

fameux, -se, famous, 

famille, /. family. 


Frangais-Anglais | 





farine, f. flour. 

fatigant, -e, tiresome. 

fatigué, -e, tired, fatigued. 

il faut, it is necessary, must. 

faute, /. fault, offence, mistake. 

fauteuil, m. arm-chair. 

faux, fausse, false, artificial, 
adulterated. 

favori, favorite, favorite. 

feld-maréchal, m. field-marshal. 

femme, f/f. woman, wife. 

fenétre, f. window. 

fer, m.iron. fers, fetters.’ fer 
blanc, m. tin. 

fermé, -e, shut. 

fermer, to shut, to close. 

fermeté, /. firmness. 

féroce, fierce, ferocious. 

festin, m. feast. 

féte, f. birthday. 

feu, m. fire. 

feuille, f. leaf (of book or tree). 

février, m. February. 

fi! fie! 

fidéle, faithful. 

fier, fiére, proud. 

figure, /. face. 

se figurer, to fancy. 

fil, m. thread. 





fa 


face, visage, m., figure, f.; (a 
wry face), grimace, f. 

to fail in respect, manquer de 
respect. 

faithful, fidéle. 


to fall, tomber; — _ in with, 
rencontrer; —= Out, 60 
brouiller. 


fallen, tombé, -e. 


English-French 





fa 


false, faux, fausse, 

family, famille, f. 

famous, fameux, -se. 

fan, éventail, m. 

to fancy, s’imaginer. 

far, loin. by far, de beaucoup. 
fast, vite. 

fat, gras, grasse. 

father, pére, m. 


380 


fil 


fille, f. daughter, girl. 

fils, m. son. 

fin, f.end. ala —, after all. 

fini, -e, ended, finished. 

finir, to finish. 

fixer, to fix. 

flambeau, m. torch. 

flatter, to flatter. se —, 
hope; to flatter one’s self, 

flatteur, m. flatterer. 

flegmatiquement, calmly. 

fleur, f. flower. 

fleuve, m. river. 

flocon, m. flake. 


to 


Francais-Anglais 





fo 


fois, f. time; bien des—, many 
a time. 

fonction, /. function. 

fondre, to melt. — en larmes, 
to burst into tears. 

font, v. make. 

force, /. strength, power. 

forét, /. forest. 

fort, -e (adj.), strong, hard; 
(adv.), much, very. 

fortune, /. fortune. 

fou, fol, folle, mad, foolish, 

foudre, /. lightning. 

fouiller, to ransack. 





fa 


fault (defect), défaut, m.; (er- 
ror), faute, f. 

favor, faveur, /. 

favorite, favori, favorite. 

fear, peur, f. for fear of, de 
crainte de, de peur de. 

to fear, craindre, avoir peur. 

February, février, m. 

fellow, garcon, m. 

ferocious, féroce. 

few, peu. a few, quelques 
(adj.), quelques-uns (pron.). 

fewer, moins. 

field, champ, m. 

fifteen, quinze. 

fifth, cinquiéme, 

fifty, cinquante. 

to fight, se battre, 

to fill, remplir. 

to find, trouver; (a thing lost), 
retrouver. 

fine, beau, belle, 

finger, doigt, m. 

to finish, finir, achever. 


English-French 





fo 


fire, feu, m. 

first, premier, premiére., 

fish, poisson, m. 

to fit, aller. 

fit of anger, accés (m.) de 
colére. 

five, cinq. 

to flatter, flatter. 

flatterer, flatteur, m., -euse, f, 

flattering, flatteur, -euse. 

flock, troupeau, m. 

floor, plancher, m. 

flour, farine, /. 

flower, fleur, /. 

fly, mouche, /. 

fog, brouillard, m. 

to follow, suivre. 

foolish, fou, folle; sot, sotte, 

foot, pied, m. 

for, pour; (during), pendant; 
(marking the beginning), de- 
puis; (con7.), car. 

to forbid, défendre, 

forenoon, matin, m. 


381 


fo 


foule, /. crowd. 

fourchette, /. fork. 

fourmi, /. ant. 

fournir, to furnish, 

fourrure, /. fur. 

frais, fraiche, fresh, cool. 

fraise, f. strawberry. 

fraisier, m. strawberry plant. 

framboise, /. raspberry. 

franc, m. franc, 20 sous. 

franc, franche, straightforward, 
frank, 

francais, -e, French, 

France, /. France. 

frapper, to strike. 

fréquenter, to frequent. 

frére, m. brother, 

fripon, m. rogue, 


Frangais-Anglais 





ga 


froid, -e, cold. to 
be cold. 

froideur, f. coldness. 

fromage, m. cheese. 

fruit, m. fruit. 

fruitier, -ére (adj.), fruit. 

fumée, /. smoke, 

fumer, to smoke, 

fureur, f. fury. ‘en —, wild. 

furieux, -se, furious. 

fusil, m. gun, 


avoir —, 


gagner, to reach, to gain. 
gai, -e, cheerful, merry. 
gaiement, cheerfully. 
ganache, f. blockhead. 
gant, m. glove. 





fo 


to forget, oublier. 

to forgive, pardonner, 

fork, fourchette, /. 

formerly, autrefois. 

fortnight, quinze jours, m., 
quinzaine, f. 

fortunate, heureux, -se, 

fortune, fortune, f. 

forty, quarante, 

found, trouvé, -e, 

four, quatre. 

fourteen, quatorze, 

fourth, quatriéme, 
un quart. 

franc, franc, m. 

frank, franc, franche, 

free, libre. 

freely, librement, 

to freeze, geler. 

French, francais, -e, 


a fourth, 


English-French 





ga 


Frenchman, Frangais, m. 

fresh, frais, fraiche. 

Friday, vendredi, m. 

friend, ami, m., amie, f. 

friendship, amitié, /. 

to frighten, effrayer. 

frightful, affreux, -euse, 

from, de. — me, de ma part. 
— him, de sa part. 

fruit, fruit, m. 

fruit (adj.), fruitier, -ére. 

to fulfil, remplir, 

full, plein, -e. 

fur, fourrure, /. 

to furnish, fournir, 


game, jeu, ™. 
garden, jardin, m. 
gardener, jardinier, m., -ére, f. 


382 








ga Frangais-Anglais gr 
garcon, m. boy, bachelor. géographie, f. geography. 
garde, m. keeper, guard. giberne, f. cartridge-pouch, 
garde, f.notice. prendre —, to | gibier, m. game. 
look out, to take care. glace, /. ice. 
garder, to keep. gloire, f. glory. 
gare, f. railway station. gorge, /f. throat, 
gateau, m. cake, goat, m. taste. 
gater, to spoil. gofiter, to taste, to lunch, 
gauche, /. left-hand, 4 gauche, | gouvernante, /. governess, 
to or on the left. grace, f. charm, favor. — 4a, 
geler, to freeze. thanks to. de —, pray, I 
géner, to inconvenience, pray you. 
général, m. general, gracieux, -se, graceful, 
généreux, -se, generous, grammaire, /. grammar, 
genou, m. knee. grand, -e, large, tall, great, 
gens, m. or f., people. grandir, to grow up. 
gentil, -le, pretty, neat, nice, | grand-pére, m. grandfather. 
amiable, grange, f. barn. 
ge English-French gr 
general, général, m, Glasgow, Glasgow, m, 


generous, généreux, -se, 

genius, génie, m, 

gentle, doux, douce; 
gentille, 

gentleman, monsieur, m. 

geography, géographie, f, 

George, Georges, m. 

German, allemand, -e, 

Germany, |’ Allemagne, f. 

to get, avoir, recevoir, 
here, arriver. — rid, se dé- 
faire. — up, se lever, 

ghost, revenant, m. 

gift, cadeau, m, 


gentil, 


girl, fille, f. 
to give, donner, — back, 
rendre, — me, donnez-moi. 


given, donné, -e.— back, rendu. 
glad, bien aise. — 


GS 





glass, verre, m. 

glory, gloire, f. 

glove, gant, m, 

to go, aller. —- away, s’en 
aller, partir, —- out, sortir. 
— to bed, se coucher, 
without, se passer de, 

gold, or, m. 

gone, allé, -e, parti, -e, 

gone out, sorti, -e. 

good, bon, bonne; (in conduct), 
sage. to be so good as, 
avoir la bonté de, , 

governess, gouvernante, f. 

government, gouvernement, m, 

grammar, grammaire, /. 

grand, magnifique. 

grandfather, grand-pére, aieul, | 
m. 


883 


gr 


gras, grasse, fat. 

grave, grave, severe. 

gravement, gravely. 

gravure, /. engraving. 

grec, grecque, Greek. 

gréle, f. hail. 

grelotter, to shiver. 

grenade, /. pomegranate. 

grenadier, m. grenadier, 

grenouille, /. frog. 

gronder, to growl, to scold. 

groom, m. lackey. 

gros, grosse, stout, big, large, 
rough. 

grosseur, f. size. 

guére (ne before verb), scarcely, 
hardly. 

guérir, to cure. 

guerre, /. war. 

Guillaume, m. William, 


Frangais- Anglais 





ha 


| (Aspirate h ts indicated by *‘.) 


habile, clever. 

habilement, skilfully. 

habit, m. coat. 

habitant, m. inhabitant. 

habitation, f. habitation. 

habiter, to dwell in, to live 
in, 

habitude, f. habit. 

habitué, m. frequenter. 

habituer, to accustom, 

‘hair, to hate. 

haleine, /. breath. 

‘haricots, m. beans. 

‘hasard, m. chance; par —, 
perchance; I suppose. 

‘haut, m. height, top. 

‘haut, -e (adj.), high, tall; 
(adv.), loud. 

‘hauteur, f. height. 





gr 


grateful, reconnaissant, -e. 
great, grand, -e. 

greatcoat, paletot, m. 
greatness, grandeur, f. 
Greek, grec, grecque, 
green, vert, -e. 

on what ground, 4 quel titre. 
to grow up, grandir. 

to guarantee, garantir. 
guardian, tuteur, m. 

to guess, deviner. 

guest, invité, m. 

to guide, mener, 

guilty, coupable. 


habit, habitude, f. 
had (part.), eu. 


Linglish-French 





he 


The Hague, La Haye. 

hair, cheveu, m. 

half, demi, -e, la moitié., 

half-hour, demi-heure, /f. 

hand, main, /. 

handkerchief, mouchoir, m. 

handsome, beau, belle. 

to happen, arriver, se passer. 

happy, heureux, -se. 

hard, dur, -e: fort, -e; difficile. 

hardly, & peine. 

harmonious, harmonieux, -se. 

hat, chapeau, m, 

to have, avoir. will you —, 
voulez-vous? 

he, il, lui. he who, celui qui. 

head, téte, f. 

health, santé, f. 


384 


ha 


La ‘Haye, The Hague. 

‘Henri, m. Henry 

hériter, to inherit. 

heure, f. hour, o’clock; tout a 
Vheure, just now. 

heureusement, happily. 

heureux, -se, happy, fortunate. 

‘hibou, m. owl. : 

hier, yesterday. 
night. 

histoire, f. history, story. 

hiver, m. winter. 


— soir, last 


Frangais- Anglais 





‘hollandais, -e, Dutch. 


ho 


hommage, m. homage. 

homme, m. man, 

honnéte, honest, civil, respect- 
able. 

honnéteté, f/f. kindness, cour- 
tesy, 

‘honte, /. shame, 

‘honteux, -se, 
shameful, 

horrible, horrible, 

horriblement, dreadfully, 

héte, m. host; occupant. 

hétel, m. hotel, mansion, 


ashamed, 





he 


to hear, entendre. to hear it 
said, entendre dire. 

heart, cceur, m. with all my 
heart, de tout mon coeur. 

heaven, ciel, m. 

heavy, lourd, -e. 

heedless, étourdi, -e. 

heedlessness, étourderie, f. 

height, hauteur, f. 

to help, aider. 

Henry, Henri, m. 

her (pron.), elle, la. to her, 
lui. (adj.), son, sa, ses, 

here, ici. 

here is, or here are, voici. 

herself, se, elle-méme. 

hesitation, hésitation, /. 


to hide, cacher, to — one’s 
self, se cacher, 

high, haut, -e. 

him, le, lui. to him, lui, 


himself, se, lui-méme. 
his (adj.), son, sa, ses; (pron.), 
le sien, la sienne, les siens, les 


English-French 





siennes. 


historian, historien, m. 

history, histoire, /. 

hold! tenez! 

holiday, congé, m.; 
congé, m. 

Holland, la Hollande, 

at home, 4 la maison; chez... 

honey, miel, m. 

honor, honneur, m, 

to hope (before a future), es- 
pérer; (before a pres. or 
past), aimer & croire, aimer 
& penser. 

horse, cheval, chevaux, m, 

on horseback, 4 cheval. 

horse-shoe, fer & cheval, m, 

hot, chaud, -e. 

hotel, hétel, m. 

hour, heure, f. 

house, maison, f. at the — of, 
chez. 

how, comment, comme, que. 
— long? combien de temps? 
depuis quand? — many? 
— much? combien? 


jour de 


385 


ho 


hdtel de ville, city hall. 
‘huit, eight. 

‘huitiéme, eighth. 
humeur, /. temper. 
humide, damp, moist. 


ici, here. 

ignorer, to be ignorant of. 
il, he, it. 

il y a, there is, there are. 
ile, f. island. 

illustre, famous. 

ils, they. 

s’imaginer, to fancy. 
imiter, to imitate. 
immense, immense. 
impatient, -e, impatient. 
impératrice, /. empress. 


Frangais-Anglais 





in 


impertinence, /. impertinence. 

impertinent, m. impertinent 
fellow. 

impitoyable, pitiless. 

important, -e, important. 

il importe, it is important. 

impossible, impossible. 

impur, -e, impure. 

inattendu, -e, unexpected. 

incliner, to bend.  s’incliner, 
to bow. 

incroyable, incredible. 

indiquer, to indicate. 

indiscrétion, f. indiscretion. 

indispensable, indispensable. 

indisposé, -e, indisposed. 

infame, infamous, disgraceful. 

inférieur, -e, lower. 

infiniment, infinitely. 





ho 


however, pourtant, cependant. 

humanity, humanité, /. 

hundred, cent. 

hundredth, centiéme. 

hunger, faim, f. to be hungry, 
avoir faim. 

hurry, to be in a, étre pressé. 


I, je; moi. 

ice, glace, ff. 

idle, paresseux, -se, 

if, si. 

ill (adj7.), malade; (adv.), mal. 
to be —, étre malade, se 
porter mal. 

illness, maladie, /f. 

illustrated, illustré, -e. 

illustrious, illustre. 


English-French 





in 


imaginary, imaginaire. 
immediately, tout de suite. 
impertinent, impertinent, -e, 
important, important, -e. 

to be important, importer. 
impossible, impossible. 
impudence, impudence, f. 
in, 4, dans; en. 

inch, pouce, m. 

incredible, incroyable. 
indeed, bien. 

indefinite, indéfini, -e. 
indifference, indifférence, f. 
indispensable, indispensable. 
indisposed, indisposé, -e. 
indisputable, incontestable. 
to induce, engager (4). 
industrious, laborieux, -se. 
infinite, infini, -e. 


386 


in 


infortune, f. misfortune. 
ingrat, -e, ungrateful. 
injustement, unjustly. 
inquiet, -€te, uneasy, troubled. 
inquiéter, to annoy.  s’inquié- 
ter, to trouble one’s self, to 
be uneasy. 
inscrire, to write down, 
insecte, m. insect. 
instant, m. moment. 
instruire, to teach. 
to learn. 
instruit, -e, wise. 
insulter, to insult. 
intelligence, /. intelligence, 
intention, /. meaning. 
interdire, to forbid. 
intéressant, -e, interesting. 
intéresser, to interest. 
intérét, m. interest. 
interpeller, to speak to. 
interrompre, to interrupt. 


s’instruire, 


Frangais-Anglais 





ja 


inutile, useless. 
invitation, /. invitation. 
invité, m. guest. 
inviter, to invite. 
Irlande, /. Ireland. 
irrésolu, -e, irresolute. 
Italie, f. Italy. 

Italien, -ne, Italian. 


j’ stands for je. 

Jacques, m. James. 

jalousie, f. jealousy; blind. 

jaloux, -se, jealous. 

jamais, ever. ne.. 
never, 

jambe, f. leg. a toutes —, at 
full speed. 

janvier, m. January. 

Japon, m. Japan. 

jardin, m. garden. 
Plantes, public garden. 


. jamais, 


des 





in 


inhabitants, les habitants, m. 
ink, encre, /. 

inkwell, encrier, m. 
innocence, innocence, f. 
insect, insecte, m. 

to insist, exiger. 

insolence, insolence, f. 
instant, instant, m. 
instead of, au lieu de, 

to insult, insulter. 

to intend, compter, 
interest, intérét, m. 
interesting, intéressant, -e, 
to interfere, se méler de, 
to intimidate, intimider. 
into, dans, 


Linglish-French 





ja 

to invite, inviter, 

iron, fer, m. 

it,il,le,la,lui. ofit,en. toit, 
y. it is the tenth, c’est 
le dix. it is I, c’est moi; 
it is they, ce sont eux. it is 
said, on dit. that’sit, c’est ¢a. 

Italian, italien, -ne. 

Italy, l’Italie, f. 

its, son, sa, ses, 


James, Jacques, m. 
Jane, Jeanne, f. 
January, janvier, m, 
Japan, Japon, m. 


387 


ja 
jardinier, m. gardener. 
jaune, yellow. 

je, I. 

Jean, m. John. 

Jeanne, /. Jane. 

jeter, to cast, to throw. 
jeu, m. game, play. 
jeudi, m. Thursday. 
jeune, young. 

jefiner, to fast. 

jeunesse, /. youth. 

joie, f. joy. . 

joindre, to join, to meet, 
joli, -e, pretty. 

joue, f. cheek. 

joué, -e, played. 

jouer, to play. 

jouir de, to enjoy. 
joujou, m. toy. 

jour, m. day. 

journal, -aux, m. newspaper. 
journée, /. day. 


Frangais-Anglais 





la 


jovial, -e, jovial. 

joyeux, -se, cheerful. 

juillet, m. July. 

juin, m. June. 

jumeau, m., jumelle, f., twin. 
jurer, to swear. 

jusqu’a, as far as, till. 

juste, just. tout —, exactly. 
justement, just, exactly. 


kilogramme, m. kilogram. 
kilométre, m. kilometer. 


l’ stands for le or la, 

la, the; her, it. 

la, there. 

laborieux, -se, industrious. 
lache, cowardly. 
laconisme, m. conciseness. 
laid, -e, ugly. 





je 


jealous, jaloux, -se. 

jest, plaisanterie, f. _ 

jewel, bijou, m. 

John, Jean, m. 

journey, voyage, m. 

July, juillet, m. 

June, juin, m. 

just (adj.), juste; (adv.), juste- 
ment. to have — , venir de. 
—now, tout a l’heure. 

justice, justice, /. 


to keep, garder. 
key, clef, /. 
to kill, tuer. 


English-French 





la 


kilogram, kilogramme, m, 
kind, bon, bonne. 

to kindle, allumer. 

kindness, bonté, /. 

king, roi, m. 

to kiss each other, s’embrasser. 
kitchen, cuisine, /. 

knife, couteau, m. 

to knock, frapper. 

to know, connaitre, savoir. 


to labor, travailler. 
labor, travail, m. 
laborious, laborieux, -se, 
lace, dentelle, /. 


388 


la 


laine, f. wool. 

laisser, to let, to allow, to 
leave, to let alone. — tran- 
quille, to let alone. 
tomber, to drop. 

lait, m. milk. 

lampe. /. lamp. 

lancer, to throw. 

langue, f. tongue, language. 

languir, to languish. 

lapin, m. cabbit. 

laquelle, which. 

large, broad. 

largeur, f. breadth, 

larme, /. tear. 


Frangais-Anglais 





le 


las, lasse, tired. 

latin, -e, Latin. 

laver, to wash. 

le, the; him, it. 

lecon, /. lesson. 

lecture, /. reading. 

léger, légére (adj.), light. 

légume, m. vegetable. 

lendemain, m. next day. 

lentement, slowly. 

léopard, m. leopard. 

lequel, laquelle, lesquels, les- 
quelles, which. 

les, the, them. 

lest, m. ballast. 





la English-French le 
ladder, échelle, /. to lead, mener. — to, amener. 
lady, dame, f. young lady,| -—back,ramener. — away, 
‘jeune fille, jeune personne,| emmener, 
demoiselle, /f.. leaf, feuilleg/. 
lamb, agneau, m. to learn, apprendre. 
lamp, lampe, /. learned, instruit, -e. 
land, terre, /. learnt, appris, -e. 
landlord, propriétaire, m. at least, du moins. at the—, 


language, langue, /., langage, m. 
large, grand, -e; gros, -se. 
last, dernier, derniére. 

month, le mois dernier. 


evening, hier soir. — night, 
cette nuit. at last, enfin. 

late,. tard, -e. to be — in, 
tarder a. 


Latin, latin, -e. 

to laugh, rire. 
laughed (part.), ri. 
law, loi, f. 

lawyer, avocat, m. 
laziness, paresse, f. 
lazy, paresseux, -se. 





au moins. 


leather, cuir, m. 


to leave (go away), partir; 
(leave behind), laisser; quitter. 

left (adj.), gauche. 

leg, jambe, /. 

to lend, préter. 

length, longueur, f. 

lent, prété, -e. 

leopard, léopard, m. 

less adj., moindre; adv., moins. 

lesson, lecon, /. 

lest, de peur que, de crainte 
que; (after verbs expressing 
fear), que. 


389 


le Franeais-Anglais lo 


lettre, f. letter. 


leur (pron.), to them. (adj.), 


their, le —, (dai —~, “les 
leurs, theirs, their. 

lever, to raise. se —, to 
rise, to get up. 

lévre, /. lip. 


libraire, m. bookseller. 

libre free, disengaged, atliberty. 

lieu, m. place. au — de, in- 
stead of, 

lieve, f. league. 

lieutenant, m. lieutenant. 

ligne, /. line. 

linge, m. linen. 

lion, m.lion, lionne, f. lioness, 

lire, to read. 

lisiére, f. verge, border, 

lit, m. bed. 

litre, m. liter = 1} pints, 





livre, m. book. 

livre, f. pound. 

livrée, f. livery. 

loger, to lodge. 

loi, f. law. 

l’on stands for on, one, people. 

loin, far, —de,farfrom. de 
—, from afar. 

loisir, m. leisure. 

Londres, m. London. 

long, longue, long. 
through, along. 


le — de, 


longtemps, a long time, long. 


longueur, 7. length. 

lorsque, when, while, 

louer, to praise. 

louer, to hire, to rent, 

loueur de chevaux, m. stable- 
keeper. 

Louis, m. Louis, 





le English-French lu 


to let, laisser; (a house), louer. 
letter, lettre, /. 


liberty, liberté, f. at —, libre. 
library, bibliothéque, f. 
life, vie, f. 


light (adj.), léger, légére, 

light (noun), lumiére, f. 

to light, allumer. 

like (adj.), pareil, -le; (adv.), 
comme. 

to like, aimer. 

to be like, ressembler (4). 

likely, probable, vraisemblable. 

lily-of-the-valley, muguet, mm. 

linen, linge, m. 

lion, lion, m., lionne, i 

lip, levre, ¥, 

to listen, écouter. 





little (adj.), petit,-e; (adv.), peu. 

to live, demeurer; vivre. live 
in, habiter. 

lively, vif, vive. 

living, vie, /. 

to lock, fermer & clef, 

London, Londres, m, 

long, long, longue. a — time, 
longtemps, 

no longer, ne . . . plus. 

to look, avoir l’air. — at, 
regarder, -— for, chercher. 

to lose, perdre. 

lost, perdu, -e. 

Louis, Louis, m. 

to love, aimer. 

low, bas, basse, 

luck, chance, f. 


390 


ll 


lo 


louis, m. louis, twenty frances. 

Louise, /. Louise. 

loup, m. wolf. 

lourd, -e, heavy. 

lu, -e, read. 

lucratif, -ve, lucrative. 

lueur, f. gleam, flash, light. 

lui, he, to him, to her, to it. 
lui-méme, himself. de lui- 
méme, of his own accord. 

luire, to shine, to glitter. 

lumiére, /. light. 

lundi, m. Monday, 

lune, /. moon, 

lunettes, /. spectacles, 

lutte, /. struggle. 

lutter, to struggle, to fight. 


m’ stands for me. 

M. stands for Monsieur, Sir, Mr. 

ma, my. 

Madame, /. Madam, Mrs, 

Mademoiselle, /. Miss. 

magasin, m. shop, store. 

magnanime, magnanimous, 

magnifique, magnificent. 

mai, m. May. 

main, f. hand; donner la —, 
to shake hands. 

maint, -e, many, Many a. 


Frangais-Anglais 





maintenant, now, by this time. 
— que, now that. 

mais, but, why! 

maison, f. house. 
at home. 

maitre, m. teacher, master. 

maitresse, /. mistress, 

majesté, f, majesty. 

mal, m. harm, evil. 

mal (adv.), ill, badly. * de—en 
pis, from bad to worse. se 
porter —, to be sick. 

malade, ill, sick; (n.), patient, 

maladie, /. illness, 

malentendu, m. 
standing. 

malgré, in spite of, 

malheur, m. misfortune, 

malheureusement, unfortu- 
nately. 

malheureux, -se, unhappy, un- 
fortunate. 

malin, maligne, cunning, clever, 
sly. 

malle, f. trunk. 

maman, /. mamma, 

manchon, m. muff, 

mangé, -e, eaten, 

manger, to eat. 

maniére, f. way, Manner; — 
de voir, point of view. 


a metiek 


misunder- 





ma 


mad, fou, folle, 

made, fait, -e. 

magnanimity, magnanimité, /. 

magnificent, magnifique. 

maid-servant, bonne, /. 

to make, faire. — haste, se dé- 
pécher. 


English-French 





. 


ma 


malignant, malin, maligne. 

mamma, maman, f. 

man, homme, m, 

manners, maniéres, f. plur. 

many, beaucoup. as— as, au- 
tant que. too—, trop. 

many a, maint, -e. 


391 


ma 


manquer, to miss, to fail, — 
de, to lack, to be in need of. 

marbre, m. marble. 

marchand, m. dealer, 
chant. 

marchander; to bargain for. 

marche, /. step. 

marcher, to walk, to march; to 
go to work. 

mardi, m. Tuesday. 

maréchal, m. marshal, 

le Maroc, Morocco. 

mars, m. March. 

matin, m. morning. 

mauvais, bad. — sujet, bad 
boy, bad fellow. 

me, me, tome, myself, to myself. 

méchant, -e, naughty, wicked. 

mécontent, -e, displeased. 

mécontenter, to displease. 

médecin, m. doctor. 

meilleur, -e, better (adj.). 

méler, to mix; se — de, to 
meddle with. 


mer- 


Frangais-Anglais 





meé 


mémoire, f/f. memory, remem- 
brance. 

menace, /. threat. 

menacer, to threaten. 

ménager, to save, to spare. 

ménagerie, /. menagerie. 

mener, to take to, to lead. 

mensonge, m. deceit, lie. 

mentir, to lie, speak falsely. 

menton, m. chin, 

mer, f. sea. 

merci, thank you. 

mercredi, m. Wednesday. 

mére, f. mother. 

mériter, to merit. 

mes, my. 

Mesdames , J. ladies, Mesdames. 

Mesdemoiselles, /. Misses, the 
Misses. 

message, m. Message, 

Messieurs, m™.  sirs, 
men, 

mesure, f/f. measure, 

métal, m. metal. 


gentle- 





méme, same, even, de —,|métier, m. trade, profession. 
likewise, métre, m. meter. 
ma English-French me 


marble, marbre, m 

March, mars, m. 

to march, marcher, * 

market, marché, m., 

to marry, épouser, 

Mary, Marie, /. 

master, maitre, m, 

match, allumette, f. 

May, mai, m. 

it may be, il se peut, il est pos- 
sible. 

me, me, moi. 





meadow, pré, m., prairie, f. 

to mean, vouloir dire. 

meaning, intention, /. 

meat, viande, /. 

to meddle with, se méler de. 

to meet, rencontrer. to go to 
—, aller au devant de. 

to mend, raccommoder. 

merchant, négociant, m. 

merry, gai, -e. 

metal, métal, m. 

meter, mitre, m. 


392 





me 


mettre, to put, to put on. se 
— a, to go to, to set about. 

le Mexique, Mexico. 

midi, m. noon; south, 

miel, m. honey. 

le mien, la mienne, les miens, 
les miennes, mine, 

mieux, better (adv.). faire de 
son —, to do one’s best. 

mil, one thousand (used in 
dates only). 

milieu, m. middle. au — de, 
in the middle of, among. 

militaire, m, soldier. 

mille, m, thousand; mile, 

milliard, m. a billion, 

million, m, million. 

Miltiade, m. Miltiades, 

ministre, m. minister, 

minuit, m. midnight. 

minute, f. minute, 

miroir, m. mirror, 


Francais-Anglais 





misére, f. misery. 
Mile. stands for Mademoiselle, 
Miss, 
Miles. stands for Mesdemoi- 
selles, Misses, the Misses. 
MM, stands. for Messieurs, gen- 
tlemen, Messrs. 
Mme, stands for 
Madam, Mrs, 
Mmes. stands for Mesdames, 
ladies. 

modéle, m. model. 

moderne, modern. 

modiste, f. or m., milliner. 

meeurs, f. manners, customs, 

moi, I, me, to me, as for me, 
a moi! help! moi-méme, 
myself. 

moindre, less. le —, least. 

moins, less, fewer. a — que, 
unless, au —, at the least. 
du —, at least. 


Madame, 





me 


mis, mise, put, dressed, mois, m. month, le — der- 
misérable, miserable; wretch. nier, last month, 
English-French mo 


Mexico, le Mexique. 

Middle Ages, moyen Age, m, 

midnight, minuit, m. 

mile, mille, m. 

milk, lait, m. 

milliner, modiste, m. or f. 

million, million, m. 

mine, le mien, la mienne, les 
miens, les miennes, 

minister, ministre, m. 

minute, minute, /. 

mirror, miroir, m. 

misery, misére, /. 

misfortune, malheur, m. 





to mislay, égareér, 

Miss, Mademoiselle or Mlle., f. 

mistake, faute, /. 

to be mistaken, se tromper, 

mistress, maitresse, /f. 

to mock, se moquer de, 

modern, moderne. 

moment, moment, m,. 

Monday, lundi, m. 

money, argent, m. 

monkey, singe, m. 

Mont Blanc, le Mont Blane. 

month, mois, m. in the — of, 
au mois de, } 


393 


mo | Frangais-Anglais mu 


moitié, a moitié, f, half. 


moment, m. moment, mo- 
ments perdus, spare mo- 
ments, 


mon, ma, mes, my. 

monde, m., world. beaucoup 
de —, many people. per- 
sonne au —, nobody in the 
world, tout le —, every- 
body. 

Monsieur, Sir, Mr., gentleman. 

mont, m, hill. 

les monts Rocheux, Rocky 
Mountains. 

montagne, /. mountain, 

monter, to go up, to carry up; 
to ride. 

montre, /. watch. 

montrer, to show, to point to. 

se moquer de, to sneer at, 
laugh at. 

morceau, m, piece. 

mordre, to bite. 

morsure, /. bite. 





mort, f. death. 

mort, -e (part.), dead. 

mot, m. word, 

mou, (mol), molle, soft. 

mouche, /. fly. | 

mouchoir, m. handkerchief. 

mourant, -e, dying. 

mourir, to die. 

mousseline, f. muslin, 

moutarde, /. mustard. 

mouton, m. sheep. 

mouvement, m. movement, 

mouvoir, to move, to stir. 

moyen, m. means, way. — 
age, m. Middle Ages, 

muet, -ette, mute, silent. 

mugir, to bellow, to roar. 

muguet, m. lily-of-the-valley. 

mur, m. wall, 

mir, -e, ripe. 

mfrir, to ripen, 

musée, m. museum, 

musicien, m. musician, 

musique, /. music. 





mo English-French my 


moon, lune, f. 

more, plus, davantage, no 
more, ne... plus, 

morning, matin, m. 

mortal, mortel, mortelle, 

the most, plupart, f. 

mother, mére, /. 

mountain, montagne, /f. 

mouse, souris, f. 

mouth, bouche, f. 

movement, mouvement, m. 

Mr., Monsieur or M., m. 

Mrs., Madame or Mme., /. 





much, beaucoup; fort. so —, 
autant., too —, trop. 
muff, manchon, m, 
museum, musée, m, 
music, musique, f. 
musician, musicien, m 
muslin, mousseline, /. 
must, il faut que; devoir, 
mute, muet, -ette. 
mutton, mouton, m, 
my, Mon, ma, mes, 
myself, moi-méme, 
mystery, mystére, m, 


894 


na Frangais-Anglais no 
naitre, to be born. faire —, | neveu, m. nephew. 

to produce, to give rise to. | nez, m. nose. 
Napoléon, m. Napoleon. ni... ni, neither< . . nor, 


nature, /. nature. 

naturel, -le, natural. 

naufrage, m. shipwreck, faire 
—, to be wrecked. 

‘n’est-ce pas, See étre, 

ne... pas, not. 

ne ... personne, nobody, no 
one, 

ne .. . plus, no longer. 

ne... que, only, nothing but. 

né, née, born. 

nécessaire, necessary. 

négociant, m. merchant, 

neige, f. snow. 

net, nette, clean, 

nettoyer, to clean. 

neuf, nine. 

neuf, neuve, new-made, 

neuviéme, ninth. 





niéce, /. niece. 

noir, -e, black, 

nom, m. name, 

nombre, m. number. 

nombreux, -se, numerous. 

nommer, to name. 

non, no. ni moi — plus, nor 
I either. 

nord-ouest, northwest, 

nos, our. 

notre (adj.), our. 

le ndtre, la —, les nétres 

’ (pron.), ours, 

se nourrir de, to live on. 

nous, we, us, to us; ourselves, 
to ourselves, nous-mémes, 


ourselves. 
nouveau, nouvel, nouvelle, 
new. de —, again. 





na 


nail, clou, m 

name, nom, m, 

to name, nommer, 

napkin, servietite, f. 

Napoleon, Napoléon, m. 

naughty, méchant, -e. 

near, prés de. 

nearly, presque. 

necessary, nécessaire, 

to be necessary, falloir, 

neck, cou, m. 

to need, avoir besoin de; falloir 
de. 

needle, aiguille, /. 

to neglect, négliger. 

neighbor, voisin, m.; voisine, /. 





English-French ni 


neither . . . nor, ni... ni. 
nephew, neveu, m, 
Nero, Néron, m, 


never, ne .. . jamais, 


|new (another), nouveau, nou- 


velle, 
new-made, neuf, neuve, 
news, nouvelles, f. plur, 
newspaper, journal, m, 
next, prochain, -e 
nice, gentil, gentille, 
niece, niéce, f. 
night, nuit, f. at —, le soir. 
last —, cette nuit. 
nine, neuf, 
nineteen, dix-neuf. 


395 


no 


nouvelle, f. report; (plur.), news. 

novembre, m. November. 

nu, nue, bare. 

nuire, to injure. 

nuit, f. night. cette —, last 
night (from 12 till this morn- 
ing). 

nul, nulle (adj.), no. 

nulle part, nowhere. 


obéir, to obey. 

objet, m. object. 

obligé, -e, obliged. 
obliger, to oblige. 
obscur, -e, obscure, dark. 


Frangais-Anglais 





of 


observer, to observe, to keep. 

obtenir, to obtain. 

occasion, f. opportunity. 

occupé, -e, busy, engaged. 

occuper, to occupy. 

octobre, m. October. 

odeur, /. smell. 

ceil, m. (pl. yeux), eye. 

ceuf, m. egg. 

offenser, to offend. 

offert, -e, offered. 

office, m. office, duty. bons 
offices, kind offices. 

officier, m. officer. 

offre, f. offer. 


‘| offrir, to offer. 





ni 


ninety, quatre-vingt-dix. 
ninth, neuviéme. 
no, non, ne... pas,ne... 


point. — longer, — more, 
ne... plus. — one, per- 
sonne ... ne. — money, 


pas d’argent. 

no (adj.), nul, nulle, 

nobody, personne... ne. 

noise, bruit, m. 

noon, midi, m. 

nor, ni. — I either, ni moi 
non plus. 

north, nord, m. 

nose, nez, m. 


not, ne... pas. — at all, 
pas du tout, point. — yet, 
pas encore. 


note, billet, m. 
note-book, cahier, m. 
nothing, ne . . . rien. 
to notice, remarquer. 


English-French 





ol 


novel, roman, ™, 

November, novembre, m. 
now, 4 présent, maintenant. 
nowhere, nulle part. 

number, chiffre, m.; nombre, m. 
numerous, nombreux, -se. 


oath, serment, m. 

to obey, obéir (4). 

to oblige, obliger. 
obstinate, obstiné, -e. 
to obtain, obtenir. 
October, octobre, m. 
of, de; du; dela; des. 
offence, faute, /. 

offer, offre, 

offered, offert, -e. 
office, bureau, m. 
officer, officier, m. 
often, souvent. 

old, vieux, vieil, vieille. 


396 


oi 


oiseau, m. bird. 

ombrelle, /. parasol. 

omettre, to omit. 

omnibus, m. omnibus. 

on, one, people, we, you, they. 
oncle, m. uncle. 

ont, have (third person pl.). 
onze, eleven. 

onziéme, eleventh. 

opéra, m. opera. 

opération, /. operation. 
s’opposer (a), to object to. 
or, m. gold. 

oracle, m. oracle. 

orageux, -se, stormy. 

orange, f. orange. 


Frangais-Anglais 





ordre, m. order, 

oreille, /f. ear. 
f. ear-ring. 

orphelin, m. orphan. 

oser, to dare. 

éter, to take off or away. 

ou, or. 

ou, where. par—, which way? 

oublier, to forget. 

oui, yes. je crois que —, I 
think so, 

ours, m. bear. 

outre, beyond, besides. 

ouvert, -e (adj.), open; (part.), 
opened. 

ouverture, /. opening, 


boucle d, —, 





ordinaire, common, a Il’ —,| ouvrage, m. work, book. 

as usual, ouvrier, m. workman, 
ordonner, to order. ouvrir, to open. 
om English-French ox 


to omit, omettre. 

omnibus, omnibus, m. 

on,sur. on before a day or date 
is not translated, 

once, une fois, 
de suite. 

one (adj.), un, une; (pron.), on, 
lon, no one, personne... 
ne. the one, celui, celle, 

one’s self, se, soi. 

only (adj.), seul, -e; (adv.), 
seulement, ne... que. 

to open, ouvrir. 

opened, ouvert, -e. 

opera, opéra, m. 

opportunity, occasion, /f. 

to oppose, opposer. 

or, ou. 

orange, orange, f. 


at —, tout 





order, ordre, m. 

to order, ordonner, commander, 

ordered, commandé, -e. 

in order that, afin que, pour 
que, 

other (different), autre; 
ditional), encore un(e), 

otherwise, autrement. 

our, notre, nos. 

ours, le ndétre, la ndétre, les 
ndétres. 

ourselves, nous, nous-mémes, 

out, hors. to go —, sortir; 
to set —, partir. 

to owe (ought), devoir. 

owl, hibou, m. 

own, my own, le mien. 

overcoat, pardessus, m, 

ox, boeuf, m. 


(ad- 


897 


pa 


page, /. page. 

paille, /. straw. 

pain, m. bread. 

paire, f. pair. 

paix, f. peace. 

palais, m. palace; palate. 

pale, pale. 

panier, m. basket. 

pantoufile, /. slipper. 

papier, m. paper.— 4 lettres, 
note paper. 

paquet, m. parcel, bundle. 

par, by, through; before words 
expressing time, @ or an. 
ici, this way, in this direction. 

paraitre, to appear. vient de —, 
just published. 

parapluie, m. umbrella. 

parbleu! upon my word! 

parc, m. park. 

parce que, because. 

parcourir, to go over, to run 
through. 

par-dessous, under. 

par-dessus, over. 

pardessus, m. overcoat. 


Frangais-Anglais 





pa 


pardon, m. pardon; excuse me! 

pardonner, to forgive. 

pareil, -le, like, alike, such. 

parent, m. parent, relative. 

paresseux, -Se, lazy, idle. 

parfaitement, perfectly, quite. 

par ici, this way. 

parier, to wager. 

parisien, -enne, Parisian. 

parlé, -e, spoken. 

parlement, m. parliament. 

parler, to speak. 

parmi, among. 

parole, /. word. 

part, f. part, share. dema (ta, 
sa) —, from me (thee, him, 
her). quelque —, some- 
where. nulle —, nowhere. 

parti, -e, gone away, departed, 
set out, left. 

particularité, f. peculiarity. 

en particulier, privately. 

partie, /. part; party, excursion. 

partir, to set out, to leave. 

partout, everywhere. 

parvenir, to reach, succeed, 





pa 


to pack, emballer. 

package, paquet, m. 

pain, douleur, /. 

painful, douleureux, -se. 

paint, couleur, f. — brush, 
pinceau, m. 

to paint, peindre. 

painter, peintre, m. 

painting, tableau, m.; 
ture, f. 

pair, paire, f. 

palace, palais, m. 


pein- 


Linglish-French 





pa 


pamphlet, brochure, /. 

paper, papier, m.; journal, m. 

parasol, ombrelle, /. 

parcel, paquet, m. : 

pardon, pardon, m. to ask—, 
demander pardon. 

to pardon, pardonner. 

parents, parents, m. 

Parisian, parisien, -enne, 

park, parc, m. 

parlor, salon, m. 

part, partie, f. 


398 


pa 


pas (adv.), not, not any. See 
ne, 

pas, m. step. 

passage, m. passage. 

passer, to spend; to hand; to 
escape, to go, to pass. se 
—, to take place, occur. 
se — de, to do without. 
chez, to call on. 

pasteur, m. pastor. 

patiner, to skate. 

pauvre, poor. 

payer, to pay (for). 

pays, m. country. 

paysan, m. peasant. 

pécore, /. silly goose. 

peigne, m. comb. 

peigner, to comb. 

peine, f. trouble, labor, grief. 
a —, scarcely, just. don- 
nez-vous la —, prenez la —, 
please. 

peintre, m. painter. 


Frangais-Anglais 





pénible, painful. 

pensée, /. thought. 

penser, to think. 

pension, /. boarding-school. 
percher, to perch. 

perdre, to lose. 

perdu, -e, lost. 

pére, m. father. 

permettre, to permit. 
permission, /. permission. 
Perses, m. Persians. 
personnage, m. personage. 
personne, /. person, people, any 


one, jeune —, f/f. young 
lady. ne... personne, m. 
nobody, no one. — au 


monde, nobody in the world. 
persuader, to persuade. 
petit, -e, little, small, short. 
peu, m. few, a little. avant —, 
before long. 
peu, little, few, not very. —a 
—, by degrees, gradually. 





pendant, during, for. — que,| a-— prés, about, nearly. 
during, while. peuple, m. people, nation. 
pa English-French pe 
to part, séparer. — from each | pen-knife, canif, m. 
other, se séparer. people, gens; on, l’on. so 


to pass, passer. to come to—, 


se passer. 
passage, passage, m. 
patience, patience, /. 
to pay for, payer. 
peace, paix, /. 
pear, poire, /. 
peasant, paysan, m. 
pen, plume, /. 
pencil, crayon, m. 
pen-holder, porte-plume, m. 





many —, tant de monde. 
pepper, poivre, m. 
to perceive, apercevoir. 
perfectly, parfaitement. 
perhaps, peut-étre. 
perishable, périssable. 
permission, permission, f. 
to permit, permettre. 
person, personne, /. 
personage, personnage, m. 
to persuade to, décider a. 


399 


pe 
peur, f. fear. avoir —, to be 
afraid. de — de, for fear 


of. 
peut-étre, perhaps. 
philosophie, /, philosophy. 
phosphorique, phosphorescent. 
photographie, f/. photograph. 
phrase, /. sentence. 
piéce, f. piece; (theat.), play. 
pied, m. foot. a—, on foot. 
pierre, f. stone. 
pierreux, -se, stony. 
piéton, m. pedestrian. 
se piquer de, to pride one’s self. 
pire, worse. 
pis (adv.), worse. 
pitié, f. pity. 
place, f. place, situation; seat. 
placer, to place. 
plaie, f. wound. 


plaindre, to pity. se —, to 
complain. 
plaire, to please. se —, to 


enjoy. s’il vous plait, if you 
- please. 
plaisir, m. pleasure. 


Frangas-Anglais 





plancher, m. floor. 

plante, f. plant. 

planter, to plant. 

plein, -e, full, open. 

pleuré, -e, wept, cried. 

pleurer, to weep. 

pleuvoir, to rain. 

pluie, /. rain. 

plume, /. feather, pen. 

la plupart, most. 

plus, more. ne... plus, not 
again, no more, no longer. 
de — en —, more and more. 
— tot, sooner. 

plusieurs, several. 

plutét, rather. 

pluvieux, -se, rainy. 

poche, /. pocket. 

poids, m. weight. 

poignet, m. wrist. 

point, m. point. 

ne... point, not, not at all. 

poire, /. pear. 

poisson, m. fish. 

poitrine, f. chest, breast. 

poivre, m. pepper. 





ph 


philosophy, philosophie, /. 
photograph, photographie, /. 
physician, médecin, m. 

to pick up, ramasser. 
picture, tableau, m. 

piece, morceau, m.; piece, f. 
pin, épingle, /. 

to pinch, serrer; blesser. 
pine-apple, ananas, m. 

to pity, plaindre. 

place, place, f.; lieu, m. 

to place, placer. 


English-French 





po 


plate, assiette, f. 
play, jeu, m. 


| to play, jouer. 


plaything, joujou, m. — 

pleasant, agréable, aimable. 

please, veuillez (with infin.). 

to please, plaire, faire plaisir a. 
if you —, s’il vous plait. 

pleased with, content (-e) de. 

pleasure, plaisir, m. 

plenty, beaucoup. 

pocket, poche, f/f. 


400 


po 


poli, -e (adj.), polite. 

poliment, politely. 

politesse, f. politeness. 

pomme, f/. apple. — de terre, 
f. potato. 

pont, m. bridge. 

bien portant, well. 

porte, /. door. 

porté, -e, carried. 

porte-monnaie, m. purse. 

porte-plume, m. pen-holder. 

porter, to carry, to bear, to 
wear, to put. — 4a, to take 
to. se —, to be. 

portiére, /. door. 

portrait, m. portrait. 

poser, to place, to put down. 

posséder, to possess. 

possible, possible. 

poste, m. post, station. 

poste, /. post-office. 

pot, m. pot, jug. — de terre, 
earthen pot. 

pouce, m. thumb, inch. 


poupée, /. doll. 
pour, for, to, in order to. 


Frangais-Anglais 





pourquoi, why. 

poursuivre, to pursue. 

pourtant, yet, however. 

pourvoir, to provide. 

pourvu que, provided. 

pousser, to push; to utter. 

poussiére, /. dust. 

pouvoir, to be able. 

pré, m. meadow. 

précieux, -se, precious, 

précisément, exactly. 

préférable, preferable. 

préférer, to prefer. 

premier, -ére, first, former. 

prendre, to take, catch. 
garde, to beware, take care. 

prenez, take. 

préparer, to prepare. 

prés de, near, beside, closely, 
on the point of. . 

présence, /. presence. 

présent, m. present. 
now. 

présenter, to show, to present. 

président, m. president. 

présider, to preside over. 


aa, 





po 


pocket-book, porte-monnaie, m. 

policeman, sergent (m.) de ville. 

polite, poli, -e. 

politely, poliment. 

poor, pauvre; (bad), mauvais, 
-e, 

pope, pape, m. 

portrait, portrait, m. 

positively, définitivement. 

to possess, posséder. 

possible, possible. 


post, poste, m. 


English-French 





pr 


posterity, postérité, /f. 
post-office, poste, /. 

potato, pomme de terre, f. 
pound, livre, /. 

to praise, louer. 

precious, précieux, -euse, 

to predict, prédire. 

to prefer, préférer, aimer mieux. 
preferable, préférable. 

to prepare, préparer. 
present, cadeau, présent, m. 
president, président, m. 


401 


pr 


presque, almost. 

prét, préte, ready. 

prété, lent. 

prétendre, to pretend. 

préter, to lend. 

préteur, m. préteuse, f. lender. 

prétre, m. priest. 

prévenir, to warn, 

prévenu, -e, warned, 

prévoir, to foresee. 

prier, to pray, to beg. 

priére, f. prayer, entreaty. 

prince, m. prince, 

princesse, /. princess, 

principal, principaux, principal. 

printemps, m. spring. 

pris, -e, taken. 

prison, /. prison, 

prisonnier, m. prisoner. 

prix, m. prize; price, value, 

prochain, -e, next. le mois 
—, next month. 

prodigieusement, greatly. 

professeur, m, professor, 


Frangas-Anglais 
profit, m. benefit. 





pr 


profond, -e (adj.), deep. 
profondeur, f. depth. 
proie, f. prey. 
promenade, /, walk; ride. 
promener, to take out to walk 
se —, to take a walk. 
promesse, /. promise. 
promettre, to promise. 
promis, -e, promised. 
promptement, quickly. 
prononcer, to pronounce, 
utter. 
propos, m. talk. 
proposition, /. proposal. 
propre a, fit for. 
propriétaire, m. landlord, 
propriété, f. property. 
protection, /, patronage. 
protéger, to protect. 
prouver, to prove. 
proverbe, m. proverb. 
provoquer, to provoke, 
prudence, /. prudence, 





pr 


to pretend, prétendre, 

pretty (adj.), joli, -e. 

price, prix, m. 

priest, prétre, m. 

prince, prince, m. 

princess, princesse, f, 

principal, principal, -e. 

principle, principe, m. 

prize, prix, m. to gain a —, 
gagner or remporter un 
prix. 

probity, probité, f. 

professor, professeur, m. 

to promise, promettre. 


English-French 





pr 


promised, promis, -e. 

to pronounce, prononcer, 
proof, preuve, /. 

proper, convenable. 

to be proper, convenir, 
property, propriété, f. 

in proportion as, 4 mesure que, 
proposal, proposition, f. 
to propose, proposer, 

to protect, protéger. 
protection, protection, f- 
proud, fier, fiere. 

to prove, prouver. 
proverb, proverbe, m, 


402 


pr 


la Prusse, Prussia. 
prussien, -ne, Prussian. 
pu, been able. 

public, publique, public. 
puis, then. 

puisque, since, as, 
puissant, -e, mighty. 
punir, to punish. 
punition, /. punishment. 
pupitre, m. desk. 


au’ stands for que. 

quand, when. depuis—, how 
long. 

quant a, as for. 

quarante, forty. 

quart, quarter, fourth. 
d’heure, quarter of an hour. 

quartier, m. quarter. Quar- 
tier Latin, the Latin Quarter, 
a part of Paris in which 
many colleges and_ schools 
are situated, 

quatorze, fourteen. 

quatre, four: 

quatre-vingts, eighty. 

quatre-vingt-dix, ninety. 


—ows 


Frangais- Anglais 





qu 


quatriéme, fourth. 

que (pron.), whom, 
that; (interr.), what. 

que (conj.), than, as, since; 
how; let. 

quel, quels, quelle, 
what, which, 

quelconque (after the noun), 
whatever, 

quelque (adj.), some, 

chose, something. 
part, somewhere, ~— temps, 
sometime, 

quelque (adv.), however, what- 
ever, 

quelqu’un, somebody, 
ques-uns, a few, 

quelquefois, sometimes, 

se quereller, to quarrel, 

qu’est-ce que ; . .? what? 

question, /. question. 

queue, f/f. tail. faire —, to 
stand in line. 

qui, who, which, that; (interr, 
or after prep.), who, whom, 

quinzaine, /. fortnight. 

quinze, fifteen, 

quitter, to leave, 


which, 


quelles, 


any. 


—_—— —_— = 


quel- 





pr 


provided that, pourvu que. 
to provide for, pourvoir a4, 
province, province, /. 
Prussia, la Prusse. 
Prussian, prussien, -ne, 
public, public, publique. 
punctuality, exactitude, /. 
to punish, punir. 
punishment, punition, f. 
pupil, éléve, m. or f, 


English-French 





qu 


purse, porte-monnaie, m, 

to pursue, poursuivre, 

put, mis, -e, placé, -e. 

to put, placer, mettre; — up 
(at a hotel), descendre, 


to quarrel, se quereller, 
quarter (the 4th part), quart, m, 
quarter (district), quartier, m, 


403 


qu 


quoi, which, what. 
wherewith. 
quoique, although. 


de quoi, 


raconter, to relate, to tell. 

rafraichir, to refresh. 

rageur, -se, passionate. 

raide, stiff. 

raison, f/f. reason, 
be right. 

raisonnable, reasonable, sensi- 
ble. 

ramage, m. warbling. 

ramasser, to pick up. 

ramener, to bring back. 

rang, m. rank. 

ranger, to range, to arrange. 

rapidement, quickly. 

rappeler, to remind, to recall. 

rare, rare. 

rat, m. rat. 

recevoir, to receive. 


avoir —, to 


Frangais-Anglais 





re 


recherché, -e, sought after. 

réciproquement, reciprocally. 

réclamer, to claim. 

recogner, to draw hack. 

recommander, to recommend, 
to order. 

recommencer, to begin again. 

récompense, /. reward. 

récompenser, to reward. 

reconnaissant, -e, grateful. 

reconnaitre, to recognize. 

se recoucher, to go to bed 
again, 

recu, -e, received. 

recueillir, to harvest. 

reculer, to go back. 

redemander, to ask back or 
again. 

réduire, to reduce. 

réfléchir, to reflect. 

réforme, /. reform. 

refuser, to refuse. 

regagner, to get back to. 





qu 


queen, reine, /. 
question, question, /. 
quite, tout a fait, tout. 


rabbit, lapin, m. 

railroad, chemin de fer, m. 
railway-carriage, wagon, m. 
railway station, gare, f. 
rain, pluie, /. 

to rain, pleuvoir: 

rainy, pluvieux, -se. 

rare, rare. 

raspberry, framboise, f. 

rat, rat, m. 


English-French 





to read, lire. 

read, lu, -e. 

ready, prét, préte, 

really, vraiment. 

reason, raison, /. 

reasonable, raisonnable. 

to receive, recevoir. 

received, recu, -e. 

reciprocally, réciproquement. 

to reckon, compter. 

to recommend, conseiller. 

red, rouge; of hair, roux, 
rousse. 

to reflect, réfléchir. 

to refuse, refuser. 


404 


re 


régal, m. treat. 

regard, m. look; (plur.), glances, 
eyes. 

regarder, to look at; to concern. 

régiment, m. regiment, 

régle, f. rule. 

régler, to settle. 

régner, to reign. 

regretter, to regret. 

régulier, -ére, regular. 

reine, /. queen. 

réjouir, to rejoice. 

relever, to lift up, to push up. 

relire, to read again. 

reluire, to shine, glitter. 

remarquable, remarkable. 

remarquer, to notice. 

remercier, to thank. 

remettre, to put on again; to 
send. 

remords, m. remorse. 

remplir, to fill, to fulfil. 

remporter, to carry back; to win. 

remuer, to move. 

renard, m. fox. 

se rencogner, to get into a 
corner. 


Frangais-Anglais 





Te 


rencontrer, to meet. 

rendre, to render, to make, to 
return, to restore, to yield. 
— visite, to pay a visit. se 
—, to surrender one’s self. 

rendu, -e, given back; returned. 

renoncer, to renounce. 

rentes, /. pl. income, property. 

rentrer, to enter, to return; to 
come home again. 

répandre, to spread. 

repartir, to set off again; to 
answer. 

repas, m. meal. 

se repentir, to repent. 

répéter, to repeat. 

réplique, ff. reply. sans —, 
without replying, at once. 

répondre, to answer. 

réponse, /. answer. 

se reposer, to rest one’s self. 

reprendre, to resume; to re- 
ply. 

représentation, /. representa- 
tion, show. 

réprimer, to repress, to curb. 

reprocher, to reproach. 





re 


to regret, regretter. 
regular, régulier, réguliére. 
to reign, régner. 

to relate, raconter. 

relative, parent, m. 

to remain, rester. 
remained, resté, -e. 
remarkable, remarquable. 
remedy, reméde, m. 

to remember, se souvenir (de). 
remembrance, souvenir, m. 


English-French 





re 


to remind, rappeler, 

to remit, remettre. 

to renounce, renoncer (A). 

to repeat, répéter. 

reply, réponse, /. 

to reply, répondre, 

report, bruit, m. 
representation, représentation 


to reproach for, reprocher Aa. 
to resign, se démettre. 


405 


Te 


république, /. republic. 

respect, m. respect. Manquer 
de —, to be disrespectful. 

respectueusemient, respect- 
fully. 

ressemblant, -e, a good likeness. 

ressembler, to resemble. 

ressortir, to go out again. 
reste, m. remainder. du —, 

however, after all. 

resté, -e, remained, stayed. 

rester, to remain, to stay. 

résulter, to follow. 

rétabli, -e, recovered. 

se rétablir, to be restored to 
health. 

retenir, to engage, to keep. 

retentir, to resound. 

retirer, to withdraw, draw 

back. 

retour, m. return. de —, re- 
turned, back again. 

retourner, to return, to go back. 

retrouver, to find, to find again. 


Francgais-Anglais 





TO 


réussir, to succeed, to be suc- 
cessful. 

réveiller, to awaken. 

revenant, m. ghost. 

revenir, to come back. | 

revenu, -e, come back, re- 
turned. 

revoir, to see again. 

le Rhin, the Rhine. 

rhume, m. cold. 

ri, laughed. 

riant, -e, laughing. 

riche, rich. | 

richement, richly. 

rien, nothing. 

rire, m. laughter. 

rire (v.), to laugh. 

rive, f. bank, shore. 

riviére, f. river. 

robe, /. dress, robe. 

roi, m. king. 

réle, m. character, part. 

roman, m. novel, romance, 

rompre, to break. 





re 


resistance, résistance, /. 

respect, respect, m. to fail in 
—, manquer de respect 4a. 

rest (remainder), reste, m. 

to rest, se reposer. 

to resume, reprendre. 

to return (to give back), rendre; 
(to come back), revenir; (to 
go back), retourner. 

returned (come back), revenu, 
-e; (given back), rendu, -e. 

revolution, révolution, f. 

reward, récompense, /. 

to reward, récompenser. 





English-French ri 


Rhine, le Rhin. 

ribbon, ruban, m. 

rich, riche. 

to ride, monter. — horse- 
back, monter 4 cheval. to 
go riding, aller 4 cheval. 

right, droit, -e, juste. to be 
—, avoir raison. 

ring, bague, /. 

to ring, sonner. 

ripe, mdr, -e. 

to ripen, mirir. 

to rise, se lever. 

river, riviére, f.; fleuve, m. 


406 


TO 


rond, -e, round. 

rose, f. rose. 

rouge, red. 

rougir, to blush, 
rouler, to roll. 

route, /. road, way. 
roux, rousse, red. 
royal, -e, royal. 
royaume, m. kingdom, 
ruban, m. ribbon. 

rue, f. street. 

ruine, /. ruin. 
ruisseau, m. stream. 
ruse, f. cunning, trick. 
la Russie, Russia. 


s’ stands for se; before il or ils, 
for si. 

sa, his, her, its. 

sable, m. sand. 

sac, m. bag. sac de nuit, m. 
travelling-bag. 


Frangais-Anglais 





sacrifier, to sacrifice, 

sage, wise, good. 

saint, -e, holy. 

Saisir, to seize, 

saison, /. season, 

sale, dirty. 

salir, to soil. 

salle, /. hall, room, 
manger, dining-room, 
classe, f. classroom. 

salon, m. drawing-room, parlor. 

samedi, m. Saturday. 

sang, m. blood. 

sanglant, -e, bloody. 

sans, without, but for. 

santé, /. health. 

sauf, except. 

sauvage, wild. 

sauver, to save. 

savamment, cunningly. 

savant, -e, learned. 

savoir, to know. 

savon, m. soap. 


— a 
—de 





To 


road, route, f.; chemin, m. 
roasted, rdti, -e. 

Rome, Rome, /. 

roof, toit, m. 

room, chambre, f.; salle, /. 
rose, rose, f. 

round, rond, -e. 


_ Tule, ruler, régle, f. 


to sacrifice, sacrifier. 
sad, triste; chagrin, -e. 
safely, sans accident. 
said, dit. © 

salad, salade, /. 


English-French 





sc 


salt, sel, m. 

same, méme. 

sand, sable, m. 

satisfied, content, -e. 

Saturday, samedi, m. 

savage, sauvage, m. 

Savoy, la Savoie. 

scandal, scandale, m. 

scarcely, & peine, ne... 
guere. 

scarf, écharpe, /. 

scenery, paysage, m. 

school, école, f. at —,A4 
Vécole. boarding-—, pen- 
sion, /. 


407 


sa 


la Saxe, Saxony. 

scandaleux, -se, scandalous. 

scélérat, m. scoundrel. 

scéne, f. scene, incident. 

science, /. science. 

sculpture, /. sculpture. 

se, himself, to himself; her- 
self, to herself; one’s self, 
to one’s self; themselves, 
to themselves. 

sec, séche, dry. 

sécher, to dry up. 

second, -e (adj.), second. 

seconde, /. second (of time). 

secouer, to shake. 

secourir, to assist. 

secret, m. secret. 

secret, secréte (adj.), secret, 
hidden. 

secrétement, secretly. 

seigneur, m. lord. 

la Seine, the Seine. 


Franeais-Anglais 


| seize, sixteen. 

| sel, m. salt. 

| selon, according to. 
| semaine, f. week. 





semblant, m. appearance. 

sembler, to appear, to seem. 
ce me semble, it seems to me. 

sens, m. sense, Meaning. 

sentier, m. path. 

sentiment, m. feeling. 

sentir, to feel; to smell. 

séparer, to separate. se —, 

to part. 


| sept, seven. 


septembre, m. September. 
septiéme, seventh. 
sergent, m. sergeant, 
sérieux, -se, serious. 
serment, m. oath. 

serpent, m. serpent. 
serrure, /. lock. 

service, m. service. 





sc 


science, science, f/f. . 

scissors, ciseaux, m. pl. 

to scold, gronder. 

Scotland, |’ Ecosse, /. 

scoundrel, scélérat, m. 

sculpture, sculpture, /. 

sea, mer, /. 

seashore, at the, au bord de la 
mer. 

season, saison, f. 

seated, assis, -e. 

second, second, -e; deuxiéme. 

second (of tume), seconde, f/f. 

secret, secret, m. 

secret (ad7.), secret, secreie. 

to see, voir. 


English-French 





see! tenez! 

to seek, chercher. 

to seem, sembler, 

seen, VU, -e. 

to seize, saisir. 

selfish, égoiste. 

to sell, vendre. 

to send, envoyer. 

sentence, phrase, /. 

September, septembre, m. 

seriously, sérieusement. 

serpent, serpent, m. 

servant, bonne, /,; 
tique, m. or f. 

to serve, servir. 

service, service, m. 


domes- 


408 


serviette, f. napkin, towel. 

servir, to serve. se — de, to 
use. 

ses, his, her, its. 

seul, -e, alone. 

seulement, only. 

sévére, severe. 

sévérement, severely. 

si, if, so; yes. si fait, yes, in- 
deed ! 

siége, m. seat; siege. 

le sien, les siens, la sienne, les 
siennes, his, hers, its. 

siffler, to whistle. 


Franeais-Anglais 


siffet, m. a whistle. 

signe, m. sign, signal. 
signer, to sign. 

sillons, m. plur. plains, fields. 
simple, simple, foolish. 
simplement, simpiy, merely. 
sincére (adj.), sincere, 
singe, m. monkey. 

sire, m. sire, 

sit6t, so soon, 

Six, six. 

sixiéme, sixth. 

soeur, /. sister. 





soi, one’s self, himself, herself. 





se 


to set out, partir. 

seven, sept. 

seventeen, dix-sept. 

seventh, septiéme. 

seventy, soixante-dix. 

several, plusieurs. 

severely, sévérement. 

shall. I— buy it, je l’achéterai. 
He — do it, je veux qu’il 
le fasse. — I buy some? 
faut-il en acheter? IF — 
-come at once, je vais venir 
tout de suite. 

shame, honte, /. 

sharp, aigu, -é. 

she, elle. she who, celle qui. 

sheep, mouton, m.; brebis, /. 

to be shipwrecked, faire nau- 
frage. 

shoe, soulier, m. 

shop, magasin, m. 

to go shopping, faire des em- 
plettes. 

shore, bord, m. 


English-French 


si 
short, court, -e, petit, -e. 
shoulder, épaule, /. 
to show, montrer. — me, 


montrez-moi. 
shut, fermé, -e. 
to shut, fermer. 
sick, malade. 
silent, muet, muette. 
silk, soie, f. 
silver, argent, m. 
simple, simple. 
simply, simplement. 
‘since, depuis; puisque. 
‘sincere, sincére. 
to sing, chanter. 
sir, monsieur, m. 
sister, sceur, f. 
sister-in-law, belle-sceur, f. 
to sit, s’asseoir. 
sitting, assis, -e. 
situation, place, f. 
six, six. 
sixteen, seize. 





sixth, sixiéme. 


409 


sO 


soie, /. silk. 
soif, f. thirst. 
thirsty. 
soigner, to nurse. 
soir, m. evening. 
evening, to-night. 
last evening. 
soirée, /f. evening; 
party. 
soixante, sixty. 
soixante-dix, seventy. 
soldat, m. soldier. 
soleil, m. sun. 
somme, /, sum. 


avoir —, to be 


ce —, this 
hier —, 


evening 


Frangais-Anglais 





so 


son, m. sound, 

son, sa, ses, his, her, its. 

sonder, to probe, 

songer, to think. 

sonnette, /. bell. 

sont, are, belong. sont a, be-- 
long to. 

sort, m. fate. 

sortant, -e, going out, retiring. 

sorti, -e, gone out. 

sortir, to go out, to issue, 

sot, sotte, foolish, stupid. 

sou, m. cent; sou, five centimes, 

soudain, suddenly. 





sommeil, m. sleep, avoir —, | souffler, to blow. 

to be sleepy. souffrir, to suffer; to allow. 
si Linglish-French so 
sixty, soixante. tant. — soon, sitét. — 
to skate, patiner. long as, tant que. — dol, 


sky, ciel, m. 

to slander, calomnier, médire 
de. 

slate, ardoise, /. 

slave, esclave, m. or /. 

to sleep, dormir. to be sleepy, 
avoir sommeil. 

sleepless night, - 
blanche. 

slept, dormi. 

slice, tranche, /. 

slipper, pantoufle, f. 

small, petit, -e. 

to smell, sentir. 

to smoke, fumer. 

snake, serpent, m. 

snow, neige, /. 

SO, sl; (after a transitive verb), 
le; (after an intransitive), 
ainsi. —- many, — much, 


une nuit 





moi aussi. 
soap, savon, m, 
soft, mou, molle. 
to soil, salir. 
sold, Vendu, -e. 
soldier, soldat, m. 
some, du, de la, de 1’, des; 
en; quelque, quelques-uns. 
somebody, quelqu’un. 
something, quelque 
— else, autre chose. 
sometime, quelque temps. 
sometimes, quelquefois. 
somewhat, un peu, assez. 
somewhere, quelque part. 
son, fils, m. 
song, chanson, /. 
soon, bientdét. 
sooner, plus tét. 
sorrowful, chagrin, -e. . 


chose. 


410 


ST iy 


souhaiter, to wish; to hope. 

soulier, m. shoe. 

soup¢on, m. suspicion, 

soupe, f. soup. 

souper (v.), to sup. 

souper, m. supper. 

sourd, -e (adj.), deaf, 

- sourire, m. smile. 

sourire (v.), to smile, 

souris, /. mouse. 

sous, under, below, beneath. 

sous-officier, non-commis- 
sioned officer. 

soutenir, to bear, to maintain, 
to uphold. 


Frangais*Anglais 





su 


se souvenir, to remember. 

souvenir, m. token. 

souvent, often. » 

spectacle, m. sight, play. 

splendeur, /. splendor, bright- 
ness. 

station, /. station. 

studieux, -se, studious. 

stupide, stupid. 

subitement, suddenly. 

subtilité, 7. subtlety. 

succés, m. success. 

sucre, m. sugar. 

sud, m. south. 

suffire, to suffice. 





so 


sorry, faché, triste, chagrin, -e. 
to be —, étre faché de. 

soul, Ame, /. 

soup, soupe, /. 

south, midi, m., sud, m. 

Spain, l’Espagne, /. 

Spanish, espagnol, -e. 

to speak, parler. 

to spend, passer. 

in spite of, malgré. 

splendid, magnifique, superbe. 

spoken, parlé, -e. 

spoon, cuiller, /,. 

spring, printemps, m. 

to sprain, démettre. 

square (adj.), carré, -e. 

staircase, escalier, m. 

stake, to be at stake, y aller de. 

to stand still, ne pas bouger. 

standing, debout. 

to start for, partir pour. 

station, gare, /. 

to stay, rester. 


English-French 





‘st 


stayed, resté, -e. 

in his stead, 4 sa place. 

steamboat, bateau (m.) & va- 
peur. 

steel, acier, m. 

stick, canne, /. 

still, encore. 

store, Magasin, m. 

stormy, orageux, -se. 

story, histoire, f. (of a house), 
étage, m. 

stout, gros, grosse. 

straight, droit, -e. 

strange, étrange. 

stranger, étranger, m. 

straw, paille, /. 

strawberry, fraise, /. 

stream, ruisseau, m. 

street, rue, /. 

strength, force, /. 

to strike, frapper. 

strong, fort, -e. 

studious, studieux, -se. 


411 


su 


la Suisse, Switzerland. 

suite, f. train; what follows. 
tout de’—, at once, di- 
rectly. 

suivant, -e, following. 

suivre, to follow. 

sujet, sujette, subject. 

supercherie, /f. deceit, swindle. 

supérieur, -e, superior. 

supplier, to implore. 

supporter, to support. 

supposer, to suppose, 

sur, on, upon, 


Frangais- Anglais 





F 


ta, thy. 

table, /. table. 

tableau, m. picture. 

tablette, f. tablet. 

tacher, to try. 

taille, f. figure, build. 

taire, to say nothing about, to 
be silent. se —, to hold 
one’s tongue, keep quiet. 

talent, m. talent. 

tandis que, while. 

tant, so much, so many. 
soit peu, however little. 


—_—— 





sfir, -e, sure, certain. tante, f. aunt. 
surpris, -e, surprised. tantét, by and by; sometimes. 
sursaut, m. start. en—, with | tard, -e, late. 

a start. tarder a, to be late in, to delay. 
surtout, above all. tasse, f. cup. 
st Finglish-French te 


to study, étudier. 

subject, sujet, m. 

subject (adj.), sujet, sujette. 
to submit, soumettre. 

to succeed, réussir. 

such, pareil, -le; tel, telle. 
to suffer, souffrir. 
suffering, souffrant, -e. 
sugar, sucre, m. 

sum, somme, f. © 

summer, été, mm. 

sun, soleil, m. 

Sunday, dimanche, m, 
support, appui, m. 

to support, appuyer. 

to suppose, supposer. 

sure, sir, -e, certain, -e. 
to surprise, surprendre. 

to surrender, se rendre. 

to sweep, balayer. 





sweet, doux, douce; parfumé, -e. 
Switzerland, la Suisse. 
sword, épée, f. 


table, table, /f. 

tailor, tailleur, m, 

to take, prendre. — to, me- 
ner, conduire. —a walk, se 
promener. — after, tenir de. 
— away, enlever. — off, 
dter. 

taken, pris, prise. 

talent, talent, m. 

to talk, parler. 

talkative, causeur, ~euse. 

tall, grand, -e, 

tea, thé, m. 

to teach, 


enseigner (A), ap- 
prendre. : 


412 


: | 


te, thee, to thee; thyself, to 
thyself. 

tel, telle, such. um—, such a. 

tellement, so much so. 

témoigner, to show, to ex- 
press. 

tempéte, /. tempest, storm. 

temps, m. time; weather. 4a 
—, in or on time. combien 
de —, how long. de — en—, 
now and then. 


tendre (v.), to hold out, to 


stretch. 

tenez! see here! I say! stopa 
moment. 

tenir, to hold, to keep. 
compte, to take into con- 
sideration. 

tenter, to attempt; to tempt. 

terme, m. term, expression; 
end, 

terminer, to end. 

terrain, m. soil, ground. 


Frangais-Anglais 





to 


terre, f. land, earth; par —, 
on the floor. 

terrible, awful; enfant —, 
plague of a child, nuisance. 

territoire, m. territory. 

tes, thy. 

téte, f. head. 

thé, m. tea. 

théatre, m. scene, theatre. 

théme, m. exercise. 

Thérése, /. Theresa. 

le tien, la tienme, les tiens, les 
tiennes, thine. 

tiens! there! I say! indeed! 

tiers, m. a third. 

tigre, m. tiger. 

timide, timid, modest. 

tiré, -e, drawn; shot. 

tirer, to draw; to fire. se 
tirer, to get out. 

tiroir, m. drawer. 

toi, thou, thee, to thee. toi- 
méme, thyself. 





te 


teacher, maitre,m.; maitresse, /f. 

to tear, déchirer. 

to tear out, arracher. 

to tell, raconter, dire a. 

temper, humeur, /. 

temple, temple, m. 

ten, dix. 

tender, tendre, délicat, -e. 

tenth, dixiéme. 

Thames, the, la Tamise. 

than, que; (before a number), 
de. 


to thank, remercier. thank 
you, merci, thanks to, grace 


a. 


English-French 





th 

that (adj.), ee, cet, cette. (de- 
mon. pron.), celui, celle; 
celui-la, celle-la; cela. (rel. 


pron.), qui (nom.), que (ace. ). 
(conj.), que, that’sall, voila 
tout. 

the, le, la, les. 

theatre, théAtre, m. 

thee, te, toi. 

theft, vol, m. 

their, leur, leurs. 

theirs, le leur, la leur, les leurs. 

them, les; eux, elles. to —, leur. 

themselves, se; eux-mémes, 
elles-mémes. 


413 


to 


toit, m. roof. 

Toléde, /. Toledo. 
tombé, -e, fallen. 
tomber, to fall. 

ton, ta, tes, thy. 

ton, m. tone. 
tonnerre, m. thunder. 


Frangais-Anglais 





to 


tort, m. wrong. avoir —, to 
be wrong. 

t6t, soon, early. 

toujours, always, still. 

tour, m. turn. faire un —, 
to take a turn. 


tour, f. tower. 





th 


then, (afterwards), ensuite, 
alors, puis; (therefore), donc. 


there, 14, y. — is, are, il y a, 
voila. — was, were, il y 
avait. 

' therefore, donc. 

these (adj.), ces. (pron.), 
ceux-ci, celles-ci. 

they, ils, on. — who, ceux 


qui, celles qui. 

thick, épais, -se. 

thickness, épaisseur, /. 

thimble, dé, m. 

thine, le tien, la tienne, les 
tiens, les tiennes. 

thing, chose, f. 

to think, penser; trouver. 


third, troisiéme. a —, un 
tiers. 7 

thirst, soif. to be thirsty, 
avoir soif. 


thirteen, treize. 
thirty, trente. 
this (adj.), 
(pron.), 
ceci. 
those (adj.), ces. (pron.), ceux, 
celles; ceux-la, celles-la. 
thou, tu, toi. 
though, quoique, cependant. 
thousand, mille (mil, 77 dates). 


ce, cet, 
celui-ci, 


cette; 
celle-ci; 


English-French 





to 


thousandth, milliéme. 

thread, fil, m. 

to threaten, menacer. 

three, trois. 

throat, gorge, f. 

to throw, jeter. 

thumb, pouce, m. 

thunder, tonnerre, m. 

Thursday, jeudi, m. 

thus, ainsi; at the beginning of 
a sentence, aussi. 

thy, ton, ta, tes. 

thyself, te, toi-méme. 

tiger, tigre, m. 

till, jusqu’A; (conj7.), jusqu’a 
ce que (with subj.). 

time, temps, m.; fois, f. a 
long —, longtemps. by this 
—, maintenant. from — 
to —, de temps en temps. 

in time, 4 temps. 

tin, fer-blanc, m. 

tipsy, gris, grise. 

tired, las, lasse; fatigué, -e; 
(bored), ennuyé, -e. 

to, a, jusqu’a. 

to-day, aujourd’hui. 

together, ensemble. 

told, dit, dite, raconté, -e. 

to-morrow, demain. 

tongue, langue, /. 


i 


414 


to 


tourment, m. torment. 

tourmenter, to tease. 

tourner, to turn round. 

tousser, to cough. 

tout, -e, tous, toutes, all, whole, 
every, everything. 

tout (adv.), quite. — a coup, 
suddenly. — 4a fait, quite. 
— a Vheure, a little while 
ago, just now. — au moins, 
at the very least. — de 
suite, at once. — en, while. 
— juste, exactly. 

traduire, to translate. 

tragédie, /. tragedy. 

tragique, tragic. 

trahir, to betray. 

trahison, f. treason, treachery. 

train, m. train; style. étre en 
— de, to be in the act of. 

traineau, m. sledge. 

trainer, to drag. se —, to 
creep along, to trudge. 

traiter, to treat, to serve. 
de, to treat as or like. 


—_— 


Frangais-Anglais 





tr 


tranche, /. slice. 

tranquille, easy, calm, tranquil, 
in peace. 

transporter, to carry, to take. 

travail, travaux, m. work. 

travaillé, -e, worked. 

travailler, to work. 

a travers, through, across. 

traverser, to cross, to go across. 

treize, thirteen. 

tremblant, -e, trembling. 

trembler, to shake, to shiver, 

trente, thirty. 

trés, very; very much (beforea 
past part.). 

tressaillir, to tremble, to start. 

tribune, /. gallery. 

triste, sad, sorry. 

trois, three. 

troisiéme, third. 

trompé, -e, mistaken, deceived, 

tromper, to deceive. se —, 
to be mistaken. 

trop, too much, too many, too. 
de trop, in the way. 





to 


to-night, ce soir. 

too (also), aussi; (before adj. or 
adv.), trop. “— many, — 
much, trop. 

tooth, dent, /. 

toward, vers. 

town, ville, /. 

toy, joujou, m. 

trade, métier, m. 

train, train, m. 

to transmit, transmettre. 

to travel, voyager. 

treason, trahison, f. 


English-French 





to treat, traiter. 

tree, arbre, m. 

to tremble, trembler. 

trembling, tremblant, -e. 

trial, procés, m. 

trifle, misére, f.; rien, m. 

to trouble, déranger. 

troubled (adj.), inquiet, -éte. 

troublesome, fatigant, -e; en- 
nuyeux, -se. 

true, vrai, -e. 

trunk, malle, f. 

to trust, se fier a. 


415 


tr Franeais-Anglais va 


troupeau, m. flock. 

trousses, f,, 4 mes —, at my 
heels. 

trouvé, -e, found. 

trouver, to find; to chink; to 
like. se —, to be; to hap- 
pen. — bon, approve, think 


fit. —mauvais, disapprove. 
tu, thou. 
tuer, to kill. se tuer, to kill 


one’s self or each other. 
tulipe, f. tulip. 
tumulte, m, uproar. 
turbot, m. turbot. 
turc, turque, Turkish. 
tuteur, m. guardian. 





V’un et 
V’un lautre, 


un, une, a, an,° one. 
l’autre, both. 
each other. 

uniforme, m. uniform. 

univers, m. universe. 

urgent, -e, urgent, pressing. 

utile, useful. 

utilement, usefully. 


vaccine, f. vaccination. 

vache, f. cow. 

vague, /. wave. 

en vain, in vain. 

vaincre, to overcome, to con- 
quer, 





tr English-French ve 


truth, vérité, f. 

to try, essayer, ticher de. 
Tuesday, mardi, m. 

tulip, tulipe, f. 

Turkish, ture, turque. 
turn, tour, m. 

tutor, précepteur, m. 
twelve, douze. 

twenty, vingt. 

twice, deux fois. 

twin, jumeau, m., jumelle, f- 
two, deux. 


ugly, vilain, -e. 

umbrella, parapluie, m. 

uncle, oncle, m. 

under, sous. 

uneasy, inquiet, inquiéte. 

unfortunate, malheureux, -se. 

unfortunately, malheureuse- 
ment. 





ungrateful, ingrat, -e, 

unhappy, malheureux, -se; mé- 
content, -e, 

United States, les Etats-Unis, 
m, 

unjustly, injustement. 

unless, 4 moins que. 

until, jusqu’a ce que. 

unwell, malade. 

upon, sur. 

us, to us, nous, 

use, usage, m. 

useful, utile. 

useless, inutile, 

as usual, comme & l’ordinaire. 


various, divers, -e, différent, -e. 

vegetable, légume, m. 

very, trés, bien. —-much, beau- 
coup. —well! eh bien! 

to vex, facher. 


416 





™ io y 

a doh x 
— a a s 
ae ». . 


ee 


va 


vaineu, -e, vanquished, con- 
quered, 

vainqueur, m. conqueror. 

valet, m. valet. 

valeur, f. bravery; value. 

valoir, to be worth. — mieux, 
to be better. 

se vanter, to extol one’s self or 
each other. 

vaste, vast. 

veiller, to watch; to lie awake. 

veiours, m. velvet. 

vendre, to sell. se —, to be 
sold; to fetch (a price). 

vendredi, m. Friday. 

vendu, -e, sold. 

vengeance, /. vengeance. 

venir, to come, — de, to have 
just. 

vent, m. wind. 

venu, -é, come. 

vérité, f. truth. 

vermisseau, m. little worm. 

verre, m. glass. 

vers (prep.), towards. 

vers, m. verse, line. 

vert, -e, green. 

vertu, f. virtue. 

veuve, f. widow. 

viande, /. meat. 

victoire, f. victory. 

victorieux, -se, victorious. 

vider, to empty. 





Frangais-Anglais 


vie, f. life, living; ‘good time. 
de ma vie, as long as I live. 

Vienne, f. Vienna. 

vieux, vieil, vieille, old. 

vif, vive, lively, quick, keen, 
alive. 

vigne, /. vine. 

vilain, -e, ugly, bad, wretched, 

village, m. village. 

ville, f. town, city, 

vin, m. wine. 

vingt, twenty. 

vingtiéme, twentieth, 

violer, to violate. 

visage, m. face, look, 

viser, to aim. 

visite, f. visit. 

visité, -e, visited. 

visiter, to visit. 

vite, quickly, quick. 

vivement, sharply, 
keenly. 


eagerly, 


._| vivre, to live. 


voici, here is, here are. 

voila, there is, there are. 

voir, to see. 

voisin, m., voisine, f. neighber, 
voisin, -e (adj.), next, near. 
voiture, f. carriage. 

voix, f. voice. 

voler, to fly; to steal. 
volontiers, willingly. 

votre, vos, your. 





vi 

victory, victoire, f. 
Vienna, Vienne, /. 
village, village, m. 
to violate, trahir. 
virtue, vertu, f. 





English-French 


vo 


visit, visite, f. to pay a —, 
rendre visite. 

to visit, visiter, aller chez. 

voice, voix, f. 

voyage, voyage, m. 


417 


vo | Frangais-Anglais wh 


le vétre, la —, les vétres, 
yours. 

voulez-vous, will you have? 
do you wish? 

vouloir, to like, to wish, to will. 
— bien, to consent, to permit. 
en — 4a, to have a grudge 
against. — dire, to mean. 

vous, you, to you; yourself, 
to yourself; yourselves, to 
yourselves, vous-méme, 
yourself. 





voyage, m. voyage, journey. 

voyager, to travel. 

voyageur, m, traveller. 

vrai, -e, true. c’est —, it is 
true. | 

vraiment, truly, really. 

vu, -e, seen. 

vue, f. sight. 


wagon, m. railway carriage. 
whist, m. whist. 





wa Hinglish-French — wh 


to wait for, attendre. 

walk, promenade, f/f. to take 
a-—, se promener. to go 
out for a —, aller faire une 
promenade. 

to walk, aller & pied. — 
lame, boiter. 


want, besoin, m. to be in —, 


avoir besoin; falloir. to —, 
vouloir. 

war, guerre, /. 

warm, chaud, -e. to be —, 


avoir chaud. 

to wash, laver. 

to waste, perdre. 

watch, montre, f. 

to watch, regarder, 

water, eau, /. 

to water, arroser. 

way, chemin, m. 

We, nous; on. 

to wear, porter. 

weather, temps, m. in this cold 
—, par le froid qu’il fait. 

Wednesday, mercredi, m. 

week, semaine, f. 





to weep, pleurer. 

to welcome, accueillir, 

well, bien, to be —,se porter 
bien. : 

what, quel, quelle; quels, 
quelles; ce qui, ce que. 


whatever, quelconque (after 


the noun). 

when, quand, lorsque; (interr.), 
quand, 

where, ou. 

which, rel. pron. (nom.) qui, 
(acc.) que; (interr. pron. after 
prep. or followed by of), 


lequel, laquelle; lesquels, 
lesquelles. from —, of 
—, duquel, de laquelle; 


desquels, desquelles; dont. 
to —, auquel, 4 laquelle; 
auxquels, auxquelles. (in- 
terr. adj.), quel. 

while, en (with pres. part.), 
pendant que, tandis que. 

whist, whist, m. 

to whistle, siffler. 

whistle, siffler, m. 


418 


OS ea 


A J 


Frangais- Anglais 


y, there; to it, to them; to|zéro, m. zero, nought. 


him, to her; in it, in them. 
yeux, m. (plur. of ceil), eyes. 





-wh 


_white, blanc, blanche. 

who, qui. 

whoever, qui que. 

whole, tout, -e; tous, toutes. 

whom, que; (after prep.), qui. 

why? pourquoi? 

why! mais! 

wicked, méchant, -e. 

wide, large. 

width, largeur, /. 

wife, femme, /. 

wild, féroce, sauvage. 

William, Guillaume, m. 

to be willing, vouloir (bien). 

willingly, volontiers. 

will you have? voulez-vous? 

to win, gagner; remporter. 

wind, vent, m. 

window, fenétre, /f. 

wine, vin, m. 

winter, hiver, m. 

wise, sage. 

to wish, désirer, 
vouloir. 

with, avec. 

without, sans. 

wolf, loup, m. 

woman, femme, /. 

wonderful, merveilleux, -se. 

wood, bois, m. 

wooden, de bois. 

wool, laine, /. 

word, mot, m. in a —, en 
un mot. 

work, ouvrage, m.; travail, m. 


souhaiter, 


English-French 





ze 


to work, travailler, 

workman, ouvrier, 

world, monde, m. 

worse, plus mauvais, pire, . 

to be worth, valoir. 

worthy, digne. 

to wound one’s self or each 
other, se blesser. 

wrist, poignet, m. 

to write, écrire. 

writer, écrivain. 

written, écrit, -e, 

to be wrong, avoir tort. 

wrought, travaillé, -e. 


/ 

yard, cour, f. 

year, ay, m.; année, f. last 
—, l’année derniére, /, 

yellow, jaune. 

yes, oui; si. 

yesterday, hier. 

yet (again, still), encore; (how- 
ever), pourtant. 

you, vous; on. 

young, jeune. — lady, jeune 
fille, demoiselle, /. 

your, votre, vos. yours, le 
vétre, la yétre, les vétres. 

yourself, vous, vous-méme. 

yourselves, vous, vous-mémes, 

youth, jeunesse, /. 


zero, a¢ro, Mm. 


419 


? 





INDEX. 


Numbers refer to pages. 


&, contraction with definite arti- 
cle, 35; repetition, 32; denoting 
use, 264; other uses, 268; with 
the infinitive after certain verbs, 
‘225. 

accents, 1, 2. 

acquérir, conjugation, 334. 

active voice, 330. _ 

adjectives, agreement in gender, 
24; in number, 29; qualifying 
two or more nouns, 30; forma- 
tion of feminine, 24, 125-129; of 
plural, 29, 67; comparison, 41, 
94, 253; demonstrative, 45, 44, 
46; numeral, 48, 51; possessive, 
27,28; interrogative, 107 ; indefi- 
nite, 248; position, 47, 87, 92, 
134, 251; list of those which 
change their meaning with their 
position, 351; verbal, 230. 

adverbs, formation, 252, 353; 
comparison, 253; position, 130, 
253; of quantity, 76. 

age, ways of expressing, 114. 

ago, 54, 109. 

aller, conjugation, 110; idiomatic 
uses, 153, 220, 237. 

s’en aller, conjugation, 237. 

alphabet, 1. 

année, contrasted with an, 235. 

another, how expressed, 58, note. 

any, before a noun, 80; excep- 
tional uses of, 85, 87; without a 
noun, 80. 

apercevoir and s’apercevoir, 
152. 

apostrophe, use, 2. 





article, definite: contraction with 
a, 35; with de, 37; before proper 
names, 166, 167; before nouns 
of weight, measure, or number, 
170; in general statement, 71, 
166; omission, 166, 167; repeti- 
tion, 32; used as possessive ad- 
jectives, 134, 169; with titles, 
etc., 170; with adjectives used 
as nouns, 170; partitive article, 
80, 85, 87, 171; indefinite, 21, 
171. 

as, in a comparison, 58. 

assaillir, conjugation, 334. 

s’asseoir, conjugation, 254. 

as soon as, with the future, 104. 

aussi, in comparisons, 94. 

aussit6t. que, with future, 104. 

autre and encore, 58. 

auxiliary verbs, conjugation, 
308-319. 

avant, distinguished from devant, 
56. 

avoir, conjugation in full, 308; 
idiomatic use, 133, 134. 


battre, conjugation, 244. 

better, translation, adjective, 41; 
adverb, 117, 253. 

bien, followed by des, 76; posi- 
tion, 130, 253; comparison, 117. 

boire, conjugation, 270. 

bon, different meanings, 
com parison, 94. 

bouger, without pas or point, 
256. 

brave, different meanings, 351. 


351; 


421 


422 


Index 


Numbers refer to pages. 


capital letters, use of, 15, 16; 


with days and months, 53. 

cardinal, see numbers. 

ce, cet, cette, ces, 43. 

ceci, cela, 47. 

cedilla, 2. 

celui, celle, ceux, celles, 45, 46. 

cent, use of, 49. 

-cer, verbs ending in, 184. 

certain, different meanings, 351. 

cesser, used without pas, 256. 

c’est and ce sont, 96, 97, 122. 

chez, 56. 

-ci, 46. 

cing, pronunciation, 33. 

collective nouns, with singular 

. or plural verb, 234. 

college examinations, selected 
sentences, 279. 

color, adjectives of, 47. 

commun, different meanings, 351. 

, comparison of adjectives, 41, 
94; of adverbs, 253. 

compound tenses, 157. 

conditional, formation and use, 
136, 137; after si, 215. 

conduire, conjugation, 244. 

conjugation, 59; first, 60; second, 
69; third, 74; fourth, 82; pecul- 
‘jarities in first, 180-185; table of 
formation of tenses, 242; table 
of terminations, 520; of regular 
verbs in full, 822-329; of irregu- 
lar verbs, 334-347. 

conjunctions, used with the sub- 
junctive, 204; may be changed 
to a preposition to avoid the use 
of the subjunctive, 228. : 

conjunctive pronouns, 143. 

connaitre, conjugation, 202; dis- 
tinguished from savoir, 207. 

consonants, 7. 

countries, names of, with or with- 
out the article, 166, 167. 

courir, conjugation, 229. 

craindre, conjugation, 200; with 





or without ne before the sub. 
junctive, 200. 
de crainte que requires ne with 
the subjunctive, 205. 
croire, conjugation, 195, 336; 
when used with subjunctive, 194. 
croitre, conjugation, 336. 
cueillir, conjugation, 336. 


dans, with names of places, 167; 
in expressions of time, 269. 

dates, 52, 108. 

davantage, when to be used, 212. 

days of the week, 53. 

de, repetition, 32; contraction with 
definite article, 35, 37; after 
words of quantity, 72, 76; for 
some or any, 80, 85, 87, 171; 
after partitive expressions, 171;. 
after plus in comparisons, 94; 
with the infinitive after certain 
verbs, 222; meaning “‘by,’’ 260; 
meaning ‘“with,’’ 261; other 
uses, 261. 

definite article, see article. 

demi, agreement, 52, 109 (e). 

demonstrative adjectives, 43, 
44, 46; pronouns, 45, 46, 47. 

depuis, meaning, 174; distin- 
guished from pendant, pour, 
and dés, 269. 

dernier, after the noun, 53; dif- 
ferent meanings, 351. 

dés, meaning, 269. 

dés que, with future, 104. 

devant, distinguished 
avant, 56. 

devoir, conjugation, 75; transla- 
tion, 238. 

dizresis, 2. 

dimensions, 114, 

diphthongs, 5. 

dire, conjugation, 116. 

disjunctive pronouns, 56, 9%, 
142. 

dix, pronunciation, 33, 


from 





. Index 


423 


Numbers refer to pages. 


do, as an auxiliary, 31. 

dont, use, 120. 

dormir, conjugation, 243. 

du, contraction of de and le, 37. 
da, past participle of devoir, 75. 


écrire, conjugation of, 226. 

elision, 2. 

empécher, used with or without 
ne, 200. 

en (pronoun), meaning and posi- 
tion, 78, 80, 160, 163. 

en (preposition), use with names 
of places, 166; with present par- 
ticiple, 231; in expressions of 
time, 269. 

encore and autre, 58, 

envoyer, future and conditional, 
185. 

et, used with numerals, 48. 

étre, present indicative, 24, 25, 29, 
30; conjugation in full, 314; 
auxiliary use, 54, 158. 

exercises for review, 272. 

expressions for class room 
use, 17-19. 


faire, conjugation, 112; idiomatic 
uses, 112,239; meaning “‘ to get’”’ 
or ‘* to have done,’’ 238. 

falloir, conjugation, 212; used in 
the sense of ‘‘must,’”’ 188, 228; 
in the sense of ** need,’’ 228. 

faux, different meanings, 351. 

fear, verbs expressing, followed 
by the subjunctive, with or with- 
out ne, 200. 

feminine, of adjectives, 24, 125, 
128; of nouns, 305. 

se flatter, conjugation, 332. 

formation of tenses, 242. 

fractions, 51. 

from, before names of places, 167. 

fuir, conjugation, 340. 

furieux, different meanings, 351. 

future tense, formation and con- 





jugation, 102; use, 104, 137, 
after quand, etc., 104; when not 
to be used after si, 137; ex- 
pressed by aller to indicate 
immediate action, 237. 


galant, different meanings, 351. 

gender, 21; rule for determining, 
209, 

gentil, different meanings, 352. 

-ger, verbs ending in, 184. 

grand, different meanings, 352. 


haut, different meanings, 352. 

have, when translated by faire, 
238; by devoir, 238; by venir de, 
226 


her, as adjective, 27; as pronoun, 
56, 62, 142, 143. 

hers (pronoun), 39. 

heure, used to express time, 108. 

his, as adjective,27 ; as pronoun,39. 

honnéte, different meanings, 352. 

how, how many, how much, 
when rendered by que, 252. 

how long, ways of translating, 
174. ’ 

huit, pronunciation of, 33; no eli- 
sion of preceding vowel, 2. 

hyphen, 2; in numbers, 48; in 
verbs, 22. 


i final, elision of, 2. 
il s’en faut, 257. 


il y a, distinguished from voila, 


40; ago, 54, 109; duration of 
time, 257. 

imperative, formation, 61; posi- 
tion of personal pronoun with, 
62, 144, 146. 

imperfect indicative, formation 
and conjugation, 89; use, 89, 177, 
178. 

imperfect subjunctive, fo ma- 
tion, 210; conjugation, 210; use, 


424 


Index 


Numbers refer to pages. 


impersonal verbs; used with 
the subjunctive, 189;. with the 
infinitive, 223. 

in, before names of places or coun- 
tries, 166; after a superlative, 95. 

indefinite adjectives, 248. 

indefinite article, see article. 

indefinite pronouns, 248. 

infinitive mood, 219; compared 
with the subjunctive, 227; com- 
pared with the present participle, 
231; used without a preposition, 
219, 220; used with the preposi- 
tion a, 225; used with the prepo- 
sition. de, 222. 

interrogative adjectives, 107. 

interrogative adverbs, order 
after, 140. 

interrogative pronouns, 99, 116, 
123, 247. 

irregular verbs, 
jugations, 334. 

it, as subject, 25,.96, 97; as object, 
62, 143,.160. 


table of. con- 


jamais, 85; with infinitive, 253. 
jour, distinguished from journée, 
235. 


know, savoir and connaitre com- 
pared, 207. 


le, la, les, see article. 

le (pronoun), 62, 143; meaning 
**so,’’ 148, 149. 

lequel, 116, 119. 

leur, as adjective, 27; aspronoun, 
39, 143. 

liaison, 14, 15. 

linking of words, see liaison. 

lire, conjugation, 231. 

Von, use, 83, note 2. 

lorsque, with future, 104; lorsque 
and quand, 104. 

lui, after a preposition, 56, 143; 
after a verb, 144. 





luire, conjugation, 244.. 


malgré, 56: 

matin, distinguished from mdati« 
née, 235. 

mauvais, different meanings, 352; 
comparison, 94, 

may, translation, 220. 

méchant, different meanings, 352. 

mettre, conjugation, 223. 

mien, 39. 

mil, 49. 

mille, use of, 49. 

moi, use, 143. 

& moins que, with the subjunc- 
tive, 205. 

mon, before a feminine beginning 
with a vowel or 2 mute, 28. 

monsieur, madame, mademoi- 
selle, as mark of respect, 141, 
258. 

months, names of, 53. 

more, translation, 41, 212. 

mortel, different meanings, 352. 

mourir, conjugation, 229. 

mouvoir, conjugation, 342. 

multiplication tables, 50. 

must, implying supposition, 2383 
meaning necessity or obligation, 
228, meaning ‘‘ must have,’’ 228. 


naitre, conjugation, 244. 

names of places, with or with- 
out the article, 166, 167. 

nasal vowels, 6. 


| ne, 26, without pas or point, 256; 


with ni... ni, 86; ne... que, 
85, 258; after verbs of fearing 
or preventing, 200. 

negation, 256; see ne. 

neither, 86. 

neuf, pronunciation, 33; distin- 
guished from nouveau, 129. - 

ni... ni, 86: 

not, see ne. 

notre, 27. 


Index 


425 


Numbers refer to pages. 


nOtre, 39. 

. nouns, collective, 234; formation 
of plural, 26, 67; plural of com- 
pound nouns, 304; gender of, 
299; nouns of quantity, 72; of 
material, 74; used in a general 
sense, 71, 166. 

nouveau, distinguished from 
neuf, 129. 

nuire, conjugation, 244. 

numbers, cardinal, 48; forma- 
tion of ordinal, 84, 51; with et, 
48; with a hyphen, 48. 


obéir, object, 71. 

offrir, conjugation, 243. 

on, use of, 83, 244; when changed 
to Pon, 83, note 2. 

on, omitted in French, 53. 

only, translation, 258. 

onze, no elision before, 2. 

ordinals, see numbers. 

oser, without pas or point, 256. 

ou, relative use, 119. 

oui and si, 258. 

ouvrir, conjugation, 243. 


participle, past, as adjective, 
233; agreement after étre, 54, 
158, 233; agreement after avoir, 
65, 233; of reflexive verbs, 158. 

participle, present, 59,230; com- 
pared with infinitive, 231. 

partir, conjugation, 248. 

partitive article, 80, 85, 87. 

pas, omission, 256; precedes the 
infinitive, 253. 

passive form, translation, 244; 
conjugation, 330. 

past anterior, conjugation, 178, 
243; use, 178. 

past definite, 177; use, 178. 

past indefinite, exercises on, 51; 
distinguished ‘from past definite, 
177. 

past participle, sce participle. 





pauvre, different meanings, 352. 

pendant, distinguished from de- 
puis and pour, 174, 269. 

personal pronouns, see pro- 
nouns. 

personne, position, 131; in parti- 
tive sense, with de, 248. 

petit, different meanings, 852; 
comparison, 94. 

peu s’en faut, 257. 

peur (avoir, followed by ‘the 
subjunctive with or without ne, 
200; de peur que, 205. 

piece, morceau, and piéce, 73. 

places, names of, with or with- 
out the article, 166, 167. 

plaindre, conjugation, 248. 

Plaire, conjugation, 244. 

Plaisant, different meanings, 353. 

pleuvoir, conjugation, 212. 

Pplupart (/a), with plural verb, 
234; followed by des, 72. 

pluperfect indicative, 157; sub- 
junctive, 215. 

plural: nouns, 26, 67; compound 
nouns, 304; adjectives, 29, 67; 
article, 26. 

plus with infinitive, 253. 

possessive adjectives, 27; repe- 
tition of, 32. 

possessive case, 29. 

possessive pronouns, 39. 

pour, distinguished from depuis 
and pendant, 269; with the 
infinitive, 220. 

pouvoir, conjugation, 220; with- 
out pas, 256; distinguished from 
savoir, 237. 

premier, with names of rulers 
and with dates, 52. 

prendre, conjugation, 243. 

prendre garde, followed by the 
subjunctive with or without ne, 


200. 
prepositions, %, de, depuis, des, 
en, dans, pour, etc., 260-269. « 


426 


Index 


Numbers refer to pages. 


prés de, 56. 

present indicative, first conju- 
gation, 60; second conjugation, 
69; third conjugation, 74; fourth 
conjugation, 82; use, 59, 174. 

present participle, see parti- 
ciple. 

present subjunctive, 
tion, 191; use, 188-217. 

preterite, see past definite. 

primitive tenses, 242. 

pronominal verbs, 151, 155; 
conjugation, 151, 331; used with 
étre in compound tenses, 158; 
used instead of English passive, 
244. 

pronoun, conjunctive, 143; de- 
-‘monstrative, 45, 46, 47; dis- 
junctive, 56, 96, 142; indefinite, 
248; interrogative, 99, 116, 123, 
247; personal, 142-165; posses- 


forma- 


sive, 39; relative, 42, 99, 119, 
120, 122, 247. : 
pronunciation, 3-12; syllables, 


12; words for practice, 12-14;, 


linking of words, 14, 15. 
propre, different meanings, 353. 
punctuation, 16. 


quand, with the future, 
quand and lorsque, 104. 

que, elision of e, 41, 42; cannot 
be omitted, 42; used to avoid 
the repetition of other conjunc- 
tions, 217; with the subjunctive, 
217; used for ‘‘ how!,’’ “how 
much!,” 252; used for ‘‘ why!,’’ 
257. 

quel, 107. 

question, form of, 22; first singu- 
lar, 60; noun subject, 25. 

qui, does not admit elision, 42. See 
pronoun, interrogative and 
relative. 

quoique, with the subjunctive, 
204. 


104; 





reciprocal verbs, conjugation, 
332; definition, 155. 

reflexive verbs, conjugation and 
definition, 151, 331, 

relative pronoun, 42, 99, 119, 
120, 247. 

review exercises, 272. 

rien, position of, 131; in partitive 
sense with de, 248. 

rire, conjugation of, 232. 


savoir, conjugation, 115; used 
negatively without pas, 256; 
subjunctive of softened asser- 
tion, 215; distinguished from 
pouvoir, 237; distinguished from 
connaitre, 207. 

se, 143, 158. 

seasons, 112. 

sentir, conjugation, 243. 

sept, pronunciation of, 33. 

seul, different meanings, 
with the subjunctive, 202. 

si (so), 42; in comparisons, 94; 
meaning ‘ yes,’ 258. 

si, conjunction, 137, 204; elision of 
i, 137. 

sien, 39. 

six, pronunciation of, 33. 

So, translation, 42. 

soi, 249. 

soir, distinguished from soirée, 


353 5 


some, before a noun, 80; excep- 
tional uses, 85, 87; without a 
noun, 80. 

son, before a feminine beginning 
with a vowel or # mute, 28. 

subject, repeated when of dif- 
ferent persons, 140; in interroga- 
tive sentences, 25. 

subjunctive mood, 188; forma- 
tion and conjugation of the pres- 
ent, 191; after impersonal verbs, 
189; after negative or interroga- 
tive verbs, 194; after verbs 


Index 


427 


Numbers refer to pages. 


of emotion, 197; in adjective 
clauses and after superlatives, 
202; after certain conjunctions, 
204; compared with the indica- 
tive, 188; compared with the in- 
finitive, 227; formation and 
conjugation of the imperfect, 
210; sequence of tenses, 209; 
subjunctive in independent 
clauses, 214; used for impera- 
tive, 215; pluperfect as a past 
conditional, 215. 

suivre, conjugation, 242. 

superlative, formation, 94; with 
c’est or ce sont, 96; when placed 
after its noun requires the arti- 
cle to be repeated, 94; with the 
subjunctive, 202. 

syllables, division of, 12. 


t, euphonic, 22. 

tenir, conjugation, 217. 

tenses, primitive, 242; derivation, 
242; compound, 157. 

thfan, 41; when translated by de, 
94; by que... ne, 254; or by 
que de, 220. 

that, relative pronoun, 42; demon- 
strative adjective, 43; demon- 
strative pronoun, 45, 47; con- 
junction, 217; must always be 
expressed, 42. 

them, 56, 62, 143. 

they, 142, 143. 

this, demonstrative adjective, 43; 
demonstrative pronoun, 465, 
47. 

tien, 39. 

time, translation of time of day, 

108. 


titles of sovereigns, 52. 

ton, before a feminine beginning 
with a vowel or A mute, 28. 

tout, position, 58, 131; variable as 
an adverb, 249; used with en and 
present participle, 231. 





triste, different meanings, 353. 
trouver, meanings, 61, 198. 


union of words, 14, 15. 


vaincre, conjugation, 346. 

valoir, conjugation, 346. 

venir, conjugation, 217 ; idiomatic 
use of, 226. 

verbal adjectives, 230. 

verbs, conjugation: auxiliary, 
308; irregular, 334; reciprocal, 
332; reflexive, 331; regular, 320. 

vétir, conjugation, 346. 

vilain, different meanings, 353. 

vingt, final ¢, 49. ~ 

vivre, conjugation, 244. 

voila, distinguished from il y a, 40. 

voir, conjugation, 120, 

votre, 27. 

votre, 39. 

vouloir, conjugation, 197; with 
bien, 198. 

vous, use, 22; agreement of ad- 
jective and past participle, 26. 

vowels, simple, 3; compound, 5; 
nasal, 6. 


we, used indefinitely, 83 

weather, ways of expressing, 112, 
239. 

week, days of the, 53. 

what, adjective, 107; interroga- 
tive pronoun, 123, 247; relative 
pronoun, 122. 

which, adjective, 107; interroga- 
tive pronoun, 116; relative pro- 
noun, 42, 247. 

who, relative pronoun, 42, 99, 247; 
interrogative pronoun, 99, 247. 

whom, 42, 99, 247. 

whose, interrogative, 100; rela- 
tive, 120. 


y, meaning, 160; position, 161, 163 
-yer, verbs ending in, 184. 





FRENCH 





First French Course 
\By C.A. CHARDENAL. 16mo, cloth,274 pages. -Price, 6o cents. 





Second French Course 


French Syntax and Reader, by.C. A. CHARDENAL, 16mo, cloth, 250 
pages. Price, 60 cents, 


French Exercises for Advanced Pupils 


By C. A. CHARDENAL, Revised by the Jate Professor DELPHINE 
DUVAL, of Smith College. 16mo, cloth, 258 pages. Price, go cents. 
‘THIS revision of Chardenal’s French Exercises contains all 
A the essential niles of French Syntax, in clear, concise form, 
and a valuable list of idiomatic verbs and phrases, in which 
English idioms are.rendered by the.corresponding French idioms. 


Readings from French History 


Edited by Professor ©. B. SUPER, Dickinson College, Carlisle, Pa. 
16mo, cloth, 324 pages. Price, $1.00. 
HE choice of ‘the selections ‘has been determined by ‘their 
suitableness.to the reading ability of pupils in high schools 
and colleges. In order that the selections may be interesting, 
complete episodes have, so far as possible, been given. The 
extracts will furnish the student a good idea of the style and 
manner of the ‘best French historians. “With but one exception 
the selections are arranged in chronological order. 
‘The selections are as follows : — 
Thierry, Conquéte de l’Angleterre. 
Barante, Jeanne Darc. 
Louis Blanc, Situation du Peuple avant la Révolution. 
Michelet, Prise de la Bastille. 
Lamartine, Discours de Vergniand. 
Mignet, Chute de Robespierre. 
Lanfrey, Le Décret de Berlin et ?Entrevue de Tilsit. 
Ségur, Napoléon 4 Moscou. 
Thiers, Napoléon 4 Sainte-Héléne. 
Guizot, Histoire de la Civilisation en Europe. 
53 











FRENCH 





Preparatory French Reader 





With Notes and Vocabulary. By the late GEORGE W. ROLLINs, 
of the Public Latin School, Boston, 16mo, cloth, 314 pages. Price, 
go cents. ; 


5 a reader is intended to follow the selections ordinarily 
found in the beginning book. It includes stories by Ortoli, 
Laboulaye, Jules Lemaitre, Julie Lavergne, and others, and 
among the poems are selections from La Fontaine, Victor Hugo, 
Béranger, Casimir Delavigne, and Théophile Gautier. The his- 
torical pieces, with Napoleon, Louis XVI, and Marie Antoinette 
as dominant figures, will interest young pupils in a fascinating 
period of French History. They are La Retraite de Moscou by 
Marbot, Le Mort de Louis XVI by Duruy, Les Premiers Jours du 
Régne de Louis XVI and L’Echafaud by Imbert de St. Amand. 
The Drama is represented by Le Voyage de M. Perrichon. 
The reader contains a table of the irregular verbs. 


The Ca Ira Series of French Plays 


Edited by Professor B. W. WELLS. 6 volumes, 16mo, cloth. Each, 
36 cents. 





HIS series contains plays adapted to advanced classes in high 
schools and to college students. The introductions give brief 
biographies of the authors and helpful comment on their work. — 
The notes explain peculiarities of idiom, allusions to social and 
political customs, to literature, and to history. The books are 
particularly convenient in form and excellent in typography and 
binding. The series contains the following plays : — 


Moi, par Labiche et Martin. 

Gringoire, par Théodore de Banville, et L’Eté de la Saint: 
Martin, par Meilhac et Halévy. 

La Question d’Argent, par Alexandre Dumas, fis. 

La Camaraderie, par Eugéne Scribe. 

Le Luthier de Crémone, et Le Trésor, par Francois Coppée, 

Le Fils de Giboyer, par Emile Augier, 


54 








GERMAN 





A German Grammar for Beginners 





By PAUL V. BACON. Revised Edition. remo, cloth, 448 pages. 
Price, $1.25. 


HIS is a beginning book which introduces easy reading from 

the first, along with the usual drill in grammar. The object 

is to stimulate interest, to economize vocabulary, and to give 
unity to the first year work. 

Distinguishing features of the Grammar are: — 

I. Complete stories, full of interest, connected with the gram- 
matical exercises and using the same words. The first is about 
the school, the second about the home, and so many cognates 
are used that reading may be begun as soon as the alphabet is 
learned. There are 105 pages of this reading matter, including 
poems from Goethe, Heine, and Uhland. The stories are sim- 
ple and delightful and make use of every-day words. They will 
attract the young pupil and enliven the grammar drill. The cor- 
relation of stories and grammar makes possible a small working 
vocabulary. 

II. Systematic drill on grammar, each topic being treated in 
a group of five lessons. The language of the rules is especially 
simple. 

III. Every fifth lesson is a review, and in addition three com- 
plete lessons are devoted to a review of the first half of the book 
and seven to the whole book. These reviews are twenty-three | 
in number. 

IV. Attractive material for memorizing. Each lesson begins 
with a proverb, idiom, or short poem, to be committed to mem- 
ory. These include selections from Goethe, Schiller, Heine, 
Riickert, Scheffel, Miiller, and many others. 

The New Edition contains at the back of the book a complete’ 
Summary of Inflections arranged for ready reference. This, with 
the Index to Syntax, makes the book suitable for a reference 
grammar as well as for a beginning book. 


‘(GERMAN 





Im Vaterland: A Reader for penile ds their First .or 


Second Year of German 
By PAUL V. BACON. 12mo, cloth, 430 pages. Price $1.25. 


O give the American student a better understanding and 

appreciation of Germany and the Germans; to furnish him 

with an adequate vocabulary of colloquial idioms; to point out 

and explain differences between German and American customs ; 

in short, to broaden and deepen the American’s knowledge and 

love of the German language, music, poetry, and people; these 
are the aims of 7m Vaterland.” 

Distinctive features of this remarkable book are: 

I. Dialogues on thirty-six different sabjects (such as the Ger- 
man Empire, The Imperial Family, In School, At a Store, Berlin 
University, The Army, The Hotel, In a Theatre, At a Station, In 
a Train, etc.). These give the pupil a ‘knowledge of German 
customs and prepare him for appreciative and intelligent: travel in 
Germany. 

II. Illustrations from photographs of German scenes, ‘build- 
ings, paintings, churches, and castles. (Besides forty-nine of 
these illustrations there are six maps, including a two-page 
colored map of the German Empire. 

III. Songs, with music arranged for high school pupils. 
There are twenty-seven characteristic German-songs from sixteen 
different composers. 

IV. Poems — thirty-six of them — ranging from the thirteenth 
to the twentieth century, especially adapted for memorizing. 

V. Notes on all idioms and grammatical difficulties. They 
serve also to. supplement the text. For example, they contain.a 
complete list of the German States, an outline of a gymnasial 
course of study, biographies of the authors mentioned in the 
book, and kindred matters. 

VI. Composition exercises on each chapter ofthe dialogues. 

VII. A vocabulary made with unusual care, and including all 
the idioms used in the book. 

VIII. A full, practical index of persons and of topics. 

57 





— 








GERMAN 





Allyn and Bacon’s Series of German Texts 





HIS is the most attractive and convenient series of German 
texts on the market. Each book contains complete notes and 
vocabulary, together with exercises for retranslation into Ger- 
man. These exercises are based on the text and afford excellent 
‘material for review as well as practice in composition. The prices 
will seem reasonable when the general excellence is considered. 
The following volumes are now ready : — 


GRIECHISCHE HEROENGESCHICHTEN. 


By BARTHOLD GEORG NIEBUHR. Edited by GEORGE E, MERKLEY. 
16mo, cloth, 128 pages. Price, 50 cents. 


By JAKOB and WILHELM GRIMM. Edited by GEORGE E, MERKLEY, 
16mo, cloth, 140 pages. Price, 50 cents. 


L’ARRABBIATA. 
_ By PAUL HEYSE. Edited by PAUL V.BACON. 16mo, cloth, 126 pages, 
Price, 50 cents. : 


HOHER ALS DIE KIRCHE. 


By WILHELMINE VON HILLERN, Edited by J.B. E. JoNas, of Brown 
University, Providence,;.R.I,. r6mo, cloth, 150 pages. Price, 50 cents. 


IMMENSEE. 


By THEODORE STORM. Edited by E. A, WHITENACK, of the State 
Normal School, Peru, Neb. 16mo, cloth, 116 pages. Price, 50 cents. 


GERMELSHAUSEN. 


By FRIEDRICH GERSTACKER. Edited by R. A. VON MINCKWITZ. 
16mo; cloth, 122 pages. Price, 50 cents. 


DER NEFFE ALS ONKEL. 
By FRIEDRICH VON SCHILLER. Edited by Professor C. F. RADDATZ, 
of the Baltimore City College. 16mo, cloth, 147 pages. Price; 50 cents. 


58 


GERMAN 





Allyn and Bacon’s German Texts — Continued 





DIE JOURNALISTEN. 


By GUSTAV FREYTAG. Edited by EDWARD MANLEY, of the Engle- 
wood High School, Chicago. 16mo, cloth, 272 pages. Price, 60 cents, 


DER ZERBROCHENE KRUG and DAS WIRTSHAUS ZU CRANSAC. 


By JOHANN HEINRICH DANIEL ZSCHOKKE. Edited by EDWARD 
MANLEY, of the Englewood High School, Chicago, 16mo, cloth, 169 
pages. Price, 50 cents. 


DER SCHWIEGERSOHN. 


By RUDOLF BAUMBACH. Edited by W. W. FLORER and E, H. 
LAUER, of Ann Arbor, Mich. 16mo, cloth, 262 pages. Price, 60 cents. 


DAS EDLE BLUT and DER LETZTE. 
By ERNST VON WILDENBRUCH. Edited by W. W. FLORER, of Ann 
Arbor, Mich., and M. R. SHELLY. 16mo, cloth, 238 pages. Price, 60 
cents, 


WILHELM TELL 
By FRIEDRICH VON SCHILLER. Edited by Professor CARL 
SCHLENKER, of the University of Minnesota. 16mo, cloth, 000 pages. 
Price, oo cents, 


N O pains have been spared to make this the most useful and 
attractive edition of Wilhelm Tell now on the market. The 
illustrations are numerous enough to give an excellent idea of the 
picturesque Tell country. The book has a life of Schiller, full 
notes, and an historical commentary. There are citations from 
parallel passages in other famous literary works. An appendix is 
devoted to notes on poetic diction; another gives the lines of 
the play most often quoted. Exercises based on the text furnish 
a systematic study of German grammar. Questions in German 
are given as a basis for conversation. 
59 


= P al. ae - . 
a thie — eer pei 


i a 








SCIENCE 





First Principles of Physics 





By Professor HENRY S, CARHART, of the University of Michigan, and 
H. N, CHUTE, of the Ann Arbor HighSchool. 12mo, cloth, 422 pages, 
Price, $1.25. 


HE present volume is more than a revision of the authors’ 

popular High School Physics. It is a new book from cover 
to cover. No pains have been spared to make it mechanically 
the attractive volume which the increasing interest in the applica- 
tions of this practical subject deserves. The cuts number 457 
and will be found to constitute a prominent feature of the book. 
Especial attention has been given to the language, which has 
been made unusually simple and direct. The problems are nu- 
merous and interesting, and in them the difficulty of the actual 
arithmetical performance is reduced to a minimum, since it is 
recognized that the purpose of problems is the concrete illustra- 
tion of principles rather than practice in arithmetic. 

Although in keeping abreast of the times the authors have in- 
troduced many new features, they have been careful to retain the 
general scheme of presentation, and the just proportions, which 
made their former books so popular. The space given to the 
various topics is such as logical presentation demands. No topic 
is unduly emphasized in an effort at novelty of presentation. Each 
subject is treated concisely and is divided into numerous brief 
paragraphs with sub-headings, in order to aid the pupil in con- 
centrating his mind on the points of fundamental importance. 

It has been felt that many recent text-books in physics have 
sacrificed scientific and logical presentation in the effort to inter- 
est pupils by over-emphasis of some aspect of the science which 
has been considered attractive. The result of the use of such 
books has been a one-sided preparation and a consequent failure 
to meet college requirements. The authors of First Principles of 
Physics have shown that it.is possible to produce a book which 
is as successful as their former texts in preparing pupils for col- 
lege and at the same time yields to no competing text-book of 
physics in attractiveness. 


61 


MATHEMATICS 





First Principles of Algebra 


By H.E. SLAUGHT, Associate Professor of Mathematics in:the Univer- 
sity of (Chicago, and N. J. LENNES, Instructor in Mathematics in 
Columbia University, New York City. ELEMENTARY COURSE, I2mo, 
cloth, 288 pages. Price, $1.00. ADVANCED COURSE and COoM- 
‘PLETE COURSE, At Press. 


T ‘HIS book embodies the methods of what might be called the 

new school of Algebra teaching, but at the same time has 

kept the valuable features of the books which preceded this 
movement. | 

In writing the First Principles of Algebra the.authors have been — 
governed by two main purposes: (1) to provide a gradual and 
natural introduction to the symbols and processes of algebra; 
(2) to give purpose to the subject of algebra by a,constant use of 
it in. doing interesting and valuable things. Each of these pur- 
poses leads to the same order of topics, which, however, differs in 
minor features from the conventional order. In the Introduction 
the authors offer a full explanation of their reasons for adopting 
the present order, which will be found to be logical and 
systematic. 

The study of equations and their uses is regarded as the main 
topic for the first year’s work. It is recognized that abstract equa- 
tions will appear of little or no value to the pupil unless he finds 
uses for them; hence frequent lists of problems are provided for 
translation into equations and for solution. Many of these prob- 
lems involve valuable mathematical concepts, so that during the 
first half year algebra is made to appeal to the higher and more 
useful types of interest, and not merely to the instinct for solv- 
ing puzzles, which must be the case if the greater part of this time 
is spent on factoring and in manipulating complicated fractions. 

The principles of algebra used in the Elementary Course are 
stated in a small number of short rules, eighteen in all. The 
purpose of these rules is to furnish in simple form a codifi- 
cation .of those operations of algebra which require special em- 
phasis. 





70 


HISTORY 





Readings in Ancient History: A Selection of Tlus- 


trative Extracts from the Sources 
By Professor WILLIAM STEARNS DAVIS, of the University of Minne- 
sota; Introduction by Professor WILLIS MASON WEST, of the Univer- 
sity.of Minnesota. 

Volume I: Greece and the East. 12mo, cloth, o00 pages. Price, $0.00. 

Volume II: Rome and the West. r2mo, cloth, coo pages: Price; $0.00. 

“HIS. book sets before the student beginning the study of 

Ancient History a sufficient amount of source material to 
illustrate the important or typical historical facts which will be 
mentioned in his text-book. The volumes are zof designed for 
hard study, to be tested scrupulously by minute questioning; 
they are meant for reading, —a daily companion to any standard 
text in Ancient History, — and the boy or girl so using them is 
sure to breathe in more of the atmosphere of the ancient world, 
and to get more taste of the notable literary flavor pervading 
Greek and Roman history, than would be possible from the study 
of a conventional text-book. 

Volume’I contains 125 different selections, of which the follow- 
ing are typical: The Ethics of an Egyptian Nobleman, /zscrip- 
tion ; An Assyrian Palace, JZaspero; The Shield of Achilles, 7%e 
liad ; How Glaucus tried to tempt the Delphic Oracle, Herodo- 
tus ; The Ring of Polycrates, Herodotus ; How Leonidas held the 
Pass of Thermopyle, Herodotus; The Last Fight in the Harbor 
of Syracuse, 7hucydides; Anecdotes about Socrates, Diogenes 
Laertius ; How Lysias escaped from the “Thirty,” Zysias; How 
Elephants fought in Hellenistic Armies, Polydzus. 

Volume IT contains 148 selections, including: Brutus condemns 
his own Sons to Death, Zzvy; How the Plebeians won the Con- 
sulship, Zzvy; The Honesty of Roman Officials, Polydius; The 
Reign of Terror under Sulla, Plutarch ; The Wealth and Habits 
of Crassus the Millionaire, P/wtarch; The Personal Traits of 
Julius Czsar, Suetonius; A Business Panic in Rome, Zacitus; 
The Bill of Fare of a Great Roman Banquet, Macrodius ; How a 
Stoic met Calamity in the Days of Nero, Zfzctetus ; The Precepts 
of Marcus Aurelius, Marcus Aurelius. 

78 





HISTORY 





A Short History of England 





By CHARLES M. ANDREWS, of Yale University. With Maps, Tables, 


and numerous Illustrations. t2mo, half leather, 473 pages. Price, 


$1.40. ’ 


HIS history of England aims to present within the compass 
of about 400 pages the main features of England’s story from 
earliest times to the present day. The book traces in rapid sur- 
vey the development of the people and institutions of England 
from Anglo-Saxon times to the close of the year 1911, and shows 
by what steps the primitive organization of asemi-tribal people has 
been transformed into the highly complicated political and social 
structure of the United Kingdom and the British Empire. It re- 
tains on a smaller scale the essential characteristics of the larger 
work by the same author, with many omissions of details, and 
some additions, chiefly of a geographical and biographical char- 
acter. pig 

The author tells a clear and simple story, avoiding technical 
expressions and yet. passing over no important feature of the 
history that is necessary for the proper understanding of the 
subject. . ; 

The aim of the book is to be instructive as well as interesting. 
The narrative is made as continuous as possible, that the pupil 
may follow in unbroken sequence the thread of the story. It is 
accompanied with a large number of newly selected illustrations 
and an ample supply of maps and chronological tables. The 
elaborate bibliographies contained in the larger work have been 
omitted and only a small but selective list of the best books in 
brief form has been retained. The history has been brought 
down to date in matters of scholarship as well as chronology, and 
contains many views and statements not to be found in the larger 
work. It is designed as a text-book for half-year, or elementary 
courses, but it might well be used by any reader desiring a 
brief and suggestive account of the main features of England’s 
history. 


81 


_ 





























cored tet 








ere be at oe cee tt Dt at mate 





























at orereset 
ener hee este Owe oreve > ‘ 
Pap Sy ape me DeEy we Be p aalen Wee ROW Ses < ip? 2 Snes tore - choiese tac} peer ors 
hg gt ptebeer rrergryts to Seere rererertt ct 4a4 + < ee eee a. rit » ] + ”™ a ered wt ring , 
LL hyd tee. pre ce rr tt tetas ttt eeners tat yt - e- —_ ° ~ at hte. ws or eb ed ae by Me By Se Sete ae 7 charg hye yb g Rite metee te on nl eter oe et mneee erorrevcosety bybeepenes 
ty'3* oe rt atet Obes ererererr egy re ste . 

















rocentee rary tig bk Re. eiel.e 
) . arn ct 
/ r 






































Re aoe teeneceaeie! 
~~ * far omar ae Wee Nees er oes 
. 2 am ttre etn tnt Ohm 
+ sa ed cere rept s ett ti taery bot riatn tee r@eytato yee 
4 call FD P} .. 
¢ #-e+, ‘ mt 
Par yeres 


‘ o- + photo tote tne br in bepaby heads S—bacsed 
tebe, rs o2%e. 



































































































































" 
eg ee Satan ee + > 
pedantry t tat eben et np eeeey 2 > Autgewe o- 00% . 
6 Reem Eee Re eel - i 3 - a. 2 4 v ~ - 
** .. betetys wins 2 4 ve cove body hy4 7% net oe cebehghpe-Oetcelercoer el el thsi bel, ores watt : —— 

4 . Ted hy hee etna me erere os by rebel et Po apd Bs a heer er ererereres ghperhy h- Rt byt; ane ketneseneserrre hth: 

peaes - 
rerees 


























Sain heehee (ae meee ce ene st Ae Fy eer 
vO-D<dre: —— “ Se eS Er 
fay by tied mene wy ty ty ity dee tt eatery Batt etry) -tne mae Oy F ob pig h reve sett 
[rete ty tnt et pen bate tn tey tetae: 

ee ne ~~ be 
- te 












































batty en tit ot 





















































: a . 
wrrretgtieae A + atheayt 





























ttt eeeeh " 
jit perecere ret tt bt teres my ” ‘ beivé ore 
hee ty hetero treme ety > - + _ ay eee ee r dt pper . ee 
—tydne $44 dae scesety amy Shy? Pa) ity out Uee= ea ha bd We bee wert? - 2 eke ted (OB nee wie pe 32 seekseseer sets ae pt yte Be Banke erererere-c-ong ith: ts tat phy hr hr hye bier ene. re aoarh 
2» 2. vrarreet @ — > —— +” Bet -4-0-e eee el peutetor=3)) ris © Cece eqeg) Af -210+ eB ere eos glad eh gtetr® 229 ter eter gs ete betg ++ HOt, Sys ww ory eb 
+ . or or yeas e <a ——_-= rors avolobyhyS; t= 0s o- Ste bres go erer eran yt a) Seer phate) enrees Orem 





























— 
dagtyta tomnacese sy}: 0:44 t-te cern fa Pose nem Ontntwm) 
deine? yr weasednsenrapurwysedene ys ha bebcet WW. D “s - reheat 
rw + Sdie tO rene h Ash aS etn s Bnd gs qh din GaBeSoyey 7] +10 tein Pmweyt ype :t ous ne ) why ~ sorer 4 a+ ey 
4 Re PB 0 BtOrtrw bate ty ponosah 30s ’ 6 . 2.4 ee Le-dd-—@ oe ar 4 =" pervs » he tesetybyt= 7 

aw are 2. pevetae eww " » ae ' * — i - ect’ * ares ry 2 - 
7 ars > tomeere te Bnew wtete “e - nat t's hae . better eted ane oro abel er rie t ery eter ererere 
ews 

















leet tt emt 


one eg Ht nnn tte et weney ta tn tetnw Hy # Paes * 























ones eee ee 
eee kee eee he ee Re eee te he ee ate hens 




























































































= bpd at Anite mwement ely letyhy Ort Oy 
Ay hnnapebebsetioasgainquargthe ys 
+ rer > ano 





















































































































































































































































rere 
mateo eteing hy brennan everyt pig int 























> rere Peer eer ere wee 
: rs ° : seteketes we - 
2 i+ abe A aot ht Op ioteeetas So) yt Soe 
7 > ; = Ayiy* ers La; er etaraeret " 
2 > r > > orn = rl ori pig? peta eer ener eset oh Pgh Mi ere Se te popes Lobe 
+ rs 3 re cane - “ : doherty se Oy® pd 96 beror-ws > ry . 
—) * » ‘ y? a eb eneiv Af * 2 - ~ ce 
rs wry 5 ap ta Mmtemn gh phe ob ptr te ee re a Rome © meee 

— 4 + A Ae (Pewee ete Beem te 7 Oe ae by rg B pees oo, oo 
me : rr ms ahd > . ws te re - abe 

Dy tet ete <<" pence cety tet y> oooee oeurse ss 

« aA : . ore Me Mey De daSe ereecess se eeseert 






































tab t/t ote teevevererys pt ht enm heres 
pees 5 erent + ar eprosonseen.ad ts wrayer wewrerwoesam Fo) Dutmovecie+ets No ette . 
Leg B80 0 ttn le ® BeBe eameeen ere re 20 RnR eeg gh Sao wom weeveryt rah acesssecenetenareh}®-a-h-t- ot preceteres opie orerermcemrareetebe tm reied 
—t~ & pace tne eeeg ly? gota maw ene ee Dp Ghy yeas bryos hy Meee tee tein Oe POO On a», Ae er mm me meer nee weer en enter ce wreath ety hye hehe Pen mr we ehbeee ane ee 
+02 eee. w eee Ther te trereey Met OR me rene | bel pte trees he eee net eS oh Sot op bn te rhreveter glerwtertheaeheerwe bore tphe ry t+ Leeseves. 
nn 8 ret mae lghee Sy ee OHOrr” Peta 0 One telngntap tented te hp kg Ay Sao he- po de ane Oe quran ntae whe Peder et yer eree Orel Ts oh eh Olas tO HIM SPM OR Ot OOOO ppsqrer bcowsnoase suse ovevererteeywwereeens 
Be! ewe * ue ata> ewer pervy ween ouen At Bt ver evoeoaGa SECS? bt WE MERE OT OCT COTTE we enter an Say erty er oe aren epererteet ebheaetyt yay ont wereeerines 
ss ree pe By + Sees ra tae eiehaeonesstcasoressvenoned oojh sores br onto ayeawe rates teeneewree paesrewanar te sebehepepraravarereseeenpretere 
Meh. npempeeewny ty %) 20-42 anes Or eteivhg ett erie! > htt: tet, Qebrentemwenatehriwtetee > tee pteorecerecet tteiese? ghee Ree or te Os ono he Re b-R-On inh pt aremr ts 
~ - ed oie D+ See SoBe Be Os Sede preteser thts baeets a) be Se Geeta ares: 
£. (ia ata etme by 4. * Amn Am eomomree™ Beh eee ey + pane ton ani hp ete tReet Petes eq mie che phate erw ant ni gn at eoen inn wn achaheh gryh in Oe irs ry Pea w 
Le OP reves et ot 12 teen on bed bpd mrecer ener erehit etter geet eiarecertseemneeertghys Lat, te Oar beews Solas oc werewae aren B Pa mew we Motete Get caricpesetctcorersenencnenat sane yt 
. = 2,2 et eran C poplebery hehe teartearer et oR hy Pa! + he ee ee rere ee ee et ot gre et tee ee metel 
ee ee ee us Ava pe ee aeasedaead Inaneesh of Tet Sreracasesatonsnesglchetg>-0 Sre-tvererecelperer DB ete Dee Be ener 
ry tad CR PORE Fee rr en ase La aeredend- aden be ob a fd oe sanvqnaraemansgrgiel OS ee he Be eer te ew Hehe Te MoD ed eh wht 
| rr rye no 
° ee 


























